11
f
b
‘I
f _.»
-_l.l_ll ‘
T ,:;Af¢\amG-l ‘ warm-"12.1 ‘. -_-
74 F aw CONFIDENTIAL
FOR THE USE OF OFFICERS ONLY
NOT TO BE TAKEN INTO THE FRONT LINE TRENCHES

No. I
From the latest information furnished
by British and French sources, in-
cIucIing reprints of official circulars

EDITED AT THE ARMY WAR COLLEGE
WASHINGTON, D. C.

MAY, 1917
Prom Colonel 1N0. P. FINLEY,
Infantry, D. O. L. Ofiice Militia Afl’airi.
Goqernors """"
5"


WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
191 7


Field Artillery Notes I

WAR DEPARTMEXTO
Document No. 589.
Oflicc of the Arlutunt General.
WAR DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, May 9, 1917.
The following Genera‘l Field Artillery Notes are published for
the information of all concerned.
[2595446, A. G. 0.]
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY 013 WAR;
H. L. SCOTT,
Major General, Chief of Stafi'.
OFFICIAL: ..
H. P. MCCAIN,
The Adjutant General.
7?’ I1 is J J J a f “
.15 “I r 4,124;
O O N T E N T S . r
Page.
I.——Notes on trench warfare for field artillery ........... - - . 7
II.—Close shooting in the field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 28
IIL—COunter battery work--.- -. .- .- .. - - - - . - - - - - . . - . 37
IV.——Wire cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 53
V.—-—Destruction of barbed Wire by artillery—French
oflicial data - . . . . . . . _ . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -. . . . . . _ . . . . 57
VL—Oooperation of aircraft with artillery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 61
VIE—Instructions for aerial observation in liaison with
artillery - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 105
VIII—Artillery in offensive operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 138
IX.——-Notes on German artillery emplacements, 1915. - - - - - 169
Appendix—Late instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 177
- 5
~ GENERAL FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES;
[Reprints and reports from British and French sources]

I. NOTES ON TRENCH WARFARE FOR FIELD ARTILLERY.
Part I.—NOTES FOR OBSERVING OFFICERS.
These notes are the instructions of a battery commander in France
to his observing officer. They form invaluable guide, but it is
impossible to dogmatize on such a large subject, as local circum-
stances alter the conditions.
It is not intended to imply that the position of the B. C. should
be back near his guns, but in trench Warfare the place of the B. C.
. at the observing station, which is probably very far forward, would
be often taken by the subaltern officers of the battery, the B. C.
himself being there on the more important occasions.
The map attached to the notes, although typical, is not an accurate
representation of any particular portion of the lines in France.
The importance of cooperation between artillery and infantry is
so. great that no chance should be missed of interchange of ideas
between artillery officers and the infantry they support.
The abbreviation “O. O.” in these notes stands for observing
oflicer. , ‘ ’
O. O.’s PARTY .
The O. O.’s party should Where possible consist of:
O. O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 1
Lookout men . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Telephonists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 3}Observing party.
Linesman. . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . - . 1
Of the above the O. 0., one lookout man, and two telephonists
are actually at the observing station at one time. In'the event of
the O. 0. being temporarily away both the lookout men should be
at the observing station. Where the observing station consists of a
building the telephonists should be in a strong dugout or in the
p-
l
8 FIELD ARTILLERY RQNOTES.
cellars, communication being maintained either by voice or a voice
.pipe. -
In cases where there are several alternative observing stations it
may be found convenient to arrange a telephone dugout in close
proximity to battalion headquarters.
The party in this dugout might consist of:
Telephonists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 3
Linesman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 1 ‘
Two of the telephonists being always on duty.
In this case the O. 0. would proceed to the battalion headquarters
at dusk, and the remainder of his day party might return to the
battery. \
Communication between battalion headquarters and the O. O.’s
telephone dugout will usually be by orderly or may be by telephone.
Nora—See O. O.’s map attached. .
In the telephone dugout is a switchboard to enable communica-
tion to be maintained direct to the battery from any of the observing
stations or observing posts, and from the telephone dugout itself,
also from the infantry company commander in the front line trenches.
A convenient arrangement of the telephonists in a battery is as
under— ' '
A. Group at battery telephone pit.
B. Group at O. O. H. Q. telephone dugout.
C. Group at observing station. .
D. Group off duty.
Each of the above groups, which consists of three telephonists
and one linesman, always work together. Every 48 hours the groups
are relieved, A group taking on the duties of B group and so on.
The duties of an O. O. are as under:
(1) To insure that a constant watch is kept over the area allotted
to the battery.
(2) To observe and correct fire. _
(3) To maintain constant communication, day and night, with
battalion headquarters and the battery.
(1) CONSTANT WATCH.
Either the O. O. or one of his lookout men must be at the observing
station, regardless of the weather ' conditions, throughout the day.
Even in misty or rainy weather ‘brief intervals often occur when a
fair view can be obtained. In these intervals there are always
chances of catching worln'ng parties, who might ‘be relying on the
mist to cover their operations.
‘FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 9
as‘
It must be borne in mind that in trench warfare O.'Os. are the
eyes of the Army and that the greatest reliance is placed on their
watchfulness and on the rapidity with which useful information is
at once communicated to headquarters.
O. Os. should recollect that their reports on movements, flashes
of guns, etc., are transmitted through the brigade to the headquarters
of the division so that any necessary action can at once be taken.
The necessity for accurate and rapidly transmitted reports is
apparent. During operations reports every half hour or every hour
are required; even nil reports are valuable.
(2) CORRECTION OF FIRE.
It is generally advisable that the officer who observes the fire
should himself give all ranging orders rather than report observed
results.
In the present trench warfare there are often fleeting opportuni-
ties for sniping working parties, reliefs, wagons, &c. The O. O.
should give all executive orders for these targets without reference
to the battery commander. The battery commander will have
previously informed the O. O. the number of rounds that can be
expended on these types of targets.
(3) CONSTANT COMMUNICATION.
Generally speaking, all S. O. S. messages and request for retalia-
tion from battalion headquarters to the battery in support should
come through the O. O. If by day the O. O. is not at hand the
message should be transmitted direct to the battery and to the observ-
ing station from the O. O.’s dugout: the operator being careful to
write down the message.
If an S. O. S. message is given verbally to an O. O., the O. O. will,
if he also considers the situation demands it, at once forward the
message and afterwards obtain the request in writing; all that is
required being “S. O. S.,” time and initials. Should the O. O.
consider that such urgent steps are hardly necessary he will obtain
the written order as detailed above before sending the message. This
procedure, which does not entail a delay of more than 10 seconds,
is likely to prevent a misuse of the “S. O. S.” signal; it also prevents
subsequent misunderstanding. The exact whereabouts of the O. 0.
should always be known by the operator in the O. O.’s telephone
dugout.
It is most essential that the telephone operator on duty should
be alert day and night. During the periods in which no messages
‘\
10 . FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.-
are transmitted, a call up should be given every half-hour to insure
that communication is being maintained. By night, when no opera-
tions are in progress, a single operator is required. He should be
relieved every two hours.
GENERAL PROCEDURE.
The O. 0., on arrival at the O. O. telephone dugout with his
' party, will at once report himself to the battalion headquarters.
‘ He will then take over the telephone instruments, periscopes,
&c.-, also cooking gitensils (it is generally convenient to have a
battery outfit of cooking utensils, includingaprimus stove, for the
O. O.’s party). The O. 0. who is being relieved will inform the
incoming O. O. of any special points that require attention, and will
hand over maps, panorama sketches, and the log book. He will
report himself to the battalion headquarters before leaving. The
incoming O. 0. will then see the adjutant or infantry commander
at battalion headquarters with a view to a thorough mutual under-
standing on the following vpoints: "
(1) The exact area covered by battery and nomenclature of
trenches. - ' -
(2) The exact method by which requests for retaliation will be
given and how this retaliation will be carried out by
day and by night.
(3) The O. O.’s position day and night and the means by which
the infantry will communicate with the O. O.
O. O.’S LOG BOOK.
The O. O. ’s log book should contain the information concerning
the enemy under the following headings:
(1) Machine " gun emplacements.
(2) Observation stations.
(3) Trench mortar positions that have been used.
(4) Forward gun positions. .
(5) Listening posts and sap heads, bombing posts, sniping
posts,'&c.
(6) New works, anywhere in the battery area, recording
location progress, and probable use. '
Q
(7) Wire, type, density, how supported, also probable sally-
ports. ,
(8) Special places where working parties can occasionally be
seen either at work or en route, Screens.
(9) Visible portions of roads‘ or communication trenches.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 11
. (10) Houses from which smoke is noticed.
(11) Headquarters, trench tramways, depots, dumps, &c.
(12) Places from which flares and signal rockets are usually
discharged. Searchlights.
(13) Hours of relief.
(14) True bearings to certain objects.
(15) Located ‘gun positions and bearings to flashes.
(16) A copy of the gun registers of the battery.
(17) A panoramic sketch of the enemy’s front line parapet.
This sketch to be marked in degrees to correspond with
the fighting map.
To make the book a handy one for reference, each of the above
subsections should be kept separately. An alphabetically-arranged
book such as a pocket “address book”_ would be convenient. - In
compiling the book the O. O. relies chieflyon observation, but
should obtain information from our Infantry, especially from their
night patrols; from intelligence summaries, and from aeroplane
photos.
O. Os. should obtain information as to whether the enemy’s first-
line trenches are strongly held by day or by night. '
The location of machine-gun emplacements is difiicult, but likely
places may be determined by the considerations of the practical
methods of their employments. They are likely to be posted at
places which command our probable lines of advance and are greatly
used for flanking p'urposes. Aeroplane photos may be of assistance,
but careful observation at night is necessary in order to determine
their exact'positions. This requires periscope work in front line
trenches. . '
A good deal of night work is necessary in order to determine rocket-
signal stations, Searchlight stations, houses used as billets, &c. In
this work, cross bearings from two O. Os. (or two lookout men) are
useful, their cross bearing being taken with regard to certain
objects which can be readily identified by night.
TARGETS TO BE ENGAGED. '
O. Os. should open fire without further orders on any suitable
target that may appear, as, for example: ‘
(1) Hostile observers looking over parapets (a quick snipe with
a single round or/a section salvo (shrapnel)). For success
in this work it is necessary that the panoramic sketch of
front line should be accurate and should be‘marked in
degrees corresponding to gun registers or fighting map.
12 ' FIELD ARTILLERY NOTESr
(2) Working parties. (Shrapnel)
(3) Trench mortars when active. (H. E.)
(4-) At second and third line trenches when enemy are employ- -
ing rifle fire against our aeroplanes. In this case the men
are likely to be standing well back from their parapet.
(Shrapnel) -
(5) Occasionally at houses at moderate range from which. smoke
is coming or at cooking fires in the trenches. (II. E.)
(6) When a house is on fire, turn on a few shrapnel, as there may
be a few men at work putting it out. (Shrapnel)
(7) At cncmy’s front—line parapet when there is heavy rifle fire.
(Shrapnel or H. E.) -.
Shrapnel should be used when men can be seen or are likely
to be about. H. E. should be employed against buildings,
trench mortars, &c.,. or at the trenches as in (‘7) above when
no men are visible. '
EXPENDITURE OF AMMUNITION.
Generally speaking, very few rounds can be fired, as the targets
soon disappear. Against machine-gun emplacements about a dozen
H. E. should be fired.
PERISCOPES.
The use of a No. 14 periscope in the front-line trenches requires
great skill to avoid it being smashed by rifle fire. It may be found
advisable to have a dozen dummy periscopes got up to resemble the
No. 14 periscopes in outward appearance. These can be kept perma-
nently in position until it is required to use the real periscope.
When the real periscope is to be used it should be placed behind a
dummy periscope and the latter quietly withdrawn. It is essential
that‘ several dummy periscopes scattered about in various places
should be used to prevent the exact locality of the observing post
from being given away.
CONCLUSION.
It is most necessary that the O. 0. should get to know the Infantry
company commanders and should take every opportunity of hearing -
their views of the attack and the defense of the section.
0. Os. should endeavor to make out the direction from which at-
tacks are most likely to come. This information might be most useful
in deciding on the most suitable artillery procedure to adopt for the
defense.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. i 13
The O. 0. should know when night patrols are going out and the
direction in which they are proceeding, so that in moments of stress
artillery fire can be employed to direct attention elsewhere.
0. Os. have great opportunity of studying the ground with power-
ful telescopes for prolonged periods from various points of view.
They therefore are, or should be, in a position to assist the Infantry
commander by suggesting the particular form in which the artillery
support is likely to be most effective.
It should be a point of honor with O. Os. that all enemy move-
ments by daylight are detected and reported to Infantry headquar-
ters and arrangements made for artillery support before the request
for this support has been received.
Part IL—Temperature and other corrections.
An accurate working knowledge of the temperature and other cor-
rections that should be applied to map (or previously registered)
ranges is essential to all gunner officers. If the principles underlying
these corrections are not fully grasped, two things are likely to Occur:
First. An unnecessary expenditure of ammunition in determining
the error of the day and in checking registration.
Second. Ineffective fire at critical periods, such as during night
attacks or during heavy bombardments by day when, owing to smoke
and gas, observation is impossible.
In the latter case, the fire may even cause casualties to our own
troops.
Corrections are required for the following reasons:
1. The range in yards on the map (given an accurate map) is
seldom, if ever, the same as that found by the guns.
2. The range in yards required to hit- a given target may vary
considerably from day to day, or even from hour to hour.
’ I. Corrections under this subhead are ' required because the
18-pounder range indicators are made out for use with Mark I shell
on the supposition that the average muzzle velocity of the gun was
1,590 foot-seconds. ‘
But the average muzzle velocity of the 18~pounder is more nearly
1,615 foot—seconds. This higher velocity causes a slight increase
of range.
Again, the adoption of the later marks of shell, which are struck
with a radius of head of 2 calibers as against 1% calibers for the Mark I
shell, causes a very considerable increase of range. (The difference
in the radius of the head causes the shell to have a more flowing curve
at the shoulder where it joins the body of the shell, thus reducing
air resistance.)
14 FIELD AETILLERY Norris.
The net results of these two alterations cause the gun, under normal
. conditions, to shoot beyond the actual map ranges by the following
amounts:
Map Shell
range and will fall
elevation beyond
. on guns. target.

Yards
2, 000 80
3, 000 140
4, 000 210 \
5, 000 290
6,000 360


II. The normal. or rather standard, conditions are as under:
Temperature of air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60° F.
Temperature of charge": .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; . 60° F.
Barometer ............... - -- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30° F.
Wind ........ ...................... -: ..... -. Nil.
Variations in climatic conditions may necessitate considerable
alterations to a previously registered range. The statement that
“the registered range to a point is 3,875 yards” is of but small value
unless some remarks are appended as to the approximate tempera-
ture, barometer reading, and force of the wind.
Norm—When range indicators are fitted with drums graduated for the later marks
of shell, the corrections under snbhead 1 will be eliminated.
EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE.
Changes in temperature necessitate corrections to gun ranges for
the two following reasons:
(a) Corrections due to the change of the temperature of the air.
(6) Corrections due to the change of the temperature of the charge.
(a) A rise in the temperature of the air causes the air to expand and
to become less dense; ‘there is, therefore, less resistance to the motion
of the projectile. As the projectile loses its fspeed more slowly, its
average velocity is higher; therefore for a given time of flight there
is an increase of range. _
It should be borne in mind that the time of flight for a given eleva-
tion is almost constant, regardless of temperature , barometer, or wind .
Changes in temperature of the air produce small increases of
range at short ranges; this is due to the fact that at short ranges there
is only a small change in average. velocity and a short time of flight,
while at long ranges there is a considerable change in average ve-
locity and a long time of flight. '
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 15
(b) A change in temperature of the air also causes a change of
temperature in the cordite. The effect of heat on cordite is to obtain
a higher velocity. For the 18-pounder a rise of 10° F. in temperature
of the charge will increase the muzzle velocity some 12 foot-seconds.
A rise in muzzle velocity causes an increase of range. This
increase of range is more pronounced at short ranges than at long
ranges.
For example, an increase of 40 foot-seconds in muzzle velocity
may be expected to have the following results: At 3,000 yards an
increase in range of 100 yards; at 6,000 yards an increase in range of
140 yards.
As cordite is an indifferent conductor of heat and is usually stored
in shady places, the changes in the temperature of the cordite
charges are not necessarily the same ‘as the change in temperature
of the air.
Greater changes may be expected to occur if ammunition is kept
in wagons and limbers which are exposed to the rays of the sun’in
the spring and autumn when there are considerable changes in the
" temperature of the air; the cordite may at 10 a. m. be rather cooler
than the air, and possibly at 7 p. m. rather warmer than the air.
In the tables of corrections,printed on cardboard, recently issued
to all batteries, the resultant conditions are given for the changes
in the temperature of the air and charge. For convenience in appli-
cation it is assumed that the temperature of the air and of the charge
are identical. This assiunption introduces but small error.
The corrections in the tables also combine the corrections referred
to in figure 1. /
BAROMETRIC CORRECTIONS.
Corrections in range are required for different barometric readings.
When the barometer is high the air is more dense and an increase
must be made to the range; and, vice team, when the barometer is
low the air is less dense and a decrease in the range is required.
Changes in density of the air, whether from barometric changes
or from changes in temperatiu'e, produce the same type of correc-
tions.
WIND.
The reasons for the alterations in range due to wind are more
obvious, but accurate corrections are more diflicult to make, as it is
seldom that the force of the wind ‘with regard to the path of the
projectile can be definitely determined.
The flags on the back of the card of corrections for the 18-pounder
gun give the approximate value in feet per second for a gentle breeze,
moderate breeze, fresh breeze, and high breeze.
16 _ FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
A moderate wind, or high breeze, of 30—40 feet-seconds is of fre-
quent occurrence. . ' '
For a head wind of 30-40 feet-seconds, it is necessary to add 100
yards ~to a range registered as 4,000 yards on a calm day.
Ranges registered in windy weather might be marked doubtful (‘2)
and be reverified, if necessary,'in calm weather. If, however, the
corrected gun range is found to be in fairly close agreement with the
expected gun range, the range might be accepted.
APPLICATION OF THE CORRECTIONS.
The necessary corrections for the 18-pounder gun when firing at a
map range of 5,000 yards, under various conditions, will now be
considered.

Map range, Gun
5,000 yards. corrections.

May 1, 1914: Yards.
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°F .... - . - 0 ,
Barometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30" ..... - >.. 1150 r
Wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Nil ...... .. 3:0
Total gun correction (say, 300) . . . . . . . . ..'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . —290
Hence gun rango=4,700 yards.
August 1, 1914: ' . Y 1
Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 75° F .... .. , —395
Barometer .......................................... . - 29"... . . . .. — (10
Wind (down the range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 f. s. . . . . -1‘.20
‘Total ' gun correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — 575
Hence gun range=4,425 yards.
November 1, 1914:
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 30° .. . — 90
Barometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 30.5” .... . . .' + 30
Wind (against) . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 f. s. . . . . +120
Total gun correction (say, 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 60
Hence gun range=5,050 yards.


From the above example, it will be seen that under‘ quite ordinary
circumstances a map range of 5,000 yards may require any gun range
from 4,425 to 5,050 yards to produce effect, according to the weather
conditions that happen to prevail during that shoot. It is also
obvious that if the target was registered at any period between
August 1 and November 1, the registered range might have been
recorded as anything between 4,425 and 5,050 yards.
This points to the necessity of reducing all ranges to definite
standard condition.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 17
N OTE.—-Th6 dates August 1 and November 1 are merelyinserted
to account for the temperatures that were considered; a difference
of range of 300 or 400 yards at 5,000 might easily occur within a space
of two days. -
The variations in the corrections required for a range of 3,000
yards, between 3 p. m. and 3 a. m. on the following day—such as
occur in the month of September—will now be considered.

Map range, G un
3,000 yards. corrections.

I
September 24, 3 p. m.: l Yards.
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .- 60° F .... - .‘ -140
Barometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30" ...... - .l i- 0
Wind (down range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . 20f. s. . . . .‘ _ 40
Total gun correction (say, 175) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ -. 180
Hence gun range =2,825 yards.
September 25, 3 a. m.:
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30° F. :1: 0
Barometcr.-.........-.-.......-.....-....--....--. 30". 5:0
Wind (against) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 f. 5. +40
Total gun correction (say, 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . - -l . . . . . . . - - +40
Hence gun range= 3,050 yards.


It will be seen that under the most ordinary circumstances the
change in a range of 3,000 yards may be over 200 yards in such a
small space of time as 12 hours. As the trenches are, in many places,
150 yards or less apart, the absolute necessity for a thorough knowl-
edge of temperature corrections and the method of their applica-
tion is apparent.
In trench warfare a practical way of finding the corrections nec-
essary for the atmospheric conditions at the time of shooting is to
fire at some clearly visible object of which the gun range, reduced
to normal atmospheric conditions, is accurately known, and which
is at approximately the same range as the-hostile objective to be
engaged. Such a point is known as a zero point. By having three
or four such points in his zone a B. C. is enabled to‘ check his cal-
culations or arrive at the atmospheric corrections of the moment
of shooting without calculation. This is done by firing a few rounds
at the “zero point ” which approximates most in range to his target.
This last example shows the danger of allowing guns to be loaded
overnight for shooting on “S. O. S.” lines. If it is desired to keep
guns loaded overnight, ‘the range given to the guns should be sufii-
cient to pitch the shell at least 200 yards beyond the day register
98508°-—17——2
18 FIELD ARTILLEEY NOTES.
of the German front line trench‘. If this is done, the first round can
at once be fired in general support, the subsequent rounds being-
fired with the corrections necessary to burst the shell on the German
front line trench. ‘
The two sets of examples of the corrections required for the 18-
pounder clearly show—
(1) The necessity of reducing all. ranges as found by the gun to
some definite standard; the standard recommended being temper-
ature 60° F., barometer 30”, and wind nil.
(2) The necessity for the close study of temperature and other
corrections so that in all cases where corrections can not be obtained
from shooting at datum points, reasonable corrections can be ordered
without any delay.
Table of correct-ions.
[Printed on cardboard issued to batteries.]
IS-POUNDER Q. F. SHRAPNEL, MARK 11, AND H. E. CORRECTIONS IN



YARDS.
Temperature, Fahrenheit. 1-"
' chsgge Vfind,
in :r- 30 foot-
Range' _ ometcr seconds,
30° 40° ‘ 50° 60° 70° 80° below against.
30".
2,000 yards.- + 10 — 20 — 50 — 80 -110 —150 —15 + 30
3,030 yards. 3; 0 —- 50 - 90 —140 —180 —-220 -'’0 + 60
4,000 yards.. -- 40 --lCO —150 —210 —-260 —320 - ---45 + 90
5,000 yards" — 90 —100 —230 —290 —300 —--520 -—00 +120
6,000 yards. —130 -210 ——°€0 —330 —-440 -5‘.2-O —75 +160
7,000 yards.. -150 -240 -330 -420 -510 —-600 -00 +200


[Reverse side]

1 l l l l T l
0 1- 2 J a 6 9 to n zaoooqds IOUQOO
5
l l l
4 7 s
W: J T
1/0 ues 75 _ 20 .5. ' 30-40 .S.
(if/tie- M0 era {a ' Freé H196 /
reeze breeze breeze l _ breeze
5
l l T
‘0060751954 9 *1 5? ' 3 F a
J l *7 m 1 I l L l I I

A
Part IIL—Notes on Registration.’
The object of registration is to enable batteries to open effective
fire on any point in their area in the shortest possible time.
Owing to the fact that the gun range to any particular object is
seldom the same from day ‘to day, or even throughout the same day,
it is necessary to record gun ranges that are true for certain definite
conditions of temperature and barometer. '
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 19
The standard conditions usually'accepted for gunnery occur when
the temperature is 60° F. and the barometer 30”. '
This standard will be employed in the following notes:
FIGHTING MAP.
A great saving of time and ammunition can be effected by making
use of a suitably prepared fighting map.
The following method of preparing a fighting map has been found
satisfactory :.
The exact location of No. 1 gun is marked on the map. From this
point a line is drawn‘ to indicate the zero line; this line should,
_ where possible, pass through some distinct and easily recognizable
point more or less in the center of the zone allotted to the battery.
Angles of 10°, 20°, and 30°, right and left, are drawn in using a
blue chalk pencil, and angles of 5°, 15°, and 25°, &c., in red.
The greatest care should be taken in setting out these angles,
as it is only by accurate work that the subsequent saving of time
and ammunition can be effected.
To obtain accurate results the protractor employed should be a
large one, some 8 or 9 inches in diameter.
This protractor should be fixed securely by drawing pins, and to
determine the points through which the lines for the angles will
pass, the string extended to its furthest limit.
It is unsafe to make dots on the edge of the protractor and join
these to the zero point.
Circles are then drawn in for the various gun ranges, gun ranges
being the ‘distances at which the shell should fall under normal
conditions, i. e., on a calm day when the temperature is 60° F. and
the barometer 30”.
Circles are therefore drawn at the map ranges of—
For 18-pounder q. f. gunz, Yards.
2,080 yards and marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 2, 000
2,610 yards and marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 500
3,140 yards and marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 3, 000
3,675/yards and marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 3, 500
4,210 yards and marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 000
4,750 yards and marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 4, 500
5,290 yards and marked- - - . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 000
' 5,825 yards and marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 500
5,360 yards and marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .' . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 000
Thousands in blue chalk, five hundreds in red.
20 FIELD ARTILLEBY NOTES.
The fighting map is now prepared so that the angle and range
(under normal conditions) to any point located on the map can be
read off for No. 1 gun. ‘
CORRECTIONS FOR CONCENTRATION.
A table of corrections from parallelism is made out for the other
guns which are often at unequal intervals. ‘
This table enables any gun to be employed when firing at a
point such as a road crossing, farm, junction of communication
trenches, &c.
All corrections will be “more right.”
Concentration table.


. More right guns.
Range. No. L. i ,
No. 2. No. 3. No. 4. No. 5. | No. 0.
I o r o I o r e I
2,000 yards. ................... .. 0 35 1 o 1 30 2 0 i . 2 40
3,000 yards .................... .- 0 25 40 1 0 1 20 5 1 50
4,000 yards .................... .. 0 20 30 45 1 0 \ 1 20
5,000 yards... ................. .. 0 15 25 as 50 1 5.
6,000 yards .................... .. 0 10 20 30 40 55

A table made out on the above lines should be attached to the
fighting map. (The above figures are onlygiven as an example.)
' TEMPERATURE CORRECTIONS.
As the fighting map has already been corrected for later marks
of shell for standard conditions, the corrections are plus or minus in
accordance whether the temperature is below or above 60° F.
The values of the corrections are recorded below.
18-po'under shrapnel, Mark I I.
[Corrections in yards]



Tern eratures. H q ‘
p 1 {131113258 Wind,
Range. ' rometer 30 foot"
0 . o o b 01 OW seconds,
30° , 40 50°‘ 60° 70 80 30” against.
2,000yards ..... .. + 90 + 60 +30 .0 -30 - 70 -15 ' + 30
3,000 yards . . . . . .- +140.‘ + 90 +50 0 ~40 —- 80 -30 + 60
4,000 yards . . . . . -- +170 +110 +60 0 —50 —110 ——45 + 90
5,000 yards . . . _ . .- +200 +130 +60 ‘ 0 ——70 —--140 -—60 +120
6,000 yards . . . . . .. +230 +150 +70 0 —80 —100 —-75 +160









4 I - 2 3
i
bw:\
s 5 6 7 ,.
“MD: ,I
/
12 9
f/
N
are \_
017
16 1. I5
812' 3,7. /.
2 0* is
s/ ,-
Q 513 4/ '\
12 \
I3 .
4 1 8'” '/
/ , an
n'
s”
8 ‘ <
/ can
1 .
I \\
// 7' at.
31 l '
12 9 11 /" 10 11 .12
‘A’, n a
/ / u a‘
X\ ,'¢”’T”’TA
\ 16 13 14 1s 14 1s 16
§cALt
l
YOl‘dl. 3” ‘g 'f 2 [in m
Batteqy
:00 nut.’ "0' i









"I; “a.” '11 "I: 60-. ‘film “ran, a. c.
.
[£51159
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 21
This method of determining ranges simplifies the register,- as all
registers can be automatically corrected to standard conditions.
FOLDING MAP BOARD.
After the fighting map has been prepared it should be fixed to a
map board, a folding map board being most convenient for this
purpose. Where opportunity permits the map should be glued or
gummed on the board, and the center line at the fold cut through
with a sharp knife; this will prevent the map from rucking up or
getting distorted. ‘
REGISTRATION.
From the fighting‘ map the angles and ranges can be worked
out to points that are likely to be fired on, and the gun registersv
made out for each gun before any rounds have been fired. As soon
as possible a few rounds are fired to test the truth of the map.
It must be remembered that the map is the basis of registration.
Maps are generally very accurate, but trouble sometimes occurs
when a zone extends over two maps, as maps do not always link up
accurately.
GENERAL PROCEDURE.
The first requirement is to get No. l gun on to the zero line and
the other guns parallel.
Lines of fire are laid out as seems most expedient, the greatest
care being taken to obtain parallelism from the commencement.
No. 1 gun is then ranged on the selected zero point, preferably on
a calm day; corrections for line are taken up by all guns.
As soon as the line of N o. 1 gun is correct, the aiming posts of
No. 1 gun are taken up and replanted on this line. To do this
the gun should be relaid, the dial sights set to zero, and the aiming
posts replanted over the dial sight, care being taken that the axis
of the gun is not shifted during the process.
The other guns are then given the necessary concentration to
bring them on the zero point, and the necessary rounds fired to obtain
range and line. These guns, after the required distribution for par-
allelism has been given, are relaid and the aiming posts replanted
as above.
This procedure, if correctly carried out, ensures that all guns are _
parallel.
The gun registers are corrected on the results of firing, the neces-
sary allowances being made for temperature and wind.
It will usually be found that map and gun ranges are in close
agreement. Gun ranges that differ materially from map ranges
22 , FIELD ARTILLEBY NOTES.
should usually be regarded with suspicion, and reverified on‘ another
day.
The ranges to other points are verified, and registers amended as
necessary.
‘Registration of other points should be done with as few rounds
as are sufficient to ensure that the information obtained is correct.
It is quite unnecessary to fire all guns at all the points, except in
the close registration of “S. O. S.” and other special day or night
lines. ' ~
The main business of registration is to ensure a full knowledge
of the ground, and this can seldom be obtained without the expendi-
ture of a certain amount of ammunition, the identification of the
various localities and buildings shown on the map being almost im-
possible without actually firing at them. (See below.)
REGISTRATION FORMS.
A convenient form for recording registered ranges is as follows:
GUN REGISTER.
. . . . . . . . . . . .BATTERY, R. F. A.
Gun N0. 1.
[Registered line 7° 40' R. from farm Zouave; 175° 25' L. from factory chimney. All
ranges corrected to temperature 60° F. and barometer 30". Corrector 158 unless
otherwise ordered]

Angle _of
Target. Angle Slgllg; Range. Remarks.
va~
tion).
_ O I I
Thirsty farm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. 17 10 L. 20 3,775 A 3 d 9. 2
Blank farm ................................. .- 12 25 L. 15 3,525 A 8 c 5.5
Blank X roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 20 L. 15 3,550 A 8 d 3. 0
Redoubt ................................... . - 8 10 L. 10 ,475 A 10 b 2. 6
Red cottage ................................ .. 6 5 L. 15 3,950 B 5 a 8.1
Foxfarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 535L. 20 4,725 B 5b8.8
Short farm ................................. .. 2 30 L. 10 2,725 A 16 c 1. 7
Crooked spire .......... . .................. .. 0 0 15 4,975 B _3 d 3. 8
HillX roads ................................ .. 5 — R. 15 3,600 B 13 b 8. 6
Mount X roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8 10 R. 20 4, 925 B 8 d 1. 3
Von Klukfarm ............................. -. 15 5 R. 15 3,925 B 15 c 6.3
Brewery .................................... .- 20 0 R. 15 3,250 F 6 a 4.6
I Nightlines.
B13 ........................................ -. 720L. 15 2,500 A15c7.4
1312 ........................................ -. 510L. 15 2,475 A15 09.1
B11 ........................................ .. 2 5B. 15 2,625 B 453.5
B10 ........................................ .. 810R. 15 2,550 B 407.4


FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 23
For night firing, add 100 yards, if no special correction has been
ordered.
In the form it will be noticed that there are two readings given
for checking the registered zero line. It is generally advisable to
have two distinct reference points, so that in the event of one of
the reference points being indistinct or destroyed the other can
be used to check the line. The magnetic bearing can also be
recorded.
Map names should be used, and where possible anglicised to
enable them to be sent more easily by telephone; for example,
“Peter’s farm” is more easily transmitted that “Ferme la Pietre,”
or “Brewery” than “La Brasserie.” ‘
Registers such as B 11 or D 17 refer to the German front line
trench opposite to the portion of our trench known as B 11 or D 17.
A copy of the battery registers should be kept-in the telephone
room, and all operators should be well acquainted with the nomen-
clature of the various targets.
The map squares in the column of remarks will be found to be
useful when making reports to brigade headquarters.
Each No. 1 has the register of his gun mounted on a board in
his gun pit.
Copies of all gun registers are kept at the Observing station.
RANGING ALONG THE LINE OF OBSERVATION.
Difficulties frequently Occur in ranging on to a farm or locality
which cannot be identified on the map. This is liable to occur
when the observing station is much to the flank and at some dis-
tance from the battery.
The following procedure is recommended: Note the direction of
the line of observation with regard to some known point, say, it
is 40° right of Fox farm as seen from the observing station; draw
a line on the map 40° right of Fox farm from the observing station.
The target must evidently be somewhere on this line.
A study of the map will probably show the most likely point.
The range and angle to that point are given to the guns and trial
shots fired. Small corrections may be required to bring the bursts
on to the line of observation. The bursts are then observed to be
minus; a second likely point further along the line is selected, and
the target bracketed or hit, as the case may be.
In cases where a one-man range finder can be employed at the
observing station the position of the target along the line of obser-
vation should be fairly definitely located.
24 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
METHOD OF USE.
With a well-arranged register it should seldom be necessary to
send down angles and ranges.
Suppose a working party is observed at the redoubt (see Register),
the orders might be of the following type:
“All guns, redoubt, add 50, one battery salvo.” '
On this order the Nos. 1 obtain the angles from the board, under
corrector 158, and the corrected range; they then report “ready”
to the officer on duty, who, as soon as all are ready, fires the salvo.
(Nora—The order “add 50” might be the temperature corrector
or the allowance for a head wind.) '
When ranges are registered it is only necessary to send down
the corrections from the range, such as “add 50” or “drop 50.”
If, however, it is desired to engage a target that is not on the regis-
ter, the corrected range, i. e., the actual range at which the guns "
are to fire, should be sent down from the O. P.
It is generally advisable that the officer who observes the fire
should give all executive orders; this oflicer should work out and be
responsible for all corrections for temperature, wind, barometer, do.
The present O. Os. are the battery commanders of the near future.
0. Os. should therefore be fully accustomed to control fire. If a
battery commander desires further practice, he should proceed to
the observing station.
CORRECTIONS FOR THE DAY AND THE ATTACK OF WORKING
PARTIES.
The term “corrections for the day” is apt to be misleading, as,
during the same day corrections of over a hundred yards may be
required at moderate ranges within four or five hours.
These corrections can generally be fairly accurately obtained by
calculation, but when it is desired to open fire on a working party,
which is bound to scatter after the arrival of the first shell or salvo,
it may be advantageous to verify the calculation by firing at a
registered point, preferably at much the same range. If there is
any doubt as to the exact locality of the working party, the best
method of attack is probably to fire four sal'vos in quick succession,
the range being increased 50 yards after each salvo.
To prevent undue expenditure of ammunition, only four guns
should be employed.
I
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 25
The orders should be of the following type:
‘ ‘ Four guns, angle ; angle of sight,
“Concentrate , minutes, 3,100, four salvos, or rounds gun
fire, adding 50.”
On this order the four right-hand guns are laid and the fuzes set
for the ranges of 3,100, 3,150, 3,200, and 3,250 yards. When all are
ready, the order is given, “Fire.” The guns are then fired at the
above ranges as soon as they are laid, the first four rounds being
fired as a salvo. -
This method of fire should be frequently practiced at drill.


BARRAGE FIRE.
When it is desired to establish a barrage, batteries are required to
fire at certain definite localities, such as road junctions, selected
portions of communication tranches, etc. These particular points
may not be visible from any of the battery observing stations.
To maintain an accurate fire on these points, it is necessary that
(a) the range and (b) the line should be correct.
(a) Corrections for range can be deduced from temperature correc-
tions; the corrected range thus found being checked by firing at a
clearly visible object of known range.
(b) Corrections for line can be arrived at by obtaining from the map
the direction of the line of observation (i. e., the line. from the
observing station to the target) with regard to some easily recognizable
object.
Example: No. 3 gun firing—
Corrected range to barrage point found to be 3,200 yards.
Gun angle from aiming point 10° 20’ L.
Barrage point 2° 30’ right of chimney from observation station. ,
The first rounds are fired at the range of 3,200 yards and angle of
10° 20’ L, using a corrector sufficiently long to give bursts on the line
of sight; an increase of 1° is given to the angle of sight of N o. 3 gun
to enable the bursts to be observed. Corrections for line are given
until.the bursts appear to be about 2° 30’ right of the chimney (as
seen from the observing station). The corrector is then shortened
and the angle of sight reduced by 1°; the bursts should now be at
the selected barrage point.
26 FIELD ARTILLEBY NOTES.
RANGES BY SOUND.
It is convenient to have a table of ranges in yards deduced from
the time that elapses between a flash being observed and the report
heard. \
Flash to sound.

Second. Yards.

8 H 1-‘ 1-: 1-1 1-1 H 0-‘ 0-‘ H 0-!
wmqmmmwmwomwqmmew
woamo w owwwmmmmw
mo w mggwoom mo
oo808§o oooooggéog

I
This table should be copied and entered in the log book or gummed
on to the fighting map.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
7
2

E5130. nUCUQUkv
03 &0 out,‘ .2:
DO€O§QKQ ‘(Q .NQOLK
QQGKOQ 2: 00223






552$ 1P1:
ou<oco(u.$o {03.3.5
t8 (61$: btagQéumfix
“won .. .w
J25 1 .o
.Safiw gsbzod
25 95 29328 .o.o.m
2.0 a: >c~c£=_.<
_ 13311.15 B‘QBBNQHM,‘

ll.——-CLOSE SHOOTING IN THE FIELD.
l. The trench warfare in which the army is now engaged very
frequently necessitates the bombardment of an objective situated
only a short distance from the line of trenches occupied by our
own infantry. The problem, therefore, often arises as to whether,
it is safe; after ranging has been completed with due precautions, to
continue fire on the objective without clearing our trenches, or
whether there is a chance of some of our own shell falling into them.
2. The question of accuracy of fire has, therefore, become a matter
of importance to a degree never contemplated in field warfare, or
provided for. The object of these notes is to summarize in an easily
accessible form such information as is required by artillery officers
in order that they may obtain the greatest accuracy possible from
their guns. But, before considering the various measures necessary
with this object, it is essential that they should fully realize the
limitations of their weapons in this respect. This is a matter which
should be brought to the notice of commanders and others responsible
for the organization of operations depending on artillery support.
THE ERROR OF THE GUN.
The 50 per cent zone.
3. It is well known that-if a series of rounds be fired from a gunat a
fixed elevation, the shell will not all fall in exactly the same place,
but the extent of the ground covered is rarely realized. This, of
course, varies with different natures of guns and howitzers, and also
at different ranges, and with different charges of any one howitzer
or gun, and the actual figures are given in the range tableof the gun
concerned under the name .of “the 50 per cent zone.”
The 50 per cent zone is the space in which 50 per cent of the rounds
fired at a given range should fall. If, then, this zone is, say, 50 yards
long, at a certain range, half the number of shell fired in a series at
that range should fall in a space of 50 yards, and if the mean of the
rounds was exactly on the objective, 25 yards plus or minus should
be the greatest distance from the objective of half of the shell fired.
The 100 per cent zone.
4. It is, however, necessary to know where all the rounds may fall,
and not only half of them, i. e. , to know the 100 per cent zone. This
zone is four times the length of the 50 per cent zone, and in the above
28
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 29
case it would, therefore, be 200 yards long, and we should be pre-
pared for a shell falling either 100 yards over or 100 yards short.
5. But it must be borne in mind that these figures are arrived at
under experimental conditions, i. e., wind less than 10 miles an
horn‘ and abnormal rounds omitted. Here, in the conditions of war,
even such accuracy as is promised by the range tables will seldom
be reached. Sights may shift, or be slightly out of adjustment;
the layer may manipulate the gears incorrectly and so admit an error
due to the play of the gears; or other mistakes may be made due to
the personal factor. Some allowance should be made for these
factors, and in estimating the size of the 100 per cent zone it is advisa-
ble, in order to obtain reasonable safety, to add some 10 per cent to
the figures'obtained by multiplying the 50 per cent zone by 4. I
6. To take a case: If the task of a.4.5-inch howitzer battery is to
bombard a hostile line 100 yards in front of our own trenches, the
commander must realize that if the range is 4,800 yards, at which
the 50 per cent zone is 45 yards, it will be quite possible for an
occasional shell to drop in or behind our own trenches, even though
the gun and the ammunition and the work of the gunners are in all
respects correct. The question then arises how is the battery com-
mander to carry out such a task without risk of hitting his own infan—
try, supposing it to be undesirable to withdraw the latter‘? There
are two solutions.
_7. One method is for the battery commander to range so that the
mean point of impact instead of being at the target is so much beyond
it that the shortest shell of the series will still be beyond our own
trenches. In'other words, so‘ to range that the mean trajectory is’
sufficiently over the target to insure the 100 per cent zone being
clear of our trenches. But it must be realized that this will involve
a smaller percentage of hits.
8. The other method is to take advantage of the fact that the
breadth zone is always much smaller than the length zone1 and
employ enfilade or oblique instead of frontal fire. Such fire on a
long target will always give many more hits than frontal fire; in fact,
the expenditure of ammunition should be only about one-seventh
of that necessary to obtain the same effect with frontal fire. The
longer the range of the gun the greater are the possibilities for enfilade
fire, since the normal errors of the gun will provide the necessary
searching effect, ‘while the comparatively small breadth zone will
insure a large proportion of hits on the target. A study of the effect

1 The 50 per cent zone of the 6-inch gun at 10,000 yards is 75 yards, while the breadth
zone is only 10% yards.
so FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
of wind on. projectiles also shows that it is considerably less when the
wind is across the range than when up or down it. The proportion
, varies with different guns and howitzers from 5 to =}, and it is'theree
fore evident that the danger of inaccuracy due to wind is much less
in enfilade than in frontal fire.
9. From the foregoing, it is plain how the relative value of weapons
for particular purposes may vary directly as their accuracy, as shown
by their 50 per cent zones in the range tables; and how necessary it
therefore is that all those concelned with the preparation of plans
of operations should have some idea as to what these values are.
10. The error of the gun dealt with above is a source of inaccuracy
which cannot be eliminated. Many other factors affect the accuracy
of the shooting, but these can be all allowed for and their effect
therefore neutralized. These will now be dealt with in succession.
EFFECT OF \VEATHER.
11. The shooting of a gun is affected by variations of the following:
((1) Height of barometer.
(b) Temperature of air.
(0) Temperature of charge.
(d) Strength and direction of wind.
Corrections for all these must be made if real accuracy is to be
attained. They can be calculated from information given in the
range tables or addenda to them, and since exact readings of (a),
(b), and (0) can be obtained, they can be accurately allowed for.
Wind is, however, seldom constant, either in velocity or direction;
it is not easy to judge; and it varies at different heights above the
ground level. The best approximation to its velocity and direction
can generally be obtained from the R. F. C.
12. It is not only the shooting of the gun that is affected by \
weather. The burning of the time fuzes, on which the effect of
shrapnel fire, in particular, so greatly depends, is seriously affected
by damp. Our experience in Flanders last winter, as well as in
South 'Africa, showed clearly how rapidly ammunition may deter-
iorate unless properly protected from the weather. Fuzes and tubes
are especially susceptible to damp, and should not be exposed to
its effects more than can possibly be avoided. Ammunition recesses
if used must be properly constructed so as to protect their contents
from the weather, and limbers and wagons must be kept closed.
13. As regards thenumber of shell to be fuzed, or the number of
fuzes to be uncapped, this is a matter on which it is impossible to lay
~ down definite rules, as the number must vary with the situation
and the nature of the equipment. But it has been observed that
I
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 31
the tendency, especially with inexperienced troops, is to fuze (or
1mcap) far more than is really necessary. This is a matter which
commanders must watch closely, for it affects not only the accuracy,
and therefore the effectiveness of our fire against the enemy, but
also the safety of firing over our own Infantry.
14. It is only by close supervision, and minute attention to detail
on the part of all concerned, that the ammunition can be kept in
good condition during the weather for which we must be prepared.
EFFECT OF WEAR.
15. Erosion 1 of metal, caused by the heat of combustion of the
charge, takes place at the commencement of the rifiing. This
allows the projectile to be rammed home a little further, thus in-
creasing the air spacing for the charge. In consequence, the muzzle
velocity falls off. The method of compensating for this is given
under the heading of “calibration.”
16. In an advanced state of wear shell will be unsteady in flight
and accuracy will be appreciably reduced. The capacity for close
shooting, therefore, of guns that have become worn is affected,
and this fact must not be forgotten when allotting guns to tasks
demanding specially accm‘ate shooting. In calculating the 100
per cent zone, an allowance of 30 per cent might be made for a gun
approaching the condemning limits of wear.
]7. When ‘wear necessitates the replacement of guns it follows
that the guns of a battery will show varying amounts of wear, and
will not shoot alike. This will affect the shooting of the battery
as a whole, and is another factor to be borne in mind when close
shooting is required. This, again, can be compensated for by
calibration.
18. The very short rounds of which there were many cases with
the 4.7 inch Q. F. guns at one time were due, not to wear of the gun,
such as is mentioned above, but to defective ammunition. Driving
bands stripped and the shell turned over in flight.
EFFECT OF VARIATION IN AMMUNITION.
As regards cartridges.
19. Owingto small variations in manufacture, and in the quality
of the ingredients of which cordite is composed, there may be differ-
ences in muzzle velocities given by difierent lots of cordite.

1 This erosion is more rapid with guns firing Mark I cordite than with those firing
M. D. , the heat of combustion of the former being considerably greater than that of
the latter. Howitzers, in which the chamber pressures are comparatively low, wear
much longer than guns.
32 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
20. In order to compensate for this, charges for guns and howitzers
are, where possible, adjusted, i. e., when cartridges are made up from
va lot which is known to give a velocity lower than the standard
velocity, the necessary addition is made to the normal weight of the
charge, so as to insure its giving the standard muzzle velocity.
Similarly, when the lot of cordite being made up into cartridges is
known to be high in Velocity the necessary deduction is made. This
fact is not generally known, and complaints have been made of
charges being of different weights, when this had been specially
arranged in order to insure their shooting alike.
Where cartridges are not marked A. C. (adjusted charge), various
lots should be kept separate as far as possible.
As regards weights of shell.
21. A decrease in weight of shell will increase the muzzle velocity,
and so tend to increase the range; but at the same time the alteration
of the ballistic coefficient will tend to shorten the range and so
nullify the effect of the higher muzzle velocity. '
22. Small variations in weight of shell make Very little difference
in high-velocity guns, but the difierence is more marked in the case
of howitzers, e. g., with the 4.5-inch howitzer a difference of 10
ounces inweight of the shell would alter the range by about 40 yards
at 4,000 yards when using full charge; this is about the same as the
50 per cent zone. It is, therefore, advisable that howitzer shell
should be grouped according to weights.
REGISTRATION OF TARGETS.
23. Registering is a term now applied to ranging by trial shots on
various objects with a View to being able on some future occasion to
open an immediate and effective fire on those points. As is well
known, the range found at one time is not usually found correct on a
subsequent occasion, even though all the variables dealt with in the
preceding paragraphs have been eliminated as accurately as possible.
The difference is due to what is generally termed the “ error of the
day,” but might be more accurately described as the error of the
moment, since on the same day temperature conditions and wind
may easily vary sufficiently to alter the range with the 18-pounder
as much as 200 yards at a range of 4,000. With the 4.5-inch howitzer
such alteration would be less, but ‘it is obvious that a couple of trial
shots fired early in the day will not be sufficient to determine the
“ ul‘l'Ol‘ of the day."
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 33
24. The record of registration of a target should contain the fol-
lowing—
(i) The range to it.
(ii) The lateral angle to it measured in such way as has
been found convenient.
(iii) Corrector.
If variables have been correctly eliminated this record gives the
range and line in normal atmospheric conditions 1 and in calm
weather.
When, however, shooting is to be carried out on such registration
in conditions that are not normal, it is obvious that the only correc~
tion that will have to be applied to (ii) is one for wind; other atm0s_
pheric conditions do not affect it.
Now, a projectile is affected less by wind across the range than
by one up and down it. It follows then that registration for line
should be more reliable than it is for range, and that, when shooting
on registration, enfilade fire will probably give considerably better
results than frontal.
25. A fairly good map of the country is available. For accurate
shooting this should, however, be supplemented by information
from the topographical section of the royal engineers, who can plot
with great accuracy gun positions and various prominent points from
which angles can be measured. If, therefore, a target is located on
the map by the royal flying corps, its range and bearing can be
obtained by measurement and it should then be possible to bring a
fairly accurate fire to bear on it, provided that the sighting of the
guns has been correctly arranged by means of calibration.
CALIBRATION.
26. The term calibration has been generally understood to mean
the process by which the muzzle velocities of guns can be calculated
from the data obtained by actual shooting. Although, owing to the
variables that have to be eliminated, the calculated muzzle veloci-
ties may not be absolutely accurate, nevertheless the results obtained
give an excellent indication of the comparative shooting of guns
one with another and with the map, and they are therefore of great
value.
27. The following instructions should be of assistance for cali-
brating guns in the field: '

1 The following are understood by the term “Normal”——Barometer 30 inches.
Temperature of air, 60° F. Temperature of charge, 60° F.
98508 °—-17—3
34 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
((1) Select a target about the center of the arc of fire of the battery,
and at a distance of about the average range at which the guns are
used, and have its position accurately fixed on the map. If possible
the target should be visible from an observing station.
(1)) Choose a day on whi ch the wind is steady and does not exceed
30 foot—seconds.
(0) Note the following: Barometer, air temperature (in the shade),
wind,1 charge temperature, lot of cordite.
(d) Fire a series of at least five rounds from each gun at the target.
(e) By means of the special calibration slide rules determine the
M. V. of each gun.
28. The temperature of the charge varies very slowly for a sudden
change of air temperature. It may, therefore, for practical piu‘poses,
be assumed that the charges will be at the average day and night
temperature of the recess in which they are stored. If it is desired
to measure the charge temperature more accurately, a clinical
thermometer must be used.
29. The following example will illustrate the method of deter-
mining the M. V.:
A 6-inch B. L. C. is fired at a target, distance 8,100 yards. Barome-
ter 30.5 inches. Air temperature 40° F. Wind 20 foot-seconds
against shell. Charge temperature 35° F.
As a result of the shooting it is found that the sight has to be set at
8,975 to hit target.
Using the battery rule first, and setting it for barometer, air tem-
perature and wind, it will be found that opposite 8,100 yards is
the corrected range 8,370.
‘ Now taking the gun rule, and setting the corrected range 8,370
opposite 8,975 gun range it will be found that under 35° F., the
charge temperature, is the M. V. of the gun, viz, 2,035 foot-seconds.
For purposes of record this M. V. should be painted on the gun.
30. Two slide rules are employed:
The battery rule.
The gun rule.
31. The battery rule corrects for barometer, air temperature, and
wind.
To use this rule set the barometer reading opposite the air tempera-
ture on the slider. Move the cursor over the zero ofthe Wind scale.
Move the slider until the estimated wind velocity’s component
along the line of fire is under the cursor. The rule is then set.

1Best obtained from the R. F. (3., vide par. 12.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 35
Opposite the map distance on the rule can be read the corrected
range to be ordered by the battery commander. This corrected
range is compensated for barometer, air temperature, and Wind.
32. The gun “rule corrects for charge temperature and the variation
in the M. V. of the gun (as found in calibration) from the M. V. for
which the sights are graduated.
To use this rule move the slider until the charge temperature is
opposite the M. V. found by calibration. The rule is then set
and should be clamped by the clamping screw.
Opposite the corrected range ordered by the battery commander
will be found the “gun range” to be given to the gun. This gun
range will therefore be the map distance corrected for—
Barometer.
Air temperature.
Wind.
Charge temperature.
M. V. of gun as found by calibration.
This rule is used by the No. 1 at each gun. By means of it he
converts the range ordered by the battery commander to “gun range ”
to be given to his gun.
36 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
.35
e926 .5 MMJmwmw asses.‘ . @9225
seine mate. .i cm 25.0 31.2‘ @959 E 3 . §==m+ .33 2

Quest §o.\e$q\w%\ skxxi \‘Qa. u was‘ was \Qnesa. $.98?» NEW .Q \ MQEQ \RSQ .. wflk .. Sink‘ \Qeswfi $6 .50 3x‘ ....\\&\a. @Rwni
383$. hmmQemSw me .Qaou a<m-§2x has .235. $38“. .Xxu \o efixfik agegm. Q m 5! 2R embassy Qmkmfim ms» \e “$90 $3.‘! .98 $3896 .3Q
.25. ac um: mzk mm.r<m.rm:._.: m4n2<xm z<
.ooom a Q09‘ .88 ._.< X 00 .@ .>>o_._..w .;o:.m.¢ .3 2 mo muzo~ :Ezudxoogxmm .Nom 0256.5 2454.0

lll.~——COUNTER-BA'I'TERY WORK.
THE IMPORTANCE OF COUNTER-BATTERY WORK.
1. During the course of the present war the importance of counter-
battery work has become more and more accentuated. For just as
artillery forms the main support of the offensive, so also is it the
strongest weapon of the defense.
Destruction of the enemy’s artillery is a most important factor of
success, from both a moral and material aspect. Every hostile
battery destroyed is one step gained, and destruction of the enemy’s
artillery must not be left to the eve of a battle, nor neglected till the
enemy attacks.
The struggle against hostile artillery must therefore be the con-
stant consideration of commanders.
Counter-battery work is not a matter of spasmodic effort, but is a
continuous operation, depending for success on accuracy of fire, con-
tinuity of plan, unremitting study, and firm control. Its conduct
on these lines will alone meet the end in view, namely, the con-
siderable if not total reduction at decisive moments of the volume
of hostile artillery fire, whether in the form of preparation for an
assault, counter-preparation to meet attack by our own troops, or
barrages offensive and defensive.
Guns and howitzers of all calibers may be employed in counter-
battery work, as on other tasks, according to the requirements of the
tactical situation, which alone can indicate the nature and volume
of artillery fire to be devoted to each phase of artillery action.
ORGANIZATION AND COMMAND.
2. The general officer commanding royal artillery of the army is
charged with the coordination of all artillery action both in offense
and defense, and he should pay special attention to counter-battery
work.
Working in close touch with the general staff, he submits to the
army commander his proposals as to the extent of the corps counter-
battery areas, based on the artillery available with corps and the
grouping of the hostile batteries; also as to any subsequent modifi-
cations necessitated by considerable movements of the enemy’s
37
38 FIELD ARTILLERY- NOTES.
artillery. It is his duty to insure that hostile guns situated in the
counter-battery area of one corps, but firing on the front of another,
are adequately dealt with; for it will seldom be found that the whole
of the hostile artillery which fires on the infantry and guns of any
particular corps is situated within the counter-battery area of that
corps. He deals direct with the corps wing and balloon wing com-
manders in all matters relating to the combined work of artillery
and royal flying corps, and works in close touch with the general
staff (intelligence) and field-survey company in all matters affecting
artillery intelligence.
3. The general oflicer commanding royal artillery of the corps is
responsible in a similar manner to the corps commander, whose in-
structions he issues direct to the corps heavy artillery and any field
artillery directly under his command. He is, therefore, at all times
responsible to the corps commander for the counter-battery work of
the corps. He deals direct with the corps squadron and balloon-
company commanders in all matters connected with the combined
work of the artillery and royal flying corps. The corps and balloon
wing commanders are, however, the executive commanders of the
corps squadrons and balloon companies, respectively, and as such
act as the technical advisers of general oflicers commanding royal
artillery of corps, with whom they should be in closest touch.
The general officer commanding royal artillery of the corps lays
down the general counter-battery program, both with regard to
the destruction of the enemy’s artillery, which must be systemati-
cally and persistently sought after, as well as for general neutraliza-
tion, which at times may become a matter of necessity—as, for in-
stance, at the moment of the infantry assault or in the face of a heavy
hostile bombardment. This program must include any share in
counter-battery work that the field artillery may be called upon to
take up. ,
4. Apart from such orders as may be issued by the army as regards
coordination of counter-battery work between neighboring corps,
the general ofiicer commanding royal artillery of the corps must
arrange with those of corps on either flank for immediate assistance
from their batteries whenever it becomes necessary to deal with
artillery outside his corps area which is punishing the infantry or
impeding their advance.
He is further responsible to the corps commander for the allotment
of ammunition and its proper expenditure to the best advantage.
He exercises a constant control over the action of his counter-bat-
teries, assuring himself by frequent visits to groups and batteries
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 39
that fire is conducted on sound lines, that the means of observation
and communication are both adequate and satisfactory, and, by
study of air photographs, that the fire is accurate and productive of
results. During the actual course of a battle the general officer
commanding royal artillery will seldom be able to pay such visits,
as his time will be fully occupied at his headquarters.
The brigadier general commanding corps heavy artillery is the
executive officer who issues the daily orders for counter-battery
work, allots the actual batteries and arranges all details, for which
purpose he may be assisted by a staff officer for counter-battery Work
who is attached to the artillery staff of each corps.
His orders will specify the tasks to be performed, the ammunition
allotted, and the aeroplanes to be placed at the disposal of batteries,
in accordance with the directions of the general officer commanding
royal artillery of the corps.
He forwards daily to the general officer commanding royal artillery
of the corps and to other oflicers, specified from time to time in higher
orders, a report on the hostile artillery and the work of his counter-
batteries. It is his duty to insure that all information of immediate
value is passed to the batteries concerned.
6. The object of this organization, whatever its details may be, is
to insure a methodical and permanent system of counter-battery
work, which in the actual battle plays a capital role.
Particular care must be taken to insure that the counter-battery
action of the artillery of the corps shall not degenerate into the spas-
modic fire of independent batteries dependent 011 the individual
ideas and energy of their commanders.
The assistance in counter-battery work that can be and is af-
forded by the royal flying corps is beyond dispute. The closest
personal touch between the artillery and the royal flying corps is a
matter of the first importance. Difficulties and occasional failures
will occur, but their recurrence can best be obviated by frequent
interviews, both before and after work, between officers of the two
arms concerned.
At the same time artillery must not look upon the aeroplane as an
essential to successful fire, particularly as regards counter-battery
work. Correct use of datum points, calibration, calculations for the
error of the day, thorough and accurate intelligence as to hostile
batteries and careful intersections of our own battery positions will,
granted good gunnery, render it perfectly possible to deliver an
effective fire on occasions when aeroplanes can not work or are not
available. On such occasions recourse may also be had to accurate
40 I FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
instrumental observation from two stations, for which purpose it is
not necessary that the target should be visible so long as the bursts
of the shell can be observed. If a hostile battery has been accurately
located by bearings, this method should give good results.
7. The system of communications for counter-battery work must
be carefully studied if efficiency is to be ensured and waste of mate-
rial avoided. Gounter-battery formations should, as far as material
allows, be in direct communication with similar formations on either
flank, the corps squadron and balloon company, the army observa-
tion section posts, and with the artillery of divisions in the line.
For without such communication quick transmission of information
and orders is impossible and, consequently, rapid application of ef-
fective fire.
8. Three points of general application in connection with the or-
ganization of counter-battery work remain to be noted:
(i) The dividing lines for counter-battery work between forma-
tions, whatever their size, must always be regarded as elastic, and
arrangements must be made by artillery commanders concerned, in
consultation with the royal flying corps, for adequate overlap on
either flank.
(ii) It is to be clearly understood that whatever be the counter-
battery programme ordered for any particular day, arrangements must
be such that any hostile battery (not included in the programme)
reported as active either from the air or from the ground can be
immediately engaged.
(iii) All means of observation must be fully considered and care-
fully organized. Observation from the air and the possibility of
delivering an accurate though unobserved fire by means of calcula-
tions have perhaps tended to belittle the value of direct observation
from the ground.
Whenever hostile batteries can be seen active from ground-observ-
ing stations they should be promptly engaged without waiting for
other means of observation. Direct observation from the ground
is particularly to be looked for when the progress of a battle brings
possession of commanding ground with a good view of hostile ter-
ritory hitherto unseen except from the air.
THE ALLOTMENT or ARTILLERY.
9. While definite batteries must be detailed for normal counter-
battery work falling within the scope of the army or corps programme,
it is clear that the actual number of guns required will and must
vary in accordance with the needs of the tactical situation.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 41
It is the duty of the army or corps commander, as the case may be,
to lay down from time to time the amount of artillery to be devoted
to the destruction or neutralization of the enemy’s batteries.
But unless the counter-battery programme states what batteries
are to be employed on this work and aims at avoiding unnecessary
changes, within such limitations as can be foreseen, cooperation on
the part of the royal flying corps will be rendered far more difficult,
and the great advantage that accrues from personal understanding
between royal artillery and royal flying corps officers will be largely
sacrificed.
10. Howitzers and guns placed well forward must be included in
the artillery detailed for counter-battery work and may be arranged
in mixed or distinct groups, so long as the action of all batteries de-
voted to any one area is controlled by one authority.
Howitzers (8-inch and upward) are required for the work of de—
struction; guns play their part in neutralization. Six-inch howitz-
ers are largely used for neutralization and are very effective. They
are not really powerful enough to destroy long~established and care-
fully constructed emplacements, but they are of great value in an
advance when the enemy’s guns are forced back into positions more
or less hastily constructed.
A proportion of the corps or divisional field artillery can be use-
fully employed in the counter-battery work of the corps. The em-
ployment of field howitzers for this service should be particularly
considered in all artillery schemes, as these weapons are provided
with gas shells.
Field guns (13 and 18 pounders), with their rapid rate of fire, can
give great assistance in neutralizing the nearer hostile batteries;
their value in this respect is perhaps apt to be overlooked, owing
chiefly to the fact that there are so many calls upon them in the
actual battle.
LOCATING AND RECORDING THE POSITIONS OF HOSTILE
BATTERIES.
11. A methodical system of sifting, recording, and studying all
information concerning hostile artillery from whatever source avail-
able, is essential to the quick and effective application of, counter-
battery fire.
The chief sources of information are——
(a) Observation-section posts and artillery-observing stations (by
means of cross observation of flashes).
(b) Royal flying corps (aeroplanes and balloons).
42 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
(c) Sound-ranging sections.
(d) The study of maps and air photographs.
All information of immediate importance must be forwarded
direct to headquarters, corps heavy artillery, while the coordinate
positions and all available details are published periodically by the
army in the form of a map or list, or both. This map or list forms the
basis of the counter-battery programme ordered by the arm and corps.
12.‘ In every counter-battery office a book 1 must be kept in which
the record of every known hostile battery within the allotted area
is entered from day to day until this battery is finally struck out as
destroyed or as having moved to a new position. Air photographs
of each position should be kept with the book. An enemy battery’ s
record should include its caliber and coordinate position, its sector
and periods of activity, the occasions on which it is engaged and by
what weapons, the resulting damage inflicted. &c. ' '
By this means it is possible to compile a list showing at a glance
the positions and natures of hostile batteries that are known to fire
on the various sectors of our line, while constant reference to this
list and to the batteries’ records will not only enable counter—battery
fire to be directed from. day to day on reasoned lines, but will build
up a valuable store of knowledge on which to work in a battle.
13. The development of “sound ranging” greatly facilitates the
work of recording hostile batteries, as by this means not only the
location of a battery can be found during a period of defini te activity,
but also the actual target and, in favorable circumstances, the
caliber may be ascertained. By the collation of a number of “sound
ranging” reports it is therefore possible gradually to work out the
arcs of fire of hostile batteries, and knowledge of this nature will
obviously much facilitate counter-battery work. particularly during
periods of trench warfare. By the same process any system of
“dummy flashes” regularly used by the enemy should sooner or later
be discovered.
Sound ranging can not be carried out during a continuous bom-
bardment by our own batteries, but is feasible during hostile artillery
activity when the total rate of fire does not exceed one round per
second.
14. All our experience emphasizes the importance of air photogra-
phy and of constant study of air photographs.
In the first place, these things are essential if no hostile battery
is to escape punishment. It does not necessarily follow that a gun

1 Specimen pages of a suitable counter-battery book are inserted at the end of this
pamphlet.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 43
position is unoccupied because no flashes are seen to appear from it,
while, on the other hand, both dummy flashes and blank charges
may be used to simulate active batteries.
Again, it must not be assumed that because a battery is known to
have moved or to have been destroyed its old position will not be
subsequently repaired and reoccupied, nor, on the other hand, that
a battery will move because it has been severely handled.
(‘areful comparison of photographs of various dates will greatly
assist decision as to whether emplacements are occupied or not,
attention being particularly paid to the marks made by tracks and
the blast of guns and to the actual condition of the pits.
Air photographs will also disclose the position of emplacements
constructed for the support of the enemy’s rearward lines of defence,
and will thus enable a commander to work out in advance his arrange—
ments for counter—battery work in the future.
A tendency on the part of the enemy to camouflage a certain
number of his battery positions has lately been remarked.
Constant photography of the areas likely to be occupied by hostile
artillery is therefore called for at all times in the hope that new
positions may be detected in the first stages of their construct-in
before effective concealment has been attained.
Finally, air photographs will assist a commander to appreciate the
extent to which his counter-battery work is crowned by definite
results.
15. Occasionally it may be necessary to induce the enemy to
disclose the positions of his batteries at times when conditions are
favorable for observation. This will particularly be the case just
prior to active operations, or when by reason of bad weather or other
circumstances the hostile artillery has escaped observation for some
considerable period. The object in view may be attained by means
cf “Chinese” attacks or even by a vigorous display of trench mortar
activity; but action by artillery alone is unlikely to achieve the
desired result.
PRINCIPLES OF ACTION.
[Attention is called to “Cooperation of aircraft with artillery,” issued by the general
staff, November, 1916,]
16. The characteristics of counter-battery work are two-fold—
destruction of hostile batteries as a daily task and neutralization on
certain tactical occasions of all batteries which it has not been possible
to destroy.
It is evident that destruction offers the most satisfactory means of
reducing the hostile artillery to impotence. But since this ideal
44 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
can not be completely achieved, occasions will arise in all active
operations when the infantry must be further protected against
the enemy’s guns by fire for neutralization.
The immediate object of all counter-battery work being to obtain
maximum effect on hostile artillery, batteries specially detailed for
this work must on principle be placed well forward, so that distant
hostile batteries may be reached and also that full benefit may be
reaped from enfilade fire.
Destruction.
_17. The howitzer is par excellence the counter-battery weapon
for destructive purposes, owing to the advantages it possesses over
the gun in accuracy and its ability to deliver its shell at very steep
angles of descent.
To insure the destruction of a hostile battery, certain requirements
must be met:
"((1) It must be established that the position to be engaged is
actually occupied.
(b) Fire must be carefully controlled and observed, not only during
ranging but also while firing for effect.
(c) A sufficient quantity of ammunition must be devoted to the
task in hand.
As regards (b), fire is only of value if it is accurate and this depends
on control and observation. Both guns and howitzers have a tend-
ency to lose exact range or line to a target from a variety of causes,
even though ranging may have been satisfactorily accomplished.
18. If destruction is to be achieved with certainty, and if the
tactical situation admits, it is desirable that observation should con-
tinue to the last in order that any subsequent inaccuracy of fire,
beyond that due to the error of the piece, may be at once detected and
corrected.
19. Touching the expenditure of ammunition, it is futile to attempt
the destruction of a hostile battery with a small number of rounds.
The following table may be taken as a general guide to the minimum
number of rounds which under favorable conditions may be con-
sidered sufiicient to destroy a battery, assuming frontal fire is em-
ployed:
Rounds.
(3-inch howitzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 200
8-inch howitzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 150
9.2-inch howitzer. . . . . . . - -' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 100
12-inch howitzer. . - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 50
If enfilade fire is used a less number should suflice.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 45
Economy in ammunition is to be sought, not in withholding any
of the amount required for a legitimate task, but by taking every
precaution to insure accuracy of fire and by avoiding the possibility
of waste, due either to the engagement of a doubtful target or to the
adoption of a policy of half measures. If a hostile battery is to be
destroyed, then fire should not cease till the result, as far as it is
possible to tell, has been achieved.
20. Destruction, as already stated in a previous section, must be
regarded as a continuous procedure. It is to be carried out at all
times with relentless vigor, both during actual battles and in the
intervals between them.
21. While anything in the nature of plastering an area with shells
in the hope of destroying a scattered collection of hostile guns can
only entail waste of ammunition, and is therefore to be deprecated,
cases may occasionally arise when it may be justifiable to attempt
the simultaneous destruction of a group of gun positions with certain
strict provisos.
The positions must, of course, be known to be occupied and must
be contained Within an area small and clearly defined by means of
roads, tracks, streams, etc., so as to facilitate for the air observers
the ranging of the various batteries to be employed on the task.
These batteries should consist of the heaviest and longest ranging
weapons available so that full benefit may be reaped from the power
of their shell and from enfilade fire. The area must be thoroughly
covered with shell, fired on a simple and methodical plan.
22. Time is a factor of great importance in destructive work as
regards the cooperation of the royal flying corps, and every step that
can be taken to expedite fire observed from the air is an emphatic
sain- .
With the slower firing howitzers the destruction of a hostile battery
may be undertaken simultaneously by two batteries of the same
group.
Arrangements having been carefully thought out beforehand, each
of the two batteries should range one after the other. Fire for effect
can then be carried out by rounds of battery fire at two seconds
interval from each battery alternately on a signal from the aeroplane
observer, who will send down the results in the usual manner.
The observer can call at any time for fire to be taken up by one of
the batteries if he sees abnormal errors occurring.
Normally, however, destructive effect is under present conditions
best assured by concentrating all the guns or howitzers of a battery
on each emplacement of the hostile battery in turn; the order in
which the emplacements are engaged being arranged beforehand.
‘13 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
In carrying out the work of destruction every endeavor should
be made to exploit the use of oblique and enfilade fire, as in every
case the breadth zone of a gun or howitzer is much less than its length
zone, and the chances of obtaining direct hits are therefore greater
as the obliquity of the line of fire to the target increases.
Known batteries must be definitely selected for an attack, in order
of their importance and activity, both before and during active
operations, and be notified in the daily program of counter-battery
work.
Prearranged shoots should be carried out as systematically as pos-
sible so as to admit of the maximum amount of aerial observation of
fire for destruction.
Fire for destruction with aeroplane observation should, when
possible, be followed from two ground observing stations, the ob—
servers being informed when the aeroplane observer gives “ O. K. ”
This procedure may assist to secure accurate fire at some future
date when no aeroplane is available.
Aeroplane observation should, however, invariably be provided,
if the tactical situation admits, in the case of fire for destruction
when accurate observation from the ground is impossible.
2%. Consideration must always be directed toward the selection
of the most suitable weapon for destructive work in each instance.
Apa"; ii om the question of oblique fire which has already been
touched upon, it is obvious that the heaviest howitzer should pref-
erably be employed when the protection of the target is known or
reasonably believed to be of the strongest. Similarly, against a
battery unprotected or merely camouflaged, the field howitzer may
prove a perfectly adequate weapon. Commanders should bear in
mind that at times of abnormal artillery movement, such as must
occur in the case of a hurried reinforcement on a large scale, or of a
sudden retreat, there will be periods during which a number of
hostile batteries will be little if at all protected. Under such cir-
cumstances full use can be made of the lighter forms of artillery for
counter-battery work, ‘so long as the protected and unprotected
targets can be distinguished.
Shrapnel fire of field guns or 60-pounders can be usefully employed
in conjunction with the actual work of destruction effected by heavy
howitzers, with a view to inflicting loss on detachments that may be
compelled to withdraw from their guns or at night, by bursts of fire
at irregular intervals on personnel and horses sent up to move the
damaged battery.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 47
N eu tralization.
25. The object of neutralization is to paralyze and blind those
hostile batteries which have not been destroyed by a sudden and
violent application of all available means. It will therefore be
required both in offense and defense.
In the offensive, directly that the infantry leave their trenches
they must be relieved as far as possible of the burden of the enemy’s
barrage, which may otherwise inflict considerable losses and even
arrest their movement.
At this moment every available weapon must be employed against
the hostile artillery and continue firing until the infantry is estab-
lished in the position won. On every hostile battery known or
suspected, and that is not at the moment subjected to destructive
fire, the must be opened of sufficient intensity to prevent the service
of the guns. By cutting the batteries’ communications and by
engaging all known observing stations, the power of the hostile
artillery will be still further reduced.
It is open to question whether hostile batteries definitely located
just prior to an attack should be destroyed at once or not. Every
battery that is destroyed is one less to reckon with on the day of
attack. On the other hand, batteries that are severely shelled and
not actually destroyed, may be induced to move to a new position
and so be unlocated at the hour of assault. In this case it may be
impossible either to destroy or even to neutralize them at the criti-
cal moment. These considerations must receive due weight in the
artillery plan for an offensive operation.
26. In cases of preparation by the enemy for attack or counter-
attack, and at other times when he subjects our infantry to a severe
bombardment, the need of neutralizing fire will occur just as much
as at the moment of our own assault. The infantry again must be
relieved of the weight of the enemy’s fire, and under such circum-
stances relief can only be immediately effected by a general neu-
tralizing fire, which must for the time being take precedence over
the prearranged destructive program of the day.
27. In all schemes therefore of offense and defense regard must
be had to the orders and arrangements necessary to produce effec-
tive neutralization, either at a predetermined hour or at a moment’s
notice, as the case may be.
Neutralization zones must be allotted to groups and batteries
and, in considering action to meet attack or counterattack by the
enemy, the counterbattery program must include a scheme of gen-
48 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
eral neutralization to be executed, if required. by every available
- gun that can be spared for the purpose.
Hostile artillery reduced to silence by neutralization should be
kept under intermittent fire by field or medium guns to prevent a
recurrence of its activity.
The royal flying corps play a direct and important part in neutral-
ization. For while the enemy’s ground observing stations and
occasionally his balloons are the charge of the artillery, his aero-
planes and the majority of his balloons must be engaged by the royal
flying corps, who thus assist to deprive him of his means of observa-
tion.
Antiaircraft guns must also take a vigorous share in denying to
the enemy the benefits of aerial observation.
A thorough and detailed scheme is therefore essential to effec-
tive neutralization, and such a scheme can only be built up on
knowledge. Hostile batteries will notbe neutralized unless their
whole history is studied from day to day with untiring energy.
Further, to increase the chances of success, measures must be taken
to arrange as far as possible for observation from the air and from
the ground of the fire of neutralizing batteries.
28. As regards the methods of fire to be employed, fire should be
distributed over the whole target from the first round.
29. Gas shell may be profitably employed for neutralizing fire,
provided that atmospheric conditions are favorable and that a sufli-
cient quantity of such shell can be fired. For guidance as to the
number of gas shell required see “Instructions on the use of Lethal
and Lachrymatory Shell” issued by the general headquarters. under
No. S. S. 134, sec. 11.
30. The foregoing paragraphs deal chiefly with neutralization
during the actual progress of a battle. But at other times the moral
of a hostile battery may be considerably affected by the knowledge
that it will be subjected to prompt and accurate neutralization
whenever it opens fire.
It is therefore important that hostile batteries should be quickly
engaged not only when their flashes are seen from aeroplanes,
balloons or observing stations, but also when their activity is deduced
from current reports. Such deductions should frequently prove
correct if the records of hostile batteries are carefully kept on the
lines laid down in Section IV, and if a quick and reliable system
of transmitting reports of hostile artillery activity exists.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 49
COUNTER-BATTERY BOOK.
[Specimen pages]
EXPLANATION.
The object of this book is to provide all artillery commanders
who have counter-battery work to do with a detailed account of the
situation in a portable form, and in one with which they will all be
conversant, so that when batteries or groups are relieved the new
_comn1ander at once has a grasp of the grouping and activity of the
hostile artillery.
As each book only contains 100 pages, it will be necessary for the
larger formations to keep more than one book, and in order to derive
the full benefit from the information supplied by the army, the pages
should be numbered consecutively, and the histories of all batteries
entered, so that the number of the page corresponds with the number
given to the battery in the active hostile battery list (A. H. B.).
In the case of a smaller formation such as a group, one book would
probably be- sufficient if the pages were numbered and an ordinary
index kept at the end of the book.
On each right-hand page is a form to show the history of the active
hostile battery, while immediately opposite, on the left-hand page,
is an account of how that particular battery has been engaged by
' our artillery.
By this means it can be at once seen—
(1) How often a battery has been reported active
(2) By whom it has been reported (R. F. C. ; sound ranging section;
observing station; balloons; corps intelligence).
(3) How often it has been engaged by our artillery and the number
of rounds expended.
(4) How many photographs have been taken of the position and
their dates.1
P. Correct to 20 yards.
Order of accuracy- . - -{Q Correct to 50 yards.
R. Correct to 100 yards.
A. Each gun position seen.
R. F. C. visibility . - . [B Battery position seen.
C. General idea only.

1 These should be kept in a properly indexed box, so that any photograph can be
turned up at a moment’s notice.
98508°—17———4
50
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
INDEX.
In order to provide a connection between the registered number of
the batteries of the active hostile battery list and the actual coordi-
nates of the battery, a few pages, showing in outline ordinary map
squares, are added at the end. '
Upon these squared pages should be filled in the map square letters
and numbers corresponding to the area for which the particular
group in question carries out the counter-battery work.
The number of the page containing the battery history should be
inserted on the squared pages, in the approximate map position of
the battery in question.



Engaged by— Date Caliber. Rounds. Result.
96th S. B ........... . . 16. 4.16 6" H. 20 Unknown.
103d H B .......... . - 22. 5.16 60-pr. 75 Neutralized.
74th S. B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. 11. 16 9. 2” 30 Bad.
74th S. B ........... .. 11.11.16 9.2” 40
23d S. B ............ - . 11.11.16 9.2" 60 Good. Appears knocked out
64th S. B ........... . . 11. 11.16 12” 25 on photo.
D./148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 11.11.16 4.5" 100
- - - u - n - Q Q o - Q - n u o - e a - --
. u . - Q Q - e . - - - . - - - - I - ~ . . >
- ~ _ e Q . ~ - --
e - Q - - - - o s.
n Q - o . - - - .-
- - . a _ . - - --
. - _ a ~ - I - --



IQ 'SEIJSON LH'EI'I'ILLHV (I'IEIIJ





Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H 26, C 2834 ........................................... __ A. H. B. number. 1.
H 26, C 3240 ....................................... . . . . . . Caliber. 15-cm. H. or 10.5-cm. G.
Other emplacements. .. . . . . . . . . . H 26, C 3748 . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . _ . . . . _ . . . Accuracy. Q. P.
H 26, C 5053 ........................................... . . R. F- C. visibility. A.
Photo and date. Target or arc. R. F. C. S. R. S. O. K. B. S. 032158 Remarks.
11M550. 8.4 .16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Hebuterne. . .. 9. 4 . 16 9. 4 . 16 5. 5 . 16 10.11 16 4. 5 . 16 Four heavily protected its lying
11M551. 8.4 .16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. D 20d . . . . . . . .. 16.4 . 16 10.4 .16 20.5 . 16 . . . . . . . . .- 16.5 .16 across a track, under whic 1 she tors
12L1070. 17.8 .16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. E 150.... . . . . .. 4. 5 . 16 4. 5 . 16 12. 7 . 16 . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 . 16 connected by a gallery have been dug.
12111660. 22.10.16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Pommier.... . . 16. 5 . 16 21. 5 . 16 . 11.16 . . . . . . . . . . 1. 7 .16
113L337. 23.11.16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 22. 5 . 16 22.5 . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __ 12.7 .16
1.7 .16 5.11.16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.11.16 5.7.16.—-Light railway connected to
12. 7 . 16 10. 11. 16 position. Tracks shown in original
10. 11. 16 photos are disappearing.
11.11.16 10.11.16.——Later photos, show that
22. 11. 16 camouflage is more complete.
Was not active between July and
November.


52
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
l
| l v D I’!
00"‘
Inc...‘ I‘.


.I|-.'
'I-l-lll
I I l I n w I 0 I-


l
r | . 0 ‘I ‘'0'-


@
f3
I

.--------|4--------45-
---.-| 9---.




IV.-——WlRE-CUTTING.

WEAPONS FOR WIRE-CUTTING.
1. The weapons for wire-cutting are—
Medium trench mortar
18-pounder Q. F.
Howitzers.
60-‘pounder B. L.
In all cases close observation is essential to obtain good results.
TRENCH IVIORTARS.
2-inch trench mortar.
2. The 2-inch trench mortar with the Newton fuse has been found
the most suitable mortar for wire-cutting, for the following reasons:
(a) The bomb contains sufficient weight of metal to cut the wire. ‘
(b) The H. E. charge is sufficient to drive the fragments at a high
velocity through the wire.
(0) The bomb bursts immediately on impact, so the lateral effect
is very great and the craters formed are small and shallow.
Efi'ect with 2-inch trench mortar.
3. The following experiments have been carried out, which show
the results that may be expected when using the 2-inch mortar with
Newton fuse:
(a) The wire consisted of a mixture of English and French barbed
wire, strung with the least possible tension from wooden pickets about
4 feet high. Each bay was 12 square yards with 12 strands to each
bay. Forty rounds were fired, of which 30 fell in the wire itself, and
1,200 square yards were cut sufficiently to allow the easy passage of
infantry. This is at the rate of one round per 40 square yards.
(b) The target consisted of crinoline wire crossed by strands of
barbed wire. Forty rounds were fired, of which 25 fell in the wire
itself, completely demolishing an area of 600 square yards. This is
at the rate of 1 round per 24 square yards. The range was about 333
yards and the conditions easy.
53
54 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
From these experiments it would appear that one round per 10
square yards of barbed wire, and one round per 6 square yards of
loose wire, would be a generous allowance when estimating the
amount of ammunition required to cut wire with the 2-inch trench
mortar, using the 107 D. A. fuse, and allowing a factor of safety of 4
for difficult conditions of firing, observation, etc.
Observation of fire.
4. Observation of rounds against wire is difficult, and flank observa-
tion should invariably be employed if the best results are to be
obtained. ' -
Wind will be found to have considerable effect on 2-inch bombs,
so that in windy weather very careful observation and ranging are
necessary.
18-POUNDER, Q. F.
Range.
5. The best ranges for the 18-pounder are between 1,800 and 2,400
yards. Between 1,000 and 1,800 yards difficulties generally occur
in clearing our own parapets, owing to the flat trajectory of the shell,
and below 1,000 yards fuses can not be set to burn with sufficient
regularity on account of its high velocity.
Wire can be cut up to about 3,500 yards, but more time and a con-
siderable increase in the amount of ammunition are required.
Above this range the shrapnel bullets have not sufficient remaining
velocity to deal with wire effectively.
Calibration.
6. Guns must be overhauled by the artificers and carefully cali-
brated before being used for wire-cutting. ‘
Platforms.
7. Good steady platforms are essential. The best platform has
been found to consist of a foundation of brick, or sandbags with a
covering of brick rubble, well pounded—wood is too springy. On
chalky soil a special platform has been found unnecessary. A baulk
of timber should be placed under the trail-eye and sandbags placed
between the baulk and the spade. For accurate shooting the gun
should recoil in prolongation of the trail, as jump and side-slip are
then practically eliminated. To obtain this at the shorter ranges
the trail should be raised and well supported in such a position that
the gun has a little more than the correct elevation when it is in the
traveling position. Steps for the trail can be cut to suit varying
elevations if required. The traversing gear should be nearly at zero
for the same reason.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 55
Anchoring.
8. With a good platform and the gun recoiling in prolongation of
the trail, anchoring is often unnecessary—sandbags placed behind
and in front of the wheels, and on the lower felloes between the
spokes, will help to stead y the gun.
If anchoring is necessary, a baulk of timber should be well dug in
directly under the axle and secured; a rope being passed round it
and round the trail as far forward as possible. The recoil of the
carriage tightens up the rope. When a switch is required, it is only
necessary to run up the gun, and the rope slacks off.
Observation of fire.
9. The observing officer should be as close as possible to the wire
and his eye should be on a level with his task. It is generally advis-
able to have two observers—one close up and to a flank to observe
for range and height of burst, one further in rear and directly opposite
the wire to correct for line. This is especially desirable when firing
at wire in enfilade. It may sometimes be necessary to make special
arrangements for close observation, e. g., by sapping forward and
establishing an observing station.
Before guns attempt to cut wire, Infantry patrols should be sent out
to report on the nature and extent of the wire, looking especially for
low trip wires where the grass is long. They should also report on the
progress of destruction. In the case of distant hidden wire, it may
be necessary to resort to air photographs to obtain this information.
Ranging.
10. It is generally agreed that shrapnel is the most efficient projec-
tile, but everything depends upon bursting the shell in the right
place. Each gun should be accurately ranged on the near edge of
the entanglement and the shell should burst about four feet above
the ground and as close to the wire as possible. A burst even five
yards short has little effect.
Instead of using the Corrector, the length of fuze should be given,
and small alterations in the height of burst obtained by raising or
lowering the angle of sight a few minutes. About 30 to 40 per cent
of the rounds should burst on graze. '
A proportion of H. E. shell (about 5 per cent) mixed with the
shrapnel is useful when the wire is fixed on iron posts.
Method of fire.
11. When plenty of time is available, a good method is to begin
with two or three guns per battery and note which gun settles
down to steady shooting. Continue with that gun, relieving the
detachments. A gap should be made through the wire and then
enlarged. .
56 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
When there is a large amount of wire to be cut, each gun should be
ranged separately, and then fire continued with salvoes, gradually
reducing the elevation as the guns get hot. Continual pauses must
be made to let the guns cool down and to check the registration.
Once a battery has been detailed for wire cutting, it should not
be called _upon to fire at other targets except in case of emergency.
Night firing, barrages, etc., should be carried out by other batteries.
Ammunition.
12. The amount of ammunition required varies with the range
and the depth and quality of the wire. A rough rule is to allow
1/3 the number of hundreds of yards in the range for each yard of
front. ,
The ammunition required should be dumped beforehand as far
as possible, so as to avoid throwing unnecessary strain on the person-
nel of the battery.
Fuzes should be sorted into “lots.” Fuzes vary, and occasionally
a good “lot ” will burn very regularly and allow of a reduction in the
number of grazes expected.
HOWITZERS.
High explosives from howitzers (4,.5-in. and 6-in.) should be used
in conjunction with the 18-prs., to scatter the posts and the wire
when cut. Heavy howitzer (8-in. and 9.2-in.) will cut a lot of wire,
but unless a quick acting fuze is employed (such as No. 106), they are
liable to create awkward obstacles, owing to the size of the craters.
60—POUNDER.
Wire beyond the range of field guns may be cut by 60-pounders,
provided accurate observation is obtainable, but the amount of
ammunition required is very large. H. E. may be employed, but
only a small portion of rounds can be expected to burst in the wire.
The difficulty with shrapnel at long ranges is the irregular burning
of the time fuze (No. 85); but this may be improved by taking out
the set screw, loosening the nut, setting the fuse and then tightening
up the nut again. The set screw is then replaced.
A good steady platform is a necessity. The trail should be raised
above the level of the bottom of the wheels and the carriage allowed
to recoil through about 2 feet.
V.—DESTRUCTION 0F BARBED WIRE BY ARTILLERY.
[French official data. Mar. 16, 1917.]
1. The destruction of barbed wire by artillery fire may properly
be considered as one of the most important artillery developments
of the present war.
The official note published to the armies of the north and cast, a
translation of which is forwarded herewith, covers the subject thor-
oughly, and is the latest official French information published to
the armies.
2. The provisions of the note were foimd in force in a divisional
artillery command recently visited. On March 9, 1917, two light
batteries were seen while making a breach through a heavy barbed-
wire entanglement which the infantry reported as being absolutely
clean and wide enough to march 12 men abreast through it.
The officers of the batteries consulted the present note before mak-
ing their plans for the destruction of the wire. Three and one-half
hOlll‘S were allowed for the work by the division commander; but,
after a little more than an hour’s firing for effect, the breach had
every appearance of being ready for the infantry advance. This
fact was observed personally from a point in the infantry trenches
where the wire could be seen easily.
3. Although the note may be considered as embodying the ac-
cepted French ideas on wire cutting, it should be borne in mind that
the conclusions are based on the assumption that French munitions
are to be used. Unless similar shells and fuzes are available, the
conclusions reached in France will not necessarily hold good. In
this connection, it is reported that the British cut wire with time
shrapnel cut at zero.
So far as munitions are concerned, the matter must be solved in
the United States by proper authority after the necessary tests; but,
so far as the conduct of fire is concerned, it is believed that certain
portions of the present note could be included in provisional firing
instructions for field artillery almost in their present form.
57
58 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
DESTRUCTION OF BARBED WIRE.
[Note issued to the Armies]
All wire can be cut if fire is carefully adjusted for both deflection
and range. The center of im pact must be kept in the wire.
Breaches in wire must be made by battery and not by piece.
Each piece accounts for 5 or 6 meters, and a battery will cut a breach
about 25 meters wide.
Unless sights and quadrants (United States terms are used) are‘
in perfect condition, it is better to obtain the elevation from a
gunner’s quadrant in degrees rather than in meters.
First establish a 50-yard bracket on the visible portion. of the
target. For narrow wire, 15 meters, open fire for effect at the mid-
range of the bracket, obtaining elevations from the quadrant and
adjusting each piece separately, placing its center of impact in the
wire accurately.
After each piece has been accurately adjusted on the center of
the bracket, fire battery salvos, verifying frequently. During the
fire for effect it is even advisable to verify the adjustment of indi-
vidual pieces once or twice. In this way a breach in narrow wire
may be made with an expenditure of about 150 rounds per piece.
For wider wire, after having adjusted each piece carefully, com-
mence fire for effect at the short limit of a 25-meter bracket. Proceed
25 meters at a time, obtaining elevation changes from a quadrant,
firing four to six rounds per piece at each range, alternately pro-
gressively and retrogressively through the wire. The first range
fired each time should be range either surely short or bracketing.
This short limit should‘be verified for each piece two or three times
and do not depend upon the “sense” of the salvo.
The number of range changes necessary depends, naturally, on
the width of the wire. The following table gives an idea of what
is often required:


Number of
Width of 25-meter
wire, range
meters. changes
needed.
25 2
50 3
75 4
n X 25 n+ 1

Against wire which is not visible, a very accurate map or aerial
observation is essential. Open fire at the longest range observed
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 59
surely short of any visible portion either of the wire or the terrain near
it. On this information beat the‘zoue thoroughly, coming back each
time to the initial range and verifying the result at this range.
If P represents the width of the wire, the number of range changes
necessary will be +1. ‘
With the foregoing methods 37 to 40 per cent instead of the 57 per
cent to be expected from the probability tables will burst in the
wire.
Wire-cutting tests have been made at ranges between 2,000 and
4,200 meters. For breaches in 4-millimeter wire, 20 to 25 meters
Wide, 50 rounds per gun per range change will be required. For 5 milli-
meter wire 7 5 rounds per gun per range change will be needed.
Based on the above, it appears that the following amounts of
ammunition are required to cut wire:

,-- l Number l Number
“3213,? of of range of
' changes.’ rounds.
I
}

10-15 1 500
15-25 1 z 600
25-50 l 3 e 900
50-75 ' 4 1,200
l ' l
The above figures depend absolutely upon accurately adjusted
fire. Without absolute accuracy of adjustment no wire will be cut, no
matter how much ammunition is used.
On a counter slope a range change of 25‘ meters will give an abso-
lute change of


, w
20 in which to is the angle of fall, and p the slope in mils. If the
wire is more than 25 meters wide, the range change should be
diminished. The factor 20 indicates the advantage of the angle of
fall, to obtain which either the range should be increased or the
angle of fall increased by means of plaquettes.
Fuses—The fuse to be used depends upon the terrain. On heavy,
torn-up ground use the fuse with normal retard. On ordinary hard
ground use the “I” or “I. A.” fuse. (See report of O 6 on “French
percussion fuses, Oct. 23, 1916, for description of these fuses.) The
“sans retard ” fuse is the least desirable for wire cutting. The best
result is obtained when the projectile bursts nearest the wire. If
60 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
the nature of the ground is unknown, open fire with the normal
retard (5/100 of a second). If the result is a burst on ricochet above
1!,- meters above the ground, change to “I ” or “I. A,” depending
upon ammunition supply. For chevaux-de-frz'se use “I ” or sans
retard.
Shrapnel is sometimes used with good effect on wire which does
not exceed 4 mm. in thickness. Above that, the wire is touched
but is not cut. If the pickets are seen still standing, it may be
assumed that the wire is not cut. Shrapnel is ineffective on wire at
ranges above 2,500 meters. The height of burst must be accu-
rately adjusted at an average of 1 mil, so that all the bursts may
be in the wire. If at a suitable range and less than 4 mm. in thick-
ness, shrapnel will cut a breach 10 meters wide at an expenditure
of 50 rounds per gun per range change.
If well adjusted, enfilading or oblique fire is very effective against
wire, because the law of dispersion will cause so many of the shells
to burst in the wire. Breaches made in this way give irregular
limits in the direction of the march. The deflection must be accu-
rately adjusted. Fire should be slightly shifted for direction from
time to time. If kept always on the same spot, a few wires may be
left uncut. In many cases such fire has produced more satisfactory
results than direct fire, especially on counter slopes.
Time required—Because wire cutting involves fire for precision,
carefully adjusted and frequently verified, it takes time. Fire
should not be more rapid than 100 rounds per gun per hour. One
hour and thirty minutes must be allowed for an ordinary breach.
As there are likely to be unforeseen delays, it is prudent to allow
three hours in planning operations.
In conclusion, it may be stated that, under certain conditions,
all the projectiles and fuses of the 75-millimeter gun are suitable for
cutting barbed wire, and that the choice of projectile and fuse
depends upon circumstances and is a problem to be solved by the
battery commander in each case. In any event the task of wire
cutting is one which calls for the greatest care and precision and
absolute accuracy of adjustment.
VL—COOPERATION 0F AIRCRAFT WITH ARTILLERY.
GENERAL.
1. Importance of artillery—T he strength of the defense in modern
warfare, due to the universal use of the spade and barbed wire and to
the great increase in the number of machine guns, has made the
success of the infantry attack more dependent than ever on efficient
artillery preparation and support.
Accurate artillery fire is dependent on good observation; as the
range of modern weapons has increased, so has the need for aeroplane
observation on account of the increased number of targets which can
be engaged at a greater distance behind the enemy’s lines.
2. Means of observation from the (lira—The means of observation
available from the air are aeroplanes and balloons. For accurate
observation at long range on a small target, such as a hostile battery,
observation by an aeroplane, which can fly vertically above the tar-
get, is essential. Balloons, owing to their vulnerability, have to
work from beyond the range of most of the enemy’s artillery, and are,
therefore, most usefully employed in obser'vdng fire on targets at
short range, such as trench junctions or batteries in forward positions
or on those of greater extent, such as villages, strong points, or trans-
port and troops on the move.
3. Natures of artillery—Under varying conditions the artillery
brought into the field may include all types of guns and howitzers
up to those of the heaviest nature. The various natures may be
classified roughly as follows:
(i) Field guns (13-pounder and 18-pounder. guns): These are
primarily employed in barrage fire, repelling attacks in the open,
raking communications and wire cutting. They are also employed
to assist in counter-battery work against batteries within their range.
(ii) Medium guns (4.7-inch and 60-pounder guns): Chiefly em-
ployed in raking communications, and forming a barrage beyond the
range of the field guns, also in counter-battery work, especially for
neutralization fire.
(iii) Heavy guns (6-inch, 9.2-inch, and 12-inch guns): These are
used against villages, railway stations, camps, etc., which are beyond
the range of all other artillery. They are also employed against
61
62 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
observation stations, such as chimneys and church towers. Six-inch
guns may be employed for long range counter-battery work.
(iv) Field howitzer (45-inch howitzer): Chiefly used for the
bombardment of the weaker defenses, enfilading communication
trenches, and against troops that are badly entrenched; also for
cutting wire which is beyond the wire-cutting range of field guns
(3,200—3,400 yards). Also to assist in counter-battery work against
guns not provided with strong head cover and for barrage work,
especially by night.
(v) Medium howitzer (6-inch howitzer): Used for trench bom-
bardment and counter-battery work and against troops intrenched.
(vi) Heavy howitzers (8-inch and 9.2-inch howitzers): The prin-
cipal roles of these weapons are counter-battery work against bat-
teries provided with good cover and the destruction of strong
defenses.
(vii) Superheavy howitzers (12-inch and 15-inch howitzers):
Destruction of specially strong defenses, bridges, etc. The 12-inch
howitzer is also used with great effect for counter-battery work.
N. B.—A shell fired from a gun has a lesser angle of descent and a
greater remaining velocity than one fired from a howitzer; the 50 per
cent length zone is greater in the case of a gun, but the 50 per cent
breadth zone of a gun is less than that of a howitzer.
4. Organization of artillery—The artillery is normally divided
into divisional artillery and corps artillery. The heaviest natures
of guns and howitzers may be army artillery, but even so are usually
placed at the disposal of one or more corps.
Divisional artillery consists of 18-pounder guns and 4.5-inch how-
itzers. It is under the immediate command of the O. R. A. of the
division, and is organized for administrative purposes in brigades of
three or four batteries and for tactical purposes in brigades or in
groups, consisting of both guns and howitzers. During active
operations the divisional artilleries will generally come under the
direct command of the G. O. C. R. A. of the corps.
The corps heavy artillery is under the executive command of the
brig‘adier general commanding corps heavy artillery and is organized
in groups consisting of a varying number of heavy and siege bat-
teries. A counter-battery group is generally formed to relieve the
corps heavy artillery commander of the details of counter-battery
work. In cases where the artillery organization for counter-battery
work consists of two or more subgroups, central control and respon-
sibility must be vested in one man.
5. Allotment of front—The front of an army is allotted to the
various corps by army headquarters, and each corps is made respon-
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 63
sible for a certain area as regards counter-battery Work. This is
known as the corps counter-battery area, and is the area over which
the corps squadron R. F. C. operates. For observation purposes the
corps counter-battery area is usually divided into two or three flight
areas, according to its size.
When there are two flight counter-battery areas two flights are
detailed to specialize in counter-battery work with the heavy and
siege batteries allotted for that purpose.
The third flight is then made responsible for the information con-
cerning the trenches on the whole corps front and for registration
work with divisional, heavy, and siege artillery. This arrangement
must be considered as elastic, and flights may be required to reen-
force each other as circumstances arise.
When the corps counter-battery area is divided into three flight
areas each flight is made responsible for a section of the trenches and
for all registration work over the flight area, in addition to its counter-
battery work.
The division into two flight counter-battery areas is usually the
best.
The artillery commander allots counter batteries firing into the
flight areajor work with each flight (see par. 10). Observers ‘special-
ize as regards their own areas and batteries, but considerable elas-
ticity as regards firing into neighboring flight areas is essential, and
the same applies to corps and even to army counter-battery areas.
WORK REQUIRED OF THE ARTILLERY.
6. Tasks of the artillery—The work required of the artillery may
be broadly divided as follows:
(a) Barrage fire and attack of targets in the open.
(b) Bombardment.
(c) Counter-battery work.
7. Barrage fire and the attack of targets in the opera—This is the
work of principally light and to some extent medium guns. Aero-
plane cooperation is for the most part confined to locating targets
and reporting them immediately to the artillery concerned. In the
case of barrage fire batteries may be previously registered by aero-
plane observation on the front they cover, but it is not possible to
carry out any deliberate ranging from the air when the barrage is
being made. Deliberate ranging is the exception, too, when en-
gaging targets in the open, partly because they are generally of a
fleeting nature and partly because the fire of several batteries is
usually concentrated on such targets and the observation required
for deliberate ranging is not possible.
64 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
8. Bombardment—This is the particular réle of howitzers of all
natures, though guns may also be employed with H. E., particu-
larly against vertical targets such as breastworks, barricades, walls,
and houses, and for enfilade fire.
To achieve an effective bombardment great accuracy of fire is
essential.
All weapons, especially heavy howitzers, must check their ranges
daily before beginning to bombard, either on their datum points or
on their targets. If observation of targets from the ground is not
possible, batteries should be registered on them by means of aero-
plane observation, and in all cases the more that aeroplanes can be
used to check and to correct ranging the better.
Registration by heavy howitzers previous to the first day of
bombardment is of little, if any, value.
Useful results may be obtained from aerial observation during the
actual bombardment of a trench by heavy howitzer batteries. The
observer must, however, be provided with a map showing the tasks
alloted to the various batteries for which observation, is required.
He is then able to send corrections on any particular section of
trench line direct to the mast of the battery dealing with it.
9. Value of counter~battery work—Good, counter-battery work is
an essential factor of success. Unless the enemy’s batteries are
discovered and destroyed not only will his barrage fire render the
capture of an objective diflicult and costly, but his subsequent
bombardments may make its retention impossible. Successful
counter-battery work depends upon:
(i) Good organization.
(ii) The allotment of sufficient artillery of suitable natures.
(iii) Eflicient observation.
(iv) Close personal touch between royal artillery and royal flying
corps.
10. Natures of counter-battery 'worlc.——Counter-battery work is of
two kinds: (a) Neutralization; (b) destruction.
Neutralization is a temporary measure that can be suitably em-
ployed in connection with a definite operation, extending over a
limited period of time, e. g., during an attack. It is the normal
task of the medium guns, assisted by the divisional artillery when
available. Medium howitzers, if available, may also be usefully
employed.
Destruction is the essence of counter-battery work and necessi-
tates the use of heavy howitzers and sometimes heavy guns. A
proportion of heavy howitzers should be detailed for this work;
where circumstances allow, they are sited well forward in positions
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 65
when they can reach the enemy’s artillery employed on barrage
and bombardment. Such positions are not suitable for trench
bombardment owing to the comparative inaccuracy of heavy howit-
zers at short ranges. At the same time it must always be left to the
discretion of the artillery commander concerned to employ any
proportion of his artillery on the most important task of the moment.
Owing to the limited number of machines that can be main-
tained in the air at one time, counter-battery work in order to be
effective must be continuous, and every hour of good flying weather
should be utilized for destructive fire. No number of batteries allotted
for counter-battery work on one particular day will make up for the
lack of sufficient batteries on previous days. Constant changes in
the allotment of batteries render close touch impossible between the
royal artillery and royal flying corps.
DUTIES OF ROYAL FLYING CORPS IN COUNTER-BATTERY
WORK.
11. General .—~’l‘he duties of royal flying corps pilots and observers
employed on counter-battery work are twofold, viz:
(i) Location of the enemy’s batteries.
(ii) Observation of fire.
12. Location of targets—At least one machine should be up in
every corps counter-battery area during the hours of daylight,
whenever flying is possible, as an artillery patrol to locate targets.
If the amount of work on hand admits, it is preferable to detail
separate machines for this duty and for that of ranging batteries,
but during a battle the duties will usually have to be combined, as
described in paragraph 13 below.
A machine employed on this artillery patrol duty may carry out
observation of fire, if a hostile battery is seen active, but it must be
remembered that information secured by reconnaissance may be of
greater value to the corps than stopping the fire of a single hostile
battery.
Even when low flying only is possible much useful work can be
done by artillery patrols working from behind their own troops,
especially in spotting flashes, which are often more easily seen on a
dull day, and in reconnaissance of the enemy’s trenches.
The duties of an artillery patrol are—
(i) To locate new hostile batteries, and report those seen active.
(ii) To reconnoiter all known hostile battery positions, especially
those only roughly located or reported from other sources, and to
fix their exact positions if possible.
98508°—~17—-——5
66 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
(iii) To observe fire, if so ordered, on‘ hostile batteries seen active.
(iv) To locate new trenches, machine-gun emplacements, and
hostile works generally.
(v) To record any movements seen on roads or railways and to
send them down to the artillery, if within range.
The squadron recording officer (see below) will keep a list of
points on which he requires further information; he should always
be consulted before a patrol goes up. Pilots and observers must be
kept fully informed by him as to the latest information concerning
their corps and flight areas.
For the location of enemy’s batteries other means may also be
employed, namely:
(a) Artillery observation from posts on the ground.
(b) Cross bearings by survey posts provided with the necessary
instruments.
(0) Balloons.
(d) Sound ranging.
(e) Aerial photography.
Good results can only be obtained by exploiting all the available
means to the fullest extent, and by the careful collation'and minute
study of the results of each. This work is primarily the duty of the
artillery intelligence, but the results of air observations and pho-
tography must also be kept and closely studied by the corps squad-
rons.
Both the royal artillery and the royal flying corps should keep a
book in which each hostile battery is entered on a separate page
when first located. The subsequent history of the battery, i. e.,
when engaged, when active, &c., together with an air photograph
(or a record of its number) on which the battery will be found, will
be kept up to date by an officer specially detailed for this duty. In
a squadron this will be the duty of the squadron recording officer
who will, whenever possible, personally interview pilots and ob-
servers on their return from a shoot. The counter-battery com-
mander will apply for the necessary photographs to theicorps squad-
ron commander, who will obtain them from his brigade if outside
the squadron photographic area. Photography is the basis of good
counter-battery work.
13. Observation of fire—To obtain the accuracy of fire which is
necessary if counter-battery work is to be of any value, good observa-
tion is essential. The aerial observer enjoys direct and unobstructed
vision from a most advantageous position, such as is obtained by no
other method.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 67.
Provided hostile batteries are accurately located, good neutraliza-
tion fire can be obtained without aerial observation, but to attempt
destructive fire without such observation is almost always a waste
of ammunition. Since the number of aeroplanes that can work sim-
ultaneously on any front is limited, one of the chief duties of the
counter-battery group commander is to draw up his daily program
of prearranged shoots in such a way as to admit of the maximum
amount of aerial observation of fire for destruction. Each machine
is given certain batteries to work with and certain targets to engage.
Either the pilot or the observer undertakes these shoots. if during
the shoot he sees another battery active, he can engage it if he has
one of the batteries allotted to him available but may only in excep-
tional cases interrupt the shoot on which he is engaged. Meanwhile,
whichever of the two is not doing the ranging watches for new gun
positions and active batteries, and reports the latter by wireless so
that they can be neutralized and silenced at once, or be noted for
destruction as soon as opportunity offers.
Fire for destruction with aeroplane observation should, if possible,
be followed by two ground observing stations, the observers being
informed when the aeroplane gives 0. K. This procedure may
assist to secure accurate fire at some future date when no aeroplane
is available.
14. Necessity for close touch—The necessity for the closest per-
sonal touch between the royal artillery and the royal flying corps
can not be too strongly urged. However systematic cooperation may
be, difl‘iculties are bound to occur from the very nature of the work.
The simplest and best way of avoiding difficulties and of putting
matters right when failures occur is by mutual discussion between
the battery commander and the air observer.
Failures must always be investigated by the squadron commander,
and by the wireless assistant equipment officer if a wireless failure,
and a complete list of failures with results of investigations must be
sent to Wing headquarters daily in order that any action necessary to
prevent their recurrence may be taken. Observers should utilize
every opportunity of visiting the batteries allotted to them. On non- .
flying days squadron and balloon company commanders should ar-
range to send observers out to the batteries with which they work
in order to watch the procedure during a shoot so that they may get -
some idea of the difficulties and delay with which the artillery have
to compete.
A new observer should spend two or three days with a battery
before he commences to range guns and should see it firing with aero-
68 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
plane observation. Similarly, royal artillery officers should, it pos
sible, spend a few days with their corps squadron and balloon com-
pany. -
An artillery liaison officer is attached to each corps wing headquar-
ters to assist the wing commander in insuring successful cooperation.
COMMUNICATION .
15. General—Given good organization and well-trained personnel,
effective cooperation between artillery and aircraft is largely de-
pendent on rapid and reliable communication to and from the air
and on the ground.
16. Communication from the aeroplane t0 the artillery—Wireless is
the principal means of communication from air to ground, and all
aeroplanes doing artillery work will normally be provided with wire-
less transmitting sets.
The following should be provided with ground receivingsets:
Headquarters of corps heavy artillery.
Headquarters of heavy artillery groups.
Heavy and siege batteries or detached sections of the same.
Divisional artillery headquarters.
Field artillery brigade or group headquarters.
Squadron headquarters (two sets).
Balloon companies.
One of the squadron headquarters stations should be located .at
squadron headquarters for practice and tests; the other should be at
corps heavy artillery headquarters, or at any central position in the
corps area sufficiently far back to prevent jambing. This latter sta-
tion should be joined to squadron headquarters by a direct telephone
line, and acts as the link between the squadron commander and his
machines working on the line. At this station are taken wireless
reports, hostile aircraft reports, and, in case of sudden enemy bom-
bardments or attacks, calls for reinforcing machines.
The artillery work of any particular machine may be taken if re-
quired, and an observer failing to get a reply to his signals can test his
- wireless over this station.
Two operators are required for each ground set. Their sole duty
is the reception of wireless messages; orderlies and other means must
be provided by the artillery unit concerned for the further transmis-
sion of messages received. If more than one aeroplane using wireless
is employed per 1,000 yards of front serious jambing is liable to occur;
adjacent machines must work on different wave lengths. These
lengths are allotted for the whole front by headquarters, royal flying
corps. (See par. 39.)
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 69
If machines are not fitted with wireless a system of communication
by lamp or Very’s lights must be adopted, but both methods are slow
and uncertain. When using lamps the observer must know the
exact position of the battery with which he is working in order to be
able to direct his lamp quickly and accurately. With Very’s lights
the number of different signals that can be made is strictly limited.
17. Communication from the artillery to the aeroplane-——Communi-
cation from the ground to the aeroplane is by means of ground sig—
nals, i. e., strips of white cloth laid on the ground according to a pre—
arranged code. The number of signals sent to the machine from the
ground must be reduced to the minimum necessary. The best place
for observation is over the target, whereas the aeroplane must fly back
over the battery to read ground signals. Time is thus wasted and the
continuous observation of the target interrupted.
It is important, however, that the aeroplane observer should,
whenever possible, know with what battery he is working, so that he
may watch for the flash of its guns. He will thus be able to distin~ _
guish the burst of its shell from those of other batteries firing on tar~
gets in the vicinity.
18. Communication on the ground.——-Communication on the ground
is equally important, and direct telephonic communication is neces-
sary between the corps heavy artillery commander and the ‘corps
squadron and balloon company respectively, and also between the
two latter and the counter-battery commander, if one is appointed.
(See par. 4.)
It is also essential that corps squadrons should be able to commu-
nicate easily and quickly by telephone with all the counter-battery
group and battery commanders with whom they are working.
19. Signals in use—The following codes will be used:
(i) Aeroplane to artillery—wireless or lamps.
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
Antiaircraft guns ....................................... . . AA
Are you firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . RUF
Are you receiving my signals- ...................... . . B
Am returning to landing ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . CI ~
Are you ready to fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. KQ
Artillery ......................... - '. . . . . . . . . . . . . .' . . . . - - ART
Battery fire ......... . -, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . BF
Cavalry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . CAV
Change to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X
Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COL
Continue firing in your own time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G0
70
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - G
Fire for effect (fleeting opportunity signal) ............ . . GF
All available batteries to open fire (sudden attack or
very favorable target) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . LL
General answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - T
Guns in position at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . - - N
Guns firing in position at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . - - . . - NF
Guns not firing at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . _ - -' . . . . . _ . . . - - NT
Graze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - GZ
High explosive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - L
Infantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - FAN
Mechanical transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - MT
Mostly (as in mostly graze), or mean point of impact. - - M
Mostly left to avoid confusion with “wait” . . . . . . . . . . - - QM
Percussion- - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - P
Shoot unobserved or washout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - W
Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V0
Stand-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - A
Stop firing or wait- - . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - MQ
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -, . . . . . . . _ . . . . . - SW
Target (range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - OK
Time shrapnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z
Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - S
Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R
Left . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - Q
More right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RR
More left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QQ
Just . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . _ - . - - . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . J
Far . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . F
The call LL is used in cases of emergency, e. g., a sudden attack
or when a particularly favorable target presents itself. Any battery
within range should open fire on receipt of this call.
It should,
therefore,_ be used only in exceptional circumstances since; it will
result in other work being temporarily suspended.
The call must be changed periodically in case the enemy should
make use of it to interfere with our fire.
The stand-by signal “A” before nature of target, e. g., ANF,
signifies that observer is prepared to range a single battery on the
target.
The signal AA is sent immediately after NF.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. ‘71
(ii) Aeroplanes to artillery—Very’s lights:


Line. Range. Signal.
No correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . - . Over ............ . . Red.
N o correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - Short. . . . . . . . . . . . - Green.
Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - Over ............ . . Red red.
Right . . . . . . . - . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . Short. . . . . . . . . . . - - Red green.
Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . - Green red.
Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . Short. . . . . . . . . . . - . Green green.
Correct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . Correct . . . . . . . . . . . - Red green red.
Stop firingr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - Red red red.


In the event of the supply of lights running short, a complete
circle to the right may be substituted for a red light and a complete
circle to the left for a green light.
Thus: Two circles rightr-Red red, i. e., Right and Over.
If it is required to range for fuze, the observer fires the following
signals:
For bursts on graze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - Green.
For bursts in air- - . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red.
(iii) Aeroplane .to artillery—Clock code.

The target is regarded as the center of a clock, with 12 o’clock
pointing true north and the remaining hours accordingly. Imagi-
nary circles with the target as center at radial distances of 10, 25, 50,
100, 200, 300, 400, and 500 yards from the target are lettered Y, Z,
A, B, G, D, E, F, respectively. '
'12 _ ‘ FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
The observer notes the fall of a round with reference to the imagi-
nary circle and clock hours, and signals the result thus—Y 4, B 6.
When observing single rounds a shell will be reported as O. K.
in the event of a direct hit on the target, e.- g., on a gun emplacement
in the case of a battery. When firing salvos or a quick rate of battery
fire, rounds falling in the area covered by the target, e. g., between
two guns in the case of a battery, will be reported MOK.
Observation of rounds bursting on graze when time shrapnel is ,
being fired will be preceded by the graze signal GZ, e. g., a shell
bursting on graze 50 yards from the target at 5 o’clock will be signaled
as GZA 5. '
When giving general corrections the clock code will be used, e. g.,
if most of the shells are falling 200 yards from the target at 1 o’clock
the signal will be MC 1 (mostly 200 yards at 1 o’clock). A celluloid
disk with hour lines cut in its circles, according to the scale of the
map in use, is of great assistance to the observer.
(iv) Artillery to aeroplane—Ground signals (strips of white cloth 12
feet by 1 foot):
Ready to engage target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L
Ready to engage target (battery using one gun only). . L
When targets have been reported and numbered, the -
target to be engaged can be shown by Roman figures,
e. g., Ready to engage target N IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - LIV
Battery receiving signals, but guns not ready to fire A
(With a bar underneath for every 10 minutes that will
probably elapse before guns are ready).
Yes. . . _. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - K
Go home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . --. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. T
With figure added means go home for 1, 2, or 3 hours. . T III
Observe for time shrapnel- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Observe for fire effect- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - _
Am not receiving your signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . _ . - _
Signals weak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless not ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat last observation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. . . . . . . . . . . - .
Repeat last two observations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
' No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message received. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change to another target (followed, if necessary, by
the designation of the target) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _
Target not understood or not received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l]; wzlh<l~<i<i€b12<N
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 73
If it is necessary to distinguish between batteries close together,
roman figures placed under other signals can be used. Ground
signals will be placed so as to be read from the target side of the
battery.
Artillery commanders must see that the ground signals are com-
plete, correct, and suitably placed, and that there is no delay in
putting them out. An open dark-colored piece of ground should be
selected, away from other objects, such as trenches, chalk heaps,
etc., likely to catch the observer’s eye. A man must be detailed by
the artillery unit concerned to work the ground signals; the wireless
operator is fully occupied.
(v) Artillery to aeroplane—Morse signals when using lamps:
Calling up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Series of dots.
Change to (followed, if necessary, by designation of
target) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - X
General answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T
Go home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - CI
Battery receiving signals, but guns not ready to fire;
or, “Yes” in answer to a question- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . K
, Gun fired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - Series of dashes
N o. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . N
Observe for high explosive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - LYD
Observe for percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - P
Observe for time shrapnel- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z
Observe for fire effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
Observe for battery fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . BF
Ready to engage target (stand by) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L
Repeat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y
Am not receiving your signals- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Signals weak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . H
Wireless not ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W
REPORTING OF TARGETS.
A. WIRELESS OR LAMP.
20. General.——Cooperation between aircraft and artillery may take
place under three different sets of conditions:
(1) When the position and are of fire of our own battery and also
the position of the target it is proposed to engage are known to both
battery and aeroplane.
(ii) When the position and are of fire of our own battery are known,
but the position of the target is unknown until discovered by the
aeroplane. '
74 I FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
(iii) When the position of our‘ own battery is not known to the
aeroplane, nor the position of the target until discovered by the
aeroplane.
Under the first set of conditions the shoot can be arranged before—
hand and carried out as described in paragraph 21. Under the sec-
ond and third conditions a system is necessary by which the aero-
plane can inform the artillery of the nature and location of targets
discovered during the flight, and of the extent to which it is able
to observe fire on them.
During open warfare the third set of conditions may be expected
to be normal, except perhaps in the case of the heavier types of
tractor-drawn artillery. The entry of these into action will be de-
liberate, and it should be possible in most cases to keep the royal
flying corps informed as to their position and arcs of fire.
21. Squadron call sysicm.—This system is used in the case of pre-
arranged shoots, or when the observer wishes to call up a particular
battery after reporting the target by the zone call system described
below.
Separate prefix calls are allotted—
(a) To each squadron by royal flying corps headquarters.
(b) To each battery placed at the direct call of aeroplane observers,
by squadron commanders.
(c) To other batteries or field artillery group headquarters by
squadron commanders, the call holding good for the particular shoot
only.
These prefix calls are usually letters.
Suppose the squadron call to be P and the battery call F, the call
used by the aeroplane to call up the battery is PF, and this call
precedes every message sent by the aeroplane.
In addition to squadron and battery calls, special calls (numbers)
are allotted to each individual aeroplane pilot or observer by the
squadron commander. These calls will be used in the case of pre-
arranged shoots, or of impromptu shoots with a single battery, when—-
(a) Calling up a battery until the first observation has been sent
down.
(b) Changing from one target to another.
(0) Sending CI.
They will be sent immediately after the squadron call, e. g.,
P 3 F.
Should a battery wish to register a number of targets, calls for
each target should be arranged beforehand. They can conveniently
consist of the battery call letter, followed by the number of the tar-
FIELD ARTILLER‘Y NOTES. 75
get according to the order in which they are to be engaged. Thus, if
a battery whose call is L wishes to register four targets, the target
calls will be L1, L2, L3, L4.
22. Zone call system—For other than prearranged shoots, the
system used necessitates both battery and observer being in pos-
session of maps squared on the same system. A suitable division is
into main lettered squares of 6,000 yards’ sides and subsidiary num-
bered squares of 1,000 yards’ sides.
For the purpose of wireless zone calls the big lettered squares on
the map are divided into four parts, as shown by the thick lines and
letters in the diagram below. The whole area covered by the map
is thusautomatically divided into zones 3,000 yards by 3,000 yards,
each having a two-letter call which consists of the map square letter
followed by the zone letter, e. g., WB is the call of the northeastern
zone of the square W. Owing to the area covered by each sheet of
the map no doubt should arise as to the sheet referred to and the
sheet number will not therefore be included in the call.

8A 9 10 11l3 12
\l
13 14 15 16 17 18

25 26C 27 28 291) 30


31 32 33 34 35 36


The 1,000 yards’ squares on these maps can be further subdivided
into 500 yards’ squares lettered A, B, C. D, read horizontally from
the top left hand square.
23. Application of the system.—The royal flying corps arrange for
a suitable number of artillery machines to watch the zones on the
immediate front of the army, and allot squadrons to counter-battery
areas corresponding with their corps front as far as possible. The
limits of counter-battery areas should coincide. as far as possible,
with the boundaries of zones. ‘
These areas are subdivided into flight counter-battery areas
consisting of probably two or three zones (3,000 by 3,000 yards
each‘).
76 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
24. Calls and messages from the air.—(i) The aeroplane observer
sends down information regarding any hostile troops or active
batteries, other than those on which shoots have been prearranged,
which he may see in the zone allotted to him, under the call of the
particular zone in which the target is seen. Squadron calls are
not used.
In order that the message may be generally understood, targets
must invariably be sent down by the coordinates. If the target
is in the flight counter-battery area, the coordinates may be fol-
lowed by a serial number (target Gall N1, &c.) which will hold
good for the period of the current flight only.
Targets in other areas may be sent down, but in order to avoid
confusion no serial number should be sent.
- (ii) Troops are considered in mass unless stated to be in column,
and a column to be at rest unless the direction of movement is given.
Coordinates of a mass or of a column at rest refer to the center,
and of a moving column to the head.
Examples:
Zone W.
(a) WA NF W9c52 = guns in action at W.9.c.5.2.
(b) WD GOL 2,000 FAN W W 29a24 = 2,000 infantry in column
moving W. at W.29.a.2.4.
A call such as (b) may be preceded by LL (favorable target call).
(iii) Should the observer wish to observe for a particular battery
whose call and position he knows, the target abbreviation will be
preceded by the wait signal MQ. He is then free to call up and
observe for the particular battery by squadron and battery call.
Example:
W B MQNF W6d24 = Guns in action at W.6.d.2.4 (ob-
server is about to call up a par—
ticular battery).
(iv) If the observer is ready to observe for a single battery on the
target, but does not know the call or position of any particular bat-
tery he will send the “stand by” signal A immediately before the
target abbreviation. A battery will then be detailed by the artil-
lery commander concerned.
Example:
WB ANF W12c54 N1 ..... . - = Guns in action at W.12.c.54 (ob-
server is prepared to observe for
a single battery).
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. '77
(v) The observer may recommend that the target should be
engaged by either guns or howitzers by adding a number to the
zone call, as follows:
W B 1=Call for guns (heavy guns, if available).
W B 2=Call for howitzers.
To summarize—
Zone WA.
(a) W ANF W2d45 N1- . . - = Call for fire from any battery
(gun or howitzer) on active bat—
tery at W.2.d.45. General cor-
rections may be sent.
(b) W A MQNF W2d45. . == Signifies that observer intends to
observe a particular battery on
active battery at W.2.d.45, and
will call it up by squadron and
battery call. Stops fire called for
by (a) above, to allow observer to
observe for the particular battery.
(0) W A ANF W2d45 N1. = Same as (b), but observer asks group
to choose a battery to engage tar-
get instead of choosing one him-
self.
(d) WA2ANFW2d45 N1. =Same as (c), but observer suggests
use of howitzers.
25. Arrangements on the ground.—-(a) Receipt of calla—Officers
commanding groups, brigades, or batteries to which wireless receiv-
ing sets are attached must keep the wireless operator informed as
to which zone calls he is to take, i. e., those of the zones into which
they can fire. All such calls will be taken by the operator and
reported to the officer commanding the battery or group with which
he is working. The operator should not be asked to take the calls
of other zones, or, while doing so, he may miss those which concern
his unit.
Divisional and corps heavy artillery commanders can instruct
their wireless operators to take messages from whatever portion of
the line information is required.
(b) Answering calla—The arrangements to be made for answering
calls from the air must be decided by the artillery commander
concerned. The following examples are merely intended to indi-
cate the general procedure:
78 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
X group with wireless station attached consists of a number of
18-pounders, ‘1.5-inch and 6-inch howitzers, and two 60-pounder
batteries. The zones covered by the guns of the group are K D
and L C.
(i) Message received—-
K D FAN 1,000 K.23.b.33.
Oflicer commanding X group directs shrapnel fire to be opened
on the target by two 18-pounder batteries and one 60-pounder
battery. The aeroplane observer may send any observation he
may be able to make under the target call, or under the coordinates
if no target call has been allotted.
If the above call was preceded by the favorable target call “LL, ”
all available guns would be turned on to the target.
(ii) Message received—-
L C 1 NF L.32.a.78.
Ofiicer commanding X group may turn both 60-pounder bat-
teries on to this target, one battery using shrapnel and the other
H.‘ E., or if 60-pounder batteries are not available, may use any
other type of gun. The aeroplane observer acts as in (i).
(iii) Message received—
L G 2 ANF L.21.d.43 N1.
Ofiicer commanding X group details one 6-inch (or 4.5-inch)
howitzer battery, or if he considers it preferable a battery of 60-
pounders. The aeroplane observer ranges the battery under call
N1, e. g., L G N1G.—L G N1 D 4, &c.
(iv) Message received—
LC MQNF L.20.c.16.
This signifies that the observer intends to call up a particular
battery and observe for it, as described in paragraph 21. Suppose
the squadron call to be P, the observer’s call 2, and battery call L.
The observer would next send down—
P 2 L NF L.l3.c.16. N1.
The group commander can keep the whole control in his own hands
as in the above examples, or he can detail the batteries to answer
first calls for each type in each zone.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 79
B.—-VERY’S LIGHTS OR SMOKE SIGNALS.
26. General procedure—\Vhen Very’s lights or smoke puHs are
used as signals the position of a target can be shown by the aero-
plane flying to a position vertically over thetarget, and there firing
off a Very’s light or smoke puff. The range may be obtained from
the following data :1
(i) The angle of sight of the aeroplane flying at a prearranged
height.
(ii) The range of the aeroplane when it is vertically over the ta:-
get at a prearranged height.
(iii) The range and the angle of sight when the aeroplane is verti-
cally over the target, but its altitude is unknown.
The methods given above for finding the range of a target may,
if desired, be used in combination and the mean of the results taken.
The aeroplane is followed by the director, and at the moment
the signal is given the angle shown on the director is read off. This
gives the line.
RANGING WHEN USING WIRELESS.
27. General.—-An observer must, when possible, find out exactly
what is required before going up. For instance, the fire which he
is observing may be for effect, or merely to register certain definite
points. Again, a battery commander may wish to correct the line
and range of all the guns of his battery and so require observation
of fire for each one, or may only want observation for the particular
gun selected to carry out the ranging.
A. —PREARRANGED SHOOTS.
28. Details of system.—The observer, having received his orders
and left the ground. tests his wireless over the aerodrome where the
ground signal is put out to show that the signals are strong and clear.
He then calls up the stations of the batteries with which he is to
work, and asks if they are. receiving his signals, “B.” The station
or stations answer by lamp or strips on the ground, sending K if the
signals are being received. While climbing the observer sends his
call at frequent intervals to enable the operator to tune in to his
wave length.
The observer having got his height sends A (stand by), followed
by the designation of the target to be engaged. The battery replies
by F (message received).
The battery then puts out T if the battery can not fire at all, a A if
any delay is anticipated, and L as soon as the guns are laid and ready
80 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
to fire. If the battery can not fire on the particular target sent down,
but is ready to fire on other targets, LX is put out.
It is important that one or other of these signals should be put out
at once. If this is not done, the observer assumes the presence of
hostile aircraft, or that his wireless is not working properly, and
much time may be wasted.
All signals from the ground are acknowledged by the observer by
the general answer T.
The observer flies to a convenient position for observing the fall
of shell and gives the signal G (fire). The battery should then fire
immediately; if not ready within 10 seconds it should wait for the
signal G to be repeated. In order to avoid the strain of continually
staring at the target area, and to minimize the possibility of con-
fusion with other bursts, the observer will watch for the flash of a
gun firing and then look toward the target to observe the fall of
the shell. He should know the approximate time of flight.
After ranging has commenced, if the observer is not quite sure
whether a gun has fired or not, he will signal W, meaning shot
unobserved, before again signaling G.
If the battery has fired, the receipt of the signal “Shot unobserved ”
will give it time to lay before receiving the signal G.
The observer sends the observation giving the position of the shell
with reference to the target by means of the clock code.
This procedure is continued until the ranging is completed.
29. Nature of projectile—As a rule single rounds are sufficient for
observation, but it may sometimes be necessary to fire salvos of
two or more guns. If the gun can fire shrapnel (l3-pounder, 18-
pounder, 4.7-inch, 60-pounder, and 6-inch gun),an observer may
signal for time shrapnel to be used during ranging when observation
is difficult (or a few rounds of time shrapnel may be fired on the
initiative of the battery commander after a series of unobserved
rounds). In such cases when the shell have been brought near the
target the observer may signal “change to percussion” or “change
to H. E.” so as to get more accurate results. Observation will then
be easier as the observer will know where to expect the shell to fall.
It may also assist an observer to distinguish the shell of his par-
ticular battery from that of others firing into the same area if he calls
for salvos to be fired or for time shrapnel.
A There is every chance of the firstshot being missed if it does not
fall where the observer expects to see it. It is therefore desirable
that the battery commander should endeavor to place the first
shell where. its burst will not be concealed by woods, etc.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 81
30. Correct-ion of line and range—If the guns are well calibrated the
line and range of one gun may be found and the necessary corrections
applied to the other guns. If, however, the battery commander
wishes to correct the line and range of all the guns of his battery he
will fire them in, turn and receive observations for each.
The observer will send G when ready to observe the first gun.-
The battery commander will then fire off each gun in succession,
receiving the observation of each round. The correction due to an
observation is applied only to the gun concerned so that it is only
necessary to wait for the signal G before firing the next gun. The
observer should give G immediately after the observation of the
preceding round.
The observer will continue as above until the range and line for
each gun is satisfactory, or until the battery commander signals
V (observe for fire effect) and commences battery fire.
31. Switches—The observer, while a shoot is in progress, may
switch a battery by the signal X on to a fresh objective when he
sees a fleeting or important new target, or when further shooting
at the old target is useless owing to difficulties in observation, etc.,
but a shoot once begun must be completed if possible. The ob~
server should, therefore, normally call up another battery if he is
himself prepared to observe fire on the new target.
If a hostile battery being ranged on is silenced, the observer will
complete ranging and then signal NT (guns no longer firing).
B.—IMPROMPTU SHOOTS.
32. Details of system.—If the observer wishes to observe for a
particular battery, he sends down the target as described in para-
graph 24 (iii) and then calls up the particular battery as described
in paragraph 21. If the observer is prepared to observe for a single
battery he sends the signals described in paragraph 24 (iv), but in
this case must allow sufficient time for the battery to be detailed and
the guns laid before sending G.
RANGING WHEN USING LAMP.
33. Outline of system—The observer flies over the ground station
and calls it up with the lamp. The remainder of the procedure is
similar to that followed when using wireless, except that the battery
repeats each signal sent by the observer until the general answer is
received from the aeroplane in acknowledgment. This eliminates
the likelihood of any mistakes. When signalling, the observer
98508°—17—-6
82 , FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
must insure that his lamp is accurately aligned on the battery in
order that his signals may be clearly read. In a moving battle,
aeroplanes using signaling lamps may show that they wish to signal
information by making a complete circle over the unit to which
they wish to signal.
RANGIN G WHEN USING VERY’S LIGHTS AND CIRCLIN G
SIGNALS.
34. Outline of system.——Success when using these forms of signal-
ling is largely dependent upon the battery commander knowing the
most suitable time to fire, in order to enable the observer to see the
fall of the shell.
All signals to change the target or the nature of fire must be sent
from the ground. '
Where it is necessary .to give the battery commander more in-
formation than can be conveyed by signals, the observer must drop
a message bag. If it has not been possible to make preliminary
arrangements, the observer will drop a message stating the course
. he proposes to fly and when it is most convenient for the battery to
fire.
Signals should not be made from the air when the aeroplane is
between the sun and the battery.
Two men should be detailed from the battery to watch the ob-
serving aeroplane, one with field glasses looking for the signals, the
other with his naked eye keeping a continuous watch on it so as to
make certain that no mistake is made as to the actual machine,
since, when there are several aircraft out, confusion between them
is likely to arise.
METHODS OF FIRE.
35. General.—Artillery may fire either for registration purposes or
for effect, and fire for effect includes neutralization fire and destruc-
tive fire (see pars. 6-10). The procedure after ranging is completed
depends on the nature of fire required.
36. Registration—When registration of targets is being carried out,
each round will be observed throughout the shoot, and the signal
“change to a fresh target" will be made by the battery, unless
arrangements have been made before going up that the signal to
change is to be given by the observer. In the latter case, it should
be remembered that a gun will generally be loaded, ready to fire at
the old target when the signal to change is given.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 83
37. Neutralization—In the case of neutralization fire speed is the
essential, and rapid fire will be opened as soon as the approximate
range and line have been obtained. The decision as to when to
open rapid fire will rest with the battery commander and not with
the observer.
Preparation for neutralization during an attack may be made by
registering particular batteries on known hostile batteries immedi-
ately prior to the assault. Such batteries are then in a position to
neutralize, without air observation, the batteries. on which they are
registered, should these batteries open fire during the attack.
If the target is not being hit, the observer should, whenever the
situation admits of his watching the effect of the fire, send down the
mean point of impact of a number of rounds, using the signal M,
followed by the location in the clock code. If more than one battery
is firing and the fire is producing some effect on the target, corrections
should not be sent as they may result in putting batteries which
have the correct range off the target. During a battle or any period
of activity, fire will very often be from the map, without observation.
In the case of moving targets, the observer must signal his ob-
servation with regard to the position of the target at the moment the
shell bursts. It is for the artillery commander to predict the position
of the target when the next round bursts and to make allowances
accordingly.
38. Fire for destruction—Fire must be carefully controlled and
observed, not only during ranging, but also while firing for effect,
if destruction is to be definitely achieved.
Howitzers, but more particularly guns, have a tendency to lose
exact range or line to a target from a variety of causes, even though
ranging may have been satisfactorily accomplished.
Fire must be directed at a particular point, such as a hostile gun
or emplacement, or trench junction.
When the observer, seeing that adequate effect has been obtained '
on one gun, wishes to switch on to the next, he will use the signal
SW, followed by the clock code.
This will indicate the distance and direction that the battery
should switch in order to hit the next gun.
The same method may also be used when bombarding successive
points on a hostile trench line.
When ranging has been accomplished, i. e., when the mean point
of impact on the emplacement or other target has been established,
a series of rounds (the number depending on the caliber and nature
of the weapon employed) should be fired without correction. '
84 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
Observations should then be sent down for the mean point of im-
pact of these rounds. and the procedure repeated, and so on.
When the battery commander considers that his guns are ranged
sufficiently accurately, he orders battery fire at a small interval and
puts out a V on the ground in place of an L.‘
The observer may not see the V, but should always watch the
battery for a few seconds after a gun has fired in response to his G.
He will then be able to see when battery fire is started. Correc-
tions are given for a group of rounds as described above.
Aeroplane observation should invariably be provided, if the
tactical situation admits, in the case of fire for destruction when
accurate observation from the ground is impossible.
For examples of cooperation under various conditions, see
Appendix I. '
WIRELESS.
39. Prevention of jambina—The number of aeroplanes using
wireless which can work on any front without jambing each other’s
signals is limited, and depends largely on the skill of observers and
wireless operators, and the amount of supervision and attention to
detail on the part of squadron commanders and wireless officers.
Generally speaking, one machine to every 1,000 yards is the maxi-
mum, and this is still further limited if some machines are working
far out and others close in. '
Even at the above interval, adjacent machines must use different
wave lengths and should, if possible, employ signals of different
tones. _
Wave lengths and tones on the whole front are allotted by head-
quarters, royal flying corps.
40. Care of instruments—Wireless instruments are delicate and
easily get out of order. Wireless officers are responsible that all
wireless personnel are thoroughly trained in the care and adj ust-
ment of their instruments. Artillery commanders to whose units
wireless stations are attached must insure that adequate care is
taken of the instruments, especially when on the move.
A Mark III tuner wrapped in several folds of a blanket and
strapped firmly to the top of a limber can, when necessary, be taken
over very rough country without injury.
41. Erection of station—Wireless masts must be erected on the
highest ground in the vicinity of the unit with which they are working
and must be arranged as shown in the diagram below, with the mast
toward the target.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 85
The earth lead should be short and straight and carried to earth
as directly as possible. C‘ are must be taken that the earth lead is
not brought around the instrument or run in close proximity to the
aerial lead.
The earth mat should be parallel to and immediately under the
aerial, as close to the tuner possible, and buried. If the operator
is provided with a deep dugout, it is better to arrange the earth mat
in the dugout rather than to bring it up to the surface by a long lead.
Aerial leads must be carefully insulated and must not touch or be
led through earth. Care must be taken that they do not come in
contact with the iron supports or roof of dugouts.
Wireless officers are primarily responsible that stations are prop-
erly erected, but artillery commanders must make themselves
acquainted with the correct method and assist the wireless officer
in this matter.


Aerial. 7
Central line of fire of
/ Battery.
/ Mast
/ I '__——__~ ‘—_>
Earth /
—l ( Dug-out.

Artillery commanders are also responsible that suitable cover is
provided for the operators. It should be as sound proof as possible
and not too near the guns.
The operator can be in the same dugout as the battery commander
provided it is on high ground and not too close to the battery. Other-
wise he must be provided with a separate dugout and connected by
telephone with the battery commander.
42. Position when sending—Wireless machines should work within
3,000 yards of their target and should only come closer to the battery
for which they are observing when it is apparent that the latter are
not receiving their signals. The likelihood of jambing is increased
by coming in close to the receiving station, and time is wasted if
machines do so unnecessarily.
The strength of the signals depends largely upon the direction in
which the machine is flying with respect to the ground aerial. The
signals are strongest when the aeroplane is flying toward the battery
‘86 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
in such a way that the aeroplane aerial is in line with or parallel to
the ground aerial. The weakest signals are the consequence of send-
ing when flying away from the battery. Flying across the line of the
ground aerial gives medium signals. Signals must never be sent
when a machine is turning.
The following diagram suggests a good method of flying when
ranging on a target so as to get the strongest signals:
F/i‘eo’ 6' 6'



L J J
("Orrecfi'ons F 80/291‘ 568/?
X Zi/ye/
Direction of Ground Aerial.
\
’
Squadron commanders must insure that all pilots and observers
realize the importance of sending from the right position. If suffi—
cient attention is paid to detail and signals are sent correctly it is
.quite unnecessary for the observers to return close to their stations
before sending their signals.
Messages must be kept as short as possible. The code signals only
must be used and must not be repeated more than twice at one time.
To save waste of time, if an observer finds that a battery is not
getting his signals, he should return at once to his squadron, sending
a message if he can for another machine to relieve him. On his
return he should immediately investigate the cause of the failure.
By calling up his squadron central or headquarters station before
landing he can ascertain whether the failure is due to the transmitter
or to the receiver.
43. Receipt of messages—Each wireless station has two operators.
Commanders of units to which stations are attached are responsible
that one operator is always on duty whenever there is any possibility
of a machine working with his station. The operator must be in-
formed by the unit with which he is working as to v. hat calls he is
to take and must be notified of any changes. H e must report at once
all messages received. Weather reports may be taken by operators
attached to artillery units, but press messages are on no account to be
taken.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 87
Whenever possible all wireless messages taken during the day
should be collected and examined by the squadron wireless officer.
The messages taken at batteries should be compared with those
received at the squadron central station. The collection of this data
will enable a check to be kept upon—
(i) The sending of pilots and observers.
(ii) The efficiency of operators.
(iii) The amount of signalling sent from the air.
44. Irtrestfgation of failures—Thorough investigation of every
failure which occurs must be made by the squadron, and if necessary
by the wing, wireless officer. The former (assisted by the wireless
noncommissioned officer) should visit the batteries with which
their squadron is working every day or two. The objects of these
visits are——
(i) To see that stations are correctly put up in the most suitable
place, as described in paragraph 41.
(ii) To test the efficiency of operators.
(iii) To note any deficiency in the transmitting sets or any faults
in the sending of observers.
(iv) To see that the operators tune in properly.
(v) To insure that observers give the operator a chance to tune in
properly.
To carry out tests (ii) to (v) the wireless officer should listen in
himself. Wireless oflicers during these visits should make a point
of seeing battery commanders and ascertaining whether they have
any suggestions or complaints concerning the wireless work or the
operators attached to their batteries.
45. Weather reports—Weather reports as below should always be
sent down to the squadron headquarters station, especially in un-
settled weather.
When sending down weather reports by wireless, the following
codes will be used:
Wind=W. Clouds-—=C.
Height will be given in hundreds of feet—e. g., W20SW65=wind
at 2,000 feet SW. 65 m. p. h.
C25=Clouds at 2,500 feet.
Messages will always be sent in the above order.
e. g., W45NW50C60 will be the method of sending, wind at 4,500
feet NW. 50 m. p. h., clouds 6,000 feet.
OK PHOT.=All right for photography.
OK ART.=All right for artillery observation.
88 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
The object of these weather reports is as follows:
(1) To let flight commanders know whether the weather is fit to
send up machines for any particular duty.
(2) To give the heavy howitzers the direction and strength of the
wind at various heights. Heavy howitzers should get similar in-
formation from balloons.
Any changes in the weather while a machine is up should be sent
down. .
Wireless operators attached to antiaircraft guns should be in-
structed to take in these weather reports.
REPORTS. ‘
46. Report to battery.—Whenever possible, the battery commander
should receive a report from the observer on the shooting done.
These reports will be madevout soon after the observer lands, while
what has happened during the flight is fresh in his mind, and should
contain the following information: _
(a) Fall of the rounds as observed. This is a check on any mistake
in signaling observations.
(b) An' explanation of any difficulties the observer may have had
to contend with.
(c) A rough sketch of the subsquare, showing the position of the
battery with the fall of the rounds marked on it.
((1) If any direct hits were obtained on hostile guns.
These reports will be sent to batteries through their brigade head-
quarters.
If possible, the observer should go and see the battery commander
as soon as a shoot is over, especially in cases of failure. If he can not
do so, he should himself speak to the battery on the telephone.
47. Squadron records—The first duty of pilots and observers on
returning from artillery work is to enter the result of their flight and
all information obtained on a form provided for the purpose. (A
suitable form is shown in Appendix II.) Extracts from this form
will be entered by the squadron recording officer in the squadron
record book and in a target book kept for the purpose. Each hostile
battery is given one or more pages, and all information concerning
the battery is entered under various headings.
Batteries are classed “A,” “ B,” or “ G, ” according to the accuracy
with which their positions are located.
Those classed “A”- or “B” will be given a number by the Army
for convenience of reference and use as a target call in the case of pre-
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. ~ 89
arranged shoots, and will be marked on a photograph. A record of
the number of the photograph or photographs on which each battery
will be found will be made in the target book.
48. Reports to corps artillery—When the tactical situation permits,
daily reports ( see Appendix III) will be sent by the squadron to gen-
eral officer commanding royal artillery of the corps, brigadier general
commanding corps heavy artillery, and corps wing headquarters.
These reports show under the heading “Active hostile batteries”
all batteries seen active during the day, including batteries already
known and numbered and those newly found or verified. Batteries
will be classified “A,” “B,” or “ ‘,” as explained above.
Under the heading “Hostile battery positions reconnoitered " is
given any information obtained concerning emplacements from
which flashes have not been seen.
49. Reports from other sources—Artillery observation posts, balloon
and field survey companies, and sound-ranging sections furnish corps _
artillery and corps heavy artillery headquarters with a similar list
of active batteries located by them during the day. These batteries,
if their positions are not already accurately located, should be recon-
noitered and verified by the squadron concerned at the first oppor-
tunity.
50. Weekly Z':Ists.——Each squadron will send to wing headquarters
a weekly list of all hostile batteries located in the corps area. All
known batteries will be included in this list, which will show the
time and date on which each battery was last seen active. In the
case of a battery classed “A ” the coordinates of each gun should be
given, and in the ease of a battery classed “B ” the coordinates of each
end of the position.
The following should be noted:
(1) Whether the hostile battery has been heavily shelled by us.
(ii) Whether it is thought that the hostile battery is still active.
(iii) Whether it is thought that the hostile battery has moved,
stating probable new position, if possible.
Any information which may help artillery commanders to decide
how best to engage the hostile battery should be added.
Combined lists showing the active hostile batteries located up to
date should be compiled and circulated weekly by the field-survey
company.
The officers of the field-survey company charged with making up
the list should be in very close touch with squadrons, royal flying
corps, and should take every opportunity of questioning pilots and
observers.
90 _ FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
COOPERATION BETWEEN ARTILLERY AND BALLOONS.
51. GeneraL—Balloon companies are allotted to corps and provide a
further means of aerial observation in addition to the corps squadron.
The cooperation between the corps artillery, the squadron, and the
’"balloon company must be very close, and the allocation of work
between the squadron and the balloon company must be carefully
thought out, so that each is allotted the task most suitable to it.
Whenever possible, the officers commanding the corps squadrons and
the corps balloons should meet the general officer commanding royal
artillery of the corps the previous evening to arrange the work for
the succeeding day.
52. Employment of balloons—Balloons, owing to their vulner-
ability to artillery fire, are forced to observe at long range. Com-
pared with aeroplanes, therefore, they obtain less direct observa-
tion, and their view may be hampered by dead ground, especially
at long ranges. On the other hand, they enjoy better facilities for
keeping a particular area of ground under continuous observation,
the observer can use glasses of considerable power, and the means of
communication by direct telephone to the artillery are superior.
The work most suitable to balloons is consequently—
(a') Spotting the flashes of hostile guns.
(b) Reporting on the direction, intensity, and results of hostile
bombardment, which can be carried out, to a certain extent, by
night as well as by day.
(0) Observation of fire at close and medium ranges.
(d) Observation of the enemy’s defenses, location of machine
guns, etc.
(e) Observation of movements on roads and railways.
When conditions are favorable, observation of fire can be carried
out by balloons at long ranges in open country, but experienced
observers are necessary.
53. Spotting flashes—Owing to the facility with which an area can
be kept under observation, the corps balloons should, during a battle,
be able to keep the artillery commander constantly informed as to
the activity of the enemy’s batteries. The whole area allotted to
each balloon must be watched, working from one flank to the other,
and the fact of any hostile battery opening or ceasing fire must be
reported at once to the artillery commander. Hostile active batter-
ies sent down by aeroplane under the zone call and taken in by the
balloon wireless station must be reported at once to the observer
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 91
in the balloon. If there are two observers in the balloon. one can
be employed to report on the enemy’s artillery as above, while the
second observes for our own batteries.
54. Hostile bombardments.-—Balloons, owing to their position. are
suitably placed to observe hostile bombardments and barrage fire,
and report on their intensity and the area bombarded. They can
sometimes. in addition, observe the connection between the flashe;
of the enemy’s guns and the fall of their shell. Such information
is of value to the artillery during trench warfare, since it enables
the arcs of fire of the enemy’s batteries to be established approxi-
mately. This in its turn enables counter-battery fire to be directed
onto the most likely hostile batteries when any particular area is
bombarded by the enemy subsequently, or when neutralization is
required in connection with an operation in a particular area.
55. Observation of fire—Balloons may be used to observe fire on-—
(a) Trenches (except the front system where close to our'own
line).
(1)) Strong points, villages, etc.
(0) Batteries.
Observation of fire on trenches is usually for registration purposes
previous to a bombardment. As it will not be possible to correct
the fire during the bombardment the greatest accuracy is essential.
In ground which has been much out up the enemy’s trenches are
usually very difficult to locate from a distance except when seen in
enfilade, and this difficulty must be borne in mind when allotting
targets to balloons.
Observation from balloons is very dependent on the weather;
ground mists, haze, and the position of the sun affect visibility to a
very large extent. It is preferable, therefore, when prearranging
shoots, to give the balloon observer a list of the targets the artillery
wish to engage, and to leave it to him to decide, according to condi-
tions after ascent, which targets can be engaged with a prospect of
success and the order in which to engage them.
In addition to prearranged shoots on known targets, the procedure
for engaging batteries seen active and other fleeting targets must be
decided by corps artillery commanders. Certain batteries can be
placed at the direct call of the balloon when the latter observes a
target, or a battery can be detailed by the artillery commander con-
cerned on receipt of a report by telephone from the balloon. The
former system tends to greater speed in the case of fleeting targets and
to closer touch between batteries and observers. Such batteries
should have a direct telephone line to the balloon, if possible.
92 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
56. Ranging—Before a target is engaged the observer will send the
following information to the battery:
(a) The position and height of the balloon.
(b) The direction and strength of the wind.
(c) The position and nature of the target, if the shoot has not been
prearranged .
The battery will inform the observer of the nature of projectile and
fuse to be used and the approximate time of flight.
The observer will inform the battery when he is ready to observe.
Before firing each round “Stand by” will be sent to the balloon.
The observer will then give “Ready.” As soon as “Ready" is
received by the battery, but not before, the gun will be fired at once.
As the gun is fired, “No. —— fired” will be sent to the balloon.
When ranging, the battery commander must aim at obtaining a
bracket on the line BALLOON—TARGET. The closer the line BAL—
LOON—TARGET approximates to the line BATTERY—TARGET the
easier will be the ranging, as the error of the gun is much less for line
than for range.
The observer will observe on the line BALLOON—TARGET, giving
observations as follows:
(a) Right or left—The amount in degrees and minutes should be
sent.
(b) Line and short or line and over.
(0) Unobserved.
If more than 300 yards short or over the observation should be “far
short” or “far over.”
These observations may be qualified somewhat as follows:
Smoke rising behind house 1 degree right.
The observation short or over will not be given until the burst is
on the line BALLOON—TARGET, unless the observer is perfectly con-
fident that the round is short or over owing to its having fallen at
some point easily recognizable on the map.
With time-shrapnel a burst in air above the line of sight BALLOON—
TARGET is given as “Air Over,” and a burst in air below the line of
sight BALLOON—TARGET is given “Air Short.” This enables the
battery commander to find both his range and fuse.
The battery commander, and not the observer, is the judge of
when the range and fuse have been found with sufficient accuracy
to warrant fire for effect, or a change to another target if registration
is in progress.
It may sometimes be possible to arrange for cross observation on a
target from two balloons. Careful arrangement of communications
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 93
is necessary to insure that the observations from each balloon refer
always to the same round, and the balloons should be in direct com-
munication with one another. Each balloon sends down observa-
tions with regard to line only, giving the angular distance right or
left of the line BALLOON—TARGET. The position of the round is
plotted at the battery.
57. Communications—In order to get full value from balloon ob-
servation it is essential that a good system of ground communication
is established. Each balloon must have communication by tele-
phone with artillery group headquarters, and through them with all
batteries for which it observes. When possible, however, it is
desirable that balloons should have their own system of communica-
tion direct with batteries in addition, in order to avoid frequent
interruption during a shoot. This communication can be suitably
arranged by establishing a forward balloon exchange in the area of
the battery positions, with a double line back to the balloon exchange
and single lines to the batteries with which the balloon works.
Direct communication with the sound ranging section, if such
exists, is of considerable value. .
Each balloon should have a telephone exchange on the ground
where an officer must always be on duty when the balloon is up.
He will be responsible that the necessary telephone communica-
tion is established in good time in the case of prearranged shoots, that
all targets sent down by the observer are passed on at once to the
group headquarters or battery concerned together with all necessary
information, and also that instructions received from the artillery
are passed on to the observer.
58. Records—The following, with which all officers must be con-
versant, will be kept in the exchange:
(a) A diagram of the telephone communications of the balloon.
(b) A map showing the positions of all batteries for which the bal-
loon may have to observe, together with their arcs of fire.
(0) A map showing the enemy defenses and the position of all
accurately located hostile batteries, with their arcs of fire if known.
Panoramic and aeroplane photographs of the latter will also be
kept in the exchange.
Section record books and target books will be kept as in the case of
aeroplane squadrons (see par. 47), and similar reports will be ren~
dered (see par. 49).
94 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
DUTIES OF PILOTS AND OBSERVERS AND OF RECORDING
OFFICERS.
59. Artillery patrol wort—Guns in movement are usually easy to
find, as little opportunity for concealing them exists when brought
into action suddenly. Where guns are difficult to find the teams
near at hand may sometimes be visible.
On the other hand, the guns of a defensive line are difficult to
locate. One of the most diflicult tasks required of air observers is
that of spotting hostile batteries firing on a bright day, locating them
with absolute accuracy, ascertaining whether they are guns or
howitzers, whether they are dummy or real, and discovering where
their shells are falling. A careful study of the vertical and oblique
photographs available is of great assistance.
Emplacements are hidden away under trees and in orchards and
gardens, and the teams are hidden well in rear. Alternative em-
placements are almost invariably arranged and it is necessary to
fly directly above them to tell whether they are occupied or not.
Batteries seldom show signs of life when an aeroplane is overhead,
except during a battle. Overhead cover can generally’ be noted
by the observer if he knows the position of the battery beforehand,
but the only way he can tell with certainty whether the emplace-
ments are occupied is by seeing the guns actually firing or men
going in or out.
Flashes are a valuable guide, but care must be taken to distin-
guish between real and dummy flashes. The best way is to observe
whether the fall of shell in our lines follows shortly on the flashes
seen. The greatest care must be taken to locate flashes accurately,
checking the location by further observation. \
Field guns have a yellowish white flash which gives a decided
kick forward. Small howitzers have rather a larger and yellower
flash than the field gun, followed by a little puff of smoke. Large
howitzers have a larger and redder flash than the smaller ones, and
there is quite a big puff of yellow smoke succeeding the flash, which
appears some two feet above it.
Batteries sometimes use a flash reducer. The effect on the flash
is as follows: The flash is red and appears a little in front of the
muzzle of the gun, followed by a thin puff of smoke. This is very
apt to be taken for a dummy flash. Big flashes should be mistrusted,
especially if followed by smoke.
Dummy flashes look about the same in color as gun flashes, but
do not have the kick forward which distinguishes the latter.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 95
When guns are seen in the open the observer must note whether
there are any signs of personnel or wheel tracks in the vicinity;
otherwise they may be dummies.
Wheel tracks show up well on stubble, plow, and snow, but do
not show up well in wet weather. Tracks of men going to and from
batteries show up well on grass, cultivation, and snow, and are a
good indication.
Dummy gun pits are often made behind the guns; any cover,
such as hedges in front of pits seen in the open, should, therefore, be
carefully searched. Particular attention should be paid to cover
close to roads.
Before making a gun reconnaissance of an unfamiliar area,
observers must study the map carefully for woods and depressions
behind or in which howitzers are likely to be placed.
Observers must know the calls and positions of all located batteries,
and must be given all available information regarding them. It will
be of assistance if artillery staffs can indicate the localities where
hostile batteries, which are unlocated, are suspected.
The observer must search these areas carefully from overhead,
and also watch for flashes from them when flying low behind our
own lines. The latter method is often successful when the former
fails.
Gun pits will be marked on a special squared artillery map by a
circle showing the number of pits in it and giving the direction in
which they face, thus:


A note will be made whenever possible as to whether gun pits
previously reported are occupied or not. Unless an observer is
quite sure that gun pits are occupied, he will report them as “ Appar-
ently occupied.” It is a good plan to turn suddenly after passing
over a suspected area, as guns often cease firing when an aeroplane
approaches. Shelling by either side will be noted and its locality
and intensity accurately reported.
Observers on artillery patrol must make every effort to secure
information regarding new trenches and works of every description,
roads or railways and movements on them, collections of transport
and material, billets, etc.
96 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
The information so collected is reported to the intelligence branch
of the corps staff, and, if the work is well done, it should reduce the
amount of corps reconnaissance required.
60. Work on returning from artillery patrol—Immediately on re-
turning from artillery patrol the observer must write a summary of
the information obtained on a form provided for the purpose. (See
par. 47.)
61. Observation of _fire.——-Accurate observation of fire can only be
carried out from a position as nearly as possible directly over the
target.
Observers must pay particular attention to the following points:
A. Wireless.—
(i) No code signals other than those authorized must be used.
(ii) Long messages which may jamb other machines must be
avoided.
- (iii) Each signal should be sent twice clearly and crisply, particu-
lar attention being paid to correct formation of letters. After an
interval of 10 seconds the signal should be sent twice again, and no
more. '
Slow drawling signals are very hard to read through other and
crisper signals. They are more easily jambed and at the same time
cause jambing. .
(iv) The personal call of the pilot or observer must only be used
when calling up the battery until the first round is fired, when call-
ing up for each fresh target, and when sending C I.
B. Gunnery.—
(i) Observers must make themselves acquainted with the charac-
teristics of the various guns and howitzers in use, e. g., nature of
burst, time of flight at various ranges, projectiles used.
(ii) Observers must study the arcs of fire of the batteries with
which they work, and must avoid asking batteries to fire outside
their are or beyond their range. Corps artillery headquarters should
furnish the corps squadron with maps showing the arcs of fire of the
batteries detailed to work direct with aeroplanes.
(iii) If the observer has to break off a shoot, he must send CI, and
explain fully after landing. The battery may be able to
continue the shoot with balloon observation.
62. Accuracy.-—The basis of successful cooperation between air-
craft and artillery is mutual confidence. It is therefore the duty of
every pilot and observer to be scrupulously careful as regards the
accuracy of his work and the reliability of his reports. A well de-
fined line must be drawn between what is certain and what is only
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 9'7
surmised; and when ranging, above all, corrections must never be
given unless the burst is seen and accurately located. Accuracy
must not be sacrificed to speed, and if mistakes are made they must
be admitted at once.
Pilots and observers must take every opportunity of visiting the
batteries with which they work. It is only by watching batteries
shooting with aeroplane observation that the observer can realize
the‘ difficulties and delays with which the artillery have to compete.
Moreover, a report on the day’s work, made verbally, and followed
by discussion of any points that require elucidation, will do much
to promote mutual confidence.
63. Coordination of artillery work—The chief work of the squadron
recording officer is the coordination of the artillery work. The fol-
lowing are some of his duties:
(i) To compile the program of prearranged shoots, and ensure that
it is made known to all concerned.
(ii) To notify other squadrons when shoots are being carried out
in their counter-battery area.
(iii) To watch the number of machines using wireless on the squad-
ron front, and to see that it is not excessive at any one time.
(iv) To warn batteries when an aeroplane is going up to work with
them, and .to inform them at once of any postponement of prear-
ranged wo‘rk, whatever the cause.
(v) To keep observers informed of any change in the batteries al-
lotted to work direct with aeroplanes.
(vi) To keep observers fully supplied with the latest information
concerning the enemy’s positions, specially his artillery.
(vii) To give observers, before they leave the ground, the latest
information as to the enemy’s batteries reported active, and the po-
sition of our own troops.
(viii) To telephone all information received from the air to corps
and artillery headquarters. ‘
(ix) To. interrogate observers on landing.
98508°-—17—-—-7
as FIELD ARTITLLERY NOTES.
APPENDIX I.
EXAMPLE 1.——Prearranged registration on trenches working with two
batteries.
8-INC-H HOWITZER BATTERY AND 9.2-INCH HOWITZER BATTERY.
Squadron call, D. 8-inch battery calLnP. 9.2-inch battery call, M. Observer's
. ca , 15. "
8-inch_battery has two targets to range on and wishes to register one gun on each.
Target calls, P1—P2.
9.2-inch battery has two targets to register and wishes to register two guns on each
target. Target calls, M1—M2.
N . 'Bl.—0nly an experienced observer can undertake three targets at once, as in this
examp e.

Call. Signal. Remarks.
g {I """"" ' ' 3 }Both batteries put out K.
D 15 P .......... - . T
D 15 M . . . . . . . . _ . . T
D 15 P .......... .. A P1 P2 P puts out A.
D 15 P . . . . . . . . . . . . T _
11; Ifi - - - . -- - - -- - ATMI M Puts out L- Guns being previously laid,
D 15 M ......... __ M1 G MfiresNo.1gun.
D M . . . . . . . . . . . A2
D M ......... _ _ M fires No. 2 gun.
D M _ _ _ _ _ . _ . _ . - 4 .
D 15 P . . . . . . . . . . -. A P1 P2 .
D 15 P .......... . - KQ P puts out L.
D 15 P .......... _ . T s
D M ......... _ _ G M fires No. 1 gun.
D M . = . . . . . . . . . A3
D15P .......... ._ PIG PfiresNo.1gun.
D P .......... _ _ W Blind round.
D P .......... _ _ P2 G P fires No. 2 gun.
D P _ _ . . _ . _ . . _ - _ B3
D M . . . . . . . . _ - _ G M 2 gun misfires.
D - M _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ __ W
D M . . . . . . . . . . _ G M fires No. 1 gun.
D M . . . . . . . . . . _ Y8
D P . . _ . . . . . . . . . P1 G P fires No. 1 gun,
D P __________ _ _ Z4
D - G MfiresNo.2gun.
D M . . . . _ . _ . . _ - Z3
D P .......... _ _ P2 G P fires No.2 gun.
D P .......... - . Y2
D M . . . . . _ . _ . _ _ G M fires No. 1 gun
D M . . . . . . . . . . _ Y9
D P . . . . . . . . . . _ . P1 G P1 misfires.
D P . . . . . . _ . . . _ _ P W
D P .......... - - P2 G Gun not ready.
D P . . . . . _ . . . . - . W
D M . . . _ . . _ _ _ _ _ G M fires No. 2 gun.
D M _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ OK
D P . . . . . . . . . . . . P1 G P1 fires.
D 1’ __________ _ . A 3
D M _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ _ _ G ‘ M fires No. 1 gun.
D M . . . . . . _ _ _ _ - Y3
D l’ .......... . - P2 G P2 fires.
D I’ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Y8
D M . . . . _ . . _ _ . . G M fires No. 2 gun.
D M . . . . . . _ . _ . _ Y9
D ' l’ . . . . . . _ _ _ . . _ P1 G P1 fires.

FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. _ 99
EXAMPLE 1'.—Prearranged registration on trenches working with two
batteries—Continued.
8-INCH HOWITZER BATTERY AND 9.2-INCH HOWITZE-R BATTERY,
Squadron call, D. 8-inch battery call,
llP. 9.2-inch battery call, M. 0bserver’s
15.




Call. Signal. Remarks.
ii i. """""" " ‘if’ r. 1
......... .. *0 re .
D M . . . . . . . . . . . ply
D M . . . . . . . . . -. No re .
D M.- - -\V p y
D P . . . . . . . . . . . - P2 G P 2 fires.
D P .......... . . OK
D M-. . G No reply.
D M .......... - . W
D M. .. G No reply.
D M... W
Machine flies back to see ground signals
and finds LX II.
D M.. . T
D M- . A M2 M puts out L.
D M-. _ 'I‘
D P . . . . . . . . - . - . P1 G P l fires.
% ii """"" " MZZQC M N
. 1 res o. 1 .
n M.. 23 gun
D P .......... .. P2 G No reply—registration finished.
D P .......... - . P2 W
D P _ _ . . . . . . . . . . P1 G P 1 fires.
D P . . . . . . . . . . . . A3
D M. G M fires No. 2 gun.
D A8
D G MfiresNo.1gun.
D Z3
D P . . . . . . . . . . - . P2 G No reply. /
D P . . . . . . . . . . . - P2 W
D P _ . . . . . . . . . .. Pl G P 1 fires.
D P .......... - . Y3
D P .......... -. RUF P2 P puts out N.
D P .......... .. T
D M.. G M fires No. 2 gun.
D Y9
D M.... G M fires No. 1 gun.
D OK
D P .......... . . P1 G P 1 fires.
D P .......... -. Y8
D M. .. G M fires N0. 2 gun.
D M Z!)
D M. .. G M fires N o. 1 gun.
D M. .. YR
D P .......... . . P1 G No reply.
D P .......... .. PI W '
D P .......... . . Pl G No reply.
D P .......... - . PI W
D P .......... . - RUF Flies back over battery to see signals. '
T put out.
D P .......... . . T
g if """"" " (ii M fir N 2
.......... . . es 0. gm.
D . Z3
D M.-... G
No reply—registration finished with No. 1
gun.
ioo “ Friars) 'ARTILLERY NOTES.
EXAMPLE 1.——Prearranged registration on trenches working 'with two
_ batteries—Continued.
8-INCH H OWITZER BATTERY AND 9.2-INCH HOWITZER BATTERY.
Squadron call, 1). 8-inch battery calLHPis 9.2-inch battery call, u. Observer’s
ca .
,
Call. Signal. Remarks.
D W
D G No reply.
D M W
Ila—U]; Sends down a few area calls on active
NA NF N14a73 batteries during pause in shoot.
D M.... G MfiresNo.2gun.
D M .......... -- Y3
D M .......... - - G N 0 reply.
D M.... W
NA NF N14a73
NB NF N5d54
D M .......... -. G N 0 reply.
D M... - -. W
D G No reply.
D M.... W -
D M.... G No reply—observer flies back over M and
finds T out.‘
D M. - W
D 15 M .......... .. T
D 15 141.. CI
EXAMPLE II.—Imprompta shoot on actwe hostile battery.
WITH ANY TYPE OF GUN.
Squadron call, D. Observer’s call, 1. Battery call, K. _
_ Squadron,
T516 observer’s -
mm and Signal. Remarks.
mes battery
' call.
0 .......... .. MA MQNF Sent a few times to indicate that observer is
M15d54 going to range a particular battery on target.
1 D 1 K..- . B Repeated until K put out.
2 D 1 K.... T Acknowledge K.
D 1 K.... ANF Fput out.
M15d54 .
3 D 1 K. '1‘ V put out until us are laid; then L put out.
6 D 1 K T Aeroplane then eaves battery and prepares to
observe flying near target.
8 D 1 K . G Battery fires 1 gun.
D K . W Unobserved; round rather wide; observer saw
a little smoke drifting away. but too late to
give accurate correction. He now knows
where to e set the next.
D . . G Battery fires 0. 2 un.
10 D K... 03 Burst being outsi e B circle, observer gives
time for correction to be put on.

FIELD ARTILLEBY ‘horns.
101
EXAMPLE II.- —Impromptu shoot on active hostile battery—Contd.
- WITH ANY TYPE OF GUN.
Squat ron call, D.
Observer's call, 1.
Battery call, K.

- Squadron
T516 observers
min and Signal. Remarks.
' ' battery
utes. ‘
call.
12 D 1.‘. .. - G Battery fires No. 3 gun.
D K.- Y4
13 D K -- G Battery fires No. 4 gun.
D K. -. A4
14 D K-- G Battery fires No. 1 gun.
D K- Z4
15 D K . - G Battery fires No. 2 gun.
D K-- C8
16 D K-- G No.3gunmisfires.
D K-- . W
D K. _ G No. 4 gun fires.
‘ D K. Z4
17 D K. G No. 1 gun fires.
D K.- A3 a
17.} D K-- G No. 2 gun fires.
D K- - - Z4
18 D K- G No. 3 gun'fires.
D K.-- - Y8
D K---- G No.4gunfires.
D K.-- A7 '
19 D K. - G Battery opens battery fire at 2 seconds interval.
20 D . MOK Obseryer sees 3 guns fire, and gives mostly cor-
rections.
21 D K--- G
D K- - MOK Observer sees that only 3 guns fire and sees 3
' D K.--- Y4 Z8 OK bursts. He first gives mostly corrections,
followed by corrections for each burst.
22.1; D K..-- G
D K-- - MY8
24 D K.--- G
MY8
Third C7 Third gun wide; separate correction sent for .
wide round.
25 D G
D MOK
Third B8
26 D K---- G
D K--- . M29
D OK Y10
A8 Y7
28 D K. G
D K-- - MOK
Third Y3
29 D K. . GO



Observer, having other work to do, asks battery
to continue firing in its own time. Observer ‘
1s then free to commence another shoot, but
should watch old_ target from time to time to
see that ‘the fire is still efiective, sending cor-
rections 1f necessary.

‘1'02 man "Amritsar - Norris.
EXAMPLE III.——Prearranged shoot on hostile battery for destruction.
_ Squadron call, L.' Observer’s call, 1.
Battery call, R (9.2-inch howitzers). Target call, R1.

- Squadron, '
Tilnme observer's l _ ,
min_ and Signal. Remarks.
mes battery :
' call. 1
0 L1 R . . _ B Repeated until K put out.
1 L1 R . . - - .; T Acknowledge K.
L1 R. . - . .l A R1 Stand by for prearranged target, 1. e., hostile battery.
2 L1 R. . . ..| T L acknowledged. 1
4 1111 R - _ . . 1%} Battery fires N o. 1 gun. Target N o. 2 emplacement.
5 . . . - .K 9
L PM-..) G No.2gun fires‘.
6 L n .... .! A2
L G No.3misfires.
7 L R. w
L G No.4fires.
8 L R. - . . . Z8
L G No.1fires.
9 L R. . . Y2
L G No.2fires.
10 L R . .. . . Z6 0. K., No. 3. Observations sent with reference to
N o. 2 emplacement.
L G No.3fires.
11 L R - . . - . OK This of course refers to N o. 2 emplacement.
L G No.4fires.
12 L R . .- . . Y3


and so on, until battery commander is satisfied that each gun is
ranged. He then puts out V and fires for effect with all four guns at
No. 2 hostile emplacement. The observer does not see the V, but
on sending the next G sees four-rounds bursting near-the target in
rapid succession. He realizes that the battery is firing for effect
and sends mostly corrections. When the observer is satisfied that
sufficient effect has been obtained on No. 2 hostile emplacement
he switches on to No. 3 emplacement, using the signal SW and the
clock code. Fire for effect is opened forthwith on No. 3 emplace-
ment, then on No. 4, and finally on No. 1.
FIELD
103
ARTILLERY NOTES.'
a APPENDIX IL-Specimenformfor pilot’s and obsereer’s report.


No. Squadron, R.F.C. Date.
1 Hour of— ,
'l‘y e and Pilot and ' ,
nulinber. observer. But-‘7' Remarks.
Start. Return.




REPORT ON FLASHES SEEN OR RECONNAISSANCE OF A HOSTILE

_.BATTERY POSITION.
. Flashes seen at . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . -

. No. of flashes seen ................. . .

. Time seen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . .

scorer—-
. Accuracy. ......................... - .

. Area shelled or direction of flashes. . .

. Action taken by observer, and re—
sults observed ................... . .


GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF POSITION.

. (a) Coordinates of tanks ........... ..

(1)) Nature of tracks, dugouts,
camouflage, signs of occupa-
tion, etc ...................... . .

8.
Registered N o. in A.H.B. list ...... . -
To be filled in by recording officer.

9.
Photo Nos ......................... _ .

10. Previous reports .................. . .


REPORT ON ARTILLERY OBSERVATION.

1. 2.

. Battery ranged with ............... - .

. Nature of target .................... . .
. , . - . --

. Coordinates of target .............. ..


CI
. N o. of single rounds observed. ..... _ -
. Results of single rounds observed - . - .
. Whether battery fired for efieet .... . .
----- -- I
----- _- f

. Approximate N o. of rounds fired.- . . .
. ~ ~ n . --

eoqcz
. Results of fire for effect ............. . .

9.
Sheets observed by pilot or observer .
a ¢ Q Q o .-


Date . . . . . ..
Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX III.——Specimen of daily report.
No. 1 SQUADRON, ROYAL FLYING CORPS.



E; . >3
3; Coordi- _ g T e of d
o mates of . Description. *5 32136,} stiilrégn Engaged by-—- Q5 Result and remarks.
position. 175 g ‘ B ' 0 ‘ <# B
HOSTILE BATTERY POSITIONS ENGAGED 0R POINTS REGISTERED.
‘p. m. _ _ _
53 .................................................... .. 24th siege ....... .. 1. 10 5 rpungls Y, shoot stopped owing to
c on s.
36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21st heavies ..... .. 3 1 O. K. Several Ys. Big explosion
' behind northern pit.
3 trench points ............ “I ...................... .. lli‘thkbattery, R. 3.15 Registration successful.
ACTIVE HOSTILE BATTERIES.
a. m. _ a. m. .
11.30 A 12 b 42 24 2 hows. in pits behind A Hows. sheling K 33d siege . . . . . . . . .. 11.50 20. Ks, on pit at A 12 b 42. 4 Ys
houses. 15 d. on A 12 b 53.
p. m. .
2.30 B 19 d 38 55 4lguns .................... .. C Apparently firing .................. ..
from houses. ,
p. m. ,
3. 10 S 30 b 30 44 4 guns along hedge ........ .. B Probably 77-min. 23d heavies . . . . . .. 3.30 Several Z’s, battery stopped firing.
to guns. Shoot interfered with by H. A. ' ,
S 30 B 33
HOSTILE BATTERY POSITIONS RECONNOITERED.
Date . . . . . ..
Signature . . . . . . . . . . . .
701
‘SE-‘LON; L'E'L'I'I'IILHV (I'IEIIJ
VII—INSTRUCTIONS FOR AERIAL OBSERVATION IN LIAISON
WITH THE ARTILLERY.
_._-_I
Many targets are hidden from terrestrial observers. For this reason
the aeroplane and the balloon are indispensable auxiliaries to the
artillery.
The present instructions rescind and replace previous instructions
on the same subject. They are intended to furnish information
covering:
1. The conditions under which aerial observations is used with
artillery.
2. The missions which may be fulfilled.
3. The duties of the personnel concerned.
Annex I establishes rules for the observation and conduct of fire
by aeroplanes and balloons, with a note on the designation of obj ec-
tives.
Annex II gives codes for the transmission of signals.
Annex III gives in a general way models of forms for various rec-
ords which must be kept.
(TRANsLA'roR’s Nora—Annex I and II are necessarily given in
an abridged form.)
Part I.—-CONDITION.S GOVERNING THE EMPLOYMENT OF
AERIAL OBSERVATION IN LIAISON WITH ARTILLERY.
1. Under good atmospheric conditions the aeroplane can give rapid,
accurate, and, if necessary, vertical observation even on the most
distant targets. It makes it possible to observe not only the sense
of salvos but also the amount of the observed error.
2. The aeroplane signals to the ground by means of wireless teleg-
raphy, by projectors, by dropped written messages, or by signal
lights. Wireless telegraphy is the best method. A conventional
code, Morse system, permits the observer to report his presence, to
designate targets, to report results of fire, and to give all required
information concerning friendly troops of the movements of the
enemy. This information is received at the receiving stations de—
scribed in paragraphs 8_and 11.
105
106 ' FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
3. The receiving stations can, by means of panels of white cloth
or projectors, give the aeroplane a limited number of simple indica-
tions concerning the conduct of fire. There are in addition a few
receiving sets" on aeroplanes which can be used with transmitting
sets at receiving stations near important headquarters.
4. Use of wireless teZcgraphy—The use of wireless telegraphy has
given a tremendous importance to aerial liaison with artillery. On
account of its delicate nature, and the great number of aeroplanes
which necessarily have to work in a restricted zone, strict discipline
and careful organization are necessary to reduce to a minimum the
many chances for con-fusion.
Different aerpplanes are distinguished as follows:
(a) By the “call” adopted for each receiving station.
(b) By the use of varying wave lengths.
(0) By varying the loudness of the emission.
(d) By the use, in certain cases, of watches with colored dials,
which make it possible for neighboring aeroplanes to send their
signals at alternate specified intervals and thus avoid confusing their
signals. This device interferes with the continuity of observation
and should be used only when necessary.
It is important that aeroplanes keep out of neighboring zones and
that they do not come closer than 2 kilometers to their‘ own receiv-
ing stations, except for very important messages. Messages sent
when ‘immediately above the antennae interfere seriously with other
messages.
Technical matters concerning wireless telegraphy are prescribed in
each army and in each army corps by the chief of the radio service
concerned. '
In each army corps designated ofiicers of air squadrons supervise
the wireless telegraph service in their own squadrons and at the
receiving stations. These officers are under the orders of their
squadron commanders and of the chief of the radio service of the
army corps.
5. Projectors—By means of projectors communication can be
established:
(a) When the artillery has no receiving station.
(b) When there are many aeroplanes working in one zone and
interference amongst wireless messages is unavoidable.
(c) When the distance is not too great.
(d) When necessary for neighboring aeroplanes to identify each
other by a simultaneous use of projectors, viz, (1) By the orientations
of sheafs of light, or (2) by the use of a prearranged call.
‘FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 107
6. Dropped written messages—Dropped written messages may be
used to give information concerning targets or the results of fire.
Each message is placed in a small container provided with a small
streamer. They should be dropped from a height not more than 300
meters and as close to the receiving station as possible.
7. Use of signal lights—In principle, signal lights are used only for
communication with the infantry. During the artillery preparation
their use with the artillery may be authorized by proper authority.
A conventional code must be adopted at a preliminary conference,
and only a few simple messages can be sent.
8. Receiving stations—Each artillery command, subcommand, or
group (in certain cases, each battery) is equipped with a receiving
station and equipment. A specially trained officer, called the receiv-
ing officer (ofiZcie-r d’entenne), is provided at each receiving station. He
transmits by voice or telephone to the unit concerned the inter-
pretation of the information received from the aeroplane. It is an
important and delicate duty, requiring great specialization.
Each receiving station must have direct permanent telephone
connection with each battery. In each artillery command there
must be provision for the use of auxiliary receiving stations when
the antennas at the main receiving stations are broken.
9. Telephones.——Connections are provided as required by the
instructions on liaison dated December 12, 1916. (Submitted by
R. E.,Feb.21, 1917.)
10. Panels—Each receiving station is provided with identifica-
tion panels which enable aeroplanes to distinguish their own receiv-
ing stations. They are especially necessary when the artillery
changes position.
In addition to the identification panels, window-shutter panels
(panneaux a persiennes) are provided for use with the Morse code.
All panels are transported by the artillery units to which they
are issued.
11. Receiving stations—The use of receiving stations varies with
the tactical situation as follows:
(a) The receiving station of a group or battery acts as a station
for the adjustment of the fire of its own unit.
- (Nora—A “group” corresponds to a field artillery battalion in
the United States service.)
(b) The receiving station of an artillery command or subcom-
mand acts as a post of commandant.
The aeroplane asks such stations for authority to adjust on targets
which appear in the zone and receives from such stations the orders
108 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. '
of the artillery commander. In the case‘ of special groups or bat-
teries which have been given particular missions, the aeroplane
consults the groups or battery direct without the intervention of the
artillery commander. '
i (c) The receiving station of a group acts as a fire-control station.
It follows the work of the aeroplanes of the artillery command as
well as that of the infantry aeroplanes operating in the same zone
in order to gather all important useful information. , q
(d) Supervising receiving stations of each army corps are-placed
near the corps headquarters or else at artillery headquarters. They
should in general receive messages from all the aeroplanes of the
army corps or at least from all those having .a general mission,
such as supervising the artillery, accompanying the infantry, or
operating with the higher command. In this way they receive
and distribute all information sent in by the aeroplanes. Whenever
it is evident that calls fromaeroplanes are being disregarded or not
being heard, supervising receiving stations will notify subordinate
receiving stations. ‘
(e) Receiving stations at air squadrons: Each air squadron has a
receiving station by which the emissions of aeroplanes may be
verified at the moment of departure, the work of the aeroplanes at
the front followed, and relief of aeroplanes requiring it may be fur-
nished.
12. The artillery commander, after conference With the air com-
mander and the chief of the radio service of the army corps, or the
army, fixes the conditions governing the work of the personnel at
receiving stations.
At certain times, particularly during an action or in a war move-
ment, the artillery commander will provide for uninterrupted lis-
tening service at receiving stations in order that all aeroplanes call”
ing the artillery command or subcommand may be put in communi~
cation at once. The complete liaison is the duty of the receiving
officer (officier d’antenne). He should study it with care and be
held responsible for the proper working of all means of communica-
tion (telephone, optical telegraph, wireless telegraph, messengers,
etc). ‘
13. The signal codes for wireless telegraphy, for projectors, for
identification panels and a model for dropped written messages will
be found in Annex II.
(TRANSLATOR’s Nora—Annex II. is necessarily given in an
abridged form.)
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 109
BALLOON.
14. Balloons usually observe at from 1,000 to 1,500 meters, never
above 2,000. These altitudes must be reduced in ‘strong winds.
Balloons with two baskets can carry two observers with separate
telephone connection.
15. On account of its vulnerability, the balloon must keep at a
long distance from the enemy, not less than 9,000 to 10,000 meters
when ascensions, descensions, etc., have to be made. Once in the
air it can be carried on the winch to within 6,000 or 7,000 meters.
16. There are always portions of the terrain hidden from the
balloon observer. Such dead spaces will be marked on the map
and furnished to the artillery commands.
17 . On account of the delay involved in changing observers, dur-
ing action an observer must remain up all day.
18. The telephone is depended upon for communications. The
necessary lines are shown in the Instructions on Liaison, dated
December 12, 1916, submitted by R. E., February 21, 1916.
In addition, each balloon company is furnished with a wireless
telegraph sending set with which information received from the
balloon may be sent to the higher command and the artillery groups
in cases in which the telephone connection is interrupted.
19. Mobilitg/.—-When the way is not blocked ‘by trees, wires, etc.,
balloons can be easily moved without deflation or even when in
the air.
Part II.—ARTILLERY MISSIONS WHICH AERIAL OBSERVA-
- TION CAN ASSIST.
20. Such missions are:
Artillery information covering enemy works in a sector.
Observation of enemy activity in a sector.
Liaison with other arms.
Observation and adjustment of artillery fire.
21. Artillery "information service—This consists in obtaining all
possible information concerning enemy works so that the following
targets may be located:
Posts of commandant, machine-gun emplacements, battery
positions, communication trrenches, etc. Photographs, inter-
preted by specialists, are superior to information furnished by the
observer himself. After details have been located in photographs,
however, a second personal reconnaissance, made with high-powered
field glasses, will often be of value.
110 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
22. All aerial information gained by an aero squadron is con-
solidated by the information officer of the squadron who commu~
nicates it at once to the artillery information officer (S. R. A.—
Service .Renseignements d’Artillerie). In a similar manner the
artillery information ofiicer of a command transmits all his informa-
tion to the air service.
Targets are identified by giving their coordinates. Each. enemy.
battery thus identified should be described on its ‘own information
card. (See Annex I.)
From photographs, the compiled sketches by the air service, the
corps provisional compilations, and the firing maps are made up.
The rapid transmission of these compilations, especially during
an action, is of the greatest importance.
23. The observation service consists in watching a given sector for
the purpose of giving immediate information in regard to active
batteries in order that friendly troops in danger may be warned
and, eventually, the action of friendly troops be observed. _
24. Such service is particularly hard on aeroplane observers for,
on account of the noise of their own motors, they can hear nothing
and must watch uninterruptedly. For this reason, aeroplane
observation is carried on only over terrain hidden from the ballons
or during action.
25. Except in cases of zones defiladed from balloons and for special
missions, aeroplanes will not be used for continual observation
except when no balloons are available.
26. The service of continual watchfulness should be developed.
It is the duty of the aerial observer to call for immediate fire when-
ever he may judge it necessary. It is the duty of the commanding
officer to see that troops cooperate with aerial observers. If pos-
sible, receiving stations will notify aerial observers as to which bat-
tery is going to fire. .
27. Liaison with infantry or cavalry—This is covered by instruc-
tions on liaison, issued on December 12, 1916, and forwarded by
R. 13., February 21, 1916.
28. Observation of fira—This service includes the following:
Fire for adjustment or verification, in order to register the terrain
and prepare for fire for effect.
Fire at a single range and fire of precision for the purpose of neu-
tralizing or destroying the enemy’s works.
Progressive fire opened by shifting a previously established sheaf
of fire in order to neutralize momentarily targets upon which fire of
precision can not be undertaken.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 111
29. The sense and amount of errors in firing can be given only if
each salvo or rafale is fired at the demand of the aerial observer.
For adjustment of fire and for fire for precision the aerial observer is
particularly suitable. He increases the efficiency of fire and saves
ammunition. For searching fire when the aerial observer is not ad-
vised before the firing of each salvo or rafale aerial observation is of
less value. '
30. Aerial observation is limited to three hours at'a time and is
liable to interruptions due to atmospheric conditions or aerial corn-
bats. For this reason battery commanders should fire as rapidly as
their matériel permits without sacrificing accuracy to speed.
31. The balloon which is useful at short or mid ranges as it com-
municates easily with the ground, is also useful for certain adjusting
fire and fire of precision. It is sometimes useful to open fire which
the aeroplane finishes, and inversely to observe fire for effect which
the aeroplane has commenced. -
Rules for the conduct of fire with aerial observers are given in
Annex I.
32. Coordination of service of balloons and aeroplanes—This coor-
dination is realizedas follows:
By a judicious division of duties between aeroplanes and balloons
on the part of the artillery commander. '
By the close association of the two services, intercommunication
by means of documents, plans, photographs, and good telephone
service connecting the aeroplanes and balloons of the same command.
This assurance of this association is the duty of the air commander of
the army. 1
33. Division of duties among aeroplanes—Whenever an aeroplane
can be assigned to each artillery command and the artillery prepa-
ration has been partially made each observer should be given a
definite task of observation of fire in his own zone.
In order to avoid errors, observers who have identified targets
should ordinarily, themselves, be required to adjust fire on the
same targets when possible.
But under certain other. conditions it may be advisable in a large
zone ‘to assign to one aeroplane the supervision and control of search-
ing fire and to others the adjustments and the fires of precision.
34. The relative importance of the different missions assigned to
aeroplanes varies with circumstances and the various phases of the
action. It is indicated by the commanding general.
35. However, in an offensive action against a fortified position
the chief missions to be given to artillery aeroplanes follow one
another as follows:
112 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
(a) Information service and observation service in order to deter-
mine precisely the location of enemy batteries and positions.
(b) Observation for the reservation of the terrain and the adjust-
ment of batteries on the principal targets on which they can fire.
(0) Observation of fire for precision for the destruction of enemy
batteries and defensive positions.
(d) Observation for fire control commencing as early as possible
on the day of the attack.
(6) During the action, neutralization, or destruction of enemy’s
batteries, dispersion of reserves'and reinforcements, and watchful-
ness over well-defined zones for the observation of fire for effect and
for rapid shifts to new targets. On particularly important targets
it may even be necessary to assign such targets to special aeroplanes.
36. Periods of movement—In principle, in periods of movement,
each division is given its zone of march and action. This zone is
explored by aeroplanes.
In accordance with-plans made in advance, they communicate
the information obtained by aerial signal lamps, by signal lights,
or by wireless telegraphy to information centers established succes-
sively along the route of the division according to the orders of the
division commander in such a way that reception shall be continuous.
Such information centers are in communication with the aviation
field by optical telegraph, telephones, wireless telegraphy, pigeons,
areoplanes, and automobiles.
At each information center there must be an officer of the air
service who should. at once select a landing ground easy of access
and near‘the information center. The commanding general at once
details the necessary personnel for the observation and establishes
all means of liaison possible.
The division commander has the artillery commander with him
and successively moves his headquarters from one information
center to another as the advance continues.
The artillery commander makes requests on the air service,
through the information center, for such aeroplanes as he may
require, assigns them to his units, and indicates their missions if
possible. '
Upon leaving the aero park the aeroplanes fly toward the informa-
tion center and at once indicate the groups to which they have been
attached and the targets concerned. The groups reply by displaying
their panels.
' Artillery division and group commanders must establish receiving
stations whether they are needed at once or not. For this purpose
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 113
the wireless telegraphy camions are pushed as far forward as possible.
Landing grounds must be near information centers. The divisional
artillery commander sends the necessary orders to the landing
grounds, and keeps with him a number of observers who utilize
such aeroplanes as come into the landing grounds for the carrying
out of new missions which may be given them. In no case should
lack of landing grounds or telephonic communication interfere with
aerial observation. As the fight develops, conditions more and more
approach those of stabilized or trench warfare.
Part lIL—DUTIES OF PERSONNEL.
37. Efficiency of aerial observation in liaison with artillery depends
upon:
(a) The efficiency of the pilot and of the observer.
(b) The efficiency of the receiving officer (oflicter d’antenne).
(c) The efficiency of commanding oflicers.
38. Aerial observers must be perfect masters of the map of the zone
involved and must know absolutely the position of their own and
hostile batteries and the intentions and dispositions of the command-
ing oflicer. They must frequently consult artillery group and bat-
tery commanders. In addition, both the pilot and the observer
must appreciate the great importance of their mission and be pre-
pared to carry it out if possible in spite of hostile aeroplanes.
39. The receiving ofiicer (ofiict'er d’anten'ne) has a position fully as
important as that of the pilot or the observer. He must be perma-
nently detailed in each command. His'duties are to inspect the
receiving station and all its equipment, and keep it in perfect con-
dition, to interpret and transmit all information received from the
aerial observer, to communicate with him by means'of panels or
other devices, and to classify and record all data useful for his own
and neighboring groups. After orders for an adjustment are received -
he must cooperate with and assist in every way the aerial observer
and the battery commander.
40. The commanding officer fixes the program and announces his
purpose. Based on the information received from the aerial observer
he assigns targets to various groups and batteries. He acts on request
for artillery fire and decides whether such fire shall be fire for pre-
cision or zone fire. He communicates all useful information to
higher authority and keeps in touch with neighboring commands.
He keeps in touch with the infantry advance as reported by the
98508°—-17———-8
114 ‘ FIELD ARTILIJERY NOTES.
aerial observers and takes suitable measures to‘ insure that this
advance is not interfered with by fire of the friendly artillery.
41. It is the duty of battery commanders to deliver regular, accu-
rate and rapid fire at the instant that it is requested by the aerial
observer.
42. Everyone concerned should bear in mind:
(a) That all messages must be brief, and
(b) That the enemy is probably following all emissions of the
Wireless.
43. The aim of instruction should be the development of the
ability of aerial observers to reinforce existing means of communi-
cation, and the cooperation of a great number of aeroplanes, and
balloons on a restricted front. To this end:
(a) Annexes I and II must be strictly followed.
(b) Aerial observers must work precisely so as to reduce the
length of their transmission.
(0) Receiving officers must put out signals quickly.
((1) All should work together in spite of simultaneous emissions,
simultaneous firing of batteries and other characteristics of an in-
tense action. In order to accomplish this, frequent combined
exercises must be held.
44. Such exercises include the following:
Ground exercises between aerial observers and receiving officers,
viz.: Practice in communicating with wireless telegraphy, optical
telegraphy, with panels and with projectors on the ground. For
this purpose sending and receiving instruments must be mounted
at air squadrons so that the work may be carried on in weather too
bad for flying. The exercises should be tried at a time when there
are many wireless sets being used at once.
45. Ground exercises between aerial observers, receiving stations
and battery commanders, viz: The director of the exercise assumes
certain conditions concerning the fall of shots by means of the map
and thus tests the quickness of mind of the observer, the wireless
and telephone service and the cooperation between the receiving
station and the battery. > - ~
46. Exercises in flight to test the use of instruments, viz: The
..
‘ designation of objectives, first with one battery and one aerial
observer and then with several.
47. The foregoing exercises should be repeated under the assumed
conditions of a war of movement. .
FIELD ARTILLERY‘ NOTES. 115
Annex L—RULES FOR THE CONDUCT OF FIRE.
Part I.—Aeroplanes with Light Artillery.
1. Aerial observation permits exact reconnaissance of targets, the
measurements of errors in deflection and range, the observation of
rafales or salvos delivered simultaneously, and the measurement of
their mean error. .
The difficulties include precarious communication, the short time
available for observation, the rapid movement of the aeroplane,
snow, wind, rain, clouds, the sun, reflection on the wings, and the
limited action of the wireless telegraph. All of these difficulties
render aerial observation at times intermittent.
Success implies a close understanding between the observer and
the battery commander, the use of simple means of communication,
and the avoidance of all dialogue. Great latitude should be allowed
the aerial observer in making requests, decisions, etc. The battery
commander should avoid loss of time by being able to adjust quickly
once he has received the proper information.
CONDUCT OF FIRE.
2. In service firing there should always be a preliminary confer-
ence between the observer and the battery commander, but for
practice this conference should frequently be omitted.
Before passing to aerial conduct of fire it is the duty of the battery
commander-—
(a) To adjust the sheaf.
(b) In time fire, to adjust the height of burst just above the
ground. ,
(c) To adjust all his guns for range on an auxiliary target
visible for terrestrial observers.
(d) To establish a direct line of communication to the receiv¢
ing station, avoiding all relays. '
Assuming that this has been done, the aerial observer, after
reaching the required height, signals as follows: '
Observer: Is the battery ready?
Receiving station: The battery is ready.
3. Adjustment of fire—It is assumed that, unless otherwise agreed
upon or requested, all firing shall be by simultaneous battery salvos
adjusted for parallel fire. To vary the distribution, the observer
sends for example:
Front (so many) meters. Sheaf is too wide. 7 -.
For registration on a narrow target, the observer sends, for example:
Concentrate. Fire otherwise good.
116 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
4. Battery salvos are fired with all guns at the same range and as
nearly simultaneously as possible.
5. In principle, the same ammunition which is to be used in fire
for eflect should be used in‘fire for" adjustment; but in some cases
it is desirable to use ‘time shrapnel for preliminary adjustment of the
deflection on account of its greater visibility. If the height of
burst must be changed it must be changed with the angle of site
and not with the corrector in order to keep all bursts in the same
vertical plane. '
6. Fire should be always delivered when the aerial observer asks
for it. If there is to be a delay of more than 30 seconds, do not
fire but wait for another request from the observer. Interruptions
of a serious nature are signaled by one of the following messages:
Wait several minutes, or
Battery not ready. There will be a delay of more than .1. 0 minutes.
No further need of you. ,
7. It is essential that the preliminary adjustment be as accurate
as possible. Frequent correction of the deflection, etc., wastes too
much valuable time. If the observer, when in a position to observe,
sends:
Lost. _
do not fire again with the same data, but use data half way between
that of the last salvo seen by the aerial observer and the salvo which
he has been unable to see. But, on the contrary, if the observer
sends:
Was not in a position to observe.
the previous data should be repeated.
8. Errors in rangev are reported by takin‘g‘the average error of
the four shots of the salvo with reference to the target. Errors in
deflection are reported by taking the interval between the right gun
and the right of the target. The battery should be guided by the
errors as reported and should correct accordingly. In diflicult
country where bursts are hard to observe, the aerial observer should
ask for rather conservative corrections.
9. To correct a sheaf badly distributed, the aerial observer may
send, for example:
No. 1. Fire.
The first gun then fires two rounds rapidly. By causing the first
and fourth guns to fire, the front of the sheaf may be ascertained.
10. To shift the sheaf to a new target, or to a new part of an old
target, the aerial observer should send, for example:
Change target. Add 200.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 117
11. Fire for e fleet—This may be either fire for precision at a single
range, each volley being observed by the aerial observer and the
adjustment being constantly refined, or it may be zone fire.
12. When firing at a single range, battery volleys of two or four
rounds each are usually employed. Each volley is fired at the
request of thejaerial observer who reports the mean error of each.
Concentrategdfirle is very easily observed and is useful for this reason.
13. Fire for precision by single piece—The aerial observer ' may
send, for example:
No. 1. Fire for precision. Fire.
N o. 1 then fires four rounds at full speed, and the aerial observer
reports the mean error of the group of bursts.
14. Zone fire—This may be .
(a) After the aerial observer has completed adjustment and ob-
served the delivery of more or less prolonged fire for effect. In an
action, this observation is usually restricted to the observation of
the limits of a 100-yard bracket. For this, the aerial observer de-
mands, for example:
Zone fire.
(b) Progressive fire, which is usually delivered after adjustment
on a'target or an auxiliary target, without verification. Only the
general "effect can be reported. The zone to be covered should
usually not exceed 100 meters.
RULES OF OBSERVATION.
15. If the position of the battery is known, refer bursts to the
line B——-T (battery-target), and give the error, for example:
055 meters right—202 meters short.
After a bracket has been obtained send only the sense of the bursts.
In order to estimate the amount of errors, the aerial observer refers
the distance between known points on the map to the front of a
salvo, or makes calculations based on the width of his wings or
mountings. The displacements of the points of fall of the projectile
in response to his corrections help the aerial observer to perfect
his scale of distances. Aerial photographs of the same country
taken at the same height are also very useful gauges for the- estima-
tion of distances. Corrections in range are given in even multiples
of 100 and 50 meters; corrections in deflection are given in units of
25 meters. '
16. If the battery position is not accurately known, refer the
bursts to a north and south line and an east and west line passing‘
through the target, for example:
101 east—055 north.
118 FIELD ,ARTILLERY NOTES.
17 . When using time shrapnel, aerial observation indicates errors
in deflection only. , ' A
18. To get on a target rapidly which has not been previously
designated on the map, the aerial observer sends, for example:
Lay on me. Range 4,000. ' .
, The'aerial observer then flies directly on the line B— T.
19. In the designation of objectives the aerial observer is the
representative of the commanding officer. In order to identify
targets their coordinates are announced. (See Annex I, part 3, or
Tables of Signals No. 4, Annex II.) . _ .
In firing, the aerial observer is simply the collaborator of the
battery commander. The responsibility for the fire rests with the
battery commander; and the aerial observer intervenes only under
the following conditions: ' i
(a) If conditions require timefire or volley fire of several rounds.
He then requests:
Time fire. Battery volley.
(b) If conditions require fire for precision. He then requests:
Fire for precision. Is the battery ready?
(0) If the result desired is attained. In this case he sends, for
example: . ‘
Result attained. Cease firing.
(d) If a change of target is necessary. He then requests, for
example:
Change target’. Subtract 200.
(e) If further observation is impossible. In this case he sends:
Further observation impossible. I am going to land.
Part H.—Balloon Observation with Light Artillery.
1. RULES OF FIRE.
The conditions which govern observation of light artillery fire with
aeroplanes do not apply entirely in the case of'balloons, on account of
the superiority which the telephone gives from the point of view of
communication. The following modifications should be noted:
(a) With the 75-millimeter gun, time shrapnel should be used to
give rough indications of the direction only. Percussion fire only
can be used for ranging.
(b) In firing salvos, an interval of five seconds between shots is
recommended in order to identify the shots from each gun.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 119
(c) In order to facilitate observation the following procedure should
be considered normal:
Battery: Ready to fire.
Observer: Ready to observe.
Battery: Salvo fired.
2. RULES OF OBSERVATION.
Bursts are usually referred to a line battery—target, B—T, and a
line perpendicular thereto passing through the target. Shots are
reported as “Right” or “Left,” “Short” or “Over.” The amount
of the error is ordinarily given for the first salvo only or when the
error is abnormal. In all cases, after the bracket has been obtained,
only the sense of bursts is given. On account of dispersion, it is use-
less to attempt a closer bracket than 100 yards for range and 25 yards
for deflection. Indications as to deflection are always sent before
those for range. _ Indications-as to amount of errorprecede those as
to sense of error. Whenever evident effect is produced at the target,
the report “ Target” should be sent. . I
Whenever the observer ‘is in a proper position to observe and a
burst is not seen, “Lost” should be sent. If not ready to observe,
the observer should send “lives not in a position to observe.” _
If the line balloon—target makes an, angle greater than 30°, with
the line battery—target, B— T, the coordinates of the balloon position
are sent to the battery for reference, and the errors are reported with
reference to the line balloon—target and replotted at the battery“,
When telephone communication is interrupted, wireless teleg-
raphy or projectors are used. In that case the rules given for obser!
vation by aeroplane hold good.
3. SHVIULTANEOUS ADJUSTMENT.
Under ordinary conditions a balloon observer can observe for .‘two
or more batteries. , If one of them is a heavy battery firing ‘slowly, ,-
he can observe for three. Such observation requires excellent tele-'__
phone discipline, which is obtained through a group central When- _
ever the batteries pertain to a group. It the batteries do not belong I
to agroup, communication is obtained through a balloon-company
central. . . '
Whenever a battery has adjusted fire with the assistance of an
aeroplane or balloon observer, it must immediately make a new
adjustment with the same ammunition on another target visible
from the‘ ground and as near to the original targetvas possible. Hav-
ing done this, the battery, without assistance of an aeroplane or a
120 FIELD ARTILLERY norss.
balloon, can open effective fire on the target in question at any time,
provided atmospheric corrections are properly made. The results
of such adjusting fire on an auxiliary target, as well as the results of
the fire adjusted by the aerial observer, must be recorded in the
battery data book (carnet de tir). ~
Part IIL—Rules for the Conduct of Fire of Heavy Artillery.
OBSERVATION FROM AN AEROPLANE.
1. In the adjustment of heavy artillery, there is no principle not
involved in the conduct of fire of light artillery. Strict discipline is
called for, and the following rules must be followed. For medium
oalibers, to include the 155
2. Preparation of fire.—-—It is essential that the first salvo fall
where the aerial observer expects it to fall. In order to accomplish
this, make careful preliminary adjustment of deflection, distribution,
and range, using an auxiliary target and either balloon or terrestrial
observation. The adjustment must be piece by piece, and the
‘ ‘range for the moment” must be established.
The telephone connection must be absolutely assured, and no
relays can be relied upon. Every means of saving time is taken
advantage of.
3. Adjustment of fire—Battery volleys of two rounds each are
advisable. N on-delay action fuses are used in order to make bursts
more visible. Fire for effect immediately follows. The sheaf is
parallel for the first shots and is then modified as needed. The indi-
vidual errors of guns having been corrected for, four rounds are then
fired for each piece with five seconds interval. The aerial observer
then reports, for example:
055 left—151 short—202 short—101 right—202 short—151 short.
This is continued until the end of the fire for amelioration. If
less number of rounds are reported upon than have been fired, the
battery commander takes as a result the average of the reports
received and disregards the shots not reported on. If this trouble
continues, return to fire by piece, the aerial observer reporting, for
example:
Lost—Lost—055 right, correct for range—101 left, 101 short.
4. In principle, if the battery has not fired, the aerial observer
asks again for fire. If the battery can not fire within 30 seconds
after observer’s request for fire, the battery commander waits for a
new request. If fire is interrupted, advise the aerial observer at.
once of the probable length of the delay.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 121
If the aerial observer does not see the bursts when he is in a position
to see them, do not use the same data for a second salvo, but use
data halfway between the last salvo seen and the one the observer
could not observe. Use non-delay action fuses to make more smoke
whenever there is difficulty in observation. But if the observer was
simply not in a position to see, repeat salvo with olddata. In the
case of modern rapid-fire heavy artillery, fire several rounds from
each gun. If the wind is blowing from the left, fire from the right.
If the wind is blowing from the right, fire from the left.
5. Fire for effect is divided into fire for precision for demolition
and zone fire.
6. Fire for precision is carefully supervised by the aerial observer
and is delivered by battery salvos at two or three seconds interval.
Twenty-four rounds are usually fired, and then the aerial observer
makes a report, for example, as follows:
5 short—12 over—1 target (assuming that 18 rounds have
been observed). ‘
Eventually certain individual pieces may be distinguished and
their errors reported, for example, as follows:
First piece, 150 short.
To change to new target or to new part of old target, the observer
sends, for example:
Change target. Add 350; or change target, subtract 30.
After firing 24 rounds, if the individual adjustment of the
pieces is satisfactory, continuous fire may be employed; but
salvos must be resumed as soon as the aerial observer asks for them.
In no case should accuracy be sacrificed for speed.
7. Zone fire depends upon the bracket previously determined.
Never search more than a given bracket with the target assumed as
being at the center of the bracket.
(a) Controlled fire: After firing either 12 or 24 rounds fired by sal-
vos, the aerial observer should report as to individual errors of pieces,
if any, as follows: .
055'right—151 short, first piece 202 over.
Simply the number of bursts, “short,” “over,” or “target, ” may
also be announced. ‘ ‘
(b) Progressive fire: This is not as effective as controlled fire. It
is used only in concentrations of fire unsupervised by aerial obser-
vation except as to general effect.
8. One aerial observer may observe for two heavy batteries,
either on the same or on different targets.
122 FIELD ARTILL'ERY NOTES. .
‘9. In such cases, if the batteries are together one officer should
be designated as a fire commander for the two. If they are not
together they should work separately, firing alternate salvos at the
request of the aerial observer. After adjustment, each battery
should fire 24 rounds for amelioration of fire separately. Then they
should simultaneously open fire for effect.
10. When two batteries fire on different targets, the same prin-
ciple ‘applies. Fire for effect should be delivered in series, first of
24 rounds per battery and then in longer series. '
Never sacrifice accuracy for speed. If the fire of one battery is
unsatisfactory, the observer should ask for a cessation of fire and
should go on with the other battery. ' The observer announces to
one battery, for example: .
Range (or deflection) not adjusted. Cease firing.~ Guns above
155 min.
11. In principle ‘the fire should be adjusted shot by shot, gun by.
gun, after the instructions given in paragraph 18 of the Firing Instruc—
tions of May 15, 1915. .
Whenever an error in amount is observed, the aerial observer
announces it.
Correct the second round by the amount of the error reported for
the first round; correct the third round by an error equal to one-half
of the error reported for the second round; correct the fourth round
by a correction equal to one-third the error reported for the third
round, and so on until the range correction is as small as one-sixth
the bracket for range and the deflection correction is as small as one-
half a decigrade (8/10 of a mil).
Follow this fire by six rounds fired for amelioration.
The same precise method should be followed with the 155 mm. gun
if it is desired to destroy a small target with a minimum number of
rounds. On the contrary, with good observers, battery salvos may
be used even with larger guns.
RULES OF OBSERVATION.
12. In principle a conference between the aerial observer and the
battery commander should precede each adjustment; but, for practice,
it is often advisable to do without it. In the designation of objec-
tives, the aerial observer is the delegate of the commanding officer;
in the conduct of fire he is the assistant of the battery command er.
The aerial observer designates targets and asks for adjustment on
the most important. The artillery commander designates the
rrnm'a- ARTELERY news. 123
battery to fire and indicates his decision to the aerial observer by
means of a panel. If it is not deemed advisable to fire on the target
designated, he so advises aerial observer and asks for the designa-
tion of another target, but, in principle, to avoid confusion, it
is best to accede- to demands made by aerial observers when
possible. ' i .
13. For heavy calibered guns, the amount of. error of each burst
should be reported. The. deflection error should ‘first be given, and‘
then the range error. Errors should be estimated by reference to the
map and to aerial photographs. The amount of the errors always
precedes the sense of the error.
For- medium calibered guns, the amount of observed errors is
given in the case of first rounds only or in cases where the error
exceeds 100 meters. Observations are always referred to the center
of the target. ‘ ~ ~
If one part of the target is destroyed, shift the fire to another part.
14.. The aerial observer should interfere in the conduct of fire
only when: _ _
- (a)' He thinks that fire for precision is no longer necessary;
(b) If the object has been accomplished;
(e) If the target must be changed;
('4): If observation becomes impossible, In such cases the ‘ob?
server sends, for example: . . _ ,
Observation impossible. Change target. Add 155, or
Observation impossible, Auxiliary target. ‘
Then, after adjustment on new or auxiliary target it will ‘not be
. difficult to shift the sheaf to the original target.
BALLOON OBSERVATION.
15. The same principles apply as for observation by balloon of
light artillery fire, but the reporting of the amount of errors is far
more important. For high-powered heavy artillery (A. L. G. P.),
ifthe balloon makes an ar gle of more than 20° with the line battery-
target B-— T, refer bursts to the line balloon-target, reporting. the
exact- position of-the balloon to the battery, or} else use two balloons
on the horizontal base system.
In general, do not expect too much of balloon observation for
artillery. Utilize balloons to commence adjustment which is to
be perfected by aeroplanes or to finish observation in which aero-
planes have been interrupted.
1124 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
TRENCH ARTILLERY—AERIAL OBSERVATION. " " '
Bursts are referred to known squares on a squared map. Only
rough indications as to the squares in which bursts are seen can be
given.
Telephone communication is relied upon, but if it is not available
projectors may be used. If no squared map is available, refer ob-
served bursts to a north and south. and to aneast and west line.
When using aeroplane observers, connect the trench positions of
the trench artillery to the receiving station by telephone. The
trench mortars should fire in rafales of eight and the mean point
should be reported on. If the telephone is out of order, use pro-
jectors, after having adopted an extremely simple code. Panoramic
sketches are most valuable for the designation of targets.
Part IV.
Annex I.——DESIGNATION 0F OBJECTIVES.
1. All targets and other objectives are referred to by means of
coordinates in the fighting map (plan directeur de tir), 1/20,000 or
special maps of 1/5,000, with kilometric squares, with a common
point. of origin.
Any position can be located by giving a number of six places,
giving the coordinates.
2. Abscissas are given first, then ordinates. The proper procedure
is to start in the big squares and work toward the smaller ones.
Thus, the point “x” in figure 1—
30

29
28
I
27 l
i
26
32 33 34 35 36
FIGURE 1 .
is designated as 335-282. Sometimes when working for some time
on a familiar map the first digit is omitted, and only four numbers
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 125
are used to designate a point. In such a system the point “x”
referred to would be designated 35—82.
Photographs are extremely useful for the designation of targets.
In some known zones letters may be substituted for numbers in the
big squares.
Annex II.——USE OF SIGNALS.
Part l.—-Liaison between Aerial Observer and Receiving Station.
Wireless signals are divided as follows:
1. Station calls—Groups of 2 letters.
2. Conventional signals for adjustment of artillery fire and liaison.
3. Groups of 2 numerals, for special supplementary code for ad—
justment of fire and for designation of localities other than targets.
4. Groups of 3 letters, for designation of targets and position of
hostile troops.
5. Groups of numerals for expression of distances in meters.
6. Groups of 6 numerals for expression of map coordinates.
7. Groups of 2 numerals and one letter, reserved for special artil-
ery code not otherwise 00 vered.
8. Uncoded messages in exceptional cases. To be avoided as long
and undesirable for obvious reasons.
Similar codes are used in communicating from the receiving sta
tion to the aerial observer optically, by projectors or window-shutter
panels.
The Morse code in use is as iollows:
LETTERS.
a..... f.._. m___. 1; __
b—ool g——-0 n--l 11...-
c__..._. h.... o...__.._ v...-
d__.. i.- p..__._. w._____
ch_____ j o------— q——.— X_no-_i
e. {-0— I‘ o_. you—m
éOI—I. ‘IO—I. SQ.‘ Z___Oo
NUMERALS.
1.___—-_— 4UC'Q— 7__.O. 9_____.
2.._—_ 5.‘... 8___-IIO 0_—__-
3..._— 6-‘QQO
12:; FIELD ARTILLERY ' no'rns.
SERVICE SIGNALS .
Readytoreceive ._...._. br
End of message . __ . _ . _ a r
Understood . . . _ . s 11
Wait . _ . . . a s
Repeat . . _ _ . .
Separation __ . . . _
1. Station calls are fixed in each army by the chief of the radio
service of the army and in each army corps by the chief of the radio
service of the army corps. _
In each artillery commandgvarious units are designated by calls,
all having the same first letter, as for example “P. A.,” “P. B.,”
“P. 0.,” etc.
2. The conventional code for the adjustment of fire is as follows:
Fire -— —— —— 3 long dashes
Right . . . . 2i’s.
Left —— —-— — —-— 2 m’s.
Short .... .... 2h’s.
Over — — -— — Ch.
Deflection correct —- —— . . z.
Range correct — . —— . 2 n’s connected.
Target — . . . b.
Change target — . —— -— . — 2 k’s connected.
Error . . . . . . . . . . 10 dots.
Going to land —- . . . . —.. br connected.
The signal for “Target” is sent when single shots hit the target or
when a salvo or volley is observed as “ bracketing.” “ Target, Short, ’ ’
is sent when, in a mixed salvo or volley, the majority of “bursts”
are short; “Target, Over,” is sent when, in a mixed salvo or volley,
the majority of bursts are “over.” -
The following conventional code for use in liaison with the infan-
try has been adopted:
Request artillery fire — —- — —- —- —- — —— ——
Series of dashes.
Weare advancing, lengthenrange . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series of h’s.
Range too short . . . . . . . . . . . . Series of s’s.
Sendammunition —.—-— —.-——- —.———-
' Series of y’s.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
127
3. Groups of 2 numerals for special supplementary code for adjustment
of fire and for designation of localities:
1st piece. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. O 1
2d 0 2
3d piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 0 3
4th piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 0 4
By piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 0 5
Is battery ready‘r’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- O 6
Hasbatteryfired?....---.--..--..-.--.---.---.--. O 7
Can’t see projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 0 8
Aim on me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- O 9
Can’t see panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. 1 1
Auxiliary target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2
Supervisingfire-.-.-.-.-.-.....-........------... 1 3
From the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. l 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. 1 6
From the left . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8
How many guns fired? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .- 1 9
Observation impossible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .. 1
Veryirregularforrange....-..----.-....-. 2 2
Can’t observe here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 2 3
Deflection irregular- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 2 4
Will observe as requested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5
H. E. shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 2 6
Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 2 7
(‘ease firing . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .- 2 8
Result accomplished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9
Friendly shotsfalling 3 1
Continue the fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. 3 2
Too much distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 3 3
Shrapnel, time-fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 3 4
Zone fire, I cease observing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5
Too much concentrated ........................ . 6
By battery volleys ............................. . . 3 7
With gas shells ................................. . - 3 8
Repeat ........................................ 3 9
Designation of important points in each army zone—The numerals
41 to 94, omitting 50, 60, 70, 80, and 90 (all multiples of 10), are
reserved for the designation of important points in each army zone.
128 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
They are announced by Army Headquarters, beginning at the left
and going toward the right of each army zone to avoid confusion
with neighboring armies.
Open numbers: The following numbers are left open for special
uses in each group: 15, 16, 17, 95, 96, 97, 98, and 99.
Familiar points: In each group familiar points may be desig-
nated by single letters after agreement amongst all concerned.
4. Groups of three letters, for designation of targets and enemy
positions:
Artillery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enemy aeroplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antiaircraft battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .
Battery in action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
Battery occupied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cavalry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
East from . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . -- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barbed wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . .
Infantry in column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .
Infantry deployed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .
Infantry assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
North from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
West from. - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Depth. - ..................................... --
Tail at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Nothing to report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
South of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Friendly troops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Trenches- - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Get relief for me . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .
I am going to relieve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available aeroplane here ................... - .
Head at. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .
Boyau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .
Grenade fight at. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battalion headquarters at. . . .............. . .
Brigade headquarters at ............ . _. ..... . .
wwoweHmu<wweewwawozHHHssmwnowww>>
wwmsmu>wwEmo>dadwoossqwwmHo>afl><w
mowoaHoo<<QsgwmmsmwwwQosew<<o><He
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. ' 129
Division headquarters at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Regimental headquarters at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Indications of hostile attack at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gan’t see troops at- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Friendly troops progressing at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Friendly troops stopped at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Friendly troops in retreat at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Enemy troops at. . - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enemy troops advancing at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heavy enemy barrage at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
I can not see shots falling at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Three additional combinations of three letters are left at the
disposal of Groups of Armies.
5. Groups of three numerals for the. expression of distances: As will
be noticed in the examples of messages in adjusting fire in Annex I;
the following rules hold good for the expression of distances:
For distances under 100 precede each distance by 0, ‘thus:
wwma>>>-ww
Qwwrswzww>c>tj
ezzzg>EemwH
Fifty-five ........................... -.- ....... -. 055
For distances involving even'hundreds, never end with 0, thus:
One hundred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 101
Two hundred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 202
Three hundred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 303
6. Groups of six numerals are used for the location of objectives
as explained in Annex I, Part IV.
7. Groups of two numerals and one letter are reserved for special
artillery codes not otherwise provided for.
8. When uncoded messages are used, it is necessary to use very
clear language and to be very brief.
For the successful employment of wireless telegraphy it is impor-
tant that the following rules be observed:
(a) At the beginning of each flight, the aerial observer should
repeat the appropriate station call fifteen times in order to permit
the proper adjustment of the receiving set at the receiving station.
(b) When this station call is heard the receiving officer should at
‘once display the “Understood” panel.
(0) Every message should be preceded by the station call.
((1) When several numerals are sent they are separated by the
signal of separation —. . .— ’
(e) Each operator should remember that correct manipulation of
the key is essential to success.
98508°—-17——-9
130 ‘ FIELD ARTILLERY ‘nor-Es.
- Dropped written messages—Written messages are placed in the
prescribed container provided with a streamer. The aerial ob—
server should descend to an altitude of 300 meters before dropping
the. message. When he is seen approaching the headquarters
station should display the identification panel, and all batteries
within 500 yards should cease firing. As soon as the message has
been found, the panel signifying “Message received” should be
displayed.
Part IL—Liaison Between the Receiving Station and the Aerial
Observer.
Each receiving station is supplied by’ the Artillery Park with the
following panels for communication from the ground to the aerial
observer: '
Identification panels—Large panels, 3 meters square, tacked on
wooden battens for convenient handling, white for ordinary weather,
black for use in snow. Also small square of black cloth 1 meter
square for use with ‘large white panel, and small white square of
same size for use with large black panel. The panels are arranged
so as to indicate different artillery groups as shown in figure 1a.
Panels are always displayed with the long axis toward the target.
A detail of one corporal and two privates is ‘provided for their
manipulation. -
Signal panels—Small white panels for ordinary use (black for
use on snow) 3 meters long by 1 meter wide, arranged in various
combinations to agree with code.
For example, the various numerals are shown in figure lb.
According to an accepted code, the following signals are sent from
earth to the aerial observer:
1. Observe fire of such and such groups. (Show appropriate
identification panel.)
. Ask for adjustment on . . . . . -.
. Will adjust on target you indicate.
. Observe fire on such or such target.
. 1st Battery ready, or
2d Battery ready, or
3d Battery ready (use numerals).
. Wait a few minutes.
. Battery not ready. Delay of at least 10 minutes.
. Battery has fired.
. Your wireless is heard but is confused. Repeat.
coco-10: Cflr-POON)
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 131
10.
ll.
'7
In.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Can't hear you.
Yes. Message received, or understood.
N 0.
Continue to adjust.
Fire by piece.
Salvo.
Amelinration.
Series of 24 rounds.
Fire for effect.
Fire for control.
Enemy attacks. Be guided by previous agreement.
Hostile aeroplane near you.
No further need of you.
. - - - - - . - - - - . - - - . . . - .-




‘.
WINDOW SHU'ITER PANEL CLUSED.
Showing neutral lonls only, invisible at [he height of lhe aerial observer.
132 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.




WINDOW SHUTTER PANEL, OPEN.
Showing, from point of view of aerial observer, a while rectangle 2.8 x 1.5 meters.

I 4
nx- » I
I r‘,—
<'_._~ - '
1.63‘ ‘



Group identification panel. Small signaling panel, and window shuller panel, closed.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 133
lDE/VT/F/C/I 770” P/I/VZZS
L/Gf/T ART/LL59)’, Groupe Pane/s
[j I E; [I]
AI'I'I/lery 18)‘. End. 3rd.



. 5%.
L.
Pie- {2 [:1 El [-2
3X3”?
6%. 71%. 81%. 9th. 101%.
Small
n l! in
727%. l3/f2. 741%. l6'f/r
messes
H88V/Aff/l/ery /sf' 2nd. 3rd.
f/EA VY ART/L LERY, Grouper Pane/s
From_ 67/1 to 152?’, same 5 stem as Light Arf/I/ery,
the a’lamond rep/ac/hg f a square.
my /, a.
Z nun W v W
Wilmer/Earl Pane/s, 3x Imefers
leg/,6.
' 184
ARTILLERY NOTES.
FIELD
‘a
\geg “gs,
-s i” .
‘ 3. o
‘0 r°
n l at
\VVOCQ P V



St ' iW/n'fe 0/0”,
4
SI- - a ‘ i 1 ~

- Baffler;


Open,
,i Shaw/>13! w/n'fe rec/angle
280cm. by ISO cm
[ac/r palm/deaf as!»
wléfae slide. _W/renagfio’qdif
m/easedacf/an of‘ springs
folds each a!
new/w hsfZ'Z/y.’ “0””?
Fig. 2.


0 rah'n Co
\
as
as


c_—_______._____- s-




I"
(Mm 5
'\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\S
l
___ ___ -,_~_ _ _.._

i
I



1


v











Each/cane! fin/deaf w/M
neafra/ f/nf exposed .
0 , eraf/n » Cord
C/osed
Showing nofbz'ng as seen
by aerial observer
' [M'na’aw-s/m/fer l-bne/
(fin/react a pars/brine)
For communicaf/on w/fb aerial
observers 6y Morse Code
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 135
Window-shutter panels—These panels ‘are used for telegraphing
from the earth to the aerial observer by means of the Morse code.
Their construction is shown in figure 2. By their use a white
rectangle 1.5 meters by 2.80 meters is made to appear and disappear.
Each panel is formed by seven double-faced bands of white cloth
1.5 meters by 0.40 meter, the lower side being khaki or other neutral
color. One of the larger sides is fixed, the other movable. By
pulling on an operating cord the bands fold or unfold, showing
alternately white or khaki. Only a movement of 20 centimeters
is necessary to operate it—half the width of a band.
Projectors.—-24-centimeter projectors are issued, consisting of a
portable light and reflector, a belt with pockets for 8 dry cells and a
manipulating button. 8 extra cells and 3 extra lamps are provided.
The range is from 1.5 to 8 ln'lometers by daylight and 3 to 10 kilo-
meters in the night.
Code: For use with both the Window-Shutter Panel and the pro-
jectors, the Morse Code is used, and the following conventional
signals are employed:
I want to talk . . . . . Dash held for 10 seconds.
Adjust on target you -—. .—. .——. .
designate.
Observe on such or such —.-———.———-.-———.—-
target.
'Batteryready.---..--... .—.——.—.—-.——.——.--.——
Wait for a few moments.-. .——. ..
Waitatleasttenminutes. —————..————. .————-..
Fired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — — ~ fi ~ — — — — ———-
Your wireless works but is . .-————. .
confused.
Oan’thearyou..----.-.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ———————-———~———'—————--——--
Yes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-
Continuetoadjust . . . . . -.
....piece-.-~ . . . . . . . . . -. -——————...—————.
Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. -——-——-.—————-——.—-——--.
Amelioration . . . . . . . . . . . .-
Seriesof24rounds . . . . . .. —-———....——-—....————...
Fireforeffect ........... -. —-————-—.4—————-—.
Fireforcontrol . . . . . . . . . .. Attack commences. Be .—----~. ——~--.
guided by previous ar-
rangement.
Nofurtherneedofyou.-. —-.....——--—.....--
Enemy aeroplane near you . . ——-—-—— . . -——-—-
136 FIELD Ai-RTILLERY no'rns.
In order that the Morse code may be used successfully with win-
dow-shutter panels or projectors, it is essential:
(a) That the cadence be not too rapid.
(b) That the dashes and dots are very distinct.
(c) That dashes be exaggerated to about 3 seconds.
(d) That instruments be operated calmly without hurry.
(e) That the interval between letters be at least four seconds.
If the sending instrument is not properly oriented, the aerial
observer can not read it. In that case he sends a series of dots
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . The sending station should at once verify the
orientation and, in the case of the projector, the proper burning of
the lamp.
If the lamp is burning too dimly, the aerial observer should indicate
it by increasing the cadence of his dots, thus . ., . . . . . . .
If the light gets better, he should diminish the cadence, thus
. . . . . . . When the light again becomes normal, he
should send “br,” thus —-—. . . . —.
BLANK FORMS FOR REPORTS.
(OBsERvER’s Nora—In the back of the pamphlet were several
examples of blank forms for reports and records connected with this
service; but under field conditions, there were no facilities in the
limited time allowed to copy the forms, with the exception of the
individual card index slip for enemy battery positions shown in
figs. 3a and 3b).
The following records are required:
Record of daily missions assigned to escadrilles by artillery com-
mand.
Record of daily missions assigned to balloon company by artillery
command.
Escadrille report on missions executed.
Pilot’s or observer’s detailed report of adjustments of fire and
reconnaissance .
Balloon observer’s report on hostile batteries seen.
Balloon report on adjustments of fire.
Combined report by air service, embodying information contained
in the foregoing reports.
Individual card record of enemy battery positions compiled by
S. R. A.
(Artillery Information Service at Corps Headquarters.) See
figures 3a and 3b.
FIELD ‘ ARTILL’ERY NOTES. 137
. . . . . .1311 Army.
' Groupe-
3300-20 A. D. 332-006 H. A. ment.
(Divn. Arty.) Right (X= 333, 190
Left EX: 333,150 Part (Y: 600, 660
Part Y= 600. 610


Orientation, N. ‘E. Caliber 150 men.
No. of emplacements, 4 Front, 70 mm.
Targets: Boisen hache

Souchez
Copy of Air Photograph H111 119.
of Region.
Tracin of
1/20 000 ap
oi .IRegion.



Fig. 3.—-C-ard-index record of hostile position.







_ Adjustment.‘ , Adjustment.
. ' (/2
a: g a: 8
E .22 . E .92 .
s e 8 s Q‘ 5‘


c] “5 Targets. 33 a ‘5 Targets. :3
O k , - o a . a ‘
Q o H . g h 0 Q Q :3 >*
=1 .2 o h - "1 Q o H
o s: .Q 8 Q .o E 3
4-‘: "- .p +9 L: ~49
n f3 73 ... e 68 c3 5 03
Q Z 0 4 Q Q Z 0 <1 :2
l
I Q ~ O I O h D I O O n Q O I I O O O I I‘ I Q I ~ . Q Q 0 Q I I I I t c I O l I O O U I a I c
O Q I I Q I ' O O ¢ I t ~ O ~ ~ I . ¢ I - Q l ' ' . ‘ - . ' Q ' ' Q n I I 0 t t O I Q I Q U n - - I a
I
Fig. 3a.-—Reverse side of card‘index record of hostile position.
VIII. ARTILLERY IN OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS.
L—GENERAL PLAN‘ OF ATTACK.
l. DUTY OF THE ARTILLERY COMMANDER.

In all offensive operations it is the duty of the oflicer commanding
the artillery of the force engaged, whether this is an infantry brigade
with artillery attached, a division, a corps, or an army, to prepare
an “artillery plan” as described in this paper. This plan will be
based on, and supplementary to, the general plan of attack.
2. SELECTION OF THE FRONT OF ATTACK.
Under present conditions, no offensive operation can be expected
to achieve complete success unless both the preparation and support
by the artillery are effective; and for this it is not enough that the
requirements in guns and ammunition should have been correctly
estimated and adequately provided. The first and most essential
element of success is that the front selected for attack should admit
of a full development of artillery fire, and of complete cooperation
between the artillery and the infantry. It is only when the ground
allows of artillery commanders (I) seeing clearly the enemy’s de-
fenses, and also following the movements of the attacking infantry;
(2) controlling the fire of their guns rapidly and effectively, that the
infantry can count on obtaining the full measure of support which
artillery can render. For, however carefully thought out the
arrangements for the control of both artillery fire and infantry move—
ment may be, they are always liable to be thrown out of gear by
some unexpected development.
It is, then, the first duty of the artillery commander to place
before the general officer commanding the force full particulars as
to how the ground affects the efficiency of the artillery preparation
and support, so that the latter may give due weight to such con-
siderations in selecting the front of attack. “An objective which
may appear at first sight easy of access to the infantry may prove
in the end costly to attack, if it does not lend itself to the judicious
application of artillery, fire; and vice versa, localities which present
difliculties to the infantry alone, may, if it is possible to bring the
converging fire of artillery to bear on them, be carried with com-
paratively little loss.”
138 e
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 139
s. ESTIMATE 0F GUNS AND AMMUNITION REQUIRED.
The general plan of attack having been settled, it is the next duty
of the artillery commander to prepare an estimate of the amount of
artillery and of ammunition required for the operation. The first
point to remember is that the ammunition required depends upon
the work to be done, i. e., upon the enemy’s defenses, more than
on the number of guns available. The latter is, however, the gov-
erning factor as regards the time which will be required for the
preparation, and has therefore an important bearing on the general
plan of attack, for if surprise forms any part of the latter, it is
essential that sufficient fire units should be available to allow of the
different portions of the enemy’s defenses being bombarded
simultaneously.
The nature of guns required depends, like the ammunition, on the
nature of the enemy’s defenses. There has sometimes been a tend-
ency to think that nothing but the heaviest howitzers should be
demanded on all occasions. A little consideration shows that even
if the number of these natures available and still more the amount of
ammunition for them were unlimited, conditions which were never
likely to be fulfilled, questions connected with the supply of ammuni-
tion alone would necessitate economy in their use. In estimating
requirements the heavier natures should only be detailed for tasks
beyond the power of the lighter.
4. RECONNAISSAN CE.
An estimate of the guns and ammunition required can, therefore,
. only be made after thorough reconnaissance of the enemy’s system
of defense, including his ‘trenches, machine—gun emplacements,
observing stations, communication trenches, rear lines, strong points,
wire, etc. This reconnaissance must include, not only the exami~
nation of the ground from all possible points of view, but also the
reports of air observers, and a very careful study of air photographs,
and of all information available in the intelligence section. The
latter should give the roads used by the enemy in bringing up rein-
forcements and supplies of ammunition and food, the places where
they can best be blocked by artillery fire, and the forming-up places
likely to be used for counter attack. The number and nature of the
guns which may be brought into play by the enemy is also an
important factor, as it governs the requirements for counter-battery
work.1 It is important that the artillery commander should make

lCounter-battery work has been dealt with in a separate note (No; 3 of this
series.)
140 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
this reconnaissance in company with the general staff of the forma-
tion, and that the fullest information regarding not only the enemy’s
defenses but his habits should be obtained from both. the artillery
and the infantry holding the front. ’
II.—-THE ARTILLERY PLAN. ,
5. SCOPE OF THE ARTILLERY PLAN.
The general plan of attack having been settled, and information
having been received that the necessary guns and ammunition will
be available for the operation, the artillery commander will make
out his “Artillery plan.” This should be a comprehensive state-
ment of the objects to be attained-by the artillery, and the methods.
to be employed. It will give the organization of the artillery for
the attack, the tasks and zones of the various commands, the arrange-
ments for communications and for the cooperation of the royal
flying corps, the orders regarding the expenditure and supply of
ammunition. and any other points regarding the action of the artil-
lery, which it is necessary to include. Its preparation will involve
a consideration of all the various tasks of the artillery during the
preparation and support of the attack, but care must be taken to
avoid cramping the initiative of the subordinate artillery com-
manders by entering into details which are within their province.
6. ORGANIZATION.
The organization of the artillery forms, perhaps, the most important
part of the artillery plan. The principle that a divisional com—
mander, to whom a definite objective is assigned, should have under _
his orders the artillery which is necessary to enable him to carry
out his task, may often be inapplicable, as, for instance, where a corps
attacks in depth and divisions succeed each other on the same front;
f‘c-r experience shows that any attempt to apply this principle of
attack in depth to the artillery is foredoomed to failure. Now, more
than'ever, the guns forms the “iron framework of the battle;” and
all recent operations have proved the necessity for a carefully elabo-
rated scheme for the employment of the whole of the artillery,
involving a methodical allotment of tasks from the outset, and
depending for its successful execution on an effective chain of
artillery command.
7. ALLOTMENT 0F TASKS.
The number and variety of the tasks which the artillery is called
upon to perform necessitate very careful arrangement, if the dif~
ferent natures are to be employed to the fullest advantage. These
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 141
tasks depend upon the enemy’s defenses, and must, therefore, vary
with the nature and extent of these. The following principles will,
however, generally apply.
(i) The first task of the field guns is to cut the wire. During the
preliminary bombardment they will also assist in destroying the
enemy ’s defenses wherever the nature of these renders them vulner-
able to the high explosive shell of field guns, as, for instance, where
they consist of breastworks. During this period, however, they will
be chiefly employed in preventing the enemy repairing their wire,
or the damage to their entrenchment-s. On the day of the attack
they will cover the assault by their fire on the front of attack. as well
as on the flanks; they will search the communication trenches; and
will establish barrages to isolate the attack and stop any attempts at
counter attack.
(ii) The field howitzers will be used for the destruction of the
enemy ’s first-line defenses wherever this is within their power, and
especially for blocking their communication trenches, both during
the preliminary bombardment and on the da}r of attack.
Both field guns and howitzers will also be allotted to counter-
battery work as described in the note on that subject (No. 3 of this
series); and the introduction of gas shells for the latter (see Sec. VI)
may be expected to considerably enhance their value for this work.
(iii) The medium guns (4.7-inch and 6(_)-pounder) will be chiefly
employed in counter-battery work, but may, in addition, be used for
the bombardment of definite points in the enemy ’s defenses, and for
sweeping the more distant communication trenches and approaches
generally with shrapnel. On the day of attack they will, however,
probably be all required for counter-battery work.
(iv) The medium ho-witzers (6-inch) have in the past been generally
required to assist the divisional artillery in the destruction of the
enemy ’s first-line defenses. The longer range of the new pattern
(26-hundredweight) howitzers has, however, greatly extended their
sphere of usefulness.
(v) The heavy howitzers (8-inch and 9.2-inch) will be chiefly used
for the destruction of the enemy ’s second-line defenses. and for
specially strong points in the first line‘. During the preparatory
period they will also assist in the counter-battery work by destroying
such of the enemy ’s batteries as have been accurately located.
(vi) The heavy guns (6-inch) will be used, both in the preliminary
bombardment and on the day of attack, in sweeping distant ap-
proaches, bombarding headquarters, billets, etc., and in keeping
the enemy ’s balloons at a distance. They will also be used to assist
in the counter-battery work.
142 I FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
(vii) The very heavy howitzers (lZ-inch and 15-inch) and the guns
and howitzers on railway mountings, will be used for the bombard-
ment of special points of tactical importance, or localities where it
is known that there are very strong underground refuges requiring
the heaviest shell for penetration.
8. COMMAND.
Although, normally, divisional artillery will remain as heretofore,
both tactically and administratively, under the orders of the divi~
sional commander, the scheme of an attack may render it advisable
for the corps commander to place the general officer commanding
the artillery of the corps in executive command of the whole of the
artillery supporting the attack.
In such cases the divisional artilleries will still remain under their
artillery commanders, and there will rarely be any reason to interfere
with their organization. During the ordinary work of “holding the
line, ” it is often very convenient to substitute “groups” of various
sizes formed to fit the local circumstances, for the established bri-
gades, and this may in many cases be advisable, although it has
sometimes been carried to an extreme not warranted by circum-
stances. It must, however, be remembered that there is an inherent
weakness in all such improvised organizations, and that this will
probably not be apparent until the unforeseen occurs (as in offensive
operations it inevitably will), and the necessity for unrehearsed
action arises.
The guns and howitzers allotted to. counter-battery Work will form
a separate command as described in the note on the subject (No. 3
of this series).
The medium howitzers when employed in the destruction of first
line defenses have usually been placed under divisional artillery
commanders, but the increased range of the newer pattern may ren-
der it advisable to group them with the heavier natures which will
normally form a separate command.
As regards the heaviest natures, and all on railway mountings, the
small number available and the fact that the special tasks to which
they will usually be allotted are only indirectly affected by the
fluctuations of the fight, will often render it inadvisable to restrict
their action in accordance with the narrow front of a corps. In such
cases they may be retained under the direct control of the major
general, royal artillery, of the army. When, however, they are used
to supplement the work of the lighter natures, as, for instance, when
6-inch guns are used for counter-battery work, or when the 12-inch
FIELD ARTILLERY NorEs. 143
and 15-inch howitzers are employed to destroy extra strong points
in the enemy’s trench system, or to bombard ‘villages close behind
the line, they should usually be combined in the same command as
the other guns or howitzers employed on the same task.
9. COORDINATION.
An important part of the artillery plan is the coordination of the
different artillery commands. In a corps this will mean several
divisional artilleries and the heavy artillery; in an army the artillery
of the different corps and any heavy artillery which may be retained
under the direct control of the major general, royal artillery, of the
army. It will include the measures necessary to insure cooperation
and to avoid any possibility of misunderstanding as to their respect-
ive zones and tasks; it will provide for the possibility of bringing
heavy concentrations of fire on to particular areas if required; for
cases where the heavy artillery of one corps can with advantage
engage targets in front of another; and also for the fullest possible
use of enfilade fire, the value of which for technical as well as tac-
tical reasons is explained in the note on “Close shooting in the
field” (No. 1 of this series).
10. AIR OBSERVATION.
Under modern conditions a great deal of the work of the artillery
must always depend upon the assistance of the royal flying corps,
although the actual requirements will vary according to the extent
to which direct observation is possible. It is the duty of the artillery
commander to formulate his demands in each case, and to include in
his artillery plan the arrangements decided upon; in some cases the
arrangement of the guns may be decided by‘ the number of aero-
planes which can operate simultaneously upon the front of attack.
It is essential that the observers allotted to artillery work should be
placed at the entire disposal of the artillery during the period of
registration, as well as for the actual bombardment. Close personal
touch between observers and battery commanders is the secret of
success.
On the actual day of the attack, and during the subsequent days’
fighting, the. officer directly responsible for the counter-battery work
in each corps must have an observer constantly in the air. This
will require at least four machines in addition to those required as
escort to prevent interference with the air observers by hostile
aeroplanes. A machine should also be at the disposal of the general
officer commanding the artillery of the corps, ready to go up, at once
to obtain any special information he may require.
144 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
The kite balloon sections will be allotted to artillery commands.
The important point to bear in mind in connection with these is that
for balloon observation an intimate knowledge of the country is the
first element of success. Any change of area should therefore be
avoided.
III.-—THE PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS.
11. DISTRIBUTION.
A thorough understanding of the work to be done, and of the time
at which it is to be done, is essential to‘ the success of the artillery
preparation, and subsequent action’. The work to be done must
first be divided amongst the subordinate artillery commands, e. g.,
in the case of a corps between the different divisional artilleries and
the heavy artillery. These subordinate commanders then allot
their tasks and zones to their brigades, and the brigade commanders
to their batteries.
Positions will have to be found for the large number of extra
guns which will be required for an offensive operation of any size,
as well as probably for many of those already in action, whose
positions have been selected with a view to defense. ' Every effort
should be made to place the artillery supporting the attack as far
forward as possible, so as to‘ avoid any unnecessary changes of position
during the course of operations, since these must always involve
difliculties in connection with registration and ammunition supply. '
Every precaution must be taken to conceal the fact that new posi-
tions are being prepared.
The allotment of observing stations will generally be found a still
more difiicult problem, for the expansion required will be very great
and fresh stations can not be found in a hurry. The importance of
a systematic selection and preparation of observing stations can not
be exaggerated.
12. RECONNAISSANCE.
All the above require a very careful reconnaissance both of the
enemy’s position and of the ground available, and with this object
it'is of the greatest importance .that the various artillery commanders
should get into touch at the earliest moment with the ‘commanders
of the infantry whose attacks they are to prepare and support.
Their reconnaissances must be made in conjunction with the infantry
officers, and the latter must also examine the ground from the
artillery observing stations. And this joint reconnaissance on the
ground must be combined with a joint study of air photographs,
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 145
and of all other information as to the enemy’s defenses in their
common zones of action, as described in paragraph 4. It is only
by such means that each arm can get to understand the requirements
of‘the other.
13. REGISTRATION.
The value of exact and careful registration before a close and rapid
bombardment is obvious. This registration, equally with the recon-
naissance, must be carried out in close touch with the infantry as
far as it is concerned with the enemy’s defenses; and this will insure
that the reconnaissance has resulted in a mutual understanding.
The longer the period over which the registration can be spread
the better, and in this as in every other way possible artillery com-
manders must endeavor to avoid giving any indication to the enemy
as regards the points of attack. The allotment of observing stations
and of aeroplane observers during this period will require very
careful attention. It must be remembered that even when direct
observation is possible, the assistance of an air observer may often
result in considerable saving in ammunition.
14. PROTECTION.1
It is incumbent upon the artillery to take every possible precau-
tion to prevent the enemy’s fire from interfering with the execution
of the task required of them. This involves making observing sta-
tions, battery commanders’ posts, telephone dugouts, and gun
emplacements as far as possible shellproof. During ordinary trench
warfare observing parties can usually move if their station is shelled,
and detachments can similarly be withdrawn from the guns; and
it is therefore often forgotten that such procedure is incompatible
with the support of an infantry attack, when the guns must be
fought regardless of the enemy’s fire. Unless proper protection has
been provided for the observers as well as for the guns, the attempt
to do so will only result in casualties to personnel and materiel,
and consequent failure of the artillery to render the support to which
the infantry are entitled.
15. AMMUNITION SUPPLY .
The arrangements for the supply of ammunition requife very care-
ful consideration, for it is of the first importance that nothing should
interfere with the movements of the infantry. During the prelimi-

1 Details regarding the methods of protecting observing stations, gun emplacements,
etc., are given in the note on “Artillery holding the line” (Not in this series).
98508 °—17———10
146 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
nary bombardment there will be considerable traffic connected with
the moving up of the infantry, and it is therefore advisable to have
the ammiuiition required for this bombardment with the guns pre-
vious to its commencement. But this is not the crux of the problem.
The real difficulties will commence on the night after the attack.
The roads will then be blocked with reinforcements, ammunition,
and supplies going up for the infantry, and with ambulances coming
back; and the great object is to avoid adding to the congestion during
this period. Every artillery unit should therefore have with it on
the morning of the assault, in addition to the full establishment in its
echelons, whatever ammunition it is estimated will be spent on that
and the following day. It is not necessary that all this ammunition
should be actually with the guns,1 but it must be so placed that it
can be brought up to the guns without interfering with the traffic
connected with the support of the infantry. The ammunition so
“dumped ” must be Well protected from fire and Weather.
16. COMMUNICATIONS.2
Previous to an offensive operation it will be necessary to provide
the requisite communications for a much larger force of artillery than
will normally be engaged in holding the line, and this requires very
careful organization under army and corps supervision. The actual '
communications to be established in each case must depend upon the
organization of the artillery. They will include, in addition to the
ordinary framework in the Way of command posts and observing
stations, the communications required by the higher artillery com-
manders. These latter will be laid by the signal service, but it is
essential that such circuits should be kept quite distinct from the
general system. The ordinary telephone exchanges, however useful
during trench warfare, are quite unsuited for artillery fighting com-
munications during offensive operations, when all the Wires-will be in
use at the same time.
It is impossible to take too many precautions to avoid the interrup—
tion of communication. In addition to protecting the telephone
wires as far as this is possible, preparations must be made for the rapid
opening of alternative means of communication. Visual signaling is
the most important of these, and stations should be selected and
established. Possible points in the enemy’s lines should also be

1It must, however, be remembered that in the ease of heavy artillery the physical
strain of working the guns is very severe, and that relief detachments should be able
to rest, and not be employed on the heavy work of bringing up ammunition.
2 Details regarding the methods of laying communications are given in the note on
“Artillery holding the line” (Not in this series).
FIELD ARTILLEEY NOTES. 147
selected berorehand, so that, after the attack has succeeded, inter-
mediate observers may know where to look for signals. The estab-
lishment of central stations from which messages can be sent on by
telephone will prove of great assistance.
Short range Wireless sets may sometimes be used Where visual sig-
naling is impossible, but in such cases reliance Will usually have to
‘be placed on orderlies, either on foot or on bicycle. Here, again,
arrangements must be made in advance so that everyone may know
what to do when the timg comes. »
, a » :11» r;
IV~.—'-THE PREPARATroN or THE ATTACK.
17. OBJECT OF THE PRELnfnNApY BOMBARDMENT.
The preliminary bombardment is designed to achieve a certain
purpose, namely, to enable the infantry to enter and penetrate the
enemy’s position; for this his works and the obstacles protecting
them must be adequately destroyed, and his morale shaken. The
extent of the ground to be bombarded will depend upon the objec-
tive assigned to the attack. It will in all cases include, in addition
to the destruction of the enemy’s front-line system on the front to
be assaulted, the next line in rear, and all communication trenches
leading from it toward the front line. Certain areas in rear may,
‘ however, be deliberately left untouched, while the communication
trenches are heavily bombarded, with the object of inducing the
enemy to use this ground for bringing up reinforcements; with the
same object it is generally advisable not to shell reserve billets during
this period. The trenches, both front line and support, for several
hundred yards to either flank, according to the lie of the ground and
the trace of the works, must be dealt with as heavily and effectively
as the front of attack itself, and all salients within 1,200 yards from
which flanking fire could be brought to bear must receive drastic
treatment.
18. ACCURACY OF FIRE.1
The proximity of the opposing lines, and the necessity for destroy-
ing definite points in the enemy’s lines, demand a meticulous
accuracy on the part of the artillery never previously contemplated.
The various steps necessary to ensure this are detailed in the note on
“Close Shooting in the Field,” and in order to allow of attention to
these it is advisable to arrange for periodical pauses in the bombard-
ment. During these pauses the fire should be checked by a few
rounds on calibration points, equipment carefully inspected, and
any slight repairs effected. Such pauses also serve to clear the air

1 See the note on “ Close shooting in the field ” (N o. 2 of this series).
148 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
for observing officers, besides steadying the nerves of all concerned.
They can well be combined with the arrangements for deceiving the
enemy referred to in paragraph 22.
But the possibility of danger to our own infantry has also to be
considered. The advisability of withdrawing infantry from their
trenches during a bombardment depends in each case on the local
conditions. If the trenches are good, and the men do not put their
heads up, they may be safer in the front trenches than crowded'in
support trenches, which are often hea Wsghlelled directly ourbom-
bardment opens—the nearer they’a're to'vhosktilefinfantry the safer
they are from hostile shells. At the same time the effect of one of
our own shell dropping in a crowded trench, or among men creeping
forward during the final bombardment, may be disastrous. The
“error of the gun” must be realized; and it must be remembered
that any attempt to reduce the danger by establishing a “mean
point of impact” beyond the objective will seriously, diminish the
effect of the fire.
The duty of the artillery commander is to make these points clear
to the general officer commanding; it is for the latter to decide
whether the circumstances justify incurring the risks.
19. FORWARD GUNS.
In some cases guns dug in, actually in, or_ close to, the front line
trenches, may prove of great value for special purposes, such as for
making a breach in the hostile parapets, or for knocking out machine
guns. Provided time is available, experience shows that field
guns can be got into. almost any position, and that-their fire at such ,
short ranges produces a very marked effect. The methods to be
employed will vary in every case, but a description of those em-
ployed on one occasion, when the conditions were particularly
diflicult, is given in Appendix B, as an illustration of the way in
which such a problem should be faced. The secret of success lies
in the most careful attention to detail. Unless every possible
precaution is taken the gun and detachment may both be placed
ho-rs de combat before they have effected their purpose. Although
there is no doubt that their presence has a great moral effect, their
use must not be overdone, \and they should not open fire until just
before the assault.
' 20. NIGHT FIRING.
As the bombardment proceeds, it is very important that the enemy
should be prevented from repairing the damage done to his trenches
and wire entanglements. The duty of keeping these under fire will
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 149
usually devolve upon the divisional artillery, but the infantry must
be called upon’ to assist with rifle and machine-gun fire, especially
at night. Night firing on the enemy’s defenses may also form part
of the program of bombardment with the object of shaking his
morale; but this will require careful arrangement so as to avoid
drawing fire when our own infantry are engaged in reliefs. Roads
and approaches in rear- of the enemy’s position must, in any case, be
subjected to artillery fire at night to prevent the bringing up of
ammunition and supplies, and to cause casualties in reliefs. If this
is carefully arranged, it may be expected to give important material '
as well as moral results. In view of the continuous nature of the
work required of the artillery by these and other duties, it is essen-
tial to arrange that all ranks may get the requisite amount of sleep
and rest. 7
21. DURATION OF THE BOMBARDMENT.
The time required to destroy the obstacles depends upon their
nature and extent, upon the number of fire units available, and upon
the facilities for observation. If the fire is to be deliberately con-
ducted with accurate observation, so that the full effect can be
obtained, the time required can be calculated with considerable
accuracy—with the one exception that, where air observation is
required, all depends upon the Weather. Shortening the period
may give the advantage of surprise, and may prevent the enemy
bringing up more artillery to meet the attack. On the other hand,
it will entail a much heavier expenditure of ammunition of the
heavier natures,1 and a short bombardment, however intense, may
not have the same effect on the enemy’s morale as the protracted
strain of some days’ exposure to constant shell fire, particularly if
during this period his communications are adequately blocked.
Judging from the duration of the preliminary bombardments in the
most important offensive operations during the past year,2 it can
not be said that the high road to success lies either in a short “hurri-
cane” attack or in a protracted bombardment. The duration and
character of the bombardment must primarily depend upon the
strength of the enemy’s works, and the artillery available for their
attack, but many other factors must be considered by the general
officer commanding the force, with whom the decision must rest.
It is the duty of the artillery commander to place before him the
technical considerations involved.

1 Shortening the period, will considerably reduce the amount of ammunition——
chiefly field artillery—expended on preventing the repair of damaged works, and
the bringing up of supplies and ammunition.
2 See Appendix (J.
150 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
22. CHARACTER or THE BOMBARDMENT.
Whatever the decision on this point the program of bombard-
ment must be so arranged as to keep the enemy in uncertainty as to
when the actual assault is coming. The German is accustomed to
being drilled all his life. If, therefore, it is possible during the
preliminary bombardment to drill him until he has become thor-
oughly accustomed to a certain procedure, and then, when the time
comes, to adopt an entirely different one, there will be a vei‘y good
chance of disorganizing his arrangements. Again, if he can be
induced by a burst of intense fire followed by a “lift,” to man his
parapets, it should be possible to inflict serious losses by judiciously
timed shrapnel fire; and by the repetition of such tactics it may be
hoped to make him chary of leaving his shelters. Whether when
the assault is actually to be delivered it should be preceded by a
burst of fire of the greatest possible intensity is a matter on which
there has been a gradual change of opinion. Under the present
conditions of trench warfare such fire can not be expected to cause
any great effect, and it may just give the enemy the warning which
he desires. The most important point is to avoid giving any indi-
cation of the intention to assault until the first line trenches have
been gained. Generally speaking, therefore, it is better to keep up
fire of a medium intensity up to the moment of assault, and then
not to make any sudden pause or lift. In some cases success has
followed an assault delivered during a period of absolute silence.
23. PROGRESS OF THE BOMBARDMENT.
During the preliminary bombardment it is the duty of the artil-
lery commander to watch closely the progress of the work of des-
truction, and to make any modifications in the allotment of guns
and ammunition which he may consider necessary to ensure the
completion of the work. To assist him in this, he must arrange for
the effect of the fire on the enemy’s works to be continually observed
by artillery officers and aeroplane observers, and must also be in
constant communication with the infantry commanders concerned.
A careful comparison of successive aeroplane photographs will be
found to afford valuable indications.
In some cases an attack must be launched at a prearranged time,
whatever the cost, and the responsibility of the artillery commander
is then limited to doing his best to have the preparation as complete
as possible by that time. But when this is not the case, it is the duty
of the artillery commander to inform the general officer command-
ing if he considers the attack should be deferred in order to allow
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 151
of further artillery preparation. The completeness of such prepa-
ration must, however, always be a relative term, and many Consid-
erations other than the purely artillery one must influence the de-
cision. It is a matter which most vitally affects the infantry, and
it is one, therefore, on which the opinion of infantry officers must
carry great weight.ll
While, therefore, it is the duty of the commander of the artillery
to keep the general oflicer commanding informed of the progress of
the demolition, and to state whether he considers the attack should
be postponed to allow of further bombardment, the decision as to
the completion or otherwise of the artillery preparation must rest
with the general officer commanding himself.
Vp.--THE SUPPORT OF THE ATTACK.
24. COVERING THE ASSAULT.
In trench warfare the arrangements for covering the actual as-
sault are comparatively simple, for, owing to the proximity of the
lines, the infantry will in most cases start from within assaulting
distance. All that is required is that during the few minutes which
will elapse while they are covering the short space between the re-
spective lines, all points in the enemy’s defenses from which fire
can be brought to bear are so smothered with shell as to render
this impossible.2 This will mean the whole front of the attack,
and up to as much as 800 to 1,200 yards to either flank, according
to the lie of the ground and the trace ofrthe trenches. It is above
all important that any suspected machine-gun emplacements,
which have not been absolutely destroyed by the preliminary
bombardment, should be subjected to constant fire, for one machine
gun unattended to may jeopardize the success of the whole opera-
tlon' 25. ISOLATING THE ATTACK.
In addition to directly supporting the attack, it is the duty of the
artillery to isolate it, and so allow the infantry to consolidate their
position undisturbed. For this purpose, after the attack is launched,
heavy fire must be kept up on the immediate flanks and on the areas
in front. It is particularly important to prevent the enemy’s bombers
working along the trenches from the flanks, and field guns dug in at

1Beiore the artillery attempt to cut wire, infantry patrols should be sent out to
report on the nature and extent of the wire, looking especially for low trip wires where
the grass is long. They should also report on the progress of the work of destruction.
2 Except when this is purposely omitted in the hope of effecting a complete sur-
prise—vide par. 22.
152 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
close range, as described in paragraph 19, have in some cases proved
particularly effective for blocking these. Meanwhile the fire on the
immediate front of attack must be gradually lifted. The “lifts”
want careful timing, and should be very gradual, of the nature of a
“creep” arranged to suit the pace at which the infantry are likely to
make progress. Fire from medium howitzers can of course be kept
up after that of the heavier natures, and from field howitzers later
still, while that of field guns need not be lifted for a minute or two
after the howitzers. Units must be told off to fire on all communi-
cation trenches, and other possible lines of approach, and on cross
roads, and places where troops might be massed for counterattack.
It is especially important that arrangements should be made to
cover the whole ‘front of the new line during the night after the
attack. For the second night these may have to be changed accord-
ing to information obtained from observers and air photographs
during the day.
26. BARRAGES.
The artillery must be prepared to make a barrageright across the
front in case the enemy attempts a counter attack in force, and
batteries should be retained “in observation” for this purpose and
not employed on other tasks. Barrage fire must be very carefully
regulated, and it must be realized that it is out of the question to
keep it up for an indefinite length of time. Where the ground is
under observation it is not necessary to fire until the enemy is actu-
ally seen advancing; where the ground can not be seen from the
artillery observing station‘ a slow rate of fire with occasional short
rapid bursts at irregular intervals will probably have the desired
effect. To attempt to keep up intense fire for any great length of
time may only lead to the guns being short of ammunition at the
moment when the attack actually comes.
27. ENFILADE FIRE.
Enfilade fire is of particular value in the support of an infantry
assault, not only on account of its great effect, but also because of the
accuracy with which it can be used. If the guns placed in position
for this purpose are anchored and registered accurately on the
German front line when at extreme traverse, the fire can be brought
back slowly as the infantry assault by simple turns of the traversing
wheel. Guns so placed can also be used to form a “cross-barrage,”
that is to say, one formed by guns firing at right angles to one another; '
whatever route is taken in the endeavor to pass through such a
barrage some of the fire must come in from a flank. It must be
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 153
remembered, however, that enfilade fire must be used with caution
in supporting an attack, for if it is extended over ground which the
observing officer can not see there may be danger of hitting bodies
of our own infantry beyond those which the guns are supporting.
28. ADVANCE OF ‘THE ARTILLERY.
If the object of the attack is to reach the enemy’s second line,
it is necessary that special arrangements should be made for support-
ing the further movement of the infantry. Where artillery can
advance by daylight, guns must be pushed forward for this purpose,
supported by the fire of those remaining in action. The units to be
pushed forward must be told off beforehand, so as to allow of their
,making every possible preparation1 for surmounting the difficulties
they will meet with. The probable order of advance should also be
made out, and the responsibility for commencing the movement
clearly defined. Positions and observing stations must be recon-
noitered and allotted and it may sometimes be possible to prepare
emplacements, but these must be carefully concealed. Sections or
single guns may sometimes be employed in this way when it would
be impossible to send forward a complete battery, the section com-
mander being placed under the orders of the .commander of the
battalion he is supporting.
Field howitzers are especially useful for the close support of the
infantry, as they can be placed under cover in positions where field
guns could not clear the crest, but it will often be necessary to move
forward the medium guns and howitzers of the heavy artillery as
well. I
Often, however, the country will not allow of guns being moved
forward by daylight. In such cases the guns required to support the
advance to the second line must be dug in beforehand in or near our
front line. If these guns do not open fire until the infantry have
reached their first objective, it is quite possible that they will be
able to maintain their positipn.
In the case of a corps attacking on a narrow front, with two divi—
sions in front line and one division in reserve, it would be a suitable
arrangement to use the artillery of the reserve division for this pur-
pose. This latter division would then have the support of its own
artillery ‘for the attack of the enemy’s second line.

1 This will include making exits from positions, improving roads, preparing port-
able bridges, and arranging for the carriage of the tools and materials required for the
preparation of the new positions. For the latter purpose ordinary netting is easily
carried and will be found very useful for temporary screens.
154 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
29. COOPERATION WITH THE INFANTRY.
The necessity of maintaining the closest possible touch with the
infantry throughout the preliminary arrangements and the artillery
preparation of the attack has been already insisted upon. In the
support of the attack this close cooperation becomes still more
essential, and at the samev time far more difficult. Information as
to the progress of the attack coming through infantry brigade and
divisional headquarters will rarely reach artillery commanders in
time to be of use. At the same time, to enable the infantry to suc-
ceed, the continued support of the artillery is required, and this
can only be given if the artillery are continually in touch with
their progress and can direct fire at once on any points which are
impeding their advance.1 \It is, therefore, incumbent on the ar-
tillery to take every possible step to maintain this touch, and the
result of experience shows that the following arrangements are
generally the most satisfactory.
30. POSITION OF ARTILLERY COMMANDERS.
In the first place, the artillery command posts must be carefully
selected. Those of the commanders of the artillery of corps and
divisions will usually be with the commanders of the formations to
which they belong. In cases where a corps commander decides to
place the whole of the artillery of the corps under the executive
command of the general officer commanding the artillery of the corps,
it will be the duty of the latter to maintain the closest touch with
the commander of the attacking infantry, and the posts of divisional
artillery commanders will be placed where they can best control
their commands.
The work of the heavy artillery is so intimately connected with
that of the divisional artillery that it is advisable wherever possible
to establish the command posts of heavy artillery commanders in
the closest proximity to those of divisional artillery. This is also
the best way to insure the heavy artillery commanders being kept
informed of the movements of the infantry.
Although field artillery brigade commanders will be in many cases
at first with infantry brigadiers, experience shows that any attempt
on their part to move forward with the latter only leads to the inter-
ruption of their communications with their batteries. Their place
is where they can best control the fire of their batteries.

1 Cases have indeed occurred where the obstacle to advance has been the fire of our
own artillery, when owing to the completeness of the artillery preparation the attack
has been carried through with a rapidity never contemplated.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 155
Battery commanders must be where they can best see the general
situation.‘ Once the attack has been launched this changes so rap-
idly that there is often no time to receive orders from higher com—
manders, and they must be prepared to act instantaneously on their
own initiative, of course informing their brigade commander of the
action taken.
31. OBSERVING AND LIAISON OFFICERS.
Both brigade and battery commanders will require the assistance
of “observing officers” and “liaison officers.” The primary duty
of the_ former is to observe the fire of their units, of the latter to
maintain touch between the infantry and the artillery supporting
them, and to call for artillery support as desired by the infantry
commander to whom they are attached. Both classes will require
their own means of communication, and forward observing officers
must be provided with personnel and equipment to allow of their
moving their positions.1 Artillery brigade commanders will in-
variably attach a ‘ ‘liaison officer ” to the headquarters of any infantry
brigade whose attack they are supporting. This officer must be a
man of experience and resource.
Each battery commander will usually have a “forward observing
officer” to observe the fire from a forward position, to keep him
informed of the general situation, and to send back all information
possible. In selecting their position these officers must remember
that their business is to assist their battery commanders—not to join
in the infantry fight—and that their information is of no use unless
they can get it back in time. Their best position will usually be the
farthest point forward to which good communication has been opened
up; normally battalion headquarters. Probable observing stations
in the enemy’s lines will also have been previously determined and
allotted, and sections from these to points in the second line made
from the map to test their field of view; and these will be occupied
by forward observing officers as soon as the progress of the attack
permits. .
But as a general rule, by far the best, quickest, and most accurate
information has been obtained from intermediate observing stations,
so placed as to be far enough removed from the turmoil of the attack
and yet sufficiently far forward to command a clear view of the ground
over which it is to take place. Where ground allows, one such
observing station (at least) should be established by each brigade.

1 The following has been found a suitable party: 1 oflicer, 1 noncommissioned
officer, 2 telephonists, 2 telephones, 2 small reels of D. 1 cable, 2 perisoopes, visual
signaling apparatus.
156 _ FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
As explained in paragraph 2, the possibility of obtaining such observ-
ing stations is a point of first importance in forming the original plan
of attack.
- _ 32. TIME-TABLE.
Circumstances may, however, necessitate the attack being carried
out where facilities for observation are bad; and although various
means, such as rockets, flares, flags, etc. , have been tried for indicating
the progress of the infantry in such cases, none have so far proved en-
tirely successful. . It is often, therefore, necessary to have recourse to
a ‘ ‘time-table, ” and it is then the duty of the artillery commander to
draw this up. N o definite rules for this can be given, except that it
is necessary always to work to a “zero” which can be changed up to
the last moment. An example of a time-table actually used in a
recent operation is given in Appendix D, but this must be taken as a
guide only, since circumstances will be different in every case. It
must always be remembered, too, that the time-table depends on the
movements of the infantry, and that whatever care is taken in its
preparation it can hardly be expected that their movements will be
so regular as to agree throughout with any forecast. A time-table
has often worked well during the very early phases after the assault,
but the time must come when it can no longer be followed, and all
ranks must be prepared for this. It is‘ important that infantry
officers should be acquainted-with the time-table.
VI.—-GAS AND SMOKE.
33. USE OF GAS AND SMOKE.
Gas and smoke may be used in different ways in an attack. In
some cases gas clouds are projected from cylinders, in others smoke
and gas bombs may be fired from trench mortars, or gas shells fired
by the artillery. Any one of these different methods may be
resorted to, or they may be used in combination, but since gas and
smoke bombs do not form part of the equipment of the trench mor-
tars manned by the artillery, it is with the gas shells only that the
artillery is directly concerned. The use of .gas and ‘smoke in other
forms, however, may affect the action of the artillery, and must
therefore be referred to.here. The first point to remember is that
owing to the possibility of the use of gas or smoke having to be
abandoned at the last moment on account of changes in the weather,
no abatement in the thoroughness of the artillery preparation should
be made on account of the‘ fact that the use of these aids forms part
of thegeneral plan of attack. They will only affect the action of the
artillery on the day of attack. -
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. ' 157
34. COMBINATION OF ARTILLERY FIRE WITH GAS OR SMOKE.
The idea that high-explosive shell should not be used against
those parts of the enemy’s line on which a gas attack is directed, for
fear of dispersing the gas, may be dismissed. Far from reducing the
effect of the gas, shells bursting among it may be expected to increase
it by forming eddies which will allow of the gas sinking into the
enemy’s trenches, dugouts, etc. There is, therefore, no reason to
reduce the high-explosive fire of the artillery on account of the use
of gas. Shrapnel fire may also be expected to be very effective in
combination with smoke and gas, as these will probably cause the
enemy to man his parapets, and in some cases to come out into the
open.
The use of smoke, however, adds to the difficulties of the attacking
artillery, since it interferes with observation of fire and also of the
progress of their infantry. When smoke is used on the front of attack
the artillery must therefore work to a timetable, the disadvantages
of which have already been pointed out in paragraph 32.
As regards effect on the enemy’s artillery it is impossible to inter-
fere with their ability to “barrage” our front-line trenches, but the
smoke will prevent their knowing the time and point of attack, and
therefore will interfere with their power to concentrate upon it. It
will also interfere with their power to bring fire on our infantry once
they are through the front-line barrage, as it will conceal their
progress from the enemy’s observers.
35. DESCRIPTION OF GAS SHELL.
It is, however, in the use of gas shell that the artillery is chiefly
concerned.
The body of these shell is filled with a chemical liquid (S. K.)
which is scattered over the ground as soon as the shell bursts and
then slowly vaporizes. The vapor produces intense irritation of
the eyes and respiratory organs. It is not poisonous, but those
handling the shell, especially in the case of one showing a suspicion
of leakage, should be provided with protective goggles, and should
at all costs avoid rubbing their eyes with their hands.
The bursting charge is only sufficient to open the shell, so that the
penetrative effect of the splinters is very much less than with the
ordinary shell.
as. ACTION OF GAS SHELL.
The vapor of S. K. is seven times heavier than air, and will there-
fore remain close to the ground, filling trenches, dugouts, cellars,
covered gun emplacements, woods, and hollows. The radius of
158 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
action of this type of shell depends almost entirely on atmospheric
conditions, especially wind.
The shells will produce their minmum effect—
When there is a strong wind blowing.
During heavy rain (light rain is no serious disadvantage).
When the temperature is low, near freezing point.
The most favorable circumstances for use are when there is—
A total absence of wind, or a light breeze preferably blowing
toward the enemy.
Great humidity of the atmosphere; the more saturated the
atmosphere the more marked will be the-result.
The effect is particularly marked in valleys, or small woods, and
in forests the shells may be employed even when a strong wind is
blowing outside.
In the open, on a damp and muggy day with little wind, the effect
may last for six hours or more, whereas on a dry, clear day, with a
breeze, it will probably not persist for more than 30 minutes. In
woods, buildings, or covered emplacements, the effect may be felt
for as long as 24 hours.
37. GAS BARRAGES.
Gas shells may be employed against a position which it is desired
to deny to the enemy for a certain length of time, or to create a bar-
rage through which the enemy’s troops can not pass. To get the
best effect it is always advisable to select ground which favors the
use of gas, such as, for instance, a valley, wood, or village. If a gas
' barrage has to be formed in the open it should have a depth of from
150 to 200 y rds. It must always be borne in mind that the fire
may have the‘ effect of preventing our own troops from occupying the
ground for some hours, or even, in some cases, of traversing it.
38. COUNTER-BATTERY WORK.
The chief value of gas shells is, however, for counter-battery work,
for which they possess certain decided advanatges over the ordinary
shell. The gas sinks into the dugouts; it affects the whole of the
personnel; and most important of all, it renders the position unten-
able for some time. Even if efficient protective masks are available,
these will almost certainly considerably interfere with the service
of the guns. Moreover, by tak'ng advantage of the wind, effect
may be obtained, even if the position of the guns has not been
located with the accuracy that is required for obtaining direct hits
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 159
on gun emplacements, and the effect will be most marked when the
guns are concealed in woods, houses, etc., where they are least vul-
nerable to ordinary attack. Gas shell may also often be used with
great advantage against artillery observing stations.
39. METHOD OF USING GAS SHELL.
The quantity of vapor of S. K. necessary to produce an effective
cloud can only be obtained by firing a large number of shell, with
the 4.5-inch, cast-iron shell at least one round for every two yards
of front. The fire should be rapid until the necessary cloud has been
produced, after which a slow rate will be suflicient to maintain it.
Even when the gas shell contain some smoke-producing substance,
ranging should be carried out with the ordinary shell, so as to give
the enemy no warning of what is coming. To cover a zone really
efficiently the fire must be methodically distributed, and the fol-
lowing extract from a captured German document is a good example
of how this may be done:
if‘ if * -X- *
“The four guns of a battery are so placed that with parallel lines
of fire they will cover a front of 50 meters with their fire. A series
of four rounds per 50 meters of front will be fired. The area to be
covered is then searched in zones 50 meters wide and 25 meters deep,
so that no gaps are left. The barrage should first of all be estab-
lished along its whole width and the range should not be increased
until this has been effected ” (see fig. 1).
FlG.l
BATTERY B. BATTERY A.
Direction of Fire
, -5- - “2..-
~ -8..- .__- ..-.. -.._.-
4..


The numerals represent the sequence of the Salvos.
160 ~ FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
FIG. 2
Bat‘u‘ry A.


\
\
\


|
l
\b
Batt'ery B.
I \\
l \
I \
\v s '
Direction of Fire.
4: :5
4m




IS 16


I3 I4-
The sequence in which salvos are fired will depend on the direc-
tion of the wind, the nature of the hostile positions included in the
area to be shelled, and also on the intentions of our own troops.
With a west wind, for instance, the salvos will begin from the west;
if our infantry intends to advance later towards the area in question,
our salvos will begin on the near edge of the area.
“Calculations should be indicated on a diagram, the width and
depth of which are proportional to those of'the target. Thus figure 2
represents a barrage fire against a ravine situated obliquely to the
angle of fire.
“In order to retain control of the fire, even during the procedure
of searching, the artillery commander has a similar diagram, which
enables him to change rapidly the method of searching in accordance
with either his own observations or the reports he receives. He has
only to indicate the numbers of the salvos (omit certain salvos or
else order a new series at given points).”
40. COMBINATION OF SHRAPNEL WITH GAS SHELL.
The combination of shrapnel with gas shell, if judiciously used,
may be expected to prove very effective. For instance, if troops
concentrated in villages, woods, or assembly trenches are being
attacked with gas shells, the ground in rear and on the flanks should
be swept with shrapnel at the moment when it may be judged that
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. ' 161
the gas will have had time to drive them from their cover. The
same procedure should usually ‘be followed in counter-battery work-
VIL—CONCLUSION.
41. COUNTER-BATTERY WORK, WIRE CUTTING, AND TRENCH
MORTARS.
In the above little reference has been made to counter-battery
work, to wire cutting, or to the use of trench mortars. This is because
these are all fully dealt with in separate notes, Nos. 3, 5, and 6 of
this series.
42. CONCLUSION.
In conclusion, it only remains to say that while experience points
to the procedure outlined in this note as being the best .calculated to
secure success, the details will vary with every case. Before form-
ing their “artillery plan,” on the soundness of which the success or
failure of the whole operation may so greatly depend, it is incumbent
on artillery commanders, while giving due Weight to local circum-
stances, to consider carefully the principles here laid down for their
guidance. But, however complete the plan may be, it is only by
the most careful attention on the part of all ranks to every possible
detail during preparation, and by the exercise of discipline, self-
sacrifice, and a determination to win during execution, that success
can be assured.
APPENDIX A.
ESTIMATE OF AMMUNITION REQUIRED.
The following notes will be of assistance to artillery commanders
in making their estimates:
7 (i) For wire cutting the requirements are given in the note on
the subject (No. 5 of this series).
(ii) For the destruction of the enemy’s defenses, a German memo-
randum dated September, 1915, gives the expenditure at 1% rounds
of heavy and medium howitzer; 1% rounds of field howitzer; 1 round
of trench mortar per yard for an attack on a limited front for the
capture of a definite position without a more comprehensive objec-
tive. The French estimate is 3 rounds of heavy howitzer or trench
mortar per yard for each line of front attacked. .
On the‘21st to 24th September the first army fired 1% rounds of
heavy and medium howitzer, 2 rounds of field howitzer, per yard,
on a front of 12,000 yards and an average depth of 1,000 yards. This,
98508°-—17———11
162 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
however, only enabled strong points to be dealt with and did not
admit of a thorough bombardment. At least double would have
been required if gas and smoke had not been relied on.
A more accurate estimate is obtained by taking the actual extent
of trenches to be destroyed (whether first line, support trenches, sec-
ond line, etc.), and allowing one-third round of heavy howitzer and
1 round of medium howitzer, or 2 rounds of medium trench mortar
per yard. '
(iii) For counter-battery work: The French estimate 400 rounds
(heavy) to silence each German battery. We have never been able
to make a close estimate of the amount required for counter-battery
work, since it depends on the number of the enemy’s batteries which
may be “active,” and the extent of their “activity,” and on most
of our front it is practically impossible to make any reliable estimate
of the number of the enemy’s guns. Experience, however, shows
that a very fair approximation to the expenditure will be obtained
by allowing 100 rounds per gun per day for all guns allotted to counter-
battery work.
(iv) For the miscellaneous tasks of artillery our experience agrees
very well with the French estimate of 150 to 200 rounds per gun per
day. The following number of rounds per gun per day can con-
veniently be fired:
Fieldguns...--....-...........--...-..-...--..-. 200
Fieldand mediumhowitzers.....-------.--..-.... 150
Heavy howitzers (8-inch and 9.2-inch)-., . . . . . . . - . 100
On any one day the number of rounds from field guns and howit-
zers can be considerably increased.
APPENDIX B.
EXAMPLE on THE EMPLOYMENT or AN 18-POUNDER GUN IN A FRONT
LINE TRENoH.
No'rE.—-—The following is only intended as an example. The
particular method employed must vary with circumstances in each
case. For instance, on one occasion, where a gun was placed be-
tween 150 and 200 yards from the German trenches, an ordinary
canvas screen was put up just in front of the position selected. The
Germans were allowed to get used to this, and a sandbag emplace-
ment was then built behind it. When the time came for the gun
to open fire the screen was not removed but the gun fired through
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 163
it. In another case it was found when firing a registering round
that the gun could not get at the German parapet without hitting our
own. N 0 gap in our parapet was however made as this might have
invited attention and disclosed the presence of the gun, but on the
day of the attack the infantry were cleared away from that portion
of our trench, and the gun with its first two or three rounds breached
our own parapet, and then dealt successfully with its target.
E XAMPL E .
Preparatory arrangementa—The actual position was finally selected
six days before the attack. It was not exposed to any hostile ob-
serving stations, or to flanking rifle or machine-gun fire. Accurate
measurements of the trench were taken, and a facsimile trench was
dug at the battery wagon line.
In conjunction with an engineer officer, the form of emplacement
was decided upon. The chief point consisted in the provision of a
wooden box, with a sloping hinged front, which was to be built into
the parapet. (See diagram.) The facsimile emplacement was pre-
pared accordingly, the gun placed in it, and gun drill assiduously
practiced (including live shell practice) by the detachment, which
was composed of volunteers. Gun and sights were carefully tested,
and all ammunition to be used was tested for gauge in the bore to
guard against jambs.
As a canal had to be crossed to reach the position a pontoon raft
was prepared to carry the gun, and a thorough reconnaissance of
the whole route was made. A small stream which intervened was
bridged, and ramps were cut out on both banks of the canal.
\Vhen the gun position had been fixed definitely, a back angle was
taken to an aiming point so that the gun could be laid before the
box was opened.
Occupation of the position—Two nights before the day of attack
the gun was driven down to the canal bank, being halted whenever
flares were fired. It was then manhandled and rafted across the
canal, and carefully concealed on the further bank, with its ammuni-
tion placed in a dugout. Infantry assisted in this.
Concurrently, the digging of the emplacement was commenced
under R. E. supervision. Wheel tracks, a foot deep, were cut for
the last 30 yards of the approach to the position to give better cover.
Dugouts were prepared and strengthened for the detachment and
ammunition. The epaulment was completed during the following
day.
164 , FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
The second and final stage was carried out on the night imme-
diately preceding the attack. '
Firstly, the wooden box was inserted into the parapet. To effect
this, the parapet had to be pulled down on a front of about 5 feet;
and to cover this gap, a canvas screen was erected in front. When
placed in position, the box was covered with sandbags and earth
and the parapet rebuilt around it. .
The gun and ammunition were then brought up and placed in
position. Three communication trenches had to be crossed, and
planks were laid for this purpose. They were not filled in, so that
their use by infantry might not be obstructed. In bringing up the
gun a canvas canopy was carried over it, and the detachment was
trained to fall flat whenever a flare went up, dropping the canopy over
the carriage to hide it.
Action—The artillery fire attack opened at 5 a. m. , Covered by
a salvo from a trench mortar battery in action close by, the gun
opened fire and fired its 100 rounds in 9 minutes. The range was
70 yards and the objective was to destroy a T-head and the knife-
rest wire by it. The T-head appeared to be demolished with the
fiftieth round, after which the fire was directed against the knife
rests of wire. The latter were extensively piled up, being taken in
enfilade.
No casualties occurred during the- firing, and, as soon as it was
over, the detachment was withdrawn to cover in its dugout. The
gun was withdrawn on the night following the day of attack in a
similar way and without loss.
8




.-_-
-__.. "fi
-_---'_ r-n-—~
____---—-
M-
- /-_-_-_
f‘
w‘
The thick lines indicate the wooden box in section as placed in the parapet.
At A were the hinges around which the front of the box, AB, swung when pushed
from rear, the remainder of the box did not move.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 165










Box
/ Pole fDpus/r door qben
. M '
- - ' /
Loose made/r 0'00!-
. __ Pole fapusé 0'00,- open
Ill/rye
W
. . BACK V/sw mg?”
PEN'scoPes per/scape . M797 "'8
- s T ‘:7: d‘
- \ \ l // ; :3 6 TE ‘4.: > \
--"""__ . - ; I —-—-~_ I - ': "I 25/52/1222
:1“; l/ \ A: é
*— // \ ‘a t’
M
APPENDIX C.
' Particulars of principal bombardmenls.
Bombardment.
Place. Date. Nation.
Duration. Character.
Neuve Chapelle... March, 1915... British.... 40 minutes-. Intense.
Festubert........- May 9.1915,-.. ...do ..... -- 1 hour ..... -. Do.
Do ......... .. May 16,1915... ...do......- 2days ..... -. Intermittent. Noin-
tense bombard-
ment.
Hooge .......... .. June, 1915..... .-.do ..... .. 6days......- Continuous. Intense
immediately pre-
ceding assault.
Loos ............ .. September, ...do ..... -. 4 days......- Steady bombard-
1915. ment. No intense
bombardment.
Bellewarde .......... ..do ....... .. ...do....... fidays ..... .- Intermittent.
Champagne....... .-...do ....... -. French.... 3days....... Steady bombard-
ment. Not intense
till moment of as
sault.
Vimy Ridge ......... ..do.. . . . ...do....... 5days....... Steady bombard-
ment. Intense at
moment of assault.
Frise ........... .. January, 1916. German... 8hours .... .. Continuous.
Vimy Ridge . . . . . . . . . .. ...do....... 4 hours .... .- Veryintense.
Verdun ......... .. Fggliéuary, ...do....... 1 day........ Do.
The Blnfl ............ ..dd ....... .. British... 4 days....... Surprise attack in
early morning; ar-
121116. 0 fire
3 minutes after as-
o sault. .


166 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
APPENDIX D.
Example of a time table.
[Line to be broken through Q 2 to V 6.]
O—O.lO.

I .
Guns. i’ From—1 To— Objective. Remarks.


One gun, 9.2-inch 0.0 0.10 Fme. Cour d’Avoue Q, Q—Q
howitzer. 10.
Thirty-fifth heavy 0.0 0.10 Road from house 200 yards
battery (one sec- southwest" of la Qumque
tron). Rue to Fme. de Bois tak-
mg houses en route P 14,
P 15 P 13, P 16.
Do ........... . . 0. 0 0.10 From house 80 yards south-
west of P 10 to Fme. (‘our
d’Avoue Fme. de Tou-




tte.
Elgtletn _18-pounder
a emes. - -
Three 13_p0under 0. 0 0. 10 Wire cutting.
batteries.
One 15-pounder 0.0 0.10 Enfilading wire entangle-
battery. ments and trenches in S
‘ 21a, Q 2 to P 10.
Two 15-pounder , 0.0 0.10 Enfilading wire entangle-
batteries. , ments and trenches in S
I 21a, Q 2 to R 7. \
0.10—0.40.
One gun, 9.2-inch 0.10 0.40 Fme. Cour d’Avoue and P Up till 0.45.
howitzer. 13.
Do ___________ . . 0.20 0. 40 Fme. du Bois R 8 ......... . _
Thirty-fifth heavy 0.10 0. 40 Road from house 200 yards
battery (one sec- southwest of la Quinque
tion). Rue to Fme. de Bois, talc-
ing houses en route P 14,
P 15, P 13, P 16.
Do ........... . . 0.10 0. 40 From house 80 yards south-
west of P 10 to Fme. (‘our
d’Avoue Fme. de Tou-
lotte.
Eléevietn _18-pounder
a enes. - -
Three 13_p0under 0.10 0.35 Wire cutting.
batteries.
Do ........... . . 0.35 0.40 Bombardment of trenches
with alternate H. E. and
shrapnel.
One 15-pounder 0.10 0. 40 Enfilading wire entangle-
battery. ments and trenches in S
21a, Q 2 to P 10.
Two 15-pounder 0.10 0.40 Enfilading wire entangle-
batteries. ments and trenches in S
21a Q, 2 to R 7.
Four 6-inch howit- 0.30 0.40 Bombardment of trenches
zer batteries. from Q 5 to V 6, which in-
cludes right flanks.
Four 5-inoh_ howit- -------------------------------------------- - -
zer batteries. . ._ _ , ,
One 45-inch howit- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (From Divlsional Artillery)-
- zer battery.
Do ........... . .
Q p Q a a n Q - n - Q - - u _-

_ u Q - - u - - Q - _ - . n - - - a a - ¢ c u - _ - - - u.
\


FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
167
At 0.40 infantry assault and push on to the line Fme. Cour d’Avoue-
Fme. du Bois. It is assumed that the infantry make good the line
P 8, P 10, Q 12, and the road thence to 1e Tourelle at 1.15.

0.40-1.15.
Guns. From— To— Objective. Remarks.
One gun, 9.2-inch 0. 40 1. 15 Toulotte and post 200 yards
howitzer. south.
Do ........... . . 0. 45 1. 15 Orchard M 9.
Thirty-filth heavy 0. 40 1.00 Barrage from house 200
battery (one sec- yards SW. of 1a Quinque
tion). Rue to Q 17.
1.00 1.15 Fme. de Toulotte.
Do ........... . . 0. 40 1. Barrage Rue de Marais from
M 11 to M 19 and M 20.
One 6-inch how- 0. 40 0. 50 Fme. Cour d’Avoue Q 9—
itzer battery. Q 10.
0. 50 1.05 Moulin d’Eau P 15, P 12,
P 13 P 14.
Do ........... . . 0. 40 0. 50 Fme. du Bois R 8 and com-
munication trench.
0. 50 1. 15- Fme. de Toulotte ......... . .
D0 ........... . . 0. 40 ...... . . Trenches on right flank
fromQ3t0P4andM9,
N 12, N 13, N 14.
Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0. 40 0. 50 Between Fme. Cour d’Avoue
and Fme. du Bois.
0. 50 l. 15 From P 18 to N 16 house and
_ trenches.
One 5-inch now- 0.40 ...... . . Trenches on right flank from
itzer brigade. 3 to P 4.
Do ........... .. 0. 40 1.00 Trench R s, R 9, R 11, R 12,
rigid road from Q 14 to
13.
One 4.5-inch bat- 0. 40 1.00 Communication trenches to
tery. Fme. du Bois, communi-
cation trenches to Fme.
d’Avoue.
Two 18-p o u n d e r 0. 40 1. 15 La Quinque Rue-1e Tour-
brigades. elle Roa .
Chem—p o u n d e r 0. 40 1. 10 Watch left flank and barrage.
briga e.
Do ........... . - 0. 40 1. 10 Watch right flank and bar-
ra 0.
Three 13-pounder 0. 40 ' 1.00 Barrgagela Quinque Rue and
batteries. Rue d’Ouvert if required.
1. 00 1. 15 Mobile reserves in the hands
of G. O. C. 1st division.
One 15- o u n d e r 0.40 1.15 Right flank ............... - -
briga e.





168 '
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
Further advance after 1.15; i. .e., the occupation of the line la
Quinque Rue-1e Tourelle.





Guns. From— To— Objective. Remarks.
' Two guns, 9.2-inch 1.15 1.45 Points M 19, M 20, M 23,_M
howitzers. 25, M 27, M 28, and Lorgies.
Thirty-fifth heavy 1.15 1.45 Lorgies, point 35 Rue du
hatthry (one sec- Marais, M 20, M 19.
ion .
One 6-inch howitzer 1.15 1.35 Rue du Marais, M 9, M 10,
tery. M 11, M 12, M 13, M 14,
15, M 16.
Do ........... .. 1.15 1. 35 N 1721:70 21% 20, M 17 to M 25,
, .
Do ........... .. 1.15 1.45 Lorgies points 1? 32, P 31,
and P 28.
Do ........... .. 1.15 1.45 Houses and trenches from Eventually
P 18 to N 16; trench N 26 Beau Puits.
to P24;pointsN2BandN
21; points N 29, N 30, be-
tween Rue du Mara1s and
Lorgies.
Two 5-inch howit- 1.15 1.30 Trenches at N 6, N 9, N 10,
zer batteries. ' N 11; ints M 9 and M 10.
One and one-third 1.15 ...... .. Under infantry brigadiers- .
4.5-inch batteries. _ _
Two 18 - pounder 1.15 ...... . . Under infantry brigadicrs . . .
brigades (25th
and 39th. .
One 18 - pounder 1.15 ...... . . Lorgies,Pte.Cauchiette,and
brigade (26th). watch left flank.
One .15-pounder 1. 15 ....... . . Barrage from point N 11 Deliberate, un-
brigade. l south 0 12. less rapid
firing re-
quired.
One 4.5-inch how- 1.15 ...... . . Junction of roads ......... . . Second divi-
itzer battery. _ ‘sional artil-
lerg.
One 18 - pounder 1. 15 1.35 Barrage right flank is re- . o.
brigade. quired.

lX.—-NOTES 0N GERMAN ARTILLERY EMPLACEMENTS, 1915.
[Translated from the French]
It is interesting to study the improvements made by the enemy
to his-defensive organizations duIing the first year of trench warfare.
As regards infantry intrenchments, the progress made is known to us
through documents emanating from German sources. As regards
artillery, in the absence of documents, we can obtain accurate data by
means of aerial observation and photographs. We can thus learn the
modifications which the enemy has found necessary to introduce
with the object of misleading us and also of protecting himself
against our fire.
While infantry defenses, exceptwhere necessitated by the nature
and formation of the ground (sand, clay, woods, streams, dunes, etc.),
have been of a uniform type since the commencement of trench
warfare, and very similar in general principle to those laid down
in prewar training manuals, shelters for artillery have been in a
constant state of evolution, .rom a simple screen to the present
huge dugouts, which now appear to be universal.
Artillery works may be classified under the following three types:
(a) Protected batteries (winter of 1914-15).
(b) Dug-in batteries (summer, 1915).
(c) Casemated batteries (winter, 1915-16).
All these types have been observed in use simultaneously, but
the various patterns have been modified as found necessary so as to
bring them into line with the latest types; generally speaking, how-
ever, the German artillery has used these types in the order named
above, and at the present time appears to have decided upon the
third or casemated type. ' 1
Guns were at first placed on the ground level, behind a breast-
work; subsequently they were completely dug in but not covered
over; finally casemates were adopted. This evolution of the gun
emplacement has been partly with the object of sheltering men and
matériel from fire, which has been constantly increasing in violence;
but it would also appear that it is a consequence of a modification
of the principles of artillery employment.
At the beginning of the war the offensive rdle of artillery neces-
sitated frequent changes of target and position; at the present time
169
170 FIELD ARTILLERY no'rss.
the principal mission of the guns is the formation of barrages, which
have become indispensable on' account of the reduction in effectives
employed. We shall see that changes introduced in artillery
defenses correspond exactly to this change in the role of guns.
A. PROTECTED BATTERIES.
By a curious anomaly, while all infantry positions included under-
ground shelters and casemates, the German batteries for a consider-
able time maintained positions generally associated with open
fighting. Such positions, which insured {a rapid withdrawal, were
probably maintained so long as the front of battle remained uncer-
tain. Each gun was protected by a horseshoe-shaped earthwork
(see sketch 1), which secured it against direct hits from low tra-
jectory fire but gave quite insufficient protection against high angle
or shrapnel fire. The gun crew and ammunition were accommodated
in separate dugouts, often a considerable distance from the gun, or
sometimes even in a trench behind the epaulements.
So disposed, a battery had a very wide arc of fire.
This method also allowed of constant changes of position with a
view of misleading the enemy as to the real positions and number of
the guns. The emplacements were easy to construct in large num-
bers, owing to the comparatively small amount of earth which had
to be excavated. False wheel tracks could be made to draw the
enemy’s artillery fire on to unoccupied emplacements.
Although simple to construct, these emplacements were very easy
to locate by aeroplane observations, owing to their regular shape
and the shadows they cast, and by observation from balloons on
account of their relief. Once located, it was comparatively easy to
silence them during an attack.
At first, batteries took up positions on open ground, but they soon
attempted to conceal themselves by selecting positions along the
edges of roads, thereby facilitating supply’ and obviating the neces-
sity of special approach tracks. Railway embankments were also
made use of, the guns being sheltered in emplacements cut in them.
B. DUG-IN BATTERIES.
In the early part of the campaign everything was subordinated to
freedom of movement in the event of an alteration in the line held.
Ingenuity was directed to deceiving the enemy rather than to pro-
tection against his fire. As the danger from a surprise attack dimin-
ished, thanks to the continuous strengthening of the lines of defense,
shelters for guns changed in type, and batteries remained for a con-
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 171
siderable time in one position. Consideration was then given to
the protection of guns and personnel by earthworks. The first change
was the suppression of the raised parapet. The gun was completely
dug in, just like the infantry soldier in the trenches. Frequently,
in order to avoid the inconvenience arising from differences of level
between the platform and the ground, emplacements were dug near
a hollow road, thus facilitating supply, ensuring a line of retirement
in case of necessity, and providing a trench for the personnel. Sketch
2 shows a light railway, laid along a hollow road, which serves to
supply two 2l-centimeter mortars.
Such positions, although more difficult to locate than the preceding
ones, still gave insuflicient protection.
C. CASEMATED BATTERIES.
It was shortly found advisable to provide emplacements with
overhead cover. This resulted in diminution in their width and
consequently of the arc of fire. Guns whose principal réle was
barrage fire could reduce their are of fire without inconvenience,
but it was essential to protect them effectively against our counter-
batteries during an engagement. Hence, arose and became general
the type of casemated dug-in batteries at present in use.
The enemy commenced by covering in the emplacements along
the roads with cement or logs. (Sketch 3.)
Although the guns are thus protected by overhead cover, it is
probable. that the personnel is exposed to long-range fire, especially
when the parapet is not sufficiently high or the need of free circula-
tion forbids trenches being made in the road.
However that may be, the employment of casemates has become
general with variations which are interesting to study. Sketches 4
and 5 show in plan the probable dispositions of a group of three bat-
teries, in casemates of a uniform pattern, which was located by
aerial photography. The size of the shelters for the personnel is
noteworthy. On the other hand, the casemates for the guns are
scarcely visible. These three batteries have never yet been seen
in action, and nothing in their appearance leads to the belief that
they were occupied previously to the 20th September, 1915.
Their similarity to infantry works is striking—distance of the
shelters from the emplacements in order to diminish the risks from
a lucky shot; zigzag communication trenches against enfilade fire;
trenches narrow and deep.
Sketch 6 shows the probable plan of another type of casemated
battery. The earthworks are very large; personnel and ammunition
172 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
are sheltered in deep dug-outs; the guns are disposed on the ground
level or slightly dug in under overhead cover. This type is inter-
esting because it is a compromise between the protected but‘ not
dug-in batteries, which we have already seen, and the underground
battery which we are shortly going to study. .
We now come to the battery, of which sketch 8 gives a section,
showing a gun and the dug-out for its crew. This is the most re-
markable example of overhead cover whichjhas‘sofar been located
by aerial photography. Here guns and personnel are completely
underground. The arrangements are the more interesting because
this battery has been observed in action, and it is difficult to under-
stand in what way the guns were installed. Possibly the cover of
the dug-out was constructed after the guns were placed in position.
The distance of the dug-out from the guns is remarkable; also the
proportion of ‘cover provided in comparison with theportion left
open. (See sketch 7.)
CONCLUSION.
We have thus seen that the Germans have constantly sought to
dig their batteries deeper in. The following remarks are apposite:
The chief object aimed at is the protection of the personnel whilst
the battery is in action. Gun casemates and dug-outs are con-
structed further and further apart in order to extend the zone it is
necessary to beat and diminish the effectiveness of our fire.
(lasemates having become general, it is worth drawing the atten-
tion of the higher command to the absolute uselessness of shrapnel
fire for silencing a battery reported to be in action. Only fire with
high explosive shell over a lengthy period can cope with overhead
cover. . -
As regards the battery shown in sketch 8, the fire of a 12-centi-
meter (long) battery succeeded, during October, in setting fire to
an ammunition depot, but not in silencing the battery. During our
fire for effect it appeared to slacken fire, but did not cease alto-
gether. It should be easy to record casemated and dug-in batteries
so as to give our artillery the best chance of countering them.
The object of this memorandum is to bring to notice the changes
which the enemy has introduced in his defensive organization, due
doubtless to the evolution of our methods of counter-battery work.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES. 173
- SKETCH l. PLAN AND SECTION OF AN EPAULMENT.


mlmlfllllm ;
NH “$33.91 mm 1.18:," “I: hwy/II,’
I
\\\.“ u'dml‘unm 1‘ H " "":;l’/’I',r//////”I
v u \“ 0,,0, //
\\\\ N66 1,;
\\\\ \2
\\\I\~‘ \‘ '1,
\\ w \ / \\\\\
Q s \\ ll/ \\ ,
$899" §'\ \\\v\ [/4
Q €\‘ SI {2
\ § \ \,\ é __
\ $15.
2:: gs =2 “N55
=2’. \ \ a z: =
22 W3 e w :2;
‘*E = s i ~52
E Mifl‘igs
'3 \\ E E E5 =
=\ E :\mM=s
_ \.. _ H § ~
7' _ : :5:
=_-_\’-*;__ é “WA?
El‘; 5 ‘ \\ 3‘
...a— #1 ‘90¢?
hm».
‘Hun
I '74”!
I!


SKETCH’ 2. PLAN AND SECTION OF A DUG-IN EMPLACEMENT.
u nu! {mall I u 1 p’ In ur III I “mm; "fulfil/Hull!“ n
IlmlImuumnnnulmnnn lulfl'llwllullllulll"JIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII





' /r ' v~\\\\\\‘\\w‘ -———-—
' ,2- \\\\
i’? \S
: =s
S:
g:
’ $55
5 E :5; -
' t \\ \
3:3? \\\\\\
"' F‘; i N .
f P’ -; , \\ ‘M
7 '6’ a (5" \\\\\\\\‘\\I
g 2 Q,’ Iruluu\fi\v\\\v\\¢
é, ‘WI/Hum RN "1
¢ {1L 4/ //////////////l a“!
Mm, mm”
I’,


\
\\\
A
"-’////////////l‘ ‘
174 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.


‘E
SKETCH 3. PLAN AND SECTION OF A CASEMATE AND SHELTER
AT EDGE OF HOLLOW ROAD.
. l I I I ‘I


9-14
l!
7
ll»
4/ ’ //////
.'
f.
4,‘
f
." / /7
/ VI /
a,’ :
/ I
//>’/-//////
‘ _— I /
”/
f '
V/V/l / (yd/é”

/ // ///fi
' 7


SKETCH 4. PLAN OF TWO CASEMATED BATTERIES.
I Bomb-proof ‘.h.1l..;i
um Gumtod gun.
lllll
FIELD ARTILLERY .NOTES. 175 .
SKETCH 5. PLAN OF A CASEMATED BATTERY.


Bomb-proof.
SKETCH 6. PLAN OF A CASEMATED BATTERY.
I Underground shelters.
Cl Open work.
E Casemated guns.
176 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
SKETCH 7. PLAN OF A DUG-IN AND CASEMATED BATTERY.




APPENDIX.
The following instructions were issued to the British army in
France on May 1, 1917;
To the First Army, Second Army, Third Army, Fourth Army, Fifth
Arm? , Cavalry Corps:
Instances have occurred during recent operations of the enemy
harassing our troops in their work of consolidation by means of fire
from machine guns placed well beyond the line of our final “pro-
tective” barrage. These machine guns have in some cases been
able to fire with impunity through the barrage and have been the
source of serious annoyance.
In Artillery Notes No. 4—Artillery in Offensive Operations—
Section VI (15), it is stated that: “The artillery plan must include
arrangements necessary to insure the protection of the infantry after
their ultimate objectives have been gained”; it does not, however,
follow that this duty is adequately met under all circumstances by
the form of barrage referred to in section VI (9).
The stationary “protective” barrage should prove suitable in
cases where the final objective consists of a trench, work or other
feature giving immediate cover from rifle and machine-gun fire.
Where on the other hand the final objective is marked by a line
affording insufficient cover against such fire, the form of the pro-
tective barrage must be modified.
If a standing barrage only is adopted in this instance, then it may
be possible for the enemy to fire through it with rifles and machine
guns as explained above. A “back” barrage will often be required
in addition, to be employed on the principles laid down in section
VI (9).
But what actual barrages are necessary, where they should be
placed, and by what guns they can and should be fired, can only be
decided after reconnaissance and careful study of maps both of the
enemy’s territory and of our own gun positions. The “back” bar-
rage, if required, must be able to reach at least 2,000 yards beyond
the final objective.
Smoke shell, where range admits, may be usefully employed as
suggested in section VI, paragraph 13.
At the same time the “standing” barrage will generally be required
to protect the infantry against actual counterattack, for gaps will
almost inevitably occur in any “back” barrage through which the
enemy might approach with comparatively little loss.
(2595446 A—A. G. O.)
98508°—17———-12 177
O
2‘ F CONFIDEN TIA L!

4 0 0
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
.24 5'5


FlELD ARTILLERY NOTES
No. 3

EDITED AT THE‘.
ARMY WAR COLLEGE
WASHINGTON. D. c.

JUNE, 1917
l; " fg’niaiel F5755: if: 'B‘INLE‘I'; ‘
Inst-try D (3. L. (‘,{Tme Militia Affairs,
‘Cu , l
‘ ‘ ' Y *7, “ 1.] \r
Governors island, blew i‘lork harbor, l‘. i’.


WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT‘ PRINTING OFFICE


19] 7
WAR DEPARTMENT
Document No. 610
Ofiice of The Adjutant General
6M1; .
whit/14
WAR DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, June 8, 1917.
The following Field Artillery Notes, No. 3, are published for the
information of all concerned.
[2618449, A. G. 0.]
BY ORDER on THE SECRETARY or WAR:
TASKER H. BLISS,
Major General, Acting Chief of Stafl'.
OFFICIAL:
H. P. MCCAIN,
The Adjutant General.
CONTENTS.
Page.
Abbreviations and equivalents ............................. . . . 6
Synopsis of two lectures at a British Artillery school . . . . . . - - 7
Map shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . - 7-8
Tactical employment of Artillery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . 8-9
A British synopsis of operations of battery personnel in the
occupation of a position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 9-12
Syllabi of courses at a British Artillery school . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Latest British organization for supply of ammunition in the
field, March, 1917 . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 17—19
Angle of site chart ....................................... - - 20
5
ABBREVIATIONS AND EQUIVALENTS.
A. A..... .-.Anti-aircraft.
A. S .......... . .Angle of sight ................................ . -Site.
A. S. C ....... - .Army Service Corps.
B ............. . - Battery.
B. C .......... - .Battery commander.
B. C. A ....... . . Battery commander, assistant.
B. L .......... . . Battery leader ................................ . . Executive.
B. S. M ....... . .Battery sergeant major.
D. A. D. M. S . .Deputy assistant director medical service.
1). A. Q. M. G. . Deputy assistant quartermaster general.
Director ...................................................... . .Aiming circle.
First line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Combattrain.
wagons.
G. O. 6...- . . . . .General oflicer commanding.
G. S. 0 ....... . .General stafi ofl‘icer.
I. O. M ....... . .Inspector ordnance machinery.
I. O. O ....... - .Issuing or inspection ordnance oflicer.
M. G. R. A. . . - .Major general, Royal Artillery.
M. V ......... . .Muzzle velocity.
No. 1 ......................................................... . .Chief of section.
0. P .......... . . Observation point ............................ . . B. C. station.
Order ......................................................... - -Command.
R. A .......... . .Royal Artillery.
R. .. . . . . .Reconnaissance officer.
Section ....................................................... . . Platoon.
T ............. . .Target.
'1‘. -. . . . ..'l‘rench mortar.
Wagon line ................................................... . .Combat train posi-
tion.
>< ............. . .Yards.
6
SYNOPSIS OF TWO LECTURES AT A BRITISH ARTILLERY
SCHOOL.
MAP SHOOTING.
1. Importance of subject for all branches.
Surprise and concentration the two factors that count in war.
Need for expertness, from which springs accuracy and quickness.
- Sometimes B. C’s job, sometimes B. L’s, sometimes half each.
Make all arrangements before first round.
.2. Divides itself into two cases——
(1) With observation;
(2) Without observation.
In (1) Range.
In (2) Search and sweep.
3. In both following preparations are necessary:
(a) Locate battery.
(b) Locate target.
(0) Know M. V. and consequent gun corrections for range and
line.
(d) Know temp. charge.
(e) Air.
(f) Baro. ‘
(g) Wind (short remarks on this subject).
(h) Lotting generally, fuzes, propellant, shell, and everything for
uniformity.
(NOTE; d, e, f same for any switch and should be kept separate
from g.)
4. Next work out-—
(a) Bearing B-T and switch, remembering wind.
(b) Map range B-T.
(c) Difference in height, in meters, B-T and hence A. S.
((1) Charge correction.
(e) Air.
(f) Baro.
(g) Wind.
5. Collate d, e, f, g and add or subtract for range.
6. While this collation is being done B. C. A. sends down A. S. ,
deflection, method of fire, fuze, shell, propellant, charge. By this
7
8 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3.
time bracket is ready and goes down. B. L. converts latter in ac—
cordance with calibrated M. Vs. B. C. must not be bothered with
calibrated results.
7. So far (1) and (2) the same. From this on (1) follows ordinary
lines.
8. With (2) before shooting you must—
(a) Verify your calculations by ranging on a datum point with
observation.
(b) Study your map very carefully, particularly for slopes and
shape of T. _
(0) Study your Range Table very carefully, particularly for 50
per cent zone, angle of descent, and 5’ alters elevation. ,
(d) Make out a careful program of how you will use your ammu-
nition to the best advantage, taking into consideration I) and c and
the tactical situation.
EXAMPLE, 18—POUN DER.
3—a. B—A.17.a.80.80.
T—G.9.b.3.4.
. M.V. 1 1605, 2 1605, 3 1600, 4 1600, 5 1610, 6 1610.
Charge temp. 40° F.
Air temp. 50° F.
Baro. 29.6”.
Wind 48° east of true north 20 f. s., 10.50 20 048.
Lots uniform.
. Map switch 39° R. Wind switch. Zero line A.30.c.30.60.
. Map range. ET. 4550. Time of flight 12.55”.
. Diff. in height in meters=0 L8. 0.
. Temp. charge (effect of)—-64x.
. Temp. air (effect of)—281.
. Baro. (effect of)+101.
. Wind resolved to 25 fs. behind—P86‘.
. Wind resolved to 10 is. L. to R. 10’ L. for wind.
5. Correction to range deduct 13x Bracket 47 .4400.
6. C.R. gun corrections add 50‘.
8. Verify on zero. 1st, ordinary; 2nd, gas. Concentrate on 3-15’.
Everything correct.
8. Allotment 200 gas. 8 rounds per gun, gunfire at irregular inter-
vals throughout day, i. e., on 4 occasions.
O‘QO‘Q Ham Q-o o'itgrqo 3-119 flop‘
TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT or ARTILLERY.
1. Accuracy.—(a) Against billets, bivouacs, and large columns
one can be content with registering a zone and sweeping an area.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3. 9
(b) Against batteries one works to closer limits.
(0) Against front-line trenches and in barrage work absolute accu-
racy is essential.
2. Snrprise—Range on and register datum points.
3. Concentration of efi’ort is necessary. In order to achieve it you
must have sufficient tactical knowledge to be firm in sticking to‘
your main objective and not be led into side issues.
4. The main objective is—
First phase, the hostile trenches, for all field guns and howitzers
and heavy siege howitzers (6” and 9.2” howitzers) (part of the
time).
Approaches and billets, for heavy guns.
The hostile artillery, for super-heavy siege howitzers and heavy
siege howitzers (part of the time).
Second phase, hostile counter-attacks, i. e., protection of our infantry
from hostile infantry, field guns, and howitzers.
Approaches, billets, and troops massing, heavy guns.
Hostile artillery, siege howitzers.
5. Barrages must be kept absolutely close down in front of our
infantry. This is vital.
6. Foresight, work, and the oflensite spirit are all equally essential
to insure the correct tactical employment of artillery as outlined
above.
A BRITISH SYNOPSIS OF THE OPERATIONS OF BATTERY
PERSONNEL IN THE OCCUPATION OF A POSITION.
THE OCCUPATION OF A POSITION.
(1) On receipt of orders the B. C.’s procedure is as follows:
(a) Read orders carefully.
(b) Study map.
(0) While doing above send for ofiicers, Nos. 1, etc.
(2) It is very important that as many people as possible should be
told the situation first hand. For this purpose the order “Orders ”
should be passed down the battery; on this order the following at
once fall out dismounted to the B. 0., leaving their horses with
their horseholders: Captain, B. Q. M. S., farrier, corporal shoeing
smith, section commanders and Nos. 1. Whole battery staff and all
signalers.
_ (3) It is of great importance that this powwow is held in a place
clear of the road and that while'it is going on, as always, the road is
kept clear.
104077°-—-17——2
10 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3.
(4) At this powwow the B. C. will give the following information:
(a) Probable position of battery.
(b) His probable route to it.
(c) Probable best line of advance for the battery.
(d) How far the B. L. is to bring the battery without further
orders or information; also pace at which battery should move.
(6) Probable position of O. P.
(f) Method of establishing communication from battery to O. P.
In short all possible information that he can give as to probabili-
ties from a study of the map. ‘ _
(5) The B. C. will then go on to reconnoiter; he will take with him
the following: Reconnoitering officer, reconnoitering officer’s di-
rector man, two horseholders, who should be signalers.
(6) About 200 yards behind the B. C. will come the captain,
B. Q. M. S., and one horseholder.
(7) Another 200 yards further back will come the rest of the bat-
tery staff, marching as a formed body, under command of the B.
S. M. This staff will consist of the following and march in the fol-
lowing order: '
Battery sergeant major—
Telephonist (with wire). Horseholder telephonist (with
wire).
B. G.’s director man. Horseholder lookout man.
signalers. Horseholder signalers.
Signaler. Horseholder signaler.
B. C.’s groom or horseholder. R. O.’s groom or horseholder.
(8) As soon as the B. C. leaves the battery the B. L. is responsible
for the following:
(a) Keeping touch between B. C. and battery—this he does by
stringing out—first, all mounted men with battery Nos. 1, coverers,
etc. ; and secondly, dismounted men.
(b) Preparation for action.
(0) Reconnaissance of line of advance for the battery, very likely
different to that of B. C.
(d) Keeping touch between himself and battery while he is
away.
(e) The pace of the battery, i e., that the battery gets to the
position at the exact right moment, neither before nor after the
position is ready for the battery.
(f) Protection of the battery.
(9) The B. 0. must first of all select the gun position. That is
the important place.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3. 11
(10) Next he sends the telephonists off in the direction of his
probable O. P., laying wire.
(11) Next he personally selects and marks the site for each indi-
vidual gun. This is vitally necessary if the position is at all cramped
or diificult. In an open position or a simple one to occupy the
B. C. would only arrange to have the center of flanks of the position
clearly marked.
(12) 9, 10, and 11 must be done by B. C. He then goes off to
select 0. P., taking with him B. S. M. and rest of staff and over-
taking telephonists en route. ,
(13) R. 0. now sends back to battery leader to bring battery on.
(14) R. 0. next tells his director man——
(a) Coordinates of position on map.
(b) Coordinates on map of zero line.
(c) Aiming point.
B. 0. then leaves director man to work out angles for lines of fire. '
(15) R. 0. next goes back and leads battery into position sending
B. L. on to superintend director man.
(16) It is important that R. 0. should lead battery into position
as he has seen the position and knows line of approach'and all details.
If B. L. does this it is only a case of swopping horses in midstream,
which leads to delay and confusion.
(17) As soon as the battery is in action the B. L. (or senior sub-
altern) reports to B. C. all guns on zero line (stating what it is if
B. C. does not already know) and lowest range to clear the crest.
(18) As soon as the gun position is marked the captain and B. Q.
M. S. go ofi to select the wagon line.
(19) As soon as this is roughly selected the Q. M. S. goes back to
the gun position and leads the teams back to the captain. The
latter forms up the teams. He also arranges for the protection of the
wagon line.
(20) The corporal shoeing smith, who rides at the head of the
battery in the advance, remains in the gun line answering for the
captain until relieved. He is responsible for establishing commu-
nication with the wagon line and for replenishment of ammunition
and replacing casualties.
(21) The farrier is in charge of the first line wagons. These are
separated from the firing battery at “prepare for action.” They
march as a formed body in rear of the firing battery; the distance
varies according to circumstances but should not exceed 800)‘.
(22) The first-line wagons go straight to the wagon line.
12 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3.
23) Normally the captain should be in the wagon line, particu-
larly if there is any danger of it coming under fire. There must
always be one member of his staff in the gun line.
(24) It is of very great importance that alternative wagon lines
should be selected at once and communicated to all concerned; also
the routes to them and to the gun position.
(25) The captain is also responsible for the selection of the position
of assembly and the communication of this information to all con-
cerned.
(26) In case of a retirement the procedure is as follows:
(a) B. C. receives and explains orders as in 1, 2, 3, and 4 above.
(1)) The captain then goes back to select the position, taking with
him the B. C. ’s party as in 5 above.
(27) Before leaving to reconnoiter the captain is responsible that
satisfactory arrangements are made so that full wagons are left for
the firing battery. He takes with him, or orders to follow close
behind him, the newly made and comparatively empty first-line
wagons. These he arranges to refill for the occupation of the new
position. I
(28) It is of the utmost importance that the B. C . remain with the
firing battery itself throughout the retirement. On arrival near the
new position the captain meets the B. C., explains all details to him,
and leads the battery into the position. The B. C. then takes over.
(29) In details the procedure is identically the same as for an
advance except that the captain performs the reconnaissance duties
of the B. C.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3.
13
Syllabus of courses at a British artillery school.
SIEGE (6 WEEKS).
'Hours allotted.

Subject.
Oflicers.
1 N. e. Os.

Disci h'nel .................................................. . .
Marc ' g and saluting drill .................................. . .
Physical training lecture 1 ................................... . .
Physical training (one-fourth hour each day) ................ . .
Shouting dnll ............................................... - .
Standing and X gun drill (including stripping and sight test—
mg ....................................................... . .
Battery
Battery '11 orders .......................................... . .
Battery organization ........................................ . .
Map-reading lectures ........................................ . .
Map reading ................................................. . .
Gunne
Lines 0 fire lecture .......................................... . -
Directors .................................................... . -
Reconnaissance lectures ..................................... - .
Reconnaissance ............................................. . .
Observation of fire. lectures .................................. - -
Ranging lectures (including line of observation) ............. . _
Ranging (including line of observation) ...................... - -
Map shooting lecture ........................................ - -
Schemes .... . ._. .............................................. . .
Duties generally ............................................. - -
Interior economy ............................................ - -
Ins actions .................................................. . .
.) 1 ..................................... - -
Ammunition supply D. A. Q. M. G.)1 ...................... ._
Telephones (signals) 1 ........................................ - -
Calibration .................................................. . .
Re 'stration ................................................. . .
Sli erules ................................................... . .
Gun rules ................................................... . .
Aeroplanes R. A. liaison oflicer) 1 ............................ -.
Aeroplanep otos1 .......................................... . .
A. A. work (A. A. adviser)1 ................................. . .
Trench artillery (visit to T. M. School) 1 ..................... . .
Employment of artillerg (M. G. R. A.) 1 ..................... . .
Infant tactics (G O . infantry school) 1 .................. . .
Administration (A. Q. M. G.)1 .............................. . .
geréergl stafi (0G. 0.1 “iii. ...).1 ............................ ..
. . .suppies sup 0 car ........................... ..
Medical services (D. M. S. 1 ........................... ..
Gas and gas shell (chemical adviser) 1 ........................ . .
(‘are of equipment (I. O. M.)1 ............................... ..
Work of survey section (ma s) 1 ............................. . .
Work of meteorological sectionl ............................. . .
Discussions .................................................. . .
Examination ................................................ . .
N) Hr-d
o mono»
i-l M
tor-‘@0001
WODHOONUIN)HHr-lh-lwwMNGF-ItQr-wsmr-loraqr-IHHNDJ
H H
NNh-“P'Qovu-Wna
p-l
H o: H
mH<Oc>o>HcIc>o> MGM-‘Qua
a u . n v ¢ n - .-
- o u ~ a n n ~ a.
93
Total .................................................. . .
*2
236
1 Includes outside lecturers.
14
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3.
Syllabus of courses at a British artillery school—Continued.
FIELD AND HEAVY (6 WEEKS).

Subject.
Hours allotted.

Oifioers.
N. C. Os.

Disciglil e 1 .................................................. . .
Marc ' g and saluting drill .................................. . .
Physical training and lecture I ............................... - -
Shouting drill ............................................... . .
Driving drill lecture ......................................... - .
Driving drill Edismounted) .................................. ..
Driving drill without vehicles) .............................. . .
Battery leadin lecturer ..................................... . .
Standing and ' gun dl‘lll .................................... . .
Battery drill . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .
Section rill order ........................................... _ -
tery drill order ........................................... . .
Schemes. - .‘ .................................................. . .
Ranging lecture ............................................. - .
Observation of fire lecture ................................... . .
Map shooting lecture ........................................ . .
Battery organization ......................................... . _
Ranging ..................................................... . .
Gunnery lecture ............................................. . .
Directors .................................................... . .
Map reading lecture ......................................... . . '
Map reading ................................................. . .
Reconnaissance lecture ...................................... - .
Reconnaissance .............................................. . .
Stable management .......................................... . .
Shoein , ..................................................... . -
March '
Harness ..................................................... . -
Interior economy ............................................ . .
Ins ctions .................................................. - .
Pac '11 ..................................................... _ .
Duties generally ............................................. . -
Cal" ration .................................................. . .
Discussion ................................................... - .
Examination ................................................ - .
Slide rules ................................................... . .
Meteor 1 ........... - . ........................................ . .
Anti-aircraft 1 ................................................ - .
Aeroplanes photos 1 .......................................... - -
Aeroplanes ................................................. - .
Veterinary lecture I .......................................... . -
Telephones 1 ................................................. . .
General staff 1 ............................................... . .
Ammunition 1 ............................................... . .
Building 1 ................................................... . .
Trench artillery 1 ............................................ - .
Ammunition supply ......................................... . .
Administration 1 ............................................. . -
Medical services 1 ............................................ . .
Gas and shell 1 ........................................... . .
Care of equipment 1 .......................................... - .
Survey section work 1. ....................................... . -
Employment of artillery 1 .................................. . .
Infantry tactics 1 ............................................ . .
A. S. C. supplies1 ............................................ -.
H N: H H H 0-1
NOCHQJMQTHHHOO<OUOU>QHOHKHMFW$
H
HHOOOOMUIEDHHWUIUHWMQNNHQ-iwwihwNHLONHMQOH
Ono-A l—ll—l
oewmwom
H
v-l o--
C>O>O>CHOOHHHWNUOOQKIH
a - . o u o . - --
u n n - . - Q - .-
u u Q - n . - n _-
. Q u ¢ - . - - .-
Hwwwwmmwwwmmwemmwmw
83
a

8
a

Total ......................... . -- ....................... . .
1 Includes outside lecturers.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO.
15
3'
Syllabus for 4 weeks’ course for N. C. Os.
Field
and
heavy.
Siege.
Disci line ................................................... - .
Marc 'ng and saluting drill .................................. ..
Physical training ............................................ . .
Shouting drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Driving-drill lecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving drill dismounted .................................... . .
Driving drill (skeleton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery-leading lecture ...................................... - .
Gun drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .
Battery gun drill ............................................ . .
Section drill order ........................................... . .
Battery drill order ........................................... - .
Schemes ..................................................... . .
Rangmg lecture ............................................. - .
Ranging .................................................... . .
Map shooting lecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
Gunnery lecture ............................................. - .
Directors .................................................... . .
Map-reading lecture ......................................... - .
Map reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horse management .......................................... . .
Shoeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
March discipline ............................................. . -
Harness ..................................................... - .
Interior economy ............................................ . .
Ins ections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . .
Pac 'ng ..................................................... . .
Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .
Aeroplanes .................................................. . .
Telephones .................................................. . .
Ammunition ................................................ . .
Sanitation ....................... . -, .......................... . .
Riding drill ..................... . .'. ......................... . .
Gas and gas shell ............................................ . .
Care of equipment ........................................... . .
Examination ................................................ . .
Lines-of-fire lecture .......................................... . .
0bservation-of-fire lecture ................................... . .
Duties generally ............................................. . .
Re osito .................................................. ..
Registration ................................................. . .
Slide rules ................................................... - .
Gun rules ................................................... . .
I.’ 1: rs.
H H H
n u u 0 n u c n u-
- n . Q Q - - - .-
- . - n - q - Q --
- o - a u - I . -.
H011 rs.
- I - . - - . - -.
- - v n u o . u .-
Q _ Q - Q ~ - . a.
v - - - n - - - -.
a Q - Q - - - - -.
H
l-‘lQi—“kUMMP-‘OOHO‘


Total ............................................... . .I . . .

H
C5
N

16 FIELD ARTILLEBY NOTES, NO.
3.
Syllabus for 4 weeks’ course for young ofiicers.

Field
and
heavy. -
Siege.
Duties generally ............................................. . .
Dlscl line ................................................... . .
Marc_ 'ng and saluting drill .................................. . .
Physlcal training ............................................ . .
Shouting drill ............................................... . .
Driving drill lecture ......................................... . .
Driving drill dismounted .................................... . .
Drlvlng drlll_(skeleton) ...................................... . .
Battery leading lecture ...................................... . -
Gun drill .... . ._ .............................................. . -
Battery gun drill ............................................ - .
Section drill order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery drill order ........................................... . .
Schemes ..................................................... - .
Ranging lecture ............................................. . .
Observation of fire lecture ................................... - .
Ma‘p shooting lecture ........................................ . .
Ba tery organization ........................................ . .
Gunne lecture ............................................. . -
Lines 0 fire .................................................. . .
Directors .................................................... . -
Map reading lecture ......................................... . .
Map r " ................................................. . .
Reconnaissance lecture ...................................... . .
Reconnaissance .............................................. . .
Horse management .......................................... . .
Repository .................................................. . -
Shoelng ...................................................... . -
March discipline ............................................. . .
Harness ..................................................... . -
1111361101: economy ............................................ . .
Inspectlons .................................................. . .
Packing ..................................................... . .
Law ......................................................... . _
Calibration .................................................. . .
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slide rules ................................................... . .
The offensive ................................................ . .
Em loyment of Artillery .................................... . -
B ding .................................................... . -
Aeroplanes .................................................. - .
Telephones .................................................. . .
Meteor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -
Sanitation ..................... . .' ............................ . .
Riding drill ................................................. . .
Survey section work ......................................... . .
Gas and gas shell ............................................ . .
Care of equi ment ........................................... . .
Early mornlng stables ....................................... - .
Duties of section commander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examinatlon ................................................ . .

o n a n u n u o I.
IOHQ'DMCBHPHMHBQWOQOOMM
Hot-rs.
i . - - e ~ Q - a --


Total .................................................. . .
H
‘1
H
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, N0. 3. 17
Syllabus for 2 weeks’ course for ofiicers.

Field and
heavy_ Siege.

_ _ Hours. Hours.
Discifillgne ................................................... - .
Marc ' g and saluting drill .................................. . _
Physical training ............................................ . -
Ranging lecture - ............................................ . -
Ranging ..................................................... . .
Map shooting lecture . ....................................... . .
Gunnery lecture ............................................. _ .
Directors .................................................... . .
Map reading lecture . ........................................ . .
Map reading ................................................. - .
Reconnaissance lecture ...................................... - .
Reconnaissance .............................................. ..
Horse management .......................................... . .
Shoeing ..................................................... . .
March discipline ............................................. . .
Harness ..................................................... .. 2 ........ . .
Inspections .................................................. . .
Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration .................................................. - -
Registration ........................................................... - -
Slide rules ................................................... . .
Building. . .................................................. . .
Aeroplanes ............................ - . - ................... . .
Ammunition ................................................ . .
Care of equipment ........................................... . .
Examination ................................................ . -
Total .................................................. . .
p-A
Awsbwwmh-toathwtow
- u - p - - . - 0.
H
mn-n-l Hi-IHOOMihOOh-H-IHOOOACONN

OOHNODOJMl-Hbl-‘H
Oi
K1 CAM-‘10030310
05
\1

l
LATEST BRITISH ORGANIZATION FOR SUPPLY OF AM.
MUNITION IN THE FIELD (MARCH, 1917).

1. The old organization for the supply of ammunition in the field
by means of brigade ammunition columns and a divisional ammu-
nition column was designed to meet the requirements of a division
acting independently, so that the division might be self-supporting.
Owing to the necesity for massing far more troops on a given front
and the consequent increase in depth of our present organization,
the corps has now become the unit for marching and fighting. A
corps, consisting of two or more divisions, must accommodate itself
on a front little greater than that formerly allotted to a division,
and may have to move along one road.
The density of troops on a given front automatically creates an
accumulation of ammunition, and, by the system of “pooling,” a
considerable reduction may be made in the number of rounds per
gun carried with the fighting formations.
18 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3.
The new organization has therefore been introduced with the
objects—-
(a) Of pooling the. ammunition carried under corps control and
thereby reducing the number of rounds per gun to be carried.
(b) Of effecting a saving in personnel, horses and vehicles.
(0) Of reducing the road space occupied by a division.
(d) The experience of the earlier part of the war showed the
necessityr for separating brigade ammunition columns from their
brigades and concentrating them under one central control.
2. A further change has recently been made in the organization
of the divisional artillery to meet the requirements on an offensive
front. One brigade of field artillery has been withdrawn from each
division, and these brigades have been regrouped to form “army
field artillery brigades.” The divisional artillery will therefore
consist of two field artillery brigades, each brigade having three
6-gun 18-pounder batteries and one 6-gun ‘1.5-inch howitzer battery.
The army field artillery brigades will consist of three 6-gun 18-
pounder batteries and one 6—gun 4.5-inch howitzer battery, or four
6-gun l8-pounder batteries. These brigades will be available to
reinforce the artillery on any offensive front as may be required.
3. Organization of the divisional ammunition column—The brigade
ammunition columns as such have been abolished for divisional
artillery, and the divisional ammunition columns have been recon-
structed into two echelons.
“A” echelon—Divided into two sections. It consists of one
ammunition wagon for each gun and howitzer in the division, and
S.A.A. carts, etc., to carry the _same quantities of rifle and machine-
gun ammunition and grenades as were formerly carried by the
brigade columns. The sections are equally divided, the number of
vehicles to each section is the same, and they contain the same per-
centage of gun, howitzer, and SA. ammunition.
“B”eehelon.—-Has one section. It consists of some of the G. S.
wagons which formerly carried gun and howitzer ammunition in the
old divisional ammunition column, and G. S. wagons to carry the
same amount of S. A. and machine-gun ammunition and grenades as
was formerly carried by the divisional ammunition column.
4. Organization of the brigade ammunition column—To each brigade
of the army field artillery will be allotted a brigade ammunition
column. It will consist of one ammunition wagon for each gun and
howitzer in the brigade, with a proportion of G. S. wagons for baggage,
stores, etc.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3. 19
5. The new divisional ammunition column is directly under the
divisional artillery commander, and forms an integral part of the
divisional artillery. It may still be drawn upon as a first reserve for
the batteries in men, horses, and material in an emergency.
It will normally march with the division; but when several divi-
sions are marching on one road, it may be necessary to withdraw the
“B” echelons, and concentrate them in rear under corps control.
The “ A ” echelons always accompany their divisions, and will usually
march in rear of all the batteries. The divisional ammunition col-
umn commander will remain with the “A” echelon.
In action, the divisional ammunition column will usually be con-
centrated, but, when the wagon lines are a long way from the guns,
wagons from the ‘,‘A ” echelon may be attached to the batteries to
assist in taking up ammunition.
If the ammunition park is a long way in rear, it may be necessary
to keep back the “B ” echelon, and push up the “A” echelon, but
this case will be the exception rather than the rule.
The normal position of the divisional ammunition column com-
mander in action will be where he can best control the supply of
ammunition. _
The normal chain of supply of ammunition will be from the sub-
park (which has now been transferred from lines of communication
to corps control) to the “B ” echelon, and thence to any section of
the “A” echelon.
6. In the case of the army field artillery brigades, the normal chain
of supply of ammunition will be from the subpark direct to the
brigade ammunition column. '
7. As the new organization has reduced the number of rounds
carried in divisional charge, it is essential that the column be looked
upon as a pool from which ammunition can be drawn by any unit.
It is not intended that certain sections of the “A ” echelons should be
atfiliated to certain artillery brigades, but the organization is elastic,
and permits of the detachment of such an amount of ammunition as
may be considered necessary for a specific task. >
20 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES, NO. 3.
\sQxeta a...‘ 6.“ .axeSQsx
mnm<> .z.._ uez<m
I 8 . 8 . s 2
mmmammamamammmmmmmememmammamammassesmanna



. .wuhazi z. b 2% L0 uuwzlxx use can 02
Zorruwmaukz no #251 mi... 20¢... 02... .ikzoniox (
020.: u>u u:.r :50 l uoz<¢ .r ozzsoxl
uz] .._<o..r¢u> n1... aka;
3%
ll... FIQW LO UJOZ<i
i;

We . eels‘-


6 3'


‘11111515 £0 31914! :10 SHlflNLW
H F

L, , 0 CONFIDEN TIA L
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
~lc 6'8 -


Field Artillery Notes
No. 2

EDITED AT THE ARMY WAR COLLEGE
WASHINGTON, D. C.

MAY, 1917
Z From Celene-i jislfj. NEQE‘Y
.-C “‘ q f ‘I.
Iilltlillll'y, D. O. L. Otncc Militia Afisirss
_Fovemora Island, New York Harbor,v N. ‘if;
_ . - - . _.
.- a


WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
I 9 l 7


WAR DEPARTMENT,
Document No. 604.
Ofiice of The Adjutant General.
61*!‘ P53 m
mill-“l
WAR DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, May 28, 1917.
The following compilation of British ofiicial instructions govern-
ing the use of artillery is published for the information of all con- f
cerned.
[2608418, A. G. 0.]
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:
TASKER H. BLISS,
Major General, Acting Chief of Stafl".
OFFICIAL!
H. P. MCCAIN,
The Adjutant General.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Par.
Notes on training of horse and field artillery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1—5
Procedure when relieving a battery in action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 6—12
Notes for commanders of siege batteries on coming into action . 13-23
Terms used in gunnery, with explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-30
Preparation for opening fire from a new position . . . . - - . . . - . . 31-41
Calibration and map shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 42-43
Parallelism of aiming posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44—46
Preparation of the fighting map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-53
Technical notes on 18-pounder barrage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54~61
Notes on the behavior, effect, and employment of projectiles
and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62-69
Duties of observing oflicers, forward observing officers, liaison
ofiicers, and forward liaison ofiicers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-78
ABBREVIATIONS AND EQUIVALENT TERMS.
British. United States.
Add ........ - .' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .More (obsolete).
Ammunition wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .Caisson.
A. of 8., Angle of sight . . . . . . . . . . . .Angle of site.
Battery in action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .Battery in position.
O. R. A., Commander, Royal Artil-
lery.
D. P., Datum point.
Director. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -Aiming circle.
Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - Less (obsolete).
F. A. T., Field Artillery Training. .Drill Regulations.
F. O. 0., Forward observing oflicer.
Lengthen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .Down. .
M. P. I., Mean point of impact. - - .Burst center.
Minus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Short.
0. P., Observation post (point). . . .Observing station.
Pivot gun ....................... . .Directing piece.
Plus. . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - -Over.
R. T., Range table.
Section- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Platoon.
Shorten ........................... . .Up.
x, Yards.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES.
NOTES ON TRAINING OF HORSE AND FIELD
ARTILLERY.
It is important that the points enumerated should be brought to
the personal notice of those concerned, and the value of close adher-
ence to the approved methods of ranging must be impressed upon
all ofiicers.
1. Sequence of orders.—-Gare must be taken to insure that
during shooting, orders by telephone are passed in the correct
sequence. N o departure from the sequence laid down in F. A. T.
should be permitted.
The order “Report when ready,” except for the first round or first
group of rounds, should not be given.
Except in special circumstances, the order for an elevation to be
put on is to be considered as. the order to fire the gun.
Officers must take care that only orders in a proper form are sent
to the battery during a shoot; e. g., such an order as “Get N o. 2 gun
on the same line as N o. 1 ” must never be sent to a battery. Accu-
racy and precision in the issue of verbal orders are all important.
2. Add and. drop—The practice of using the word “add ”
or “drop” during ranging is to cease. The same applies to the
custom which has arisen among oflicers of ordering “lengthen” or
“shorten ” corrector.
With the one exception mentioned below the exact elevation or
range should be invariably ordered. Thus, if 3,700 is observed plus
and it is desired to shorten the range by 100, the order is “3,600,”
not “drop 100.” Similarly with the corrector—the setting is to be
ordered on each occasion. _
3. Repeat—The order “Repeat” is never to be used unless
the whole of the previous order is to be repeated.
For example: First round was fired at 5°R.-—A. of sight 1° eleva-
tion—Corrector 156—3,800. As an order for the second round “20’
more right, repeat” would not be allowed; the order will be “20’
more right, 3,800.”
7
8 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
If no correction was required for the second round, the order
“Repeat” could be given, and the second round would be fired the
same as the first.
Again, a round of battery fire might have been fired at the above
range, etc. For the next round “Corrector 152, repeat” would be
wrong. The order should be “Corrector 152——One round battery
fire.”
4:. REGISTERING .A. DATUM POINT WITH A SINGLE
GUN.—The following is to be the recognized procedure:
((1) Obtain 100 yards bracket; say 3,900 plus, 3,800 minus.
(b) Verify it. . .
(0) Order the range which is most likely to be correct, say 3,850,
and henceforward think and work in groups of four.
The series might run:
5° right of zero—Angle of sight 1° elevation—Percussion shrap-
nel—No. 85 fuse—Cordite—3,800—Firel

Round. Range. Plus or minus. Order alter observation of round.
1 3,800 Minus . . . . . . .. 4,100.
2 4,100 Plus . . . . . . . . -. 3,900.
3 3,900 Plus ........ - . 3,800.
4 3,800 Minus . . . . . . . . 3, .
5 3,900 Plus ........ . - The 100-yard bracket is now verified; both the
3,800 were just minus, the two at 3,900 were a
good deal plus. So order: “3,825—Fire 4
rounds.”
6 3,825 Minus ...... . .
7 3, 825 Minus . . . . . . . . In this group of 4 there are 3 minus to 1 plus. So
8 3, 825 Plus ........ . . order: “3,850—Fire 4 rounds.”
9 3, 82.8 glinus . . . . . . . .
10 3 85 us ........ .- - - . .
’ - As this group contains 2 plus and 2 minus it may
g g’ ' ' ' ' ' ‘ ' ' be acce ted as the range that gives the mean
13 3’ 850 Minu's """" ' ' point 0 impact nearest the target.
, . . . . . . . .




As an indication as to whether the angle of sight is correct, a group
of air bursts may be fired by 18-pounders.
Example.—-Barom. read-
ing 29.5—for guns with Mark 11, range dial and barometer 30 inches,
the normal corrector is 150—-therefore, for barometer 29.5 inches,
corrector should be 147.
The order is given therefore, “Corrector
146—3,850——fire four rounds.”
If this gives effective bursts, the
inference is that the angle of sight is correct.
If, observing from the gun, the mean height of burst is 1° too high,
the inference is that the A. of S. is 1° too high; in which case lower
A. of S. 1°.
It is seen from the range table that 5’ alters range by
about 30 yards at 3,850, so 1° alters range about 360 yards. The
order may then be given, “A. of S. zero—Corrector 146—4,200—fire
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 2. 9
four rounds.” If this gives effective bursts, four rounds percussion
should be fired to verify that 4,200 is the correct range.
It would be quite in order to commence with four rounds of time
shrapnel at normal corrector, to see that no big error has been made
in the A. of S.; but in this case it would be advisable to overestimate
the A. of S. to insure air bursts. The mean height of burst is meas-
ured, and the A. of S. lowered, by the number of minutes that this
height is in excess of 10.
At the order “Fire four rounds” the gun is fired (as soon as it is
loaded and laid correctly) by order of the No. 1. The order only
differs from “four rounds gunfire” in that neither speed nor any
fixed interval between rounds is considered important.
5. Finding the corrector.——In ordinary circumstance the cor-
rector setting depends on the barometer reading at the moment.
Other factors affecting it are—-
(t) A change in lot of fuses which will sometimes necessitate an
alteration in length of corrector.
(it) A very Worn gun with which the time of flight of the shell
is affected. This can only be satisfactorily dealt with by experience,
pending the provision of a special fuse indicator to compensate for
difference in muzzle velocities.
(iii) An unusual change in the temperature or density of the
air, concerning which exhaustive experiments are now in progress.
Normally the length of corrector should remain the same at all
ranges, and perpetual ranging to ascertain the correct setting to pro-
duce the desired height of burst is entirely unnecessary.
PROCEDURE WHEN RELIEVING A BATTERY IN ACTION.
(HORSE AND FIELD ARTILLERY.)
6. When a battery is about to take over a position from another
battery in action, the battery commander and a party of telephonists
proceed to the position at least one day in advance. In future s'witch-
boards will probably be left in position and handed over on relief,
but if not, telephonists take their own switchboards; in any case
they take their instruments with them. All telephone wires are
invariably left in position by the outgoing battery.
7. The battery commander makes himself acquainted with the
country as seen from the various observing stations. He obtains as
much information as possible as to the tactical situation, etc., from
the outgoing battery commander and should visit the various bat-
talion headquarters with him.
101900°-17——-—2
10 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 2.
He takes over:
Defense scheme.-
Artillery board and fighting map (par. 17).
Intelligence map.
Diagram of communications.
Intelligence summary (23).
Panoramic sketches.
Air photographs.
8. When a battery takes over the outgoing battery’s guns in
position, the detachments march in and the reliefs are carried out,
responsibility for the support of the infantry being taken over at
such an hour as the O. R. A. may direct. The guns are taken over
“stripped,” except for the sights and aiming posts; the latter must
always be left in position. Particular care must be taken to insure
that the calibration records of the guns are handed over.
9. If a battery takes its own guns into action, suitable arrange-
ments must be made for the relief, but in all cases the outgoing
battery leaves its aiming posts in position and takes over others from
the incoming battery. .
Such reliefs usually take place at night, but detachments should,
if possible, take over during daylight.
Two nights are usually taken to carry out a relief. In a 6-gun
battery one section should be relieved the first night and the other
two on the following night.
10. Batteries keep their own limbers and ammunition wagons
complete‘, the arrangements for the occupation of the wagon lines
being made by the divisions concerned.
1 1 . Whenever possible, one officer of the outgoing battery remains
behind for 24 hours to give any required information to the relieving
battery and to accompany the new battery commander on a second
visit to the 0. Pa.
12. The divisional artillery is informed when the relief has been
completed.
NOTES FOR COMMANDERS OF SIEGE BATTERIES ON
COMING INTO ACTION.
The following notes form a guide, which should be followed as far
_as circumstances permit:
13. Communications.-—Ascertain to what extent existing lines
can be utilized. Set telephonists on to connecting battery with
O.P’s. If no 0.1’. is definitely settled upon, communication should
be established with some central spot near which an O.P. will
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 11
probably be chosen. As soon as communications are complete a
diagram of the routes followed should be made and inserted in the
intelligence summary.
14. Zero Line and. Zero Point.—Select the zero line which
must pass through the position of the pivot gun and contain a definite
point called the “Zero point”; if this point is visible and at a suit-
able range for calibration and for determining the atmospheric cor-
rection, it would become a datum point.
Auxiliary aiming points must now be selected; these points should
preferably be in front or rear of the battery as with some equipments
owing to the carriage moving considerably when firing, a side aiming
point becomes unreliable.
15. Parallel Lines of Fire—Have guns laid parallel to zero
line by most convenient method (the line of the pivot gun being
coincident with zero line).
16. Checking- Line of Fire—Check the line of fire by firing a few
rounds from each gun on the zero point and correct auxiliary aiming
point readings accordingly, remembering to keep lines of fire parallel.
1'7. Fighting map—Always keep fighting map up to date by
entering upon it any new work, trenches, etc., constructed by the
enemy and by our own troops.
18. Datum points—Select a datum point for each charge likely
to be used. - These datum points should be at or near the mean
ranges of the charges for which selected, and a good view both in
front and behind these datum points must be obtainable. The zero
point may have been already selected as a datum point.
If muzzle velocities are not known, calibration should be carried
out at the earliest opportunity.
19.. Calibration—Whenever possible, double line observation
should be employed for calibration, so that results can be plotted
and elevation for datum point accurately deduced.
If, however, it is found impossible to use double line observation,
a single observer, as close as possible to the line of fire, must be
employed.
The M. P. I. should in both these cases be verified by a large
group of rounds, say at least 12 rounds fired at the same elevation
and, where double observation can not be obtained, verification
must not be accepted unless an equal number of “pluses” and
“minuses” are obtained from any one group.
The range at which calibration is carried out should be near the
mean range for the charge used.
A day on which conditions (especially wind) are as near normal
as possible should be chosen.
12 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
Example of calibration:
8-inch B. L. howitzer V. Fourth charge 8,000‘.
Say calculated elevation (R. T. elevation, angle of ° '

sight and initial correction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . - - 31 00
Elevation for M. P. I. from shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 32 00
Difference . . . . . _ . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - l 00
From R. T.—— Yards,
minutes elevation at 8,000‘ . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 18
.'.1° 00’ elevation at 8,000K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
[[10 foot-seconds variation in M. V. . . . . . . . . . . . 55
.'.39.2 foot-seconds variation in M. V. ........ - - 216
The differences of muzzle velocities from that of the range table
should be noted for each gun at each charge, and correction tables
for these differences at the various ranges can be made for the guns
concerned and kept in the emplacements of those guns and form one
of the N o. 1’s stores. A record of these muzzle velocities should be
kept in the intelligence summary.
Correction tables for charge temperature variations can also be
similarly prepared and form one of the N o. l’s stores.
20. Map Shooting—Before engaging a target which is not visi-
ble, range on a suitable datum point, if time permits, in order to
check the initial correction. The procedure is as follows:
(a) Calculate the “atmospheric correction” (due to air tempera-
ture, height of barometer, and wind) and apply it with “gun correc-
tion ” for charge temperature, weight of shell ( if necessary), and muz-
zle velocity to the elevation due to map range, plus or minus the
angle of sight.
(b) Range on datum point on the bracketing system with one gun
and verify the M. P. I. with a group of not less than eight rounds
fired at the same elevation. This verification is most important, as
.50 per cent length zones are, as a rule, rather large and a small group
‘of rounds may give misleading results. _
(c) If the final elevation differs from that previously calculated,
the difference is likely to be due either to a wrong estimation of the
wind or to the propellant giving an abnormal muzzle velocity, or to
both.
(d) If the propellant is marked A. C., i. e., adjusted to give normal
muzzle velocities in a fairly new gun, and is in good condition, the
above difierence may be taken as being due to wrong estimation of
the wind. The true strength of wind affecting range and also
deflection should then be calculated.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 2. 13

Example:
8-inch B. L. howitzer. Full charge. Range to D. P. 8,000‘.
o /
Calculated elevation- - - - -_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - .- 31 00 (say)
Elevation found by shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - 31 30
Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . +30
From R. T. 30 foot-seconds wind requires correction of 220-", i. e.,
61 minutes elevation.
.'.The difference found, 1. e., 30 minutes elevation, corresponds to
an increase of 15 foot-seconds wind, which must be allowed for
before proceeding to engage a target in the same direction.
Suppose the original estimation of Wind velocity resolved to line
WIND-
of fire was 25 foot-seconds against the shell, this must now be taken
as 40 foot-seconds on the line of fire.
If the target to be engaged is on a line, differing widely from that
of the datum point this new estimation of wind velocity on the line
of fire to datum point must be resolved back to direction of wind
and these recalculated for the new line of fire.
14 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
Example: New value of wind velocity on line to datum point=40
foot-seconds and wind makes an angle of 30° against the above line
as in the diagram. Forty foot-seconds resolved back to wind direc-
tion=46 foot-seconds.
If line of fire for new target is as shown in figure, 46 foot-seconds
resolved to this line becomes 20 foot-seconds and this amount must
be taken as the wind velocity resolved to the new line of fire when
calculating correction to elevation.
Again, if the deflection found by shooting on the datum point~
differs from that originally calculated a similar procedure must be
followed. ‘
(e) If the difference in elevation found by shooting is considered
to be due to the propellant, then this difference must be converted
to foot-second muzzle velocity.
Say difference in elevation found by shooting = +30’ from RT.
' 10 foot-seconds muzzle velocity at 8,0001 =55 yards (15.2 minimum
elevation).
Then 19.8 (say 20) ‘foot-seconds =30’ elevation.
So an allowance for a decrease of 23 foot—seconds muzzle velocity
must be made before engaging a target with that lot.
21. Group your shells according to weight and mark of shell, and
your cartridges according to lot, as they reach the battery. See
that all shell in any one group have the same nature of driving
. band.
22. As an assistance at the 0. P’s. prepare a map for each with
degree rays drawn from the 0. P’s. and from the battery position
covering the target area; the rays from the 0. P’s. and from the
battery should be drawn in different colors. Make a panoramic
sketch from the chief O. P.
23. Keep an “Intelligence summary” showing:
(a) Auxiliary aiming point readings of each gun when parallel
to zero line.
(b) Datum points with switches from zero line, their angles of
sight, and their map ranges. .
(0) Loss or gain in muzzle velocity of each gun, with each
charge and each propellant, compared to that of range
table.
(d) Ground visible from each 0. P.
(e) “Night lines” with switches from zero line, angles of sight,
and map ranges.
(f) Any information regarding the enemy’s habits, etc.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 2. 15
TERMS USED IN GUNNERY, WITH EXPLANATORY NOTES.
[N. B.—The calculations refer to the 18~pounder gun]
24. Map range is the distance from the gun to the target measured
on the ground.
It is found by measuring the distance between the two points on
the map and applying to it the distortion error of the particular map
in use.
Maps, after they are mounted, should be tested for distortion by
measuring the distances between the various grid lines. The map
will seldom be found to have stretched or shrunk by a similar amount
both up the map and across it.
Suppose the line of fire runs east to west. Measure with a good
scale the distance from east to west between two grid lines, which
should be 6,000 yards apart on the map. Suppose this to measure
on the scale 6,010 yards, then write on the map “From ranges read
off this map by scale deduct 7 yards from every 1,000 yards range.”
This deduction is the distortion error.
If the line of fire runs north and south act similarly.
If the line of fire runs northeast to southwest measure the distortion
error east to west and from north to south. Between these two
errors interpolate an error that seems likely to be correct for the par-
ticular line of fire.
Unless the zone be very wide, one distortion error calculated for
the center of the zone, should be good enough for the whole zone.
25. If a number of rounds are fired at a target from a gun the
sights of which are set to map range, the mean point of impact of
these rounds is most unlikely to be on the target. This is due to a
variety of causes:
(a) OUTSIDE THE BORE.
(i) Variations in temperature of the air from 60° F.
(ii) Variations in height of barometer from 30 inches.
(iii) Variations in wind from nil.
The correction to map range necessitated by the above three
variables constitutes the correction for atmospheric error.
(1)) INSIDE THE BORE.
(i) Wear of the gun. This causes loss of muzzle velocity.
The amount by which the muzzle velocity of a gun
with any particular propellant differs from the muzzle
velocity for which the range table is calculated is
called the “Calibration error” of that gun with that
propellant. The correction necessary at any particular
range to counteract this calibration error is called the
16 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 2.
“Gun correction” for that gun for that range with that
propellant.1
(it) Variation in temperature of charge from 60° F. This
also causes a change in muzzle velocity. The change
caused by 10° variation in temperature of each pro-
pellant is given in the range table of the gun. Each
propellant is differently affected by heat, and the
amount varies with each charge in a howitzer.
(c) MISCELLANEOUS SOURCES or ERROR.
(t) Faulty range dial (e. g., one graduated for wrong muzzle
velocity).
(it) Weight and shape of shell and fuse .,
(ti-i) Other causes, such as wrong angle of sight, faulty esti-
mate of atmospheric conditions, propellant affected
by damp or age, inaccuracies in the map, sights out
of adjustment, etc. _
The corrections due to the causes mentioned in par. 25 (0) have no
special name, and in practice it is not always feasible to dissociate
them from the correction for the wear of the gun, par. 25 (b) (1').
Their effect would generally be common to all the guns in a battery.
The result, if the causes are not recognized and allowed for, would
be a false calibration error for the gun.
26. The range on the range dial of a gun that gives “effective”
fire on a target is called the “gun range” of that gun to that target.
This gun range will vary according to the atmospheric conditions at
the time of firing par. 25 (a). For record, therefore, this “gun range”
should be converted to what it would have been under normal con-
ditions, i. e., air temperature 60° F., barometer 30”, no wind, a
particular type and nature of shell, and charge temperature 60° F.
The resulting range is called the “normal gun range” for this gun,
target, and propellant. It differs from the “gun range,” by the
corrections for atmospheric error, temperature of charge, and type of
shell and fuse. It differs from the “map range” by the “gun cor-
rection ” and any correction as explained in par. 25 (0) (iii). It will
only apply to the propellant with which the firing was carried out.
27. Datum points are points which can be clearly seen on the
ground, and to which the normal gun range can be accurately found.

1 Charges of different lots and of different propellants are adjusted as far as possible
to give the same muzzle velocity in a new gun. Difierent propellants are, however,
unequally affected by the wear of the gun; consequently out of an old gun different
propellants will fail to give even approximately the same muzzle velocity. As the
differences may be great, and as it has been found impossible to find any proportion-
ate rule to which they will conform, it is necessary to calibrate each gun with each
of the propellants with which it is supplied.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 17
When their positions and contour heights have been accurately
fixed they can be used for calibrating purposes. They must be
easy to range on; a point such as a single bush does not fulfill this
condition.
28. Calibration is the process of finding, by shooting, the muzzle
velocities of the different guns of a battery, relative to the range
table.
29. The zero point is the point on which the aiming posts of the
pivot gun, preferably No. 1, are laid. It need not necessarily be
visible from the battery but must be suitable for use as a datum
point.
30. The zero line is the line of fire of the pivot gun to the zero
point. From it all horizontal angles are measured. Parallel lines to
this zero line from each of the other guns are their zero lines.
PREPARATION FOR OPENING FIRE FROM A NEW
POSITION.
The occupation of each new position requires a somewhat different
procedure, but the following principles form a guide that should be
followed as far as circumstances permit.
31. Set the communication staff to work to link up the-battery
position either to the O. P. or if no O. P. is known, to some central
spot near’ which an O. P. will probably be established.
32. See that the daily testing of sights has been completed.
33. Select a likely zero point; have aiming posts put out on to it
for whichever gun is selected as the pivot gun.
34. Have aiming posts put out for the other guns parallel to those
of the pivot gun. This parallelism should then be thoroughly
checked (pars. 44~46).
35. Send forward an officer to get into touch with the infantry
whom the battery is to support, or over whom the battery is to fire.
Give this officer instructions which should include:
(a) To whom he should report.
(b) What information he should obtain from the infantry.
(c) The form in which the infantry will get their artillery support
and to whom they should apply for it. The officer should see that
the infantry understand this.
((1) Means of communication with the infantry and for what com-
munication he is responsible.
(6) Verification of “night. lines ” (see last part of par. 36).
(j) When he is to return to the battery.
36. Having selected a possible 0. P., located the zero point,
and established communication with the battery position, the
101900°—17——3
18 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 2.
battery commander will proceed to range the pivot gun on the
zero point. If, when at the O. P., the zero point selected can not
be located on the ground, some other zero point must be chosen
that can be so located. (The requirements of a zero point are indi-
cated in par. 29.)
In practice there is often great difficulty in carrying out registra-
tion accurately before dark. It is most important, however, to get
the pivot gun ranged thoroughly on some point, the map location of
which is known.
Having completed this ranging, the battery commander knowing
the muzzle velocities of his guns and that the lines of fire are parallel,
is enabled to bring fire to bear on any point of his zone with a cer-
tain amount of confidence.
If, however, the “night lines” (i. e., the protective barrage) of
the battery are within a short distance of our infantry and can be
seen by the officer sent forward under par. 35, this officer should
test the battery’s fire on its “night lines.”
It would usually be wise to arrange beforehand that, in case
communication has broken down, the battery will fire (say) four
rounds of battery fire on its “night lines” at two distinct times,
separated by at least a quarter of an hour, in order to enable the
forward officer to observe at least one of these bursts of fire. The
rate of battery fire ordered should be sufficiently slow to allow the
observer to write down the result of each round and he should
send back a messenger as soon as possible with a written report
as to the accuracy of the shooting. The times may if necessary
be toward dusk in order to give the battery commander as much
time as possible to get the zero point registered.
37. The battery commander in ranging the pivot gun on the zero
point (pars. 42, 43) must be quite certain that he has obtained at least
two pluses and two minuses at the same range, and at the same
angle of sight. The setting of these should be carefully checked at
the battery. -
He should also check his angle of sight to the zero point by firing
time shrapnel at it. Knowing the “ corrector of the moment” a few
rounds should be fired with that corrector. If the angle of sight
has been correctly read off the map, an “effective” mean height
of burst should be obtained. If the mean height of burst is much
out, the angle of sight must be wrong.
38. When the battery commander has found the range and line
to the zero point accurately with the pivot gun, the deflection due
to wind is taken off the sight, and the aiming posts of that gun are
replanted in the line thus found, care being taken that the gun, in
so doing, is not shifted.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 19
The aiming posts of the other guns will then be replanted in a
similar manner to those of the pivot gun.
Provided the ofiicer who checked the lines of fire at the battery
has done his work accurately, the guns of the battery should then
have their lines of fire parallel to each other. It is advisable,
however, to fire a round of battery fire to see that no mistake has
been made.
The normal gun range to the zero point is then carefully worked
out. This will enable ranges to be ascertained for the shooting
during the first night.
39. A fighting map should be prepared on ‘the approved plan
(pars. 47-53).
40. Although in a battle, the above may be as much as can be
accomplished during the first day, every effort mustv be made to
complete the necessary ranging as quickly as possible, working on
the following principles:
(a) Test the parallelism of “Aiming posts” (par. 46).
(b) Select a few good datum points in the zone. If possible these
should be at ranges differing by 800 or 1,000 yards. Range on these
accurately with the pivot gun, taking care. that the angle of sight
is correct. '
For each datum point convert “gun range” as verified to the
“normal gun range.”
41. Have the “gun corrections” for each propellant for each gun
posted on a conspicuous board in the gunpit for that gun.
On the same board may also be written orders for “SOS.” or
other defensive barrages, the object being that on a demand for
“ S.O.S.” the only order necessary is to say “ S.O.S., G. 11, add 125.”
“Add 125” 1 is the total correction for atmospheric error and charge
temperature. This correction must always be known to the ofiicer
and senior N .00 in charge at the gun position, either by night or day.
The battery commander during a series does not give orders
concerning “gun corrections,” i. e., corrections to counteract the
wear of the guns. These gun corrections are applied as a matter of
routine by the Nos. 1 to all orders for elevation that are received.
CALIBRATION AND MAP SHOOTING.
42. Calibration with the 18-pounder will be carried out normally
with shrapnel, fuse 80, and with all propellants with which the
battery is being supplied.

1 This order “Add 125” does not contravene the provision of par. 2, which forbids
the use of the term “add” or “drop” during ranging.
20 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
It should be carried out on a datum point (i. e., a point the exact
map reference and contour height of which are known) as nearly as
possible at the range at which most of the shooting is carried out.
There should be little or no wind.
The following example shows the method:
Conditions: Shrapnel, fuse 80, percussion, cordite, temperature of
charge 40°, temperature of air 45°, barometer 29.5”, wind 5 foot—
seconds against, map range 4,000.
The battery commander first corrects the map range for the at;
mospheric conditions, thus:
Air 45° (15° below normal) - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +36K
Baro. 29.5” (.5 inches below normal) - . . . . . . . . . --20x
Wind 5 foot-seconds against . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . +141‘
+50x ~20!‘
Total atmospheric correction: +30!
4,000 +30=4_.030x.
This means that the gun must be laid as if the map range was
4,030x under normal conditions (i. e., temperature of air 60°, barom-
eter 30"’, wind nil). This would be the necessary elevation for a
gun giving 1,615 foot—seconds muzzle velocity,-for which the range
table is constructed, but with a worn gun an increased elevation
will be necessary. ,
The battery commander therefore shoots at the datum point and
obtains (say) 6 pluses and 6 minuses at a gun range of 4,200‘.
That is this particular gun requires to have the range dial set at
4,200 to send the shell a mean distance of 4,030 yards under normal‘
atmospheric conditions. The difference is 170 yards, which is the
gun correction for this gun at 4,030x or say 4,000". Now according
to page 3 of the rubber range table, a fall in muzzle velocity of 12.5
foot-seconds decreases the range by 31X at 4,000x and 32x at 4,500‘‘.
Therefore, at 4,200X the range will be decreased by 170*‘ if the fall
of muzzle velocity is—
12.5 X 170 f.s.=67% f.s.
31.5
Take this as 70 foot-seconds.
The muzzle velocity of the gun at the moment was therefore
1,615—70=1,545 foot seconds.
This was with cordite at a temperature of 40°.
With cordite at 60° the muzzle velocity would be——-
1,545 + (12.5 X 2) = 1,570 foot-seconds.
Charges of all natures are adjusted as far as possible to give the
same muzzle velocity in a new gun. With an old gun, however,

FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 21
they will not shoot the same, and the differences may be considerable.
Although charges are adjusted, nevertheless owing to difficulties of
supply under war conditions and to other circumstances, absolute
reliance must not be placed on the results of such adjustments.
It will be found in practice that quite unaccountable differences
will occasionally occur in the muzzle velocity developed by differ-
ent lots of the same propellant even in a new gun. Where different
propellants are in use a gun should be calibrated, if possible,'at
least three times with each propellant and the mean muzzle velocity
of the three recorded in each case.
The muzzle velocity to be recorded is that which would have
been realized with a charge temperature of 60° F., e. g., 1,570 foot-
seconds in the example given above.
As soon as the muzzle velocity is satisfactorily established it
should be painted on the gun itself or on the top flap of the shield
together with the number of the gun. Underneath should be
shown the gun corrections necessary, thus:
GUN No. 3714.
Charge Temperature 60° F. .
CORDI TE. N. C’. T.
M. V.=1,570 f. s. ‘ M. V.=. . . . . f. s.1
' GUN CORRECTIONS.
CORDI TE. N. C. T.
Below 4,500 add 50. 1
Above 4,500 add 75. . . . . . . .
43. Map shooting (with the aid of a datum point) .-—(i)
When time and opportunity permit, and there is any doubt about the
atmospheric error, better results will usually be obtained by first
checking the error of the moment on a datum point near the target.
The procedure is:
(a) Note the map range to datum point, say 4,500 yards.
('0) Calculate the gun range that should hit the datum point, as
follows:
Example: Wind, temperature of air and barometer normal.
Charge temperature, 45° F.
Cordite, shrapnel, N0. 80 fuse.
Map range, 4,500.
The charge temperature correction in this case will be for—-
60—45=15°
1 Figures to be filled in when calibration with N. C. T. has been carried out.
22 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
By the range table this is 32><1.5=48. The battery commander
will, therefore, order 4,550. To this 4,550 will be added in the
usual way by Nos. 1 the gun corrections for individual guns as
painted on their shields.
NOTE .—If N. C. T. had been used the correction for N. C. T. would
have been applied instead of that for cordite.
For 15° allow 4.5 foot-seconds, say 12 yards.
Therefore 4,500 would have been the order sent to the battery,
as the charge temperature correction is inappreciable.
The N. G. T. corrections may be taken as one-quarter those for
cordite, the correct figure being 3112.5.
(0) Find by shooting the gun range that gives an equal number of
pluses and minuses at the datum point. Suppose this gun range is
4,600. There is thus a total error of 50 yards in the calculations.
The point to determine is where this error lies. Assuming that the
angle of sight is correct the correction for wind may have been
wrongly computed, or there may be a variation in muzzle velocity
caused by the propellant, or there may be some other cause.
(d) Assuming that the error is due to a wrong estimation of the
wind, it must be ascertained from the range table what force of wind
would cause an alteration to range of 50 yards at 4,500. It is found
that this amounts to 15 f. s. for 18-pdr. and the force of the wind as
now found should form the basis of calculation.
(it) If time is important the following method may be used:
Having established as above that the true correction to a map
range of 4,500 is 100 yards, then with this as a basis, a proportionate
allowance can be made for the correction necessary to another
target whose map range is also known.
e. g. If the map range to the new target is 5,800, a correction of
150 would be required, and 5,950 would therefore be the order to the
battery.
PARALLELISM OF AIMING POSTS.
44. The exact parallelism of aiming posts can be checked at the
battery by various methods. The following is a good practical
method, the completion of which may be expected to occupy an
hour:
(a) Lay out the aiming points by any of the methods given in
Field Artillery Training.
(b) Take the best director available, place it in front of the aim-
ing points of the pivot gun, say at “a. ”
(0) Select some clearly defined point “P” to a flank, and put up
a mark “M ” between the director and “P.” V .
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 23
(d) Measure the angle P. a. A several times. Let us say that the
mean of three readings is 94° 15’.
(e) Move the director to “b ” in prolongation of the aiming points
of the next gun. Measure the angle P. b. B. It should read 94°
15’. If it does not, move the director slightly toward or away from
“P” taking care to keep “M” and “P” in line. From the new
position read the angle between “P” and the dial sight of the gun.
When a position has been found for the director at which the angle
between the dial sight and “P” measures 94° 15’, then that position
is in the required line of fire.
Pick up the aiming points for that gun and replant them between
the director and the dial sight.
5 a M. P.


IHI ll!
B A
(f) Move the director to a similar spot in front of the next gun
and test as before.
45. Guns that fire timev shrapnel (as distinct from howitzers)
should always have their parallelism checked by observing “kites”
from the battery, thus:
(a) From the pivot gun measure the angle of sight to whatever
constitutes the sky-line in front; suppose a line of trees obstructs
the view, and that the angle of sight to their top is 2° 20’. Give the
order to the battery “angle of sight 3° elevation”; with this angle
of sight a normal corrector would give bursts observable from the
battery above the tree tops.
(b) Select a suitable range. Provided that it will not cause danger
to the infantry, 3,600 yards will be found to save a certain amount of
24 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
calculation, as at that range one yard subtends one minute as meas-
ured by graticules.
(0) Note down the intervals in minutes by which the bursts
should be separated in the air: Thus, suppose No. 3 gun pit con-
tains the pivot gun, and that N o. 2 gun is 10 yards to the right of
N o. 3 gun, its bursts should be 10 minutes to the right of that from
N o. 3 gun.
N o. 1 gun is 55 yards to the right of N o. 3 gun, its bursts should
be 55 minutes to the right of that from N o. 3 gun.
Similarly with Nos. 4, 5, and 6, to the left of No. 3 gun.
(d) From a suitable position near the pivot gun observe a round
of battery fire with angle of sight 3 degrees elevation and range
3,600, and measure by means of graticules the number of minutes
that the bursts of the other guns are right or left of that from the
pivot gun. If any interval is found incorrect, give the necessary
correction and repeat as required.
(e) Having by this method got the lines of fire of all guns par-
allel to that of the pivot gun, aiming posts should be replanted
where necessary through the dial sight set at zero.
46. To secure parallel lines by observation from the O. P., regis-
ter each gun in turn accurately on to the zero point. Leave the
pivot gun in that line; switch the other guns out the correct amount
(calculated mathematically) that will compensate for the intervals
at which the guns are placed. For example: The perpendicular dis-
tance between N o. 5 gun and the pivot gun is paced to be 65 yards
(not 40 yards). Range to zero point 3,600. Give the order “No. 5,
1° 5’ M. L.” Aiming posts are laid out in these lines, and a round
of battery fire fired so as to see that no mistake has been made either
in the calculation or at the guns.
PREPARATION OF THE FIGHTING MAP.
47. Before the fighting map can be prepared, the exact location
of the pivot gun and of the zero point must be accurately determined.
The survey company will determine it, but the battery com-
mander must be prepared to fix the location himself, as nearly as he
can until the services of the survey company can be obtained.
48. The zero line is then drawn in colored chalk through the
zero point and the position of the pivot gun, and should be extended
right across the map to prevent any chance of a mistake in reading
right or left.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 25
49. Arcs are drawn in colored chalk at 2,000, 3,000, 4,000 yards,
etc., and in chalk of a difierent color at 2,500, 3,500, 4,500 yards,
etc., from the position of the pivot gun.
50. An arc is drawn at 8,000 yards from the position of the pivot
gun and is marked in degrees right and left of the zero line. Rays
at 10°, 20°, etc., right and left are drawn in chalk of one color; 5°,
15°, 25°, etc., right and left are drawn in chalk of another color.
51. The intermediate degrees and hundreds of yards may be
marked in thin black lines if required; and in many cases it is use-
ful to draw in degree lines right and left of the zero point from the
position of the main observing station.
52. In one corner of the map should be pasted particulars re-
garding the various datum points; the location, the angle of sight
and normal gun range to each must be recorded.
In the opposite corner a concentration table similar to that below
may be shown but the figures must be correct for the actual inter-
vals between the lines of fire of the guns.
CONCENTRATION TABLE .
[Calculated for 201‘ gun intervala]

More right guns.

Range in yards. I
No.1. No.2. No.3. No.4.'No.5. No.6.

0 I 0 I
2,000 ........................... .. 0 35 1 0 1 30 2 0 2 40
3,000 ........................... .. 0 25 40 1 0 1 20 1 50
4,000 ........................... .. 0 20 30 45 1 0 1 20
5,000 ........................... .. 0 15 25 35 50 1 5
6,000 .......................... .. 0 10 20 so 40 55



On the back of the board it is convenient topaste the windgraph,
and, for batteries concerned, the table on page 3 of the 18-pounder
range table. An angle of sight table may also be included.
53. To prevent distortion, the artillery boards are prepared by
cutting the map into squares, and pasting each square carefully
on to stretched drawing paper with the grids marked in. It is not
always possible for the fighting map to be thus accurately mounted,
and some distortion is almost inevitable. To allow for this the error
should be carefully measured as explained in par. 24.
26 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
TECHNICAL NOTES ON 18-POUNDER BARRAGES.
DEPTH 0F BARRAGE.
54. A barrage, whether of shrapnel or of high explosive, will
ordinarily cover a zone of some 200 yards depth. The better the
drill and the more careful the preliminary work, the less deep will
this zone be.
ESSENTIALS OF A GOOD BARRAGE.
55. The following points must receive attention if a satisfactory
barrage is to be achieved:
(a) Smart and accurate drill.
(b) Rehearsals, to insure that the barrage shall progress exactly as
required and that there shall be no thin places in it. Rehearsals are
particularly necessary where the ground is undulating.
(c) Timekeeping. This is all important. The barrage is divided
into periods of so many minutes. If the rate of fire is 4 rounds per
gun per minute for two minutes there will be 8 rounds prepared at
each gun for the first two minutes, after which fuses set at different
fuse lengths will be required. If the rate of fire is not kept up as
ordered, the 8 rounds will be fired either too soon, in which case there
will be a pause before the signal to lift or the gun will lift before
receiving the signal, or, on the other hand, the lift will be ordered
before the 8 rounds have been fired, and rounds are either lost or fired
at a wrong elevation. ,
It is generally as well, owing to the difficulty of accurate time-
keeping, when ammunition has been prepared to have a spare
round or two with each gun for each fuse in case the firing has been
at too rapid a rate. It is better to have extra rounds than pauses in
the fire at critical moments.
(of) Simplicity in “lifts.” Straightforward lifts where there is
but little alteration to sights do not require much rehearsal, but
where in lifting a change in direction is also required, difficulties
crop up. A battery frequently requires different elevation on all
its guns at a lift, and at the next lift fresh changes both in line and
in elevation on the sights. It is essential that where such lifts as
these are ordered that several rehearsals without ammunition should
take place.
(6) Sorting of ammunition by propellants.
(f) Adjustment of sights. If any particular range dial shows a
tendency to slip, the laying with that gun should be by field cli-
nometer. In any case during a prolonged barrage, as for instance
during a big attack, an officer should occasionally go around the
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 27
battery with the field clinometer to make sure that range dials have
not slipped and that the sights are still in adjustment.
(9) Calibration and consequent gun corrections.
AMMUNITION FOR BARRAGES.
56. Creeping barrages.— Time shrapnel affords the best screen
and the best forward effect, and so presents marked advantages over
high explosives for this purpose. Fifty per cent of shell bursting
on graze is the ideal arrangement. It is often thought that a per-
cussion shrapnel is a wasted round, but this is not altogether the
case. On very bad ground probably most of the percussion rounds
will be wasted, but there will be considerable forward effect from a
certain proportion of them, whereas the 50 per cent which burst in
air should nearly all be very effective, and all of those which burst
on percussion will produce their share of the screening effect.
High explosive with delay gives less forward effect, as the ma-
jority of the fragments fly laterally, and the screening effect is slight
and too high. Infantry can not keep so close to a barrage of this
ammunition as they can to a shrapnel one, as the high explosive
shell bursts some 30 to 40 yards beyond the point of impact. More-
over, short rounds of high explosive are more dangerous to our own
infantry than short rounds of time shrapnel, as with the former the
fragments fly sidewise down the line. It is sometimes said the
advantage of a high explosive barrage over a time shrapnel barrage
is that the error of the fuse is eliminated as well as errors in fuse
setting. Where, however, a barrage is fired according to program
there should be no errors in fuse setting, and where the long cor-
rector is selected the error in fuse burning may be largely ignored.
There will, it is true, he a few short high bursts, but these will
probably not cause casualties and are far less objectionable than
short high explosive shell as explained above.
It must be remembered that the ricochet action of this shell will
not take place at ranges over about 3,500 yards. The fuse functions
better the shorter the range and the firmer and the less pitted the
ground.
High explosive without delay is unsuitable for a barrage. The
screening effect is much the same as in the case of high explosive
with delay, but material effect upon the enemy’s infantry in trenches
would only occur where a shell burst actually in the trenches.
57. Standing barrages.—-Apart from the nature of the projec-
tile to be employed, these are also of two kinds:
(i) That which is fired to keep down the heads of occupants of a
trench which itself is not to be attacked.
28 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
(it) To keep down the heads of infantry in a trench which forms the
immediate objective of our own assaulting troops.
In the first case either high explosive with delay or without delay
or time shrapnel may be employed. If high explosive with delay is
used, the fire should be frontal, and not oblique or enfilade, owing to
the direction of flight of the splinters.
If without delay, the effect is likely to be small and- consequently
more rounds should be fired.
In either case the range must be exactly found or the effect will be
very small indeed.
Time shrapnel is the best of all, fired either frontally, obliquely, or
in enfilade, but it is also the most diificult, as it is important that the
height of burst of the fuses should be correct. For such a barrage the‘
height of burst should be 10 minutes. The height should be arrived
at by calculation or by observation of a suflicient number of rounds
by an observer in the battery. In the latter case when the proper
length of corrector has been ascertained by observation from the
battery, a short series should be fired at the trench to insure that it is
effective. The corrector setting should have been obtained correctly,
then, if the height of burst is observed to be wrong, it merely means
that the angle of site is incorrect. The latter must be adjusted and
not the corrector setting.
When a trench is to be barraged immediately previous to the
assault by our infantry, the most important point is that our infantry
should get as close to the trench as possible before the barrage lifts.
The barrage may be composed of either high explosive or shrapnel
for this purpose. High explosive with delay if placed with absolute
accuracy ( i. e., with the M. P. I. 25 yards short of the trench and the
burst immediately over the trench) will be the most effectual in
damaging the defenders, but the infantry cannot get up so close and
but little screening effect is afforded.
Time shrapnel with a long corrector is therefore again probably
the best.
58. Protective barrages during consolidation—Screening
effect is generally required for this purpose and therefore time
shrapnel with a long corrector is to be preferred.
59. Protective barrages by night and. defensive (“ S. 0. 8.”)
barrages.—As our infantry are stationary under these barrages
and screening efiect is not required, high explosive is a suitable
projectile. The stopping power of the shell is good against troops
moving across the open, and its employment enables shrapnel to be
reserved for other occasions. At night the use of high explosive has
the further advantage that fuses do not have to be set.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 29
60. Enfilade barrages.-—Enfilade barrages offer an advantage
in that infantry can approach closer to the trench fired at than with
any other form of barrage. The projectile employed must invariably
be time shrapnel, as the fragments of high explosive shell fly side-
wise. The front covered by shrapnel shell bursting 10 minutes
above the line of sight at a mean range is some 20 yards, and if the
line be correct this means only 10v yards on either side of the trench.
As the effect of shrapnel is mainly forward, a very much greater
proportion of bullets are in the trench than with any other nature
of barrage, provided the line is right. For this reason an enfilade
barrage is economical, and it is estimated that in ordinary circum-
stances one gun per 40 yards firing at 4 rounds per minute should be
sufficient.
At the same time enfilade barrages present the grave disadvantage
that guns placed for this purpose are soon masked. This type of
barrage should therefore be regarded as suitable for raids and minor
operations with limited objectives, but as unsuitable for a battle.
61. Flanking barrages.——Flanking barrages may consist of
either shrapnel or high explosive; but if the latter is used, care must
be taken that the shell are burst at a sufficient distance from the
flanks of the infantry.
Experiments have shown that this distance, in the case of high
explosive with delay fuse, should be 300 yards, assuming the line of
fire to be parallel to the line of advance.
NOTES ON THE BEHAVIOR, EFFECT, AND EMPLOYMENT
OF PROJECTILES AND FUSES.
62. There are three principal types of shell used in the service.
They are—
1. Shrapnel shell.
2. High explosive shell.
3. Chemical shell.
SHRAPNEL SHELL.
63. The behavior and effect of shrapnel shell are well understood
and do not require to be described here. The idea, however, that
shrapnel shell bursting on percussion are practically useless requires
some qualification. At short and medium ranges, and on suitable
ground, the effect of percussion shrapnel is by no means inconsider-
able.
With both percussion and time shrapnel the effect is all forward,
and the width of the zone swept by the bullets is comparatively
narrow (15—25 yards).
30 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
Employment:
(a) Frontal barrages, with long corrector to cover an advance.
(5) Enfilade barrages, with effective corrector.
(c) Defensive barrages.
(d) Neutralizing trenches.
(e) Firing on communication trenches, roads, tracks, etc., by
day and night.
(f) Troops in the open.
(g) Wire cutting.
(h) Counterbattery work (neutralization), especially if the
hostile batteries have not had time to dig themselves in.
Shrapnel shell are fired by guns only and not by howitzers.
HIGH-EXPLOSIVE SHELL.
64. High-explosive shell are fired by all natures of guns and
howitzers. Their behavior and effect depend largely on the type
of fuse used, and, when the fuse is provided with delay action, on
whether the shell is fired by a gun or a howitzer.
There are three types of fuses employed with high-explosive shell.
(13) Instantaneous.
(if) N ondelay (so-called, but giving a slight though appreci-
able delay action).
(n'i) Delay fuses.
65. High explosive shell with instantaneous fuses.—-Used
with 45-inch, 6-inch, 8-inch, and 9.2-inch howitzers. Can also be
used with 12-inch and l5-inch. Not at present supplied for use
with guns (the present No. 106 instantaneous fuse will not act with
certainty at angles of descent of less than about 8°).
Behavion—The instantaneous fuse causes the shell to detonate
immediately it strikes the ground.
Eject—The shell makes a very shallow crater and gives very
good concussion and splinter effect.
The effect of the detonation is mainly sideways and slightly for-
wards (i. e., at about 120° to the line of fire). The effect straight to
the front and the backward effect are both comparatively small.
Employment:
(a) Against personnel in the open.
(b) Defensive barrages.
(c) Counter-battery work (neutralization).
(d) Neutralizing machine guns, especially those sited for
flanking fire.
(e) Neutralizing trenches commanding the progress or the
objective of an attack. »
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 31
Employment—Continued.
(f) Distant barrages on roads and tracks.
(g) Bombardment of camps, bivouacs and billets.
(h) Destruction of wire entanglements. (The effect is similar
to that of a medium trench mortar bomb with N o. 107
fuse.)
Nora—(a) The distance sideways covered by the splinters from
high explosive shell with instantaneous fuse renders their employ-
ment dangerous if burst to the flank of our own infantry in the open,
or if burst close in front when fired from the flank.
The following table gives a rough guide as to the margin of safety
which is considered desirable:


Nature of shell. Laterally. Forward or backward.
Yards.
4.5.inch ...................... . . 500-600
6~inch ....................... . . 600-700 5 to % these amounts.
8-inch and 9.2-inch ........... . - 800—1, 000

(b) Good effect may be expected from high-explosive shell with
instantaneous fuse for neutralizing guns and machine guns if the
shell can be burst opposite the embrasure. This will be especially
so if the embrasure faces to a flank.
66. High-explosive shell with non-delay fuses—Can be used
with all natures of gun and howitzers.
Behavior.——The non-delay fuse detonates the shell almost immedi-
ately after it has penetrated into the ground, forming a crater similar
in shape to an inverted cone.
Apart from the weight of the shell and the hardness or otherwise
of the ground, the size of the crater appears to depend principally
upon the remaining velocity of the shell. For instance, the, crater
formed by an 8-inch howitzer shell fired at a short range using the
first charge is somewhat similar to the crater formed by a 6-inch
howitzer shell fired with the full charge.
Employment with guns:
. (a) Destruction of vertical cover, barricades, walls, etc.
(b) High-explosive barrages beyond the range at which shell
will ricochet or where the ground is too‘ broken for .
ricochet effect.
(c) Bombardment of dumps, railway stations, viHages, etc.
Employment with howitzers: ' '
(a) Bombardment of trenches and light cover.
'" (b) Counter battery work—destruction and neutralization.
32 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
Employment with howitzers—Continued.
(c) Bombardment of villages, railway stations, observation
stations, etc.
(d) Destruction of wire when No. 106 (instantaneous) fuse is
not available. The area destroyed, however, is limited
and very much less in extent than when the instan-
taneous fuse is used.
Nora—The splinter effect with shell fused with non-delay fuses
is comparatively small and infantry may be said to be reasonably
safe within 200 yards of the burst.
67. H. E. shell with delay fuses—Behamon—This depends on
the angle of descent and the nature of the ground. If the range is
such that the angle of descent does not exceed about 8° and the
ground is not very much cut up, the shell will ricochet and burst
in the air.
With the 18~pounder gun the point of burst is from 10 to 50 yards
in advance of where the shell strikes the ground and from 10 to 100
feet up in the air.
The strike of the splinters is ‘downwards and slightly forwards and
some will fly a considerable distance to a flank.
If the angle of descent is more than about 8°, the shell will pene-
trate and detonate some feet below the surface.
At long ranges the shell may penetrate so far that the noise of the
burst is almost entirely muffled and there is no splinter effect or
apparent crater. The reason of this is that the shell bursts so far
below the surface that the cavity formed by the detonation is en-
tirely below the ground and all that is visible is a small mound of
earth forced up from below. It does not follow, however, that the
shell is ineffective, as this is the effect desired with howitzer shell
for the destruction of overhead cover, dugouts, magazines, etc.
Sometime-s detonation takes place earlier and good crater effect is
produced analogous but superior to the effect obtained with a non—
delay fuse. This effect may be regarded as normal at short ranges
when the lower charges are used. ‘
(In this respect) the angle of descent, provided that it is sufiicient
to prevent the shell from ricochetting, appears to have little infiu~
. ence on the size of the crater.
Employment of high-explosive shell with delay fuses:
(1) With guns—
(a) Frontal barrages for ricochet effect.
(b) Strong vertical cover.
('0) Gounterbattery work (destruction).
(d) Fire against trenches which are known to be manned.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 2. 33
Emloyme'nt of high-explosive shell with delay fuses—Contd.
(2) Withhowitzers—
(a) Destruction of strong overhead cover, dugouts, mag-
azines, etc. -
(b) Bombardment of fortified villages.
(c) Counterbattery work (destruction).
(d) Bombardment of trenches, especially when firing
with reduced charges.
CHEMICAL SHELL.
68. Lethal and lachrymatory shelL—These are fully dealt
with in “Instructions on the use of lethal and lachrymatory shell”
(S. S. 134) and will not be touched upon here.
69. Smoke shelL—These are at present supplied for the 18-
pounder gun and are fused with non-delay fuses. A certain number
of 4.5-inch fused with N o. 44 fuse have also been supplied.
A white and opaque column of smoke is liberated from each shell.
These columns merge with each other and form a dense screen.
With a high barometer and a low wind the smoke tends to rise
rather rapidly.
The most favorable conditions for the employment of these shell
appear to be with a cross wind of moderate force and a low barometer.
In such conditions the shell should be concentrated on a point well
to windward of the locality which it is desired to screen, so that the
smoke will be blown across it in a thick curtain. If there is avalley
to the windward flank, the shell should be burst in it, as this to a
certain extent mitigates the disadvantage of the tendency of the
smoke to rise.
If the wind is blowing up or down the range it will be necessary
to burst the shell at intervals all along the front to be screened, and
a high expenditure of ammunition will be required.
With the 18-pounder it has been found necessary to burst the shell
10 yards apart at a rate of two rounds per minute. With the 4.5-inch
shell an interval of 15 yards should be suitable.
The phosphorus with which these smoke shell are filled is highly
inflammable and has been found to have considerable incendiary
effect on occasions.
Employment:
((1) Blinding commanding ground from which rifle or machine-
gun fire could be brought to bear on the progress of an
attack or on its objective.
34 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
Employment—Continued.
(b) Blinding the enemy’s observation stations, both in attack
and defense.
(0) In a barrage of shrapnel or H. E. to improve the screening
effect.
DUTIES OF OBSERVING OFFICERS, F. O. O.’s, LIAISON OFFI-
CERS, AND FORWARD LIAISON OFFICERS.
'70. The duties of observing oflicers, F. O. O. ’s., liaison oflicers, and
forward liaison officers have not been always clearly understood
either by the officers filling these posts or by the infantry com-
manders. These instruction, therefore, are issued with a view to
defining their duties clearly and will serve as a basis on which they
will be carried out during the forthcoming operations.
71. The observing ofifcer is the oflicer controlling the fire of his
battery from the main observation station, which should be at the
place where he can best see the situation and observe his fire. The
battery commander will himself carry out important registration,
and observe fire during destructive shoots, but as the strain of con-
tinuous observation is heavy, reliefs must be arranged when neces-
sary. . The battery commander is responsible that the officer con-
trolling the fire is fully conversant with the situation, and is thor-
oughly capable of carrying out the work of observation efficiently.
7 2. The F. O. O. is the officer sent out by brigade, group, or battery
commander to assist in observation of fire from a forward position.
He is the “forward eyes” of the commander who sent him out.
After the successful advance of the infantry, it will be his duty to
establish communication with his commander from the observation
station in the German lines allotted to him, and to carry on the work
of observation from there.
'7 3. The liaison ofl‘ieer.——Liaison between the C. R. A. of a division
and his divisional commander is maintained by the two headquar-
ters being established close together, thus allowing of frequent
personal interviews.
If the double group commander of the heavy artillery covering
a divisional front is not able to live very close to the divisional
commander, it may be necessary to attach a liaison officer from one
of the batteries to the staff of the division to insure maintenance of
the closest touch between the heavy artillery and the general staff
and O. R. A. of the division. The divisional commander will decide
whether he wishes to have a heavy-artillery liaison oficer attached
to his staff.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2. 35
During operations the infantry brigade headquarters are usually
situated so fanforward that the commander of field or heavy artillery
afliliated to the brigade can not live close to them, as the necessary
and intricate system of communication essential to the exercising
of his command could not be maintained.
In such circumstances an officer, if possible not under the rank of
captain, will be attached to the staff of the infantry brigadier both
from the field and siege artillery covering the brigade front to main-
tain the closest touch between the arms concerned.
74. Forward liaison oflicen—In order to maintain touch between
the infantry immediately engaged in the attack and the field artil-
lery supporting them, a field artillery subaltern will normally be
attached to the headquarters of each battalion in the front line.
As during the progress of the attack a battalion reaches the final
objective allotted to it, and is passed by another battalion, this
forward liaison officer will be transferred, so that liaison with the
most advanced battalions is always maintained.
7 5. All liaison oflicers must appreciate—
(a) That it is their duty and privilege to act as advisers on all
artillery matters to the commanders to whom they are attached.
(b) That it is their duty to be fully conversant with all the artil-
lery dispositions, and actions arranged for, covering the infantry to
whom they are attached and the neighboring bodies of infantry.
For this purpose they must be specially instructed under arrange-
ments to be made by the C. B. As and double siege group command-
ers.
(c) That they are the “forward ears” of the commanders who send
them out and with whom they must maintain close touch. In order
to follow the changes in the situation that takes place, their best
position is the report center.
(d) That the success of operations largely depends on the accuracy
of information and the speed with which this information is passed
to the commanders in rear, and that they have unequaled opportu-
nities of collecting information.
(e) That no amount of information is of any use unless they have
the means of passing it back to the proper quarters.
(f) That it is part of their duty to investigate reported cases of the
shelling of our own troops by our own guns, and to trace the source
of the trouble and to stop it. Four essentials for finding out the bat-
tery whose fire is causing losses to our'men are—
1. The time the shells were falling.
2. The rate of fire.
36 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 2.
3. The caliber and nature of shell (shrapnel? high explosive,
etc).
4. Direction from which shell were coming.
Infantry officers should carefully note these four points.
(g) That it is not part of their duty to take part in bombing or other
enterprises of like nature, and that they must not do so.
(h) That it is the special duty of the liaison officer at infantry bri-
gade headquarters to keep his map up to date from information ob-
tained from the staff of the infantry brigadier and other suitable
sources. That he will pass the information so received on to the
representatives of units, who should be sent to collect it at times
which should be fixed in consultation with the staff of the infantry
brigadier.
7 6. Observing oflfcers and F. O. O’s. must appreciate that in addition
to the important work of observing fire it is their duty to keep the
commanders in rear informed of the situation as far as they can see
it from their 0. P’s.; frequently they will be the first people to see
changes in the progress of operations, and their timely and accurate
reports may have far-reaching results. It is their duty to keep their
‘ maps accurately up to date, and for this purpose‘ they will refer con-
stantly to the liaison officer. There were constant cases during the
Somme battle when the maps of artillery observers were not kept
up to date.
77. The following point with regard to sending back information
requires particular attention and is frequently omitted. The time at
which the occurrence which is the subject of the report took place
must be given in the text. Negative information is frequently of
the very greatest value.
78. It is of the first importance that the infantry should clearly
understand the duties allotted to the various artillery officers as set
forth above and that they should appreciate that whether they are
efficiently carried out or not depends very largely on the assistance
given to them.
It takes two to form a liaison.
C)
i‘, go CONFIDEN TIA L

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
.Z(6'5
Field Artillery Notes
No. 4
From French and British Sources

EDITED AT THE ARMY WAR COLLEGE


WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE


I 9| 7
Wan- Dnnxnrunwr.
Document No. 618.
Ofiice of The Adjutant General.
CH‘FL ' ‘if 413.?
‘l it'se . ‘Etienne-
it $3-.
in}; "1;
WAR DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, July 10, 1917.
:The following “ Field Artillery Notes No. 4 ” are published
for the information of all concerned.
[300.6, A. G. 0.] .
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:
TASKER H. BLISS,
Major General, Acting Chief of Stan‘.
‘ OFFICIAL:
H P. MCCAIN,
The Adjutant General.
(3).
WAR DEPARTMENT,
THE ADJUTANT GENEBAL’S OFFICE,
Washington, Jane 19, 1917’.
To ALL OFFICERS or‘ THE ARMY:
You are advised that this and all subsequent documents of
a similar character which may be furnished to you from this
office are to be regarded as strictly confidential. They are to
be kept at all times in your personal possession, and are not
to be copied, nor are any parts of their contents to be com-
municated, either directly or indirectly, to the press, nor to
any persons not in the military or naval service of the United
States. In Europe these documents are not to be carried into
the front-line trenches, nor farther t0 the front than the usual
post of the oflficers to whom issued.
Strict compliance with this injunction is enjoined upon every
officer into Whose hands any of these confidential documents
may come.
BY ORDER or THE SECRETARY or WAR:
H. P. MCCAIN,
The Adjutant General.
(5)
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 4.
FROM FRENCH AND BRITISH SOURCES.
[Army War College, July, 1917. Secret and confidential. For official
use only. Not to be taken into first-line trenches]
CONTENTS. .
Page.
I. Organization of artillery command (French, December,
1916) ............................................. .. 9
Tables of provisional strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
11. Notes on guns and howitzers, and the organization of
artillery (French Mission, June, 1917) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Also heavy German artillery (French documents
of October, 1916).; ........... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 17
III. Employment of artillery on the defensive (French,
14ay,1916) .............. ., ....................... -. 21
Chap. I. Mission of artillery on the defensive . . . . - . 22
Chap. II. Organization of the command- - - . - - - - . . - . 23
Chap. III. Execution of missions intrusted to th
artillery .............. . .' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1. Demolition fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2. Concentrated fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . _. . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
A. Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
B. Fire direction ..................... . . 26
C. Organization of concentrated fire. . - - 26
D. Rules for execution of concentrated
fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - '28
E. Example of concentrated fire ...... .- 29
3. Defensive fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - . 29
A. Fire to prevent an attack . . . . . . . . . . - 29
B. Barrage fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 30
4. Contingentfire............-. - - . 36
A. Harassingfire.-......-....-.--.-..-. 36
B. Fire 111 reprisal ................... . . 36
Chap. IV. Preparation for the employment of ar-
tillery in the sectors............- . . . . .. . . - .. .- 3-7
Chap. V. Organization of the artillery. . . - .' ...... . . 39
A. Emplacement of batteries ..... . . . . . . 39
B. Distribution of targets ............ . . 40
(7)
8
III. Employment of artillery on the defensive ,(French,
May, 1916i—Gontinued.
Chap. V. Organization of the artillery—Continued.
C. Adjustments ..................... . .
D . Obtaining, transmitting, and utilizing
information, . . . . . .- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
(1) Obtaining information. . - . .
(2) Details of organization .... . .
(3) Transmission of information.
(4) Utilization of information.
Appendix I. Organization of telephone net for ob-
servationandranging................ ..
IV. Organization of a battery for active operations (British,
January, 1917) .............................. . .' . . . . . .
TableA—Distribution.....
V. Use of illuminating 75 mm. shells in firing ‘on aerial
targets (French, February, 1917 ) ................... . .
VI. Notes on the technical reconnaissance of an artillery
position and the training of the headquarters of a
battery .......................................... . .
1. General instructions .......................... - .
2. Composition of a battery headquarters ......... . -
3. Disposition of oflicers and battery headquarters
during a reconnaissance ..................... . .
4. Duties of the ofiicers in a reconnaissance . . . . . .
5. Duties of noncommissioned officers in the occu-
pation of a position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. The procedure to be adopted in the occupation
of
7. Notes on a drill for the occupation of a position. .
A. The occupation of covered positions by
the ordinary method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. The occupation of an open position . . . . . .
Page.
40
41
41
43
44
45
49
54
57
59
60'
61
63
66
67
75
75
76
N o. 7024.
I. ORGANIZATION OF ARTILLERY COMMAND.
Experience drawn from the late actions has shown the need
of increasing the means of artillery command at the actual
disposal of the infantry divisions. The latter have been pro-
vided in action with an artillery superior to the normal allot-
ment. The commander of the divisional artillery alone directs
the whole. But in actual practice he is absorbed in the com-
mand and the details concerning the posting of the different
battalions of the field artillery regiments ‘which he commands.
This technical duty of detail necessarily separates him from the
general commanding the division during the period in which the
preparation and execution of a plan of action for all the artillery
necessitates his collaboration with the division commander.’
It has therefore become essential to provide the division with
an artillery staff relieved of all direct command of troops and
sufficiently strongly organized to absorb and use rapidly all the
artillery which may be allotted to the’ divisions in the different
roles they are called upon to assume. ‘The rank of the artillery
commander of the division must allow him to take command of
the various reinforcing units which may be temporarily attached
to the division without confusion. Consequently, by dispatch
No. 19—675 1/11, November 30, 1916, the Minister of War ap-
proved the following orders: .
“In each division of infantry the artillery command shall rest
with an officer of the grade of colonel. This officer will have a
staff at his disposal, which will be reinforced according to the
duties and the additional artillery assigned to the division.
“The commander of the divisional artillery has under his
orders the commanders of the various artillery groups (field
artillery, heavy artillery, trench artillery) as well as the various
services of the artillery—supply, repairs, means of observation,
and liaison—belonging normally to the division or temporarily
attached to it.”
This measure has been vigorously carried out, following the
instructions given for each division by general headquarters——
first bureau and bureau of personnel.
3125°-17---2 (9)
10
The duties of the commander of the corps artillery have been
condensed in the form, and the duties of the general command-
ing the artillery of the army have been modified. "
The table of provisional strength—of artillery stafi of army,
‘artillery stafi of army corps, artillery stafi of division. Stafi
of commander of field artillery groups (divisional or corps), and
heavy artillery groups (army corps or army)—appended.
The tables following go into efiect immediately, except those
of the divisional artillery and the field artillery groups, which
will go into efiect successively with the. organization of divi-
sional artillery commands, following the instructions given for
each division. -
H
Table of provisional strength.







Personnel. ($335123 Wagons.
Gunners. £3 Artillery.
{6
El “5
ements. a:
v-I 3 “ §
0 “I! M , o
35 :15 g g; a
. . a s . :9; . . a . e g
v—u ' U2 . '
8a8.a-3'=’68§>~aasssessosaeg
E'aSQS‘S'ZEQ'ZEwasnnnnn'gn-gogé’
0 w o S n: i=1 m a c: m o S Q .1. as a a 05: 02> 2 a m 2 Q4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Stafi’ of Artillery of Army. -
Generalcommandingartilleirfyu 1 2 3 .... Eluperiorofileer—chiefofsta 1 1 2 .... Staflofiicers ............. 14 4 4 .... Artllleryinformationservlce... 22 2 2 .... .. - . . - .
llnti-alrcraltdefense.........-.. 22 2 2 .... .. .. ..
Trenehartlllery .............. .. 82 .. 2 3 .... -. - .. .
Sergeant ........... ........ 41 .... ._ 1 ..
Clerks ........................ 58 .......... Gunners. ........... ....... 70 . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 84
Total ................... .. 12 1 12|19 16 1 ...... 2 1 4
1 2 captains, 2 lieutenants or second lieutenants. Occasionally a 5 4 clerks (1 may be corporal), 2 clerks—A. T. S., 2 draftsmen.
staff oflieer may be a major. 6 2 telephonlsts, 2 cychsts. _
2 Major or ca tain, a staff officer. 1 1 motorcycle, 4 chauffeurs, 1 mechanlc.
B %u erior o cer, lieutenant, or second lieutenant—stafi. 8 4 reconnoitering motors taken from the army allowance.
4 r or y.
12

w H s .... : w 3 OH H H w .............. 5:485
.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. H . . . . . . . . . . . .111.3waoflQ29H
as H a ...... f“ f Hm ............... ..... :uHaHo
...... .... .. a .e. 5 ................. .....§H.HHouSm
.1- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111111111.. . . . . .. m m 11.1.1111111111.... H .JmhfifiwfimMGMUQQESOOJQQBOU
. . asses
Ease.“ .8 Eases 2: s has.
N H m . . . . . . 1111111111.. . . . . .. a NH w 1111111111.... H u 1.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4308
a. H a ...... .......... .. H; I ............. ............ :Eenqsw
.1. . . . . . . .. 1...... . . . . . . .. 1...-.. . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Nu 111......1.1.11.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . 1wMH¢~O
N N H N... .HHQHESSHHHEEHHHEHQ8E8
1.. . . . . . . 11...... . . . . . . 1.1.11 1...... .1. . . . . 1 v _w 111-.....11111111.... vH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .fiHQQEOfidHQ
N 111111 1.. ..1........ 1.. H 1hnofi$uflMQHUHHGEEOOMQHQQQU

.000 a a I I l a llooluuuln n u I I 0 a ulna... Itacauuuoloo 0'00 I I I I on N
.l‘l I I 6 I I O ll IIOI llll I I I I l O II IIIIIUIIII'IIIII IIII l O l I ‘I m
.aaso 3: H. s 55: a .e ksm

LO
N
‘H
N
00
N
H
N
C
N
O’)
H
w
H
1*
H
(9
H
N
H

'sepioro'ioyq
‘selofiorg
'esioq-g a '
'esxoq-QI
'esroq-g
'esxoq-g
'esioq-g
'esxoq-t
'esroq-g
‘esxoq-I :2.
's‘ueyq $3
's,.reog;()
sIeArJQ 'sreuung S
'sreqedumxm a:
-s.Ie[pp'eS oo
sloping [-
‘reuunfi 19188“: no‘
'I'BIOdIOQ <1‘
'iu'eefixes co
'sieoggo N
.QHHSHHHQHH
areogrgu'e Arecn'eq =0

'sroqour 1931108983:


5255.
swarms need .10 11mg 1 3 ‘
£8550
. A2353 .
muons? $20M Hoqnomnom


.woHHHHflHHoOlfimeeéa Nesowfiaisw .8 figs
st
Sta of a group of field artillery
( ivisional or army corps) or
of a group of heavy artillery
(army or army corps).
Colonel or lieutenant colonel



















comman 1n ............... .. 1 2 .... . Staffoflicers ................. ..114 4 4 .... Telephoneservice ............ 1 122 10 2 .... .. 2 4 _......'.131 Gunners ..................... . 81 1 144 65 .... .. 1 . . 153
Total .................. .. 5 2 2 _.....-......... 1 14 12 6 3. 4 ........ 1 ............... 2 3
1 1 captain, 3 lieutenants or second lieutenants.
8 1 ms_ or or captain, 1 staff officer.
8 Of w ‘ch 1 is possibly a corporal.
4 2 teletphonists, 2 cychsts.
61 mo orcycle, 3 chauffeurs, 1 mechanic.
6 2 reconnoitering motors taken from the allowance of the Army Corps.
7 2 captains, 3 lieutenants or second lieutenants, 2 aeroplane
in this event he is counted on the Division Stair.
8 Sergeant clerk.
9 2 cyclists, 1 clerk, 2 radio telegraphers, besides 1 wireless operator furnished by radio telegraphic service.
“2 reconnoitering motors, 1 Iii-ton truck, with telephonic su plies, of 1,500 kilos.
of the division headquarters, as is also the transportation for ice and baggage.
0 servers detached from squadron. One observer may belong to another arm;
The 2 reconnoitering motors are taken from the allowance
111.‘ captain, 3 lieutenants or second lieutenants, including 1 wireless officer and 1 telephone officer. In each heavy artillery group (army
or arm
1 no mounted.
18 Telephone we on.
corps) there are 2 observing officers in aeroplanes, detached from an air squadron.
14 2 cyclists, 2 re '0 telegraphers, 1 wireless 0 orator from radio telegraphic service. I
15 Ireconnoitering motor; 1 ll-ton truck, wit food and baggage; 1 1§—ton truck, with telephonic supplies, of 1,500 kilos.
II. NOTE ON GUNS AND HOWITZERS, AND
THE ORGANIZATION OF ARTILLERY.
The “Instructions concerning the offensive combat of large
units” states: “The artillery opens the way for the infantry
by breaking down all obstacles opposing its advance.”
Guns of all caliber should be used for this object, but in
different ways: a
“ Guns are preferably used against the exposed personnel,
against batteries, against earthworks or shelters which can be
destroyed by fiat trajectory fire (the latter is exceptional).
“Howitzers and mortars are used preferably against earth-
works and shelters which can not be destroyed except by
plunging or vertical fire (which is the usual case) .”
These principles must serve as a base for the organization of
heavy artillery.
The development of trench warfare has had as a result, not
only to increase considerably the proportion of heavy artillery,
but also to put at the service of the infantry, and under the
orders of the commander responsible for the attack, the artil-
lery necessary to make a breach in the enemy’s defensive works.
Thus the infantry division, becoming the true combat unit,
must have control of the heavy artillery and howitzers that
destroy the obstacles opposing the advance of its infantry.
The army corps, on the contrary, will retain the guns of
large caliber in order to engage the enemy’s artillery in the
entire zone of action of the army corps.
This apportionment, which will be completed in France
during the current year, corresponds to the necessities of mod-
ern warfare. It is what is proposed for the American Army.
The best apportionment of artillery between the division and
the army corps we have found to be as follows:
To a division of four regiments.
Batteries:
4 battalions of light field artillery—i. e., 12 batteries.
2 battalions of 155 mm. (6 in.) howitzers—i. e., 6 batteries
(which may use mechanical traction to diminish th
number of horses). '
(15)
16
Ammunition columns:
2 columns of horse-drawn artillery ammunition. ‘
1 column of horse-drawn infantry ammunition.
2 motor companies of 40 tons each.
1 repairing column of field artillery.
To an army corps.
(It is unnecessary to add light field artillery if each divi-
sion has already 4 battalions.)
Batteries: .
2 battalions of guns of about 120 mm. (4 in.).
2 battalions of 155 mm. (6 in.) howitzers.
Ammunition column:
1 motor company of 40 trucks, for light artillery ammuni-
tion. 7
1 motor company for infantry ammunition.
4 motor companies, of 40 tons each, for the 4 battalions of
heavy artillery. _
1 repair column for heavy guns and carriages.
It must be remembered that this composition can only be
realized gradually.
We consider the French 75 mm. field gun the best of all
the field guns of the belligerents. It would undoubtedly be
better if its range were somewhat longer and its traverse some-
what greater, but, such as it is, with its advantages and its
faults, it has stood the test and undoubtedly will not be im-
proved upon dur'ing the war. We think the enemy, who fears
it greatly, shares this opinion.
That is why the proposal made by France to deliver to the
American Army five 75—mm. guns a day with corresponding am-
munition—i. e., 1 battery and 1 spare gun a day, seems to
us very advantageous. The Federal Government thus has the
opportunity, if it so‘ desires, of providing itself in a short time
with field artillery which is unsurpassed, without having to
transport it to the French front (which means ship economy).
It must be borne in mind that the American Army will iiot
have guns of large caliber for a long time. Under these condi-
tions it is very important to have howitzers of sufficient power
to destroy the enemy’s defensive works, constantly increasing
in strength, and of sufficiently long range to take the place,
under certain circumstances, of the guns of large caliber which
17
are lacking. The consideration of range leads us to recommend
heartily the 155 mm. (6-inch) Schneider howitzer, which France
can furnish, and which shoots farther than the 6-inch English
howitzer. It is interesting here to indicate to the American
General Staff how highly the ‘French General Staff rates this
piece, which attains a range of 11,900 m. The following appre-
ciation is an extract from the course of instruction given April,
1917, to the officers of the General Staff School at the front:
“ The 155 mm. howitzers, model 1915, are really capable, under
conditions otherwise satisfactory, of the artillery preparation
for the successive infantry attacks. They fire, in fact, a pro-
jectile sufficiently powerful to be effective against practically
any actual defensive work, and they prepare an attack all the
more easily as the rapidity of their fire permits them to dis-
charge, in less time on a given objective, the number of shells
necessary. Furthermore, their range permits them, in the
battle of demolition, to prepare the attack on subsequent posi-
tions even before the attack on the first position is made. Their
mobility, on the other hand, is snfitcient to render a change of
‘position fairly easy. The role of the howitzer is therefore con-
siderable and they will eventually replace completely, in the
armament of our heac'y batteries, the old guns of like caliber.”
On the other hand, the light 120 mm. (11-inch) howitzer, the
projectile of which lacks energy, is considered useless, and does
not figure in the program of the artillery of France.
[French Document of October, 1916.]
HEAVY GERMAN ARTILLERY.
Pnoronrron or GUNS AND Howrrznnsiar THE START or WAR.‘
The information gained during peace allows us to determine
the mobilization of a certain number of regiments of foot artil-
lery (active or reserve) and to deduce from that the materiel
with which they were armed.
Active regiments, 50 battaZions.—-Twenty-five battalions
heavy artillery of Army Corps; active, 15 cm. howitzers; 8
battalions heavy artillery of Army Corps, active, 21 cm. mor-
tars; 13 battalions siege-garrison artillery, 15 cm. howitzers,
21 cm., 28 cm. mortars; 10 cm., 12 cm., 13 cm., 15 cm. guns; 4
3125°-17‘----3 ' -
18
battalions coast artillery, 15 cm. howitzers, 21 cm., 28 cm., 30.5
cm. mortars, 10 cm., 12 cm., 13 cm., 15 cm., 21 cm. guns.
Reserve regiments, 50 battalions—Sixteen battalions, heavy
artillery reserve corps, 15 cm. howitzers; 34 battalions, heavy
artillery of siege, 21.5 cm. howitzers, 21 cm., 28 cm., 30.5 cm.
mortars; garrison, 10 cm., 12 cm., 13 cm., 15 cm. guns.
Calculation based on 50 active battalions and 50 reserve bat-
talions (400 batteries) gives the following approximate figure:
Number of batteries.



Per cent
Matérie, Active Reserve Total Pol-been‘; of howit-
' regiment. regiment. ‘ (Banger zers and
. ' guns.
15 cm. howitzer ............ . . 112 100 212 53
21 cm. mortar and heavier 73
calibers .................. . . 46 34 80 20
10 cm. gun ................. . . 12 24 36 9
12 cm. gun ................. . . 8 8 16 4
13 cm. gun ................. . . 12 24 36 9 27
15 cm. gun and heavier cali-
bers ...................... . . 10 10 20 5
Total ................. . . 200 200 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -

It is therefore known that the mobilization of German foot
artillery organization was conceived on the following basis
(round numbers) :
15 cm. howitzers, 53 per cent, ,_ _
21 cm. mortars, 2.0 per cent, }‘3 per cent howltzers'
10 cm. guns, 9 per cent, '
13 cm. guns, 9 per cent, 27 per cent guns.
Other guns, *9 per cent,
B. DURING THE CAMPAIGN.
German foot artillery appears to comprise, at the present time,
approximately‘ 1,580 batteries. It has been possible during the
campaign to identify the caliber of a certain number by docu-
ments or prisoners’ declarations.
1. Batteries of active or reserve regtmenta—(See paragraph
below.) The number has been increased during the campaign
from 400 to 484. Identifications of the calibers of 290 batteries
gives:
50 per cent 15 cm. howitzers,
25 per cent 21 cm. mortars, and heavier 75 per cent howitzers.
calibers, '
10 cm, 12 cm., 13 cm., 15 cm. guns—25 per cent guns.
19
These figures conform to the estimates made during peace.
2. Batteries of landwehr and landsturm—About 222 batteries.
We have few identifications of caliber.
3. Battalions and batteries (horse drawn) created during the‘
campaign, constituting the heavy artillery of the army corps and
new divisions—About 216 batteries. Identification of 50 bat-
teries gives the same proportion as for the active and reserve
regiments at the opening of the campaign. (Par. B—10.)
75 per cent howitzers, 25 per cent guns.
4. Batteries of position created during the campaign—Num-
bered from 201 to 794, about 594 batteries. The caliber of 90
per cent of these batteries has been determined and divided as
follows:
31 per cent 15 cm. howitzers,
15 per cent 21 cm. mortars, About 50 per cent howitzers.
4 per cent unknown howitzers,
25 per cent 9 cm. guns,
25 per cent 10 cm., 12 cm., 13 cm., 15 About 50 per cent guns.
cm. guns,
The greater proportion of guns in this list of batteries is at-
tributable to the presence of a large number of 9 cm. guns (the
old field gun) and 12 cm.- (old siege gun).
5. Various formations, high-power artillery—Heavy 15 cm.
guns, 13 batteries,’ minimum; heavy coast-defense mortars, 10
batteries, minimum; navy howitzers, 10 batteries, minimum;
armored trains, 13 trains, minimum; 30.5 cm. Austrian mortars,
number unknown; 42 cm. mortars, number unknown; 38 cm.
guns, number unknown; 21 cm. guns (navy or new gun), num-
ber unknown.
To sum up: It has been shown that the proportion of howitzers
and guns in the mobile batteries (heavy artillery of division and
army corps, heavy artillery of army, heavy, siege and garrison
artillery) established in peace has remained the same during
the campaign. This proportion is 53 per cent of 15 cm.
howitzers. 20 per cent of 21 cm. and larger caliber mortars (73
per cent of howitzers and mortars), and 27 per cent guns. This
proportion applies to the units formed at mobilization as well
as to those created later.)
The artillery of position, in which there are many batteries of
old 9 cm. and 12 cm. guns, has an equal proportion of howitzers
and guns. It is probable, from the still incomplete information
that we have, that there is an equal number of howitzers and
guns in the high-power heavy artillery.
" III. EMPLOYMENT OF ARTILLERY IN
DEFENSE.
This memorandum, drawn up by the grand army headquarters
in accordance with the orders and instructions from the com-
mander in chief, brings together in one pamphlet the methods
employed by the artillery during the period of defensive fighting
and sets forth the numerous details in application. It therefore
systematizes the employment of the artillery in the defense and
eliminates numerous detailed memoranda used in the armies,
particularly in what concerns the conduct of barrages. The at-
tention of everyone in this command is directed to the following
points:
The necessity for seeking continually the destruction of the
enemy’s artillery.
The offensive counter preparation.
The preparation for the work by artillery in the sectors.
- The prolongation of the war, the form it at present assumes,
the constant and growing improvement in material among the
belligerents makes more important, from day to day, the role
required of artillery in battle. This fact has been fully brought
out during the course of the operations before Verdun, and it
also confirmed the principle that in order to be efiective the de-
fense must be very active.
On the ofiensive, the Germans, in conformity to our own
principles, have operated with artillery in the following manner:
Preceding each of their attacks they commenced by a bom-
. bardment on a broad front and great depth, leaving the enemy
in doubt as to the point to be attacked. At the end of several
hours the bombardment increased in intensity upon the point
of attack without letting up on the other points. When the as-
sault was made it continued with the same violence upon the
rear and flanks of the region attacked. At the same time, or
more often one or two hours after, the intensity increased upon
another point of the bombarded front; the preparation being
completed, it was then followed by an attack upon this new
point. The tactics to be employed by the defense, which have
resulted in full success whenever they could be brought into
play in time, consisted in replying to every artillery preparation
(21)
22
by an identical action, to every increase of violence in fire upon
one point by a corresponding increase upon the point confront-
ing it, and by thus overwhelming the troops designated for the
assault before the launching of their attack. At the same time
we sought the destruction of the hostile batteries, or, failing that,
their neutralization. But in this duel the task is very much more
difiicult for the defense than for the attack.
In order ‘for the attacking side to attain these intense increases
in bombardment, they must employ concentrations of fire from
numerous batteries, shifting their fire successively from one end
to the other of the field of battle. The defense is governed by
the same obligation, but its action is, at least in detail, impro-
vised. Its return fire can only be delivered in time if the de-
fense has at its disposal an extremely flexible artillery, capable .
of grasping quickly the situation, taking advantage of it with-
out delay, and concentrating instantly all the means at its dis-
posal upon the successive objectives.
This flexibility, which is absolutely indispensable in order to
give to the defensive action of the arm all its power, must be
‘ sought within the organization of the command, in observation
andliaison, in foreseeing the requirements, and in a methodical
preparation of the work, so as to reduce improvisation to a mini-
mum at the crucial moment.
The operations before Verdun not only brought this out in
artillery counter preparation but also provided an opportunity
for perfecting the mechanism of certain types of service fire
already in vogue (fire in a defensive form, such as barrages,
reprisals; or in, an oifensive form, such as demolition fire and
bombardment). The object of the present instruction is to in-
dicate the means which permit of preparing and putting in opera-
tion these different methods of artillery action.
CHAPTER I. MISSION OF THE ARTILLERY ON THE DEFEN-
SIVE.
Artillery is the principal arm in the active defense, because it
alone permits of— ‘
1. Reaching the enemy at all times with its full force.
2. Checking, and sometimes even suppressing, the enemy’s
offensivepreparations before they develop. __
3. Rapidly restoring, in case of attack, the equilibrium of the
forces to the advantage of the defense.
23
These possibilities determine the missions which fall to the
artillery, such as systematic destruction of the enemy forces
(batteries, defensive works, cantonments, etc.), offensive actions
as a whole upon the weak points of the front, counter prepara-
tion, and barrage.
The artillery can only carry out its mission by virtue of great
flexibility. This flexibility is a function of the organization of
the command, of foresight as to its ‘needs, of systematic prepa-
ration for the work, and of observation and liaison.
CHAPTER II. ORGANIZATION OF THE COMMAND.
I. The organization of the command is based upon the follow-
ing principles:
(1) All the artillery placed at the disposition of a command
(division, army corps, army) is grouped under the orders of a
single chief.
(2) The various calibers are assigned to the divisions, corps,
and armies, so that each will have those batteries which nor-
mally operate with it, and so that the higher unit will have
those batteries which can range upon several sectors.
(3) Rapid reinforcement by the greatest possible number of
batteries, in support of the troops requiring it, is arranged for in
every particular.
II. Consequently the distribution of artillery of all calibers
between the commanders of sectors, the corps commander, and
the army commander, is as follows:
There are, in principle, at the disposal—
(a) Of the generals commanding sectors (habitually division
commanders) : The divisional artillery, reinforced by those
groups of corps artillery which the corps commander believes
necessary to place at their disposal; trench artillery; high-angle
batteries of heavy artillery (for example, 155 and 220 mm.
howitzers).
(b) Of the corps commanders: That part of the corps artillery
which the corps commander believes he should keep for the occa-
sion under his direct orders; the heavy artillery of medium
caliber (95 and 120 mm. and enventually 155 and 105 mm. guns,
as well as certain howitzer batteries of large caliber).
(0) Of the general commanding the army: The heavy artil-
lery of long range or large caliber (100, 105, 140, 160, 155 L, 240,
270, 280, 370 mm., etc.) and the heavy railroad artillery.
24
III. This distribution is not fixed. It is modified according
to circumstances. If the fronts are considerable, or if the
tactical situation requires it, heavy artillery of the grand parks,
the army heavy artillery, and the corps artillery may be re-
spectively placed at the disposition of the corps and the divi-
sions. '
If the allotment of high-angle fire batteries is very short, these
last may be kept under the hand of the corps commander.
IV. This distribution must not prevent full cooperation and
mutual support between the sectors,- the army corps, and the
army. On the contrary, it is indispensable that, in case of
need, all batteries capable of doing so should intervene on the
threatened front, irrespective of the group to which they belong,
the mission assigned them, or the chief under whose orders
they are. 7
The measures intended to make this intervention - proceed
easily will, throughout the various units, be foreseen and studied
in all their details. They will be made the object of a special
chapter on the “Artillery Plan of Defense.”
The corps heavy artillery will be so arranged as’ to pay
particular attention to the divisions (sectors)——that is to say,
by anticipating their wants and by being in a position to satisfy
them instantly. The same method will obtain for the heavy
artillery of the army in relation to that of the corps.
For this purpose the artillery of the army will be subdivided
into groups, each having action over two or three corps artillery
sectors. These subgroups will be connected with the corps
artillery, which. will be able to bring them into action directly,
as they do their own batteries, whenever they have need of them.
The chief of artillery of the army will only intervene in the
case where several corps need assistance at the same time, in
order to distribute the fire for the best general interests of the
defense.
CHAPTER III. THE EXECUTION OF THE MISSIONS IN-
TRUSTED TO THE ARTILLERY.
1. DEMOLITION FIRING.
Daily fire has for its object the gradual elimination of the
various elements of the enemy forces, and the expenditure of
ammunition must correspond with the importance of the end
to be‘ attained. The fire is directed at batteries, defensive
works of the enemy (blockhouses, command posts, observation
25
posts, flanking works, machine guns, bomb throwers, shelters,
etc.), and at elements of enemy troops of less importance (trains,
reliefs, workmen, fatigue parties, etc.).
All the artillery, 75 mm. and heavy, cooperate in this tematic demolition in the zone of action intrusted to them, in-
cluding the army heavy artillery, which for this purpose is
directly controlled by the corps artillery commanders.
The calibers and kind of fire to be employed, the number of
batteries to be brought into action, the number and kind of pro~
jectiles to be fired, are determined by the importance, the dis-
tance, the duration, and cover of the objectives (material shel—-
ter and the cover resulting from the accidents of the terrain).
In every case the fire is a “precise fire” (that is to say, it
is accurately adjusted on fixed objects, and from an exact regis-
tration of the ground for moving objectives). The fire is con-
tinued the necessary time to accomplish the purpose sought,
i. e., demolition. ' _ '
(a) Batteries—Their destruction is diligently sought, in co-
operation with aerial and ground observers, by the commanders
of the corps artillery. Targets are selected from among those
batteries which are particularly aggressive, and whose emplace-
ments are accurately ranged. The corps commanders pay very
particular attention to the unremitting destruction of the enemy
batteries, which is one of the primary tasks of the defense. In
order to accomplish this result they prepare a plan for sys-
tematic destruction. I
(11) Defensive works—The destruction of these, in each sec-
tor, is made under orders from the commander of the sector,
who decides when the opportunity therefor arises. He must
consider the probable reactions and his chances of success with
the means at his disposal. If he considers a demolition neces-
sary, but has not the necessary means at hand, he refers the
question to the corps commander, who may request the c'alibers
desired and an additional allowance of ammunition.
(c) H ost'ile units—These targets being generally fleeting, fire
must be opened rapidly upon them. Consequently, the initiative
of fire is given to the group or battery commanders in whose
zones they appear. Furthermore, all important points of the
terrain are accurately ranged on by each battery; the battle map
and the firing notebooks are carefully kept to date; the data
is compiled in advance and the range for the day is determined.
These rules apply to the heavy as well as to the field artillery.
3125°-—-17—-——4
26
2. CONCENTBATED FIRE.
This fire, carried out by a great number of batteries, is ' a
genuine fire attack, wherein the artillery attains all its power
by throwing a considerable mass of projectiles on a given target
upon a simple signal from the commander.
A. TARGETS.
This fire is concentrated; that is, it is either simultaneous or
successive fire by several batteries on the same target or the
same zone. It is delivered either on a portion of the hostile
front, where aggressive intentions by the enemy are indicated
(offensive works, preparations for sending out gas, drum fire,
etc); or on important assemblages of troops (cantonments,
bivouacs. columns at rest or on the march) ; or on clusters of
batteries.
B. FIRE DIRECTION.
Concentrated fire is ordered by division, corps, or army com-
manders, who, so far as concerns certain targets (clusters of
batteries, marching columns, etc.), and in order to avoid delays
may delegate their powers to their respective chiefs of artillery.
C. ORGANIZATION OF THE CONCENTRATED FIRE.
We must be able to open up concentrated fire with extreme
rapidity upon any part of the front. This rapidity is a function
of the speed with which everything is done in putting the powers
of artillery in operation—(a) the celerity with which the in
formation, necessary ‘for the coordination of all the actions,
reaches the headquarters of the principal artillery group; (b)
quickness in preparation of the orders relating to these actions;
(0) speed in opening fire, which requires absolute control of the
fire action of batteries called to take part in it.
Quickness in writing orders is facilitated by “ tables of con-
centrations.” ' -
27
Model for table of fire concentrations.

Batteries {
, capable of
Targets, or firing upon Kind of Class of Observ- Observa-
Nos. s uares on thls target projectile fire to be mg sta- tions
t e chart. (field artil- to be used. delivered. tions. made.
ler , heavy
art’ ery,etc.).



All artillery staffs (army, corps, divisions) must have in their
possession a document of this kind, which shows, for each
square on the war map, the batteries which command it. Thus
they can see instantly the number and caliber of the units
which can fire upon any given target. An extract from this
table is sent to each group or battery commander concerned.
The necessary rangings are made with every possible care, and
mention of this fact is noted on the tables of fire.
Speed in seeking and transmitting information and in con-
trol of fire is obtained by the detailed organization of the sys-
tem of observation. This organization, called the “ plan of
28
observation,” is the result of combined work by the staffs
referred to above, and is based upon the principle of inter-
changeability among observing stations of all sorts, and upon
the certainty of liaisons, direct and lateral (see organization
of a telephone “ net ” for observation and adjustment).
D. RULES OF EXECUTION OF CONCENTRATED FIRE.
(a) Concentration by no means implies that each battery
should not fire on a definite target. If concentrated fire is used
upon a zone, each battery receives a perfectly definite target
within the limits of that zone, the same target being often
fired on by several batteries.
(5) The smaller the target zone the greater the number of
batteries firing, and the greater judgment used in selecting
the emplacements, calibers, ammunition, etc., of the batteries,
the more accurate will be the concentrated fire.- Each battery .
should use converging fire, as it is surer in ranging and more
powerfulv in material and moral effect than parallel fire.
(0) The precision of adjustment to be attained varies ac-
cording to the targets. Against cantonments, bivouacs, im-
portant columns, one may be content with a rough adjust-
ment. Against batteries, as a rule, very close adjustment is
necessary. When it is a question of reaching trenches or con-
necting trenches, the fire must be absolutely accurate.
(d) Batteries taking part in a concentrated fire generally ~
fire simultaneously, in order to get the efiect of surprise and
to produce upon the enemy an overpowering impression. In
certain cases, however, when the target is immobile (e. g., bat-
teries) our batteries may fire successively, or the concentrated
fire may be interrupted from time to time in order to control
the eflicacy of the fire. _
(6) When the general commanding thinks it profitable, con-
centrated fire is made part of a combined action, wherein the
infantry plays its role. This combined action of both arms is
almost always necessary when the first-line works must be
‘ fired on in order to induce the enemy to occupy them.
(1“) Infantry troops are always forewarned of anticipated
fire concentrations, in order to enable them to take necessary
steps for their safety.
29
I‘.
E. EXAMPLE OF CONCENTBATED FIRE ON EXTENSIVE AND SLIGHTLY
PROTECTED TARGETS.
(a) Target to be fired on by each battery.
( 1) Heavy batteries: Zone oriented in the line of fire, and
having a front of about 100 meters and a depth of a bracket
and a half.
(2) Field batteries: Zone oriented in the line of fire, and
having a width of about 100 meters and a depth of about 200
meters.
(1)) Mechanism of fire. ,
(1) Heavy batteries: Ranges difiering. by one-fourth of a
bracket. In deflection, fire distributed with uniform deflection
differences.
(2) Field batteries: Fire uniformly distributed in deflection.
In range, eleyations varying by 25 meters.
(0) Expenditure of ammunition (for important targets), 400
rounds per hectare (320 per acre) for all the batteries executing
the concentrated fire, this number divided by 2, 3, or 4 for each
of the two, three, or four batteries taking part in the fire; ‘for
each battery, the rounds are equally distributed through the
dilferent elevations and different directions.
(d) Kind of ammunition: Fire directed particularly against
personnel or material objects slightly protected must be made
_ with appropriate’ projectiles.
Heavy artillery: Time-fuse shells, explosive shells with in-
staneous fuses, or “1. A.”; special shells at the end of the fire.
Field artillery: Shrapnel, explosive shells acting on the sur-
face, with delayed fuses for the short and middle distances,
fuses 1. A. above 4,500 meters. Special shells at the end of the
fire.
3. DEFENSIVE FIRE.
The object of defensive ‘fire is to check the attack of hostile
infantry before they can enter our first-line trenches. All
artillery capable of doing so takes part in this fire under two
very distinct forms; i. e., fire to prevent an attack and barrage
fire.
A. FIRE TO PREVENT AN ATTACK.
vFire to prevent an attack is intended to check an attack be
‘fore it starts, by a violent bombardment of those trenches in
which the enemy is seen assembling his troops for the attack.
30
It is carried out by all batteries of 75 caliber and by all howit- '
zers capable of taking part in it. The fire is opened whenever
signs of attack are observed (particularly in case of drum fire),
or when prisoners, deserters, listening posts, etc., give informa-
tion as to the intentions of the enemy. It is delivered on the
sector directly threatened.
The field artillery delivers an intensive fire for a limited
period (about 5 minutes) upon the enemy’s first-line organiza-
tions (trenches, supports, connecting trenches). The com-
mander decides, according to circumstances, the number and
duration of the burst of fire. This fire is delivered, whenever
possible, by alternate pieces or platoons, for the purpose of
cooling and inspecting the material.
The high-angle fire artillery delivers a continuous demolition
fire upon the same targets (particularly upon shelters, com-
mand posts, and bends in connecting trenches). (When, by rea-
son of some formation of the ground, field artillery can not act
efficiently upon the first-line trenches, the fire is delivered by
155 mm. howitzers, which then fire under the same conditions
as field artillery.)
The long-range artillery independently of its mission of coun-
ter-battery fire, lays down a screen of fire on the communica-
tions behind the line (connecting trenches, trails, roads, etc.).
Fire to check an attack is ordered by the corps or division
commanders, and carried out according to the principles set
forth above for concentrated fire. It is only efiective when it
is perfectly prepared. Consequently, corps commanders have a
plan for this fire drawn up, wherein all the details are fixed,
distinguishing, of course, between the case of general attacks
and that of partial attacks upon such and such a portion of the
front. Corps and division commanders will not forget that
their military honor is engaged in the rapid and perfect execu-
tion of the fire to check an attack.
B. BARRAGE FIRE.
Barrage has for its object——
First. Stopping the hostile attack when it begins.
Second. Preventing the arrival of supports and reserves.
It is executed by the field artillery, using indirect fire. It is
completed by the action of long-range batteries upon the rear
of the enemy’s position. Everything must be organized in the
higher commands, groups, and batteries, so that, if required, the
31
barrage may automatically succeed the fire delivered to check
the attack. -
Field artillery barrage—Since the barrage must have the
greatest possible density, allof the field artillery, without excep-
tion, takes part in it.
Distribution of batteries—When the fronts to be fired upon
are extended, each battery has its distinct sector. When they
are relatively restricted, it is permissible to superimpose the fire
of several units. However, as a rule, this superposition is only
for the purpose of reinforcing a barrage already in itself sufii-
cient, or of replacing it when it fails.
Correspondence of infantry and artillery fronts—Wherever it
is practicable it is important to make the front of action of the
infantry units correspond exactly with the barrage zones of the
artillery units (e. g., a group of artillery for a battalion).
Barrage objectives—The barrage must form a continuous
curtain and be carried as close as possible to our lines consistent
with the safety of our troops. The minimum distance consistent
with the safety of our troops is given in the following tables
(flat terrain) :
A. FRONTAL BARRAGE.

At 2,000 m. At 3,000 m. At 4,000 m.

Explosive shells ............................. . - 80 100 150
Shrapnel, percussion ........................ . . 60 80 100
Shrapnel, time .......... - ._ .................. . - 150 150 150


B. ENFILADING BARRAGE (AT ALL DISTANCES).
Explosive shells ............................................................. . .50 m.
Percussion shrapnel .................... - . - .................................. . .30 m.
Time shrapnel ............................................................... . .60 m.
The barrage must'fall on or in front of the first line enemy
trench.
When the barrage is reinforced, the supporting batteries fire
on the first line and the communicating trenches, while the
normal. barrage batteries form a curtain in front of our posi-
tions. The barrage then functions to the best advantage. But
since all batteries must, at a given moment, deliver their fire
upon the hostile trenches of the first line and their approaches,
it is essential that even those which make the curtain fire in
a direction corresponding to the enemy approaches that appear
32
in their zone, so that they may direct an effective fire on these
approaches.
In certain cases the conditions required for safety force the
delivery of the barrage behind the hostile trenches. It then
loses almost all of its value, since the enemy is free to mass his
attacking troops in the first line tnenches and to leave those
trenches without coming under our artillery fire. The sector
commanders must seek every means possible to bring their bar-
rages to bear upon the enemy’s first line trenches (by pushing
the batteries nearer, employing batteries or pieces in enfilade,
using percussion shells, etc.) and, where this is impossible, they
make up the insufficiency of the barrage by any means at hand
(1.5-inch guns, pneumatic'guns, blunderbusses, etc.) .
Opening up of the barrage.--The barrage must be delivered
as instantaneously as possible; that is, automatically in con-
formity with a rule previously laid down.
The barrage is executed either upon request from the infan-
try (by telephone, visual signals, etc.) or on the initiative of
the battery commanders, upon notice from the observing stations
(signals given by Rugierri light, releasing small balloons, unroll-
inga streamer attached to the car of a balloon,etc.), or when the
situation apparently calls for this class of fire (e. g., at night, if
- a lively firing is heard; in the daytime, if it is ascertained that
there is a flow of gas, etc). But it must be remembered that
patrols sent out by our infantry may provoke an enemy fusillade. ‘
In order to avoid launching a barrage in such a case, the bat-
talion commanders of the first line must always keep their artil-
lery informed when patrols are sent out.
Everything must be so arranged that the barrage can be
made instantaneously. For this purpose those pieces which are
not firing are, at all times, laid in the direction of the barrage
At night, pieces are aligned in that direction, laid upon a special
aiming point near enough for its light to be seen even in foggy
weather. The successive elevations and the class of fire to be
employed are known to all (officers, chiefs of section, can-
noneers)., This information, which already figures in the firing
memoranda, is also written in the notebooks of the chiefs.of sec- .
tions and platoons, and pasted on the piece itself. As a rule,
the batteries are equipped with a system of electric lighting,
for the purpose of throwing instantaneous light upon the aiming
points, sights, and crosshairs, even in case of bombardment with
asphyxiating shells. Those not provided with this installation
must—
33
(a) Place their night aiming points close enough to the pieces
to be seen at night, but far enough away, however, to be out
of reach of the gas in case of bombardment of the batteries by
asphyxiating shells.
(1)) Keep their aiming points lighted throughout the night.
(0) Furnish each chief of section with a pocket electric lamp
and have a reserve of batteries and bulbs.
Artillery commanders will not lose sight of the fact that they
are responsible, and that even an insignificant delay on their
part may bring about the loss of a position and the death of a
number of soldiers.
The range to be used is determined each time it is necessary.
It is not necessary to have this range verified by all the bat-
teries; one piece may make the verification for several batteries
in corresponding positions. '
System in firing—Systematic firing insures the greatest pos-
sible speed in beginning the barrage. It is modified afterwards
according to circumstances and the needs of the first-line in-
fantry, with whom the commander of the group or battery
making the barrage must be in close touch. Advantage must
be taken of every occasion to inspect the material by firing by
sections or alternate pieces, so as to be able, at the critical
moment, to fire the greatest possible number of pieces in good
condition.
Varying the barrage—Once a vigorousbarrage is established,
it may be varied in order to obtain a better result from the fire.
When barrage is delivered in front of the hostile first-line
trenches, the fire is extended to said trenches and the barrage
kept there. Where the barrage plays upon the hostile first-line
trenches, it does not change. In this case, the fire must be
adjusted each day with such precision that when delivered
at three successive elevations it will cover the trenches in
sight.
“When the barrage is thrown behind the enemy first-line
trenches it is fixed, as a rule, on the support and communicating
trenches. If these trenches are hidden, the fire is directed upon
the places captured that day, which should, as far as possible,
have been ranged upon in advance.
Finally, in case the enemy penetrates our lines, all or part
of the barrage should be capable of being directed, on request
of the infantry, upon those parts of our trenches occupied by
3125 °—17——5
34
the enemy. (The positions of batteries ‘on the terrain must
in every case allow this requirement to be fulfilled.)
Cessation of the barrage—The barrage ceases upon demand
from the commander of the infantry unit in front of which it
is delivered. In case all the direct and lateral communications
are cut, the barrage ceases by the order, and under the re-
sponsibility, of the artillery commander in the sector, at the
moment he thinksthe attack is checked.
Verifying the barrage.-——The commanders of all groups verify
the barrage from _a triple point of view, the selection of targets.
the density of fire, and the rapidity with which it can be laid.
In order to verify the effectiveness of the barrages when it is
impossible to see the effect of the fire, use is made of the in-
formation furnished by aerial observation and photography.
The commanders of the first-line infantry are always called
upon to check the effect of the barrages organized on the fronts.
But the artillery must avoid revealing unnecessarily the loca-
tion of pieces whose positions should not‘ be prematurely ex-
posed.
(b) Barrage by heavy artillery using high-angle fire—The
action of howitzers and mortars is not of the same order as
that of field artillery. Both of these are intended to stop the
enemy’s attack, but the 75s form a curtain over the entire
front, while the howitzers, as a rule, fire on definite points in
rear of the first line (trench junctions, command posts, lines
of shelters, etc.) for the purpose of preventing the arrival of
reserves. As an exception to the rule, howitzers may, and
should, be employed in the first-line barrage when the density
of the field artillery is too weak, or when the accidents of the
terrain do not permit of effective action, etc. Howitzers are
particularly necessary in order to fire on the “dead angles ” of
the 75s when these angles can not be eliminated by means of
enfilading fire. In order to avoid undue expenditure of am-
munition, the heavy artillery barrage is only begun automat-
ically in the case where it is thrown on the first line. It is then
carried out under the same conditions as with the 75 mm.
guns. In all other cases, the barrage is made by order of the
artillery commander of the sector, either on his own initiative
or on request from the infantry.
The plan for the barrage indicates the points to be fired on,
the system to be observed in firing, the rapidity of fire, the
arrangements to be made in the batteries for night barrage, and
the observing stations and liaisons to be established.
35
Everything must be organized so that the barrage may be
brought into action very rapidly, by day as well as by night.
The shelters of the personnel are established near the pieces.
At night a guard detail is made, and the pieces are laid in the
direction of the barrage. The liaisons with the infantry are
always provided for.
The action of the howitzers and mortars ceases by order of
the commander of the divisional artillery.
(0) Action of trench batteries—Trench pieces in position
take part in the barrages under the same conditions as the
howitzers; that is to say, by firing on definite points of the
German organization.
They enter the action by order of the infantry regimental
commander of the sector where they happen to be, or, auto-
matically, when the battery commander sees indications of an
attack. '
The plan of action indicates the points to be fired on, the
rapidity of fire, the dispositions to be made for night firing,
the liaisons to be established, etc. '
Everything must be minutely organized so that the action
may be most rapid, both by day and night.
The action of trench batteries ceases upon orders from the
infantry regimental commander.
(d) Action of the heavy artillery guns—The heavy artillery
takes part in the barrage——
(1) By opposing the hostile batteries.
(2) By bombarding the enemy cantonments and bivouacs in
the sector of attack. -
(3) By firing upon the enemy’s communications behind the
front of attack (approaches, trails, etc.). (This is particularly
the role of the 75-mm. guns, the fire of which is quite rapid
and which has very great effect upon exposed personnel.)
‘(4) And, finally, by counter attacking the enemy first-line or-
ganizations when either the battle situations or the accidents
of the terrain prevent effective fire on those organizations with
a sufficient number of light-artillery guns.
The plan of barrage fixes the role of each battery. The coun-
ter batteries enter into action, without orders, as soon as they
discover the enemy batteries in their zone of action. Those
batteries designated to bombard cantonments, bivouacs, and
communications open fire under orders from the general com~
manding the corps artillery. In each battery everything must
36
be arranged so that the unit can fulfill its mission in the mini-
mum time. (See measures taken by the field artillery.)
Support of adjacent sectors by the artitlerg—In the case of
a partial attack, artillery in the sectors not menaced reinforces
with its fire the artillery on the menaced front, at the same
time keeping a certain number of batteries in readiness for
any emergency. This reinforcement should be very rapid. Con-
sequently it must be prepared for in advance in all its details
by the commanders of the corps artillery and of the sectors
concerned. This is made the subject of a special chapter on
the “ Plan of barrage.”
4. CONTINGENT FIRE.
A. HABASSING FIRE.
Harassing fire is for the purpose of checking movements of the
enemy’s troops and supplies. It is directed on the roads and
trails most frequented by him. and also upon his narrow-gauge
railroads. It is based on data gathered from the war maps,
from photographs, and from the intelligence service. It is gen-
erally done by isolated pieces firing at irregular intervals, par-
ticularly at the presumed hours for reliefs or forwarding sup-
plies. (Employ, preferably, shells with time fuses, or explosive
shells with fuses 1. A. in order to obtain grazing results.) When
information as to the enemy’s movements is sufiiciently exact,
this fire is carried out by several pieces. It may become, in cer-
tain cases, really concentrated fire. The commanders of the
corps artillery decide daily the harassing fire to be used the
‘following day.
_ B. FIRE IN REPRISAL.
Fire in reprisal keeps up the morale of our infantry by
demonstrating that the artillery is looking out for it, and con-
vinces the enemy of our willingness to return his fire with inter-
est. It is directed upon trenches and cantonments, following
the enemy’s bombardment of our trenches and cantonments.
_ Whenever it is possible it is accompanied by a return fire upon
the enemy’s batteries.
(1) On trenches this fire must be delivered with rapidity.
The enemy’s positions in front of or in immediate proximity to
those bombarded by him must be one target. We must fire
37
a greater number of projectiles than is used by the enemy
(if possible, 2 rounds for 1).
This fire is executed by field artillery, guns of caliber 58, and,
exceptionally, by howitzers. It is delivered at the request of
the infantry, or upon the initiative of battery commanders
charged with looking after the front, upon information furnished
them by the observers. It is generally executed with instan-
taneous fuses, and, as far as possible, by enfilade fire, and at.
night with shrapnel. (As a matter of fact, there are only a
few persons in the German trenches during the day, almost the
total strength of the garrison being in the shelters. Conse-
quently, one must seek to bring destruction among these shelters.
In this case the instantaneous fuse gives better results than
that with the delayed action. This refers only to the 75 mm.
gun. With howitzers, whose angle of fall is very great, delayed-
action fuses are preferable.) At night shrapnel is fired.
(2) On cantonments.———Reprisal fire on cantonments should
be prepared in advance, so that every bombardment of our can-
tonments is replied to by a bombardment of an enemy’s canton-
ment, preferably one containing an ammunition depot or a com-
mand post. Wherever possible the bombardment is made by
field artillery; in other cases by the heavy artillery. It should
sometimes be by rafales, preferably with shrapnel or incendiary
shells. It is delivered upon request of the commander of the
bombarded cantonment or on the initiative of the commander
of the divisional artillery when his observers signal him the
bombardment of a cantonment by the enemy.
Reprisal fire is especially for the purpose of keeping up the
morale of the troops, who should be made to_ understand that
' when one of our cantonments is bombarded a bombardment of
still greater intensity is delivered by us on one of the enemy’s
cantonments. -
CHAPTER IV.—-PREPARATION FOR THE EMPLOYMENT OF
‘ ARTILLERY IN THE SECTORS.
The complex missions which fall to the artillery, the necessity
imposed for its acting quickly, altogether and with precision,
require the commander to prepare in every detail for its em-
ployment. Consequently, by direction of the commanding gen- .
eral, there is filed in all the staffs of the army, army corps, and
division——
38
A. A plan for the employment of artillery, which embraces
all the hypotheses and bears upon the following subjects:
I. Organization of the command.
II. Distribution of missions among the artillery groups. 1
III. The role of the heavy artillery and the organization of
counter batteries.
IV. Offensive counter preparations (indicating the measures
necessary to be taken in order to pass rapidly to the barrage).
_ V. The plan of barrage:
(1) Distribution of missions.
(2) Targets to be fired on (with accompanying sketch).
(3) Dispositions made for letting down the barrage (liaison
and organization of the service within the batteries).
(4) Firing system (rapidity, variation, cessation).
(5) Concentration to be employed in case of a hostile attack
directed upon a portion of the front only.
(6) The support which may be received from or given to the
neighboring divisions. ,
VI. The plan for reprisal fire.
VII. Table of concentrations.
VIII. The plan for observation and for liaison:
(1) Map of emplacements and observing stations (land sta-
tions for intelligence and ranging, balloons, wireless stations).
(2) Map showing plainly the parts of the terrain both seen
and hidden from the intelligence observing stations.
(3) Panorama by balloon. ‘ '
(4.) Distribution of the observation personnel.
(5 ) Normal and contingent distribution of the observing sta-
tions among the artillery units. (Contingent observing stations,
to be used by the artillery groups in the divers cases of antici-
pated concentration, are shown in a special column in the table
of concentrated fire.)
(6) Map of liaisons of every nature between the observing
stations, balloons, wireless antennae, command posts, and the
battery groups.
(7) Instructions for observers.
(8) Equipment of the observation posts.
B. A plan for contingent reinforcement of the sector by bat-
teries of all calibers from outside. This plan deals with the
case of an important attack by the enemy. It takes into con-
sideration:
(1) A statement of the reinforcing material to be expected.
(Statement obtained from army.)
39
(2) The organization of the command.
(3) The assignment of missions and emplacements.
(4) Organization of command posts, observing stations, and
liaisons. '
(Norm—Battery emplacements, command posts, observation
posts, and telephone communications provided for in this docu-
ment, are arranged beforehand, and all the papers on fire are
prepared—lists of coordinates, range-laying scales, and tables
of fire.)
CHAPTER V. ORGANIZATION OF THE ARTILLERY.
A. EMPLACEMENT or BATTERIES.
The battery sites are determined by the tactical mission im-
posed on them.
Field battery emplacements are primarily fixed‘by their bar-
rage role. In order to bring the barrage to bear in front of
the enemy trenches, there must be no hesitation in changing the
battery emplacements, and even in moving them to the neigh-
boring sectors, in order to obtain enfilading fire. The batteries
will be echeloned in depth in order to insure the continuity of
the barrage, to the best advantage and under all circumstances.
In case of an invasion of our lines by the enemy they must be
so arranged that all or part of them may be brought to bear
on the terrain included between our first and second positions.
Moreover, all batteries must be able to participate in fire
concentrations. For this, they must have an extended field of fire.
The necessary steps must be taken to emplace the pieces so as
to attain this object. Should there be need for it, certain bat-
teries are provided with two neighboring emplacements whose
combined fields of fire give them the desired zone of action.
This doubling of emplacements to extend the battery zone of
action is not to be confused with the multiplying of emplace-
ments for the purpose of escaping the enemy’s fire. Double
emplacements are made necessary either by the limits avail-
able for emplacements or by the inconveniences of a too ex-
tended field of fire in a close terrain.
Emplacements for high-angle batteries are determined by the
necessity for acting effectively on the enemy’s first position and
upon the communications in rear. Their zone of action» must
be as extended as possible. - _
Emplacements ‘for long-range guns are determined by the
necessity of being so placed as to be able to reach the hostile
4O
batteries, even those most distant, by having their fire eche-
loned in depth. This may often result in having such batteries
abreast and even in advance of the field artillery.
Each battery (field or heavy) should make use of several
emplacements previously organized, provided with tables re-
lating to fire (range scales, notebooks on fire) and connected
directly or indirectly by telephone with the observing station's.
It will thus be able to change position after the fire is adjusted
without delaying the fire. In case of necessity, a certain num-
ber of these emplacements may be occupied by the supporting
batteries. Emplacements must be so selected as to defilade the
batteries from ground or aerial observation. They must be
carefully disguised (artificially). The bottoms of valleys, where
gas accumulates, must be avoided. Every abandoned emplace-
ment will be rigged up with a dummy battery and false flashes.
(Nora—Notebooks on fire belong to the emplacement and not
to the battery and should always be passed on to a relieving
battery. If a battery is moved and not replaced by another the
notebook is turned in to the artillery commander of the sector.)
B. DISTRIBUTION or TARGETS.
The zone of artillery action is divided between the various
artillery groups, and, according to their calibers, into well-
defined sectors (army and corps heavy artillery and divisional
artillery). A similar distribution is made within the larger
artillery groups between the battalions and batteries, so that
each battery, balloon, aeroplane observing station, and liaison
agent may know the unit which must fire when a target appears.
This allotment of a normal zone of action to the large and to
the lesser groups does not debar them from eventuallygfiring on
neighboring zones (in addition to the concentrations provided
for) whenever the infantry has need of their support, Whenever
the commanders of near-by groups call for their assistance. or
whenever circumstances permit of their action. Each battery
or battalion must have a normal zone of action and one for
contingencies.
C. ADJUSTMENTS.
The adjustments necessary for the fire of batteries of all
calibers in their normal and contingent zones of action must be
made in advance. Consequently each battery must be adjusted
R
'41-
throughout the entire extent of its field of action. The heavy
artillery comes ‘to an understanding on this point with the ar-
tillery commanders in the army corps concerned.
D. OBTAINING, TRANSMITTING, AND UTILIZING INFORMATION.
On the defensive, artillery fire, whatever its nature, must be
delivered rapidly. The obtaining, transmitting, and utilization
of information here plays a capital role. This work must be
carefully organized.
(1) Obtaining information—This is done in two ways:
(a) By means of permanent liaison agents, detached to the
infantry by the field and high—angle fire batteries. An artillery
officer is detailed with each infantry colonel (commandant of
subsector). This officer has under his command a detachment
for liaison and observation duty, comprising sergeant observers,
noncommissioned liaison agents (one or two per battalion),
telephone operators and signalmen with necessary equipment.
The of‘ficer in charge of the liaison, whose place, as a rule, is
near the colonel, makes such inspections as are necessary to
keep himself informed as to the working of the liaison and ob-
servation. He details liaison agents with the commander of
each first-line battalion and keeps in touch with them (by tele-
phone, signals, etc.).
This personnel is charged not only with calling for the bar-
rage, but also with informing the infantry as to what is pos-v
sible for the artillery, and with keeping that artillery, which is
charged with supporting the infantry, posted upon the events
and requirements among the first-line units. It may be em-
ployed in regulating the fire. It remains with the infantry day
and night, and is subsisted with it.
The‘ officer in charge of the liaison renders daily to his artil-
lery commander a concise report of events.
(1)) By means of aerial and ground observation.
All observation, whatever its nature (observation posts, bal-
loons, artillery balloons, aeroplanes), is organized on the follow-
ing principles:
(1) It is impersonal. It does not belong exclusively to any
group or caliber. It may be employed by any unit whatever,
pursuant to orders from the commander, based on the tactical
requirements of the moment.
42
(2) It participates in the two operations (obtaining informa-
tion and ranging). Certain stations are, however, more par-
ticularly specialized in one or the other of these functions.
(3) Stations are connected by telephone with headquarters
and with the battalions or batteries, so that information or
ranges may reach those concerned in a minimum of time.
(4) Stations are connected with each other by telephone, so
that they may mutually complete and check their information.
(2) Details of organization—Land observation: Land obser-
vation comprises two classes of observing stations:
Intelligence observing stations with a wide field of view,
which are principally used in seeking targets. They gener-
ally work on gun flashes. Forming an important part of
the mechanism of command, they are established by the gen-
eral commanding the army upon the recommendation of the
corps artillery commanders. They are connected directly with
the artillery commanders of the army corps (S. R. A.) and with
the commanders of the neighboring superior groups (divisional
artillery, corps heavy artillery, and the heavy artillery groups
of the army). 'Their number is determined by the lay of the
land, the enemy’s organization, and the observing personnel
available. In every instance it isimportant that they should
cover the most extended view possible of the rear of the enemy’s
position. Their personnel is absolutely specialized. Since they
may eventually be used to establish ranges ‘and to check up
the results of fire, they are also in direct communication with
the different groups in their sector. They are specially useful
in regulating the fire of heavy artillery on auxiliary targets.
Observation ranging stations with limited fields of view are
used principally for ranging and checking the results of fire.
They are technical. means of the highest importance. The efli—
ciency of the materiel depends upon the judgment shown in
their selection, and the rapidity with which the batteries enter
into action depends upon the number of stations used and the
excellence of their organization.
The selection of the normal observing stations and the organi-
zation of the telephone net for ranging pertain to those who use
them. The chief of artillery of the army and the commanders
of the corps artillery coordinate and complete their work with
a view to eventual fire concentrations to be carried out. In
order to be complete the organization of these observing sta-
tions should fulfill the following conditions:
43
(a) Those artillery units called upon to fire normally upon
a portion of the front should have all the observing stations
necessary for carrying out their missions.
(b) The artillery units called upon to fire contingently upon a
portion of the front should be informed beforehand as to the
observing stations they may use temporarily for that purpose.
The contingent assignment of observing stations is made by
the stafi.
(0) Batteries designated to utilize an observing station nor-
mally or contingently must be in liaison with it. This liaison
must be kept up whatever happens.
(d) The observation personnel is detailed in a quasi perma-
nent manner to each observing station. It works for the benefit
of all those units referred to it. It must be capable of adjusting
the fire of heavy artillery as well as that of field artillery.
(e) Balloon observations—The artillery balloon is an observ-
ing station, with a wide field to watch over, used for the pur-
pose of keeping the artillery command informed, and at the
same time it is an agency for ranging.
I‘he commander of the group with which it is linked fixes its
zone of action and its general mission under the conditions set
forth in article 30 of the “ Instructions for the employment of
aerial observation.” As a rule, he designates each day its task
for the day following. He charges it eventually with verifying
the daily ranges of those batteries which have no auxiliary
targets visible from ground stations. He gets from it the mete-
orological information necessary in the determination of the
plans for the day. The observer in the balloon keeps the com-
manders of the artillery and batteries posted by means of his
facilities for observation.
(7’) Observation by aeroplane: Observation by aeroplane is
regulated by the “Instructions of January, 1916, G. Q. G.”
(3) Transmission of information—Transmission of informa-
tion is carried out by means of— .
(a) The telephone. The telephone net work comprises the ar-
tillery-infantry net, established in conformity with note No.
2073, of May 4, 1916, from the G. Q. G. (double liaison, one part
set up by the artillery, the other by the infantry), and the artil-
lery net. The latter serves to establish direct liaison between
(b) the army artillery commander, commanders of the corps
and divisional artillery, battalions, batteries, and the observing
44
stations; (0) the army artillery commander, the commanders of
artillery groups, subgroups, battalions, and batteries of army
artillery, and the observing stations.
,The artillery not also establishes lateral liaisons between all
commanders of artillery, artillery groups, subgroups, battalions,
batteries whatever the caliber, as well as between all the observ-
ing stations (ground stations, balloons, wireless stations).
Visual signaling, used in connection with the telephone, doubles
the liaisons between the artillery and infantry, and may, when
necessary, be uniformly organized between the observing stations
and batteries.
Rockets, or any other conventional means, varying with cir-
cumstances, may, as a last resort, take the place of telephonic or
visual communications for the barrage.
‘Wireless is used between aeroplanes and batteries equipped
with antennae and receiving apparatus.
(4) Utilization of information—The manner in which intelli-
gence furnished by the observing stations is utilized varies with
the target reported upon. If it is a question of a transient target
(such as a battery in action, small columns of infantry, an unex-
pected attack by the enemy, etc.), the observer warns directly
the artillery group or battalion concerned. Fire is opened at
once. If it is a question of an objective of real importance and
which may remain in view long enough (such as long columns on
the march, troops at rest, etc.), the observer reports to the ar-
tillery commander of the sector (through the intelligence ofiicer,
who, when necessary, checks the information by other stations
having a view over the region observed), and the artillery com-
mander of the sector orders the proper concentration. If fire on
important targets was left to the initiative of subordinates, the
artillery action would be inalterably disconnected, and the first
shots would warn the enemy and would cause him to take pre-
cautions against losses. ~
The above rules apply to all methods of observation. In case
of observation by aeroplane, the following dispositions are
made: For a transient target the wireless officer of the artillery
group orders the firing when the objective signaled is in his
normal zone; he asks for instructions when it is in his contingent
zone. For an important and fairly stationary target the wire-
less oflicer of the artillery commander in the sector gets from
the latter the necessary firing orders; the wireless ofiicer of the
artillery group in the normal zone in which the target appears
reports if he thinks he is unable to ‘deliver the fire of his unit.
APPENDIX N0. 1.
Organization of a telephone net for observation and ranging.—
Concentrated fire can only be realized if a telephone net is pre-
pared permitting lateral liaisons between the batteries and ob-
serving stations. It is impossible for batteries to install such
liaisons with their own equipment. It is also impossible to
connect up with observing stations located several kilometers
to the right or left, in the sector of unknown units. It is there-
fore incumbent upon the general commanding to intervene and
establish the entire network permitting these lateral liaisons,
without which he will limit his artillery to parallel actions
and give up all the advantages to be gained by concentrated fire.
This comprehensive network will also include—
(1) A large main cable laid parallel to the front and far
enough away to escape demolition by shelling. (See sketch.)
(2) Several branches, leaving the main cable at intervals
through centrals called “adjusting centrals,” R1, R2, R3, and
pushed toward those points of the front where observing sta-
tions are most numerous. These branches must be constructed
with every precaution necessary (multiple wires, buried, etc.)
for protection from gunfire. They terminate in centrals called
“observation centrals,” 01, 02, 03, interconnected if possible.
This entire net, main cable and branches, is constructed so
as to withstand bombardment by the enemy. It_is independent
of the way in which the front is occupied and depends only on
the terrain. It will be established and maintained by the
army, and will form the army net.
The units will connect up with this net in the following man-
ner:
(a) Nothing will be changed in the net of the artillery com-
mander, the net in depth leading from the corps artillery and
the divisional artillery to the observing stations, and passing
through all the intermediary stations. (See sketch.)
(b) Observing stations will be connected with observation
station centrals.
(0) Command stations (artillery division, heavy artillery,
corps artillery), balloons, and landing places will be connected
with ranging centrals. (See sketch.)
(45)
46
All these lines will be protected as far as possible (buried,l
placed in the trenches, etc.).
Thus installed, the net will function in the following manner:
For normal fire in the vicinity of its axis of fire, battery A,
for example, will make use of its own observing station 01".
But when it wishes to direct its fire upon the target B, it will
call up station O3”, or the balloon B, whence observation of target
B can be made under the best conditions. The liaison will be
made by the‘ army net, through A—Ol”, O’ , R1, R2, R3, O3, and 03.”
This net also makes the ranging of battery A on target B by air-
plane very easy. A wireless receiver, which can pick up signals
in the sector B, is connected with the central B3, and thence with
the battery A. In each sector a certain number of wireless receivers,
judiciously placed, are connected with the ranging central.
Such an organization allows battery A to turn its fire to the
right or left by having its fire observed by its neighbors.
The establishment of this net also has the following advan-
tages:
(1) It permits bilateral observation. To this end, for ex-
ample, battery A will utilize either the two observing stations
01’ ’ and 011)’, united by the single observation station central 01,
or the more distant stations 01”, and Oz’, united by the army net
O‘, R‘, R2, and O2
(2) It insures a double'liaison between batteries and their
observing stations. If the line A—Ol" is cut, for example, the
liaison will always be insured through the circuit 01", O‘, R1
Bat" A.
(3) It permits a direct liaison between the headquarters and
observing stations.
The system admits of numerous combinations. In order to
function favorably, the net must be so arranged that the bat-
teries do not wait upon the communications. The length of
time necessary for communications will often be very long, for
instance, between a battery and its observing station, whence
the necessity for giving the main cable and branches suflicient
wire for not encumbering the net with extraneous conversations
and for reserving it for observation service.
47
anew/Arron’ 1752'.


. a _ I
5 "‘W‘ 5 l "n
l ’/
. . p /
zany/fly fieafm/ZZ ______ ‘ _ fQLflgbm/hywafibn, r- \, ~ ‘ ' ‘ 0 ,1, '
l' , _ '
fil'I/lz‘F/pbily/UJI 52:40,; No, / - \
Army Cox-pihrtillu‘y

Legend -

Mama/hm net.
w..__0-_0.—
. _ flm'l/eg Commandant
i wetter]
I
IV. THIRD BRITISH ARMY, ARTILLERY
INSTRUCTIONS, NO. 3.
NOTES ON THE ORGANIZATION OF A BATTERY FOR ACTIVE
OPERATIONS.
1. The organization of batteries is shown in war tables of
,- organization.
If we are to get the best value out of a battery during pro-
longed and continuous bombardments, a system of reliefs for
the personnel and a very careful organization of every detail
must be thought out and put in operation in ample time before
operations begin.
2. In order to assist officers the following notes are issued.
Details may be changed, but the principles contained herein
must be adhered to.
3. In preparing these notes the principle of always maintain-
ing some portion of the personnel fresh has been steadily kept
in view. This is of vital importance and should be always
rigidly adhered to by battery commanders, even though they
have at times to work with short numbers and guns. Unless
this is done, it is quite impossible to get the best out of what-
ever personnel and materiel there is at hand.
4. The fighting depth of the artillery may be taken to be five
lines. These are the same for all natures. They are the front
line (liaison with infantry or F. O. 0.), the observation station,
the firing battery, the relief line, and the combat train (Lorry
Park in case of siege).
Each line is dealt with in turn in the following paragraphs.
Their composition in detail will be found in the attached
Table A.
War tables of organization give the data from which Table A
is compiled. '
(I) The front line—The whole of the personnel and ma-
tériel for this party must be provided under battalion or group
arrangements. . In order to meet this demand the organization
of batteries should not be interfered with unless absolutely no
other means of supply is available. The battalion commander’s
staff and any available reinforcements should be drawn upon.
The duties of this line are entirely liaison with the infantry
and the insuring of rapid communication of information to the
group and, where necessary, to batteries.
(49)
50
(II) The observation station—The cbmposition of this party is
the same, irrespective of the nature of armament of the battery.
As regards relief, this can not be legislated for in advance,
as it depends on the nature of the fighting, the ground and local
conditions, tactical or otherwise. It must be thought out by
each individual battery commander.
(III) The firing battery—The minimum number of all ranks
necessary to fight the guns should be kept in the firing battery.
Each section must include two layers and be commanded by
either a sergeant or a corporal, so that in every platoon there
is one sergeant or one corporal always at the guns. In the case
of six-gun batteries, which are intact as regards materiel, two
guns must always be kept resting; in four-gun batteries, one.
The object of this is to rest and cool the gun, to feed the men,
and to provide for necessary fatigues (supply of ammunition,
etc.) for the other guns. Any casualties must also be made
good from this source until the arrival of fresh men from the
combat train.
It is most important never to draw on the party resting in the
relief line except in the last resource.
(IV) The relief lire—This is essentially a resting place for the
relief personnel of the guns. It must be close to the gun line
so as to insure that men do not get tired in going up to the
guns; at the same time it should not be in a place that gets con—
santly shelled. It must be chosen beforehand and be carefully
sited according to local conditions. ‘
As a general rule a six-hour relief is the best. It must be
remembered, however, that the same men must not always be
on duty by night, therefore a dog watch of three hours must be
arranged for when necessary—say every third day.
(V) The combat tram—The combat train needs very careful
organization. There is a large amount of work to be done, and
often, particularly when casualties are taking place, very few
men to do it. All men must do an equal share of work—e. g., offi-
cers’ grooms, saddlers, storemen, etc., must all be employed in
general duties. The captain is in charge of the .combat train.
(A major or senior captain commands the battery.)
5. Stores to be collected.
(I) At the firing battery——
(a) Food and drinking water suflicient to last over the whole
period of the bombardment. The ammunition dumped indicates
what this period is expected to be.
(b) Spare parts in their boxes.
(0) Water for cooling guns.
51
(d) Buffer oil.
(e) Cleaning oil and rags.
(1‘) Gas blankets and antigas and antismoke appliances.
(g) Ear protectors.
(h) Stretchers and shell dressings.
(II) At the observing posts—
(a) Food and drinking water sufficient to last over the whole
period of the bombardment.
(b) Gas blankets and antigas appliances.
(0) Ear protectors. -
(d) Stretchers and shell dressings.
(III) At the relief line—The same as detailed for the observ~
ing posts.
6. The provision of splinter and weather-proof shelters for
cartridge dumps for siege artillery is of vital importance.
7. Cleaning ammunition requires a system carefully thought
out beforehand. This is specially necessary in the larger natures
of guns and howitzers where ammunition has usually to be kept
on the ground and rolled up to the guns.
8. Means of communication—From batteries forward, these
want carefully thinking out and organizing prior to active oper-
ations. The following are some of the means available:
(a) Several lines of telephones. Well laddered if in the open.
(Tapping-in stations must be arranged for.)
(b) Visual (including electric lamps and Helio).
(c) Runners.
(d) Light signals.
(e) Pigeons.
As’ many as possible of the above must be organized before-
hand and used simultaneously, in this way messages generally _.
get through. Speed is vital. ‘
In addition to the above all units supplied with wireless
receiving sets should make arrangements to tap any message
sent by infantry contact aeroplane patrols, so as to obtain the
latest information regarding the position of our advanced
infantry. All group and brigade headquarters must pass on
the information so gained as rapidly as possible to those head-
quarters and batteries not provided with wireless-receiving sets.
9. Battle headquarters or telephone dugout must be safe and
have communication to each gun either by speaking tube or
telephone.
10. Equipment—In action, box respirators must always be
carried so as to be readily available. On the move all equip-
ment must be worn on the per-son.
52 I’
11. Testing of guns for wean—This must be done by the
inspecting ordnance oiiicer before operations begin, and periodi-_
cally when possible afterwards. -
12. When starting to organize always prepare for the worst;
that is, calculate on the number of men who will probably be
available and not on what ought to be available. Equalize out
your good and bad men, When reinforcements arrive use them
up gradually—not all at once.
13. Before the bombardment starts a careful program must
be made out as to the rate of fire and all details that can be
thought of.
It is much easier to amend a carefully prepared program than
it is to so suddenly have to make arrangements for something
that has never been thought of.
14. The rates of fire to be continuously maintained throughout
a bombardment are as follows:
18 pounder or 4.5 inch howitzers, 3 rounds per battery per
minute.
(5-inch howitzers, 1 round per battery per three-fourths minute.
8 or 9.2-inch howitzers, 1 round per battery per 14 minutes.
60-pounders and 47inch guns, these being neutralizing coun-
ter-battery guns for bombarding trenches during the intervals
when the siege batteries are employed on counter-battery work;
for bombarding communication trenches and avenues of ap-
proach. _ r,
The rate of fire will be varied as required.
Super-heavy howitzers and guns, as required.
The above rates of fire refer to a bombardment. The rate of
fire for Field Artillery barrages covering Infantry attacks
, must be such as to give a really dense barrage. Four rounds per
gun a minute for short continuous periods not exceeding 15
minutes is permissible. For longer periods the rate of fire must
be proportionately reduced.
15. The duties of the various oflieers in all natures of batteries
are as follows:
(a) The battery commander must be absolutely free to go‘
wherever his presence is most essential. The principle is that-
the battery commander should be where he can best deal with
the tactical situation. So long as communications hold this will
be the O. p. where he can see. Consequently the O. p. is his
normal place to begin with.
(b) The captain organizes the combat train; when opera-
tions begin he is responsible that no supply of anything is ever
wanting at the guns or at the O. p. He must also relieve the ‘
O
53 .
battery commander at intervals, so that the latter can obtain
necessary rest.
(0) The subaltern at the O. p. assists the battery commander
to observe and shoot the battery, and is in tactical command of
the battery when the battery commander is not at the O. p.
(d) The executive at the gun line is responsible for the drill
and fire discipline of the battery. He must also make and apply
the corrections of the day as necessary, and" also the calibration
corrections.
(6) The subaltern at the relief line is responsible that the
men rest.
16. Preparations in case of an advance—These must be made
beforehand and are as follows: ,
(a) The battery commander must reconnoiter the routes lead-
ing to the advanced positions selected in so far as they lie
within our lines. He must organize the positions to be occupied.
This organization should include digging gun pits for the guns,
deep narrow trenches for the detachments, recesses for ammu-
nition, methods of communication. Routes should also be se~
lected (from themap) for advance to positions within the Ger-
man lines and arrangements made for crossing our own and
the hostile trenches:
(b) The captain is responsible for arranging for supply of
ammunition, water, food, and forage; he must also see that
camouflage material, digging tools, sand bags, timber for strut-
ting trenches, electric torches, lamps, and candles are packed
ready. -
A careful system of packing the vehicles must be evolved and
practiced beforehand by all concerned.
(0) The battery first sergeant must have the battery staff or-
ganized and horses ready to go up at once in case of an advance.
(d) In any form of moving warfare the relief system of or-
ganization must be adhered to just the same as in a bombard-
ment. There will, of course, be variations made necessary by
the varying changes of the battle and local conditions. As an
example, on arrival at a new position the “ resting relief”
would have to dig and prepare the new position instead of rest-
ing, and consequently might have to go 24 hours or more without
rest. '
17. Organization must be started at once so that the system
may be thoroughly understood and tested before operations be~
gin. This doesnot refer to the front-line liaison duties arranged
by the group or brigade, which only come into full operation
during a battle. -
4
5


_


llll '0 IIOI ll ll ll ‘OH I. II OI llll II. ‘III. II I) ll OI ll OI llilmlblllill ll Il_ll II II lololoaolgnofiaom
a H ..Hmm. m m H ..H .......... ..EHHH HQHHQMH
H; a N H H a. ..N ..a H H 3» H ...H ..a 3.1:"... :8” a .szH @ H ........... ..asafi.
HHH m m H H m .QmH ......... ..HHdj.
HH............................HHH6.HU.. MQHVQHHSEH HwHwv .. .......... ..QHHHHHHEEQH .....H3HHBom.b
..tm ..H H v a la ‘H _..H H. H N H 3...? ....H H H ..H ..... ..QHHHHHSwwBfiW.
..H H ..H. a ..mmnH van ....H . . . . . . . . . . ..QHHHH HoHHem
HHH m m H H H. ..H ..H H ..H. a i326 Ilia ............. ..wa5wp4
HHH m m H H m .Qm ......... ..mdfi.
HH......-..-.............-....AHH5.HU .EHEHEHQHZH........‘..............:.......2HHHHHH8HaH ......... 25$
.HZQMSHHHEEPH ....m ............w ..H H _H. __u m a ......H. H m H 3 H.H H H H ..H .........2HHHHHowa>P
H ..H. a ........H ......-.H .. an m ....H . . . . . . . . . . . ..oHHHHHoHHom
.gafloewgmH H m m H H H. H ..H. N ........H ........m .. mm m ....H . . . . . . . . . . . . . -.mqswuia ..Hon
wmnnaahnuu“News...HE...5.. infiunnnuuea ........ .58.... ..sd .2
HHHHPH
Q5
.5 HEHHQEHV w
i . . i . . . . . . . .Ofi: HHHPHH HHH
.3 .rm .@ ..HgiwH

'sloistd £19 A it '3 L" I‘
'sduml Butleufiis


‘sepia
'Buueufirs ‘ S3215



'sxoioextq
'souoqdelegl,



'uemeims
‘019 "Q ‘s ‘v ‘GBBAI'BE'


"SBEI'BIdOJQB‘pIIB sag—Antics
'semepio Amiru'es

'IIQHISBIIH pue sisruoqdeleJ,


'sxoog
'sxeiedumu,


'SIGIPP'BS
'SJGIQGIIM

H
In
1
q?
m
.S

s e
m. M
m m
'SIBO‘QSOSIOH
‘111883.198 ‘neg
'SCllIBAIOS <1


'SJGIIHIH)
'sietpxequiog
'[BJOdIOQ
's'iusesxes


'siueefixes asxtg

'suieileqng
'sureid'eg
'iol'eyq
assesses
.HHHQEQHHHHQ
.esssssela. as?
55
.80 .884 83% a gimme H a 463m 93 .83? 62 .mewctfiae museums 3 >396 H

i. : :__:_: z - z in .- 2 -. z : .1:- : -. u. z: :1. I : :- :. : :1: .. : ...::.'..UQ§HOAH
a H :Hee a a H :H ....... :35... SH
H__H a a H H e :N :a H H Em H :NS. a a :H a H .... .. 3.
HH a a H H a :H .....:.:xH.ofi,
H._..........................:a=8¢: 2.3228 HEB ..................:3HH38HH~H :sefisemad


V. THE USE OF ILLUMINATING 75 MM. SHELLS
IN FIRING ON AERIAL TARGETS.
The illuminating 75 mm. shell is furnished with a fuse 22/31,
which causes it t6 explode in the area to be especially illumi-
nated.
It burns about one minute. A few hundred meters of space
are sufl‘iciently lighted for practical purposes.
To illuminate a target every efiort is made to explode the
shell a few hundred meters above and in front of it.
As a rule shells should not be fired at a low height, as this
has the disadvantage of illuminating the ground for the enemy.
There are two cases to consider:
(a) When the target is visible;
(b) When the target is invisible.
(a) Visible target—One of the guns of the platoon fires
illuminating shells, while the second gun tries to reach the tar—
get with tracer or time-fuse shells.
Illuminating shells are fired like any other, with the sole
difference that, in order to counteract the reduction of velocity,
the fuse is set for half again its distance.
At this rate for an auto-mounted light gun half the height
of the objective would be added, and for a platform the given
distances would be increased.
Corrections of site and deflection should correspond to the
fuse setting thus increased.
If the illumination seems too low in relation to the target,
increase the site correction to the maximum and diminish it
should the contrary be the case.
(b) Invisible target—Await the moment to open fire until
the noise of the motor indicates the approximate location of
the adversary.
Illuminating shells are then fired from both guns so as
to illuminate the zone toward which the adversary is supposed
to be moving.
‘ (57)
58
The angle of the gun and the setting of the fuse are recorded
on the diagram of trajectories. '
The guns could, for example, be echeloned in the direction of
100 mm. on either ‘side of the presumed azimuth and could fire
by successive trajectories of 5 degrees.
Once the target is illuminated, fire is commenced as indicated
above.
' Trajéci'or'icsand curves ‘of equal fuses for
illuminating shells of 75 mm.
new, Initial Velocity 400 meters ‘per-second
[5000




_\
4000 7\ A;
is . or.
& ' 0 AL
3000 ‘ ° A
‘Q? a‘ . ' 0 _ um)“
.q? '\ _ c‘-
K t5 u‘
1%’ ~ ° 4 - °
2000 0° W
49 o r
e W e “
’\ 6'
*(l ‘b
1000 / \ h "I a; g
‘ l/f/ / a s s
Q Q N
‘ / ‘A g ‘5.?
0 z = a
1000 .2000 3000 4000

{pad ‘5000 new
VI. NOTES ON THE TECHNICAL RECONNAIS-
SANCE OF AN ARTILLERY POSITION AND
THE TRAINING OF THE HEADQUARTERS
OF A BATTERY.
1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.
The reconnaissance work of an artillery officer can be grouped
under two headings—(a) tactical, (b) technical.
(a) Covers the reconnaissance of all artillery tactical com-
manders, whose duty it is to find out the situation, and includes
the personal exchange of views with the infantry with whom
they are working; also the study of the ground and the enemy’s
dispositions, to enable them best to cooperatewith and support
the action of their own infantry.
This is primarily the duty of the divisional C. R. A., who often
may employ one of his staff officers or a specially selected
regimental ofiicer for the duty.
Brigades R. F. A. are, however, frequently “grouped with ‘”
infantry commands, and the entire responsibility may fall on
the lieutenant colonel commanding a R. F. A. brigade, or even
upon a B. C.
(b) In the actual selection of the battery position and observ-
ing stations necessary to carry out the role of the guns in‘sup-
porting and cooperating with their infantry.
The two reconnaissances may be carried out at one and the
same time by either the O. C., the brigade, or the O. C. battery;
but as a general rule the latter is the work of the O. C. battery.
In (a) the oificer who makes a personal reconnaissance of the
ground and the enemy’s dispositions (keeping in view the plans
and intentions of his own infantry) does not require a large
stafi. He should not be accompanied by more than one other
person. A large staff would be dangerous and wrong.
In (b) the B. C. should delegate work, under his guidance,
to subordinates, in order that no time should be lost in the selec-
tion and occupation of the position.
(59}
60
It is impossible to dogmatize or to lay down an absolute stand-
ard, as circumstances alter each individual case, and the fol-
lowing suggestions are only put forward as a general guide for
the training of batteries:
2. COMPOSITION or A BATTERY HEADQUARTERS.
Battery headquartera—The detail of the battery headquarters
can not be definitely laid down; 15 horses are allotted to them
in the war establishment, excluding 2 trumpeters or horse-
holders (for the B. C. and captain) and the B. S. M., but in-
cluding the 4 other mounted men who always accompany the
B. G. and R. O. in their reconnaissances.
The R. O. (reconnaissance oflficer) is the otficer who accom-
panies the battery commander in his reconnaissance.
The B. L. (battery leader) is the officer who is in voice or
signal command of the guns, either in action or on the march.
The B. 0. may become B. L. at any moment, or vice versa.
T. T.=telephonists, who should be trained as signalers as
well; L. O.=men who are likely to be required as lookout men
or patrols; R. T.=range taker; and H. H.=horse holder.
All members of the battery headquarters should, as far as
possible, be trained as telephonists, whether they are specialists,
such as range taker or lookout men, or‘ not; and as many of
them as possible should be passed signalers as well. It is im-
portant that the trumpeters or horse holders for the B. G. and
captain should be signalers. (In addition to the mounted head-
quarters, there should be at least one dismounted telephonist,
with an instrument on a firing battery wagon.)
Signalers should be normally used in a moving fight to open up
and maintain communication between the O. P. and the battery. -
A suggested detail for the battery headquarters might be as
follows:
( 1) B. (l’s assistant and mounted orderly, 2 men.
(2) R. O.’s assistant and horse holder, 2 men.
(3) “A” group signalers, 3 men, each with a telephone and
wire, and 1 horse holder, 4 men.
(4) “B” group, signalers, 2 men,rwith telephones, etc., and
1 horse holder, 3 men. , '
(This group can be kept spare during the occupation of the
first position, but can be organized by the B. S. M. to take the
place of “A” group should a move take place, or to accompany
a flank, or forward observing oflicer.)
61
(5) One range taker with instrument and 1 horse holder, who
also takes the B. S. M.’s horse, 2 men.
(6) Two mounted men (trained as lookout men in action and.
patrols when the battery is moving), 2 men.
When marching on a road the battery headquarters should
march in half sections.
When halted on a road they should back their horses into the
hedge (heads toward the road).
When moving across open country they can be in groups, or
threes, or any formation to save room and their horses.
When on the line of march, before the B. L. leaves the battery, .
section commanders, whether R. 0., B. L., or third subaltern,
march in rear of their sections, to be able to see all that goes
on in them.
The captain, B. Q. M. 8., assistant Q. M. S., farrier, and shoeing
smith should ride in rear of the battery, until “Prepare for
action,” when the first line wagons separate from the battery.
The captain then rides at the head of the first line wagons with
his horse holder, and the remainder behind.
Before B. C. goes out on technical reconnaissance, the battery
headquarters would be as follows:
B. C.
Tpr. and B. C.’s assistant.
B. S. M.
R. O.’s assistant and H. H.
2 T. T.’s.
1 T. T. and 1 H. H.
1 R. T. and 1 H. H.
2L. 0.
2 T. T. -
1 H. H. (for “ B ” group telephonists) and I mounted orderly.
(See diagram 1.)
3. DISPOSITION or OFFICERS AND BATTERY HEADQUARTERS DURING
A REcoNNAIssANcE.
F. A. T., section 192, lays down that a B. C. in his reconnais-
sance should be accompanied by as few of his staff as possible;
the remainder of the battery headquarters follows at the head
of the battery until they are required by the B. C. These
instructions cover both the 'tactical and technical reconnais-
sance, but there are undoubtedly occasions during the technical
reconnaissance when it is advantageous for a B. C. to order
62 -
his B. S. M. to come forward, ahead of the battery, with some
telephonists and others of the headquarters, when he starts out
on his reconnaissance.
It is also generally accepted that the captain must have early
information of the battery position and the intentions of the
B. C.; but he should not leave the battery sooner than is ‘neces-
sary for him to do his own work in the technical reconnais-
sance.
So that, leaving the B. S. M. at the head of the battery till
sent for, the members of the battery staff who will usually be
required to accompany the B. C. in his technical reconnaissance
may be divided into three parties: (1) ‘B. C.’s party; ( 2) R. C.’s
party; (3) Captain’s party (when the actual position is about to .
be selected).
(1) B. C.—
Trumpeter (or H. H.).
B. C.’s assistant (with rifle, director, and telescope, etc.).
Mounted orderly (with rifle), used for communication pur—
poses and can be used for digging at the O. .P., or as linesman
when the gunsare in action.
(2) R. O.—— _
Assistant (trained telephonist, signaler, director man, pen-
ciler, etc).
H. H. (with director).
(3) Captain.—
H. H. '
Assistant Q. M. S. (or other understudy).
These should take care not to ride together in a solid pha- '
‘ lanx, but should be split up into groups of not more than two
or three, to attract ‘as little attention as possible, each group
well behind the one in front, and keeping themselves concealed
from view as much as possible. Each group should keep the one
in front in view, and when the one in front stops they should
take advantage of any available cover.
All officers and members of the battery headquarters should
have their definite instructions, given verbally by the ‘B. C.
before he leaves the battery, and the B. S. M. should, if the B. C.
has left him in charge of headquarters at the head of the bat-
tery, know how orders will come to him. (If the B. C. is not
with his battery when he starts out on his technical reconnais-
sance and there is no signal communication between the B. C.
and the B. L., it is advisable to send back written instruc-
tions.) ' '
63
4. DUTIES OF THE OFFICERS IN A RECONNAISSANCE.
It is essential in any reconnaissance that all those taking
part in it should have a clear idea of what their duties are to
prevent unnecessary overlapping of work, and the following are
suggested as duties for the various officers, and points to be
attended to by them.
The battery commander should have a thorough grasp of
the tactical situation. Should he have had definite instructions
from the map or otherwise, as to the area his battery is to
occupy, the zone he has to cover, the action of his own infantry,
a careful study of the map before he sets out will more than
repay him in time saved eventually.
The actual area available for the selection of his gun position.
will probably be limited by his instructions, by his knowledge
of the power of his guns, and the necessity for concealment;
and he should, in'flat country, obtain a general knowledge of
the compass direction of his zone from any likely gun positions.
The positions selected for the battery and for the observing
station will be chosen on their own merits—neither need be
subordinated to the other.
If he has a clear knowledge of the situation, the battery
position may be selected first, otherwise the O. P., or both at
the same time. D
The considerations which guide his choice of the battery
position are:
(1) A clear field of fire over all the zone he has to cover.
(This is absolutely essential).
2. Concealment for his guns both from the ground and from
the air. (Concealment is better protection for the gunners than
any temporary field entrenchments.)
(3) Good platforms for his guns. (This is important for
accuracy of shooting and quickness switching.)
(4) Facilities for ammunition supply.
The B. C. should have in his head a fairly accurate idea of
what ground he may be required to shoot onto, so that he may
know the elevation at which he must clear obstacles in front of
his guns.
An angle of sight instrument, and an intimate knowledge
of the range table of his gun will enable him to find out the
lowest elevation at which he can shoot, and to see if his position
fulfills consideration (1).
64
The considerations in the selection of an O. P. are:
(1) A good view of the enemy’s zone.
(2) A good view of our own infantry (for cooperation by
View). _ '
(3) A position that will not be obvious to the enemy as a
probable O. P. -
(4) The position should, if possible, have a covered line of
approach.
The distance from the battery position is of minor importance.
The B. 0. must push on until he is stopped by bullets or has
found a suitable position.
When the battery position has been selected first, the B. G.
can, as a rule, give the general direction in which he is going
to look for his 0. P. to his R. 0., and he must realize that
if he‘ changes his direction and plans, this must be made known
as soon as possible to the B. S. M. (who is supervising the open-
ing up of his communications) by sending back his mounted
orderly to the battery position, as a guide to the B. S. M. and
staff. ~
The directions to the B. L. as to the battery position are sent
back by the R. O.
The B. C.’s trumpeter and horse should be left at the ‘point
beyond which it is not advisable to ride; he can act as a
guide to the B. S. M. and telephonists, and, if necessary, as a
sentry to prevent other members of the battery headquarters
from proceeding mounted beyond that point.
The B. 0. should give definite instructions to his B. L.; the
order “ Keep Touch ” is a poor one, and unfair to the B. L.
The B. L. should, if possible, be given the definite road or
direction (on the map), the point beyond which he should not
take the battery without further orders, and the pace of the
advance.
The B. 0., whenever possible, should, before leaving the R. 0.,
give him a point or direction (map or otherwise) on which to
lay out his lines. This need not be considered as anything
more than a means to enable the R. O. to get on with his work
without having to wait for orders from the O. P., but map work
and measurement of angles can be done more carefully and ac-
curately at the battery position than in an uncomfortable O. P.,
and the line thus laid out can be used as a temporary zero
line by the B. G. ' -'
The captain—The special points for which the captain is
responsible are the following:
65
(1) The direction of the movement of the first line wagons.
If the captain wishes to take the Q. M. S. on with him when
he goes forward to find out the situation, the actual leading
may be deputed to the farrier or another N. C. O.
The first-line wagons conform to the movements of the firing
battery; orders must be sent to them by the captain when he
has selected his wagon line.
(2) The selection of the wagon-line position; dependent, of
course, on the battery position. ' .
In a “moving” fight, tactical considerations and accessibility
are paramount, but the wagon line should never be so close to
the battery position that the same “searching” fire which is
directed at a battery (from the map or otherwise) is likely to
endanger the wagon line. If directly behind the guns this dis-
tance should not be less than 500 yards. A position to a flank
is generally of little advantage for reasons of safety and may
be claimed by another battery coming into action on that flank,
but there are occasions when tactical considerations and con-
cealment make a flank wagon line desirable. At all times the
concealment of the wagon line from aircraft is most important.
When fighting develops into a stationary action, as in trench
warfare, the comfort and safety of the men and horses in the
wagon line are the essentials, and distance from the battery
position is of minor importance.
(3) To see that the limbers and teams are directed back to
the wagon line when the battery comes into action. This in-
cludes the improvement of the inlet and outlet from the battery
position, cutting gaps in wire, etc., arranging that outgoing
teams will not foul incoming ones, and that, if possible, the route
should not come under fire.
The A. Q. M. S. will often be busy guiding the first-line wagons
to the wagon-line position so that the captain will generally
have to see to the above personally, and he may use the farrier
and shoeing smith to assist him.
(4) To open up communication between the battery and the
wagon line. Semaphore signaling or orderlies are generally
used in a moving fight, but telephones are more often used in
trench warfare.
(5) To make plans for a possible change in position. ‘This
includes the selection of positions of assembly, etc., and the
consideration of all probable moves.
66
(6) To reconnoiter and select alternative wagon lines and
routes to and from the battery. .
(7 ) To understudy the B. C. He must pay frequent visits
_to the O. P. in order to learn the tactical situation, and he
must realize that should the B. C. become a casualty he takes
his place. .
(8) To make plans for the supply of ammunition and replace-
ment of casualties, after the battery has come into action.
The captain’s arrangements and the position of assembly
should be communicated to all.
The R. 0.—1. He is responsible for the actual selection of the
gun platforms, according to the instructions given him by the
B. C. The method to be used in occupying the position and
the “ marking ” of it in such a way that the B. L. may see how
to bring up his guns. As soon as he has satisfied himself that‘
the battery position is definitely fixed, he will despatch his
assistant to the battery rendezvous—
(a) To inform the B. L., by means of a marked map, or other-
wise, of the position chosen for the battery.
I (b) To lead to the battery position the B. S. M., “A” group
telephonists, and those members of the battery headquarters re-
quired by the B. C. at the O. P.
2. If he intends to use an aiming point, he should make cer-
tain that all the guns can see the A. P. by actually kneeling
on each selected gun platform in turn.
3. He selects the position for his director, and the method
of laying out the line of fire.
4. He selects a position for the telephone which should be
conveniently placed for voice command.
In order to avoid the line being cut by .the teams the tele-
phone is usually first set up in front or to one flank of the
position. As soon as the teams are clear the telephone is moved
to the selected position, and care must be taken that sufficient
wire is kept in hand for this purpose.
5. He insures that the battery is not kept waiting on or near
the position a moment longer than is necessary. '
-5. DUTIES or N. C. O.’s IN THE OCCUPATION or A POSITION.
The B. S. M .—1. Commands the battery headquarters and sees
that no one who is not actually required by the B. C. goes up
to or near the observing station.
2. Supervises the establishment of communication (telephone
or otherwise) between the O. P. and the battery.
67
3. Arranges that a sufficient -. number of rifles are with the
observing parties (B. C.’s or F. O. C.’s).
4. Arranges for the digging necessary for the protection of
the O. P. party.
5. Arranges for the position of the horses of the B. C. and
those of the headquarters who are at the O. P.
In a moving fight the B. S. M. would usually remain at the
O. P. In trench warfare he will often be better employed in
the wagon line.
The Nos. 1.—1. They will select the best platforms available I
and see that their guns are halted on them.
2. That their guns are pointed in, or approximately in, the
line of fire immediately the trail touches the ground.
3. That they get their wagons up and the teams away as
quickly as possible.
In nearly every case it should be possible, with a little com-
mon sense, for a No. 1 to obtain the direction of the line of fire
from-the method used in marking the position. This should
enable him to get his gun in the line at once, and his wagon up
and the team away.
6. THE PROCEDURE TO BE ADoPTEn IN THE OCCUPATION or‘
POSITIONS.
(I) When selecting a position under cover.
If the B. is still with his battery when he receives definite
orders from his brigade commander to select and occupy a posi-
tion, he should, before he leaves his battery, give verbal instruc-
tions to all concerned and a brief outline of his intentions.
He then sets off on his technical reconnaissance with the party
as laid down on page 7.
If the B. C. has been sent for to receive instructions and to
have the tactical situation explained to him by a senior officer,
he should leave the captain and B.‘ L. in charge of his battery
and proceed with his trumpeter, assistant, and M. O.
The B. C. having received his orders, and if it is not advisable
for him to return to his battery, may then proceed as follows:
While he is still with the officer who is explaining the situation
he can send his M. O. for the R. O. and R. O.’s party (and also
for the captain), with a message to the B. L. (preferably writ-
ten), containing definite orders as to the road and the place to
halt while the preliminary arrangements are being made.
_68
The B. C. and R. 0. proceed to make their technical recon-
naissance, and, having selected the approximate battery posi-
tion, the B. 0. leaves the B. O. with the R. O.’s party and rides
on with his own party to find a place from which to observe.
While the assistant is away the R. O. proceeds to arrange the
details of his work as laid down on page 13.
The B. L. now sends on the B. S. M. and party required by
the B. 0. to the battery position and leads the‘ battery there.
On the return of the R. O.’s assistant to the battery position
the position is marked as arranged.
When the B. S. M. and the “A” group telephonists arrive at
the battery position they start laying out their line from the
spot indicated by the B. 0. One signaler (who is joined later
by a dismounted man when the battery comes up) remains at
the battery end, the other two, under the directions of the
B. S. M., proceed to lay out the line on foot, in the direction
of the O. P. Their horses are taken away to the wagon line,
and the B. S. M. reconnoiters the way to the observing station;
the M. O. may be detailed by the B. O. to guide him.
To save time it may be desirable for the B. S. M. to arrange
for a coil of wire to be taken to the O. P. by the M. O. or a
telephonist, who will then commence to lay out a line from
the O. P. to meet the telephonist who is laying the line from
the battery; or the laying of the line may be started from some
central point. Speed in opening up communication is essential,
and common ‘sense and experience should dictate the quickest
way of doing so.
On arrival at the O. P. the B. S. M. sees that the horses of
the B. G.’s party, including the M. O.’s, are sent back to the
wagon line or disposed of as ordered by the B. O. The M. 0.
will then patrol the telephone line on foot and improve its
position in places where the telephonists had failed to lay the
line to the best advantage. '

Diagrammatically :
O. P. Battery.
B. G. and M. O. B. L.
assistant. patrolling line.
B. S. M., 2 '1‘. T Assistant.
and 1 R. T. '
(Possibly 1 L. O., or 2 T. T. (1 dismounted
the B. S. M. can act as T. T. who came up with
L. O.) the battery).
69
(II) When selecting a position in the open.
The B. C. starts with his party as before, but, on approaching
the position, he must take care that the stafi with him do not
come out from the nearest cover until he has reconnoitered
the ground and made his plan. He would generally leave the
parties in charge of the R. 0., reconnoiter the ground on foot,
and arrange that on a given signal the R. 0. only should join
him and receive his instructions on the following points:
(1) Members of the battery headquarters required at the
position.
(2) Howthe positionis to be “marked.”
(3) Any instructions regarding its occupation.
(4) Target, or how the guns are to obtain the line of fire (i. e.,
reference point or A. P., method of laying, etc.) .
(5) Position from which B. C. is going to observe (protection
limber if required).
(6) Any other instructions that will tend to quickness in
opening fire or the concealment of the battery up to the last
moment.
The R. O. returns to the battery with the instructions for
the B. L. and the battery. He sends up the B. C.’s assistant
with director (if required) and usually takes over the duties
of B. L.
Under these conditions the staff at the O. P. would consist of I
the B. S. M., B. C.’s assistant and range taker. The position
is marked by the B. C.’s assistant, with director, and the B. C..
or B. S. M. (if up in time).
The director is clamped on the reference point or target,
and the B. C.’s assistant will give the section commander fur-
thest from the B. C. all the information required.
(III) In a rear-guard action.
Ina retirement the B. C. must remain with his battery and
see it out of the old position and well on the way to the new
before he can leave it. The selection of the new observing
station and battery position must devolve on one of the other
ofiicers, generally the captain. The captain, having received
definite instructions from the B. C. at the O. P., rides back
accompanied by the B. S. M. with the necessary staff.
The selection of a suitable observing station will be his first
consideration, as the battery position will probably have to be
70
subordinated to this. It will generally be inadvisable to lay
out ‘and maintain a lengthy communication between the O. P.
and battery position in a rear-guard action unless the retirement ‘
is in the nature‘ of a preconceived one to a prepared position;
in the latter case a complete reconnaissance and plans would .
have been made beforehand. ,
Having selected ‘the O. P. and battery position the primary
duty of the captain will be to send a reliable man back to the
B. C. to give full information and to guide the battery to the
place. The difliculty in a retirement is to keep touch between
the reconnoitering party and the battery. The captain should
be responsible for this. The first-line wagons must precede
the firing battery, but it is often advisable to keep them in
close touch with the firing battery, and for the B. C. himself
to control their movements, and not allow them to withdraw
in the direction of the new position under the guidance of the
farrier. The B. C. himself must superintend the move from
the old position, and must remain with the portion of his bat-
tery nearest to the enemy, until the battery is well on its way
to the new position, when the B. C. can go on and take over the
arrangements made by his captain for the new position.
71
[Bodies of troops in England move on the left of the road, in France on
the right]
DIAGRAM (1).—Battery on the march on the road (after pre-
, é %
00 i


pare for action).
18.6‘. ‘
T pr. and Assistant.
.B.3'.M.
It.0.s Assistant and 11.11.
2 " I r
1 T.T. and H.H.}("A ) 8m!’ 5‘8"11“"
1 R1‘. and 1 1111'. _
2 T.T. (“B ") group Signallers.
1' H.H. (for T.T.) and M.O.
No. 1 and gun.
Covers: and wagomi
_No. 1 and gun.
Covezer and wagon‘.
Section Gmdr.
72
DIAGRAM (2).——B. 0'. has been sent for to receive orders from
bde. comdr. or siajj' ojficer.
I"']
13.0.
Tpr. and Assistant.
M.O.
B.L. < ''
B.S.M. '
R.Os. Assistant and RE.
2 ‘LT.
1 ‘LT. and 1 H.H.
13.1‘. and H.H.
2 T.T.
1 H.H.
Battery either
'halted under trees
or on the move.

’ DIAGRAM (3).—The B. C. and R. 0. starting‘ on their technical
reconnaissance (after the M. O. has brought up the R. 0.11mi
captain and their parties).
13.0. and._B.0.
0 0
1 ..-
0 0._---- ,B.Gs. Tpr. and Assistant.



Tpr.
R.08. Assistant and H.H.
Capt. and Q.M.s_, (when the actual position is about)
to be selected.)
a I 1- 3.1;.(attireheme:thehettermvhlclfls.onthemeve.)



3-' arm. _
73
DIAGRAM (4).——R. O. has just selected a battery position along
the hedge. B. C. is going to look for O. P., and R. O.’s
assistant is going back to the B. L.



E-h
Ran. ' t w
1 1 9
0 0. #11. M71
0.". 12.03am? 1‘? 051w“.
$1..
851M
E/c. acme/y lafiéd
( 1.011% cover '.r,wmZ/¢}
74
' PLAN OFA BATTERY m ACTION.
[ o
' r l H. “- ' “'
,- -15—-~~~7_ ._~_. 0. P. (asnmn #5005) _Q
a 1' ETal'rmxi-L w. .rom 1!- :ta. 9- .....A..
__.__H- -20_ __- I-q-n “— ‘r 1
I ) \5 ' . a‘ b‘ .a
1. ‘Q. 'L a a.) . 9- it . a. 1L 1 fl- ,
‘ I fl I u _ l
E
'k
‘Hp—A. k k"
.v’" F 7
‘[1 ,\'\_
oli'fl _- I‘ ’~'.
v" """Ml _ - \Q ."\\~,_.\.\.
.\_
nueaan mg?
'snowmc DISTRIBUTION Afr
Q.R,BA‘_I"I'ERY~POSITION um'WAGON UN 5 .










.HH ----4__. . ‘-
"__;.H—---"8172nn'r~r; wrrflwssifi'xm-\
- ~m0ueaun- ' .
a. Q .1 |


,wssna: mPkb W620’
/ a? cap-mm

>_.H.._ -
Ri'iERE'iPE
I
UMBER AND TEA M. .H in
WAGON ...,__..... . HORSE........ mmowsso ups & CROSSINGS‘; ~.
MADE BY CAPT/luv ’
PATH 0F VEHICLES TO
THE FIRING BATTERY ' ' ___—
TELEPHONE WIRE. . ... ... ,
CAPTAIN OF HIS REPRESENTATIVE... O

COMMUNICATION LINKS._....._ Q

NOT TO SCALE


""0 ‘ n a c cam-An u’. "M. “200095.11.
75
7. NoTEs on A DRILL FOR THE OccUPATIoN-oF A POSITION.
(a) The Occupation of Covered Positions by the Ordinary
Method.
1. Marking—As positions are often in cramped surround-
ings, it is generally advisable to mark the flanks of the posi-
tion on the line that the guns will occupy, and for the battery
to approach from a flank in order to gain the greatest conceal-
ment possible during the occupation.
One end of the position is marked by the R. O. and his
director.
The other end by the R. C.’s assistant, kneeling in the line
of fire. ‘
2. Procedure—When the R. O. has chosen the approximate
position he marks it on a map, which he sends by his assist-
ant back to the B. L., with instructions as to how the position
will be marked. The R. C.’s assistant brings up “A” group
signalers, B. S. M., and those members of the battery head-
quarters required at the O. P.
On arrival at the position the signalers (if communication
is to be by telephone) set up the battery end of the wire in
the place indicated by the R. O. and the remainder of the
headquarters proceed to the O. P.
The R. C.’s assistant hands his horse over to the R. C.’s
horse holder, who must be able to be found, and marks as
in paragraph 1.
The B. L. rides well ahead of the battery and decides from
which flank he will approach the position, unless the R. C.’s
instructions have already legislated for this.
He then leads the battery on to the position, completing all
maneuvers as far from it as the ground Will allow.
When the guns are moving on to the position the B. L.
orders “Action Right” or “Action Left,” and points R. or L.
groundward. ' ~
This command warns the Nos. 1 that they should, when at
their correct interval and on a good platform, bring their guns
into action and get their wagons up.
It is not an order to the guns to come into action.
The B. L., as soon as he has given this signal, hands his
horse over to the lead driver of one of his subsections and
either continues to act‘as'B. L. or takes command of his section.
76
3. Formation—The most convenient formation is column of
subsections, wagons being right or left according as guns are
to be brought into action left or right.
N otes.—(a) If the cover is limited the column of subsections
may have to be at close interval, in which ‘case the No. 1, as
soon as he orders “ Halt, action right (or left)” also orders
“ Unhook wagon team,” as it is impossible to drive wagons
into position from close interval. In such a case the wagon
has to be manhandled into position.
(b) When moving into a position through a narrow entrance,
such as a gate into a field, it may sometimes be advisable to
bring subsections into action one at a time. The method
adopted would depend on traffic facilities.
(0) In inclosed country, when occupying a position along a
hedge, it may often be necessary to combine the ordinary and
special methods.
In this case the B. L. would bring the Nos. 1 on well ahead
of the battery, indicate the general alignment of the guns,
and order each No. 1 to select his own gun platform. The
battery meantime continues its march along the road and is
brought on to the position by the B. L. when the Nos. 1 are
ready.
The B. L. must decide whether he will bring the battery in
by a subsection at a time, or as a whole.
(b) The occupation of an open position.
The B. O. chooses the position and sends the R. 0. back to
bring on the battery. Before leaving the position the R. O.
decides how he will occupy it.
Marking—The B. 0. marks one end and his assistant the
other end of the position, placing themselves in the line on
which the guns will rest when in action.
The battery is usually driven up in line. '
As the battery approaches the position, the Nos. 1 canter for-
ward (about 80 yards), dismount quickly and form up in line
between the B. C. and his assistant to select their gun platforms.
As the center drivers pass them, the Nos. 1 hand their horses
over and when the trail eye reaches them they order “ Halt,
Action Front.”
N. B.—The battery leader must be careful to give the order
“ Walk ”. in suflicient time to prevent the guns overrunning the
77
position. This procedure is also applicable to. a covered posi-
tion, the approaches to which afford cover for maneuver.
In the occupation of all positions it is important to adhere
to a regular system of drill, which should be carried out in
the following order:
(1) The R. O. (or B. C.) selects and marks the position.
(2) The R. 0. sends back as much ‘information as possible to
the B. L., or the B. C. sends the R. 0. back with as much
information as possible, and on reaching the battery the R. 0.
becomes the B. L. »
(3) The B. L. rides ahead of the battery and reconnoiters
the position himself, deciding exactly how to occupy it. In an
open position the R. O. has done this before rejoining the
battery.
(4) The B. L. (or R. 0.) having completed his reconnaissance,
returns to his battery and maneuvers it in accordance with his
plan, assuming the final formation sufficiently far away to
avoid maneuvering on, or close to, the position itself.
0
m‘
u .1" y m
‘ in J i


I
Mliu' ' 1- . .
Lissa'sj’it'iI
Field Artillery Notes
0 No. 5
i In . . .
. f‘ From the latest Information furmshed
In British and French sources, in- '
c uding reprints of official circulars

C"
I‘: h) 1
EDITED AT Turi- }ARMY WAR COLLEGE
WASHINGTON. D. c.

jUNE. 1917


WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
I91 7


WAR DEPARTMENT
Document No. 619.
Ojfice of The Adjutant General.
FIELD ARTHLERY NOTES NO. 5.
WAR DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, June 27, 1917.
The following Field Artillery Notes No. 5 are published for
the information of all concerned. '
BY osDER on THE SEcRETARY or WAR:
TASKER H. BLISS,
Maior General, Acting Chief of Stay)‘.
OFFICIAL:
H. P. MCCAIN,
The Adjutant General.
(3)
CAT ECHISM FOR FIELD ARTILLERY SUBALTERN S.
PURPOSE.
As an oflicer in the Field Artillery you are required to have
an extensive knowledge of a number of subjects. On the ac-
tion you take, due to your knowledge of these subjects, will
depend the accurate shooting of your battery and the lives of
your men. , _
This pamphlet consists largely of questions which, if you
are an eflicient officer, you will be able conscientiously to an-
swer satisfactorily. If you can not answer them, you are not
efficient, which means that you may be responsible for the
lives of infantry, whom it is the whole of your work to assist,
to say nothing of the lives of your own men.
Take the necessary steps immediately, therefore, to be able
to give satisfactory answers to those questions which you can
not answer at present. '
I. GENERAL.
1. When your battery takes up a new position, do you make
every efiort to get your guns into action, lines of fire laid out,‘
and the battery connected to an observing station or another
battery which could observe for you, as soon as possible, so
that you can take part in event of a sudden attack? '
2. Are you careful that all tracks and conspicuous objects
are cleared away before hostile air scouts can see them?
3. Do you set about making rough dugouts for the men im-
mediately? '
4. Can you get a round off on your night lines inside two
minutes from receiving the order, day or night?
5. Can you get a round off on to any target in your are inside‘
five minutes'day or night?
6. Do you take advantage immediately of any fleeting oppor-
tunity?
. .. ' (5)
6
7. Are you careful to keep your personnel in touch with any
change in the situation as soon as possible?
II. THEORETICAL GUN N ERY.
1. Why is a recoil mechanism necessary?
2. Why do you need to calculate angle of site?
3. What is the actual effect of making a mistake of 10 mils
in the angle of site at a range of 6,000 yards with your gun?
4. If shrapnel is used, what is the effect of a graze burst
and of a very high burst?
5. What is the effect on range of a low air temperature, a
high-charge temperature, or a high barometer, and why?
6. What is “ drift”?
III. PRACTICAL GUNNERY.
(The majority of this applies particularly to platoon commanders.)
1. Have you got copies of handbook, drill book, and range
table for your weapon?
2. Could you have any weapon taken completely to pieces
and assemble it again?
3. If it is necessary to replace damaged parts, could you
show your men how to do it, if they did not know?
How long would it take you to replace the different parts of
your gun or howitzer that are liable to be damaged or go
wrong?
4. What is the weight of your shell, the weight of the charge
(or charges)? What do the marks on your shell mean?
5. What fuzes do you use?
6. What precautions do you take to keep your ammunition in
good condition? Charges and fuses must be kept dry and, as
far as possible, at a uniform temperature. Projectiles must be
kept dry, clean, and off the ground.
7. Do you arrange your charges and time fuzes into lots and
your projectiles into groups, according to their weight?
8. Do you take precautions to use up the old ammunition in
the pits before that which is dumped when you fill up?
9. Do you know how much ammunition is in your pits at this
_moment, and how long it would last you in event of an attack?
7
10. Do you know how long it takes for fresh ammunition to
come up during an attack, when the roads will be crowded and
possibly under shell fire?- Accordingly, do you know how long
you could maintain a definite rate. of fire before you ought to
send for more ammunition?
11. Have you a definite plan‘for the replenishment of ammuni-
tion, so that the wagons know where to drive to and the men
know where to put theammunition when they unload it?
12. Do you know the aiming points used by your guns?
13. Do you keep a board fixed in the gun pit detailing the aim-
ing point and different angles, elevations, fuzes, charges, etc.,
for your principal target and defense lines?
14. Could you at this moment go and lay your gun yourself
on some point wtihin your range and arc?
15. Is your arc of fire as large as possible?
16. Could you determine the map position of your battery in
an area of country you did not know? ' »
17. How would you lay out the original line of fire in the
following cases: -
(a) Where there are plenty of aiming points and you
know your map position. - '
(b) Where there is no suitable aiming point and you
know your map position.
(0) Where there is no suitable aiming point and you don’t
know your map position.
18. What is the efiect, if you have got your battery position
plotted 300 yards northwest of your true position, when you
switch from one target to another?
19. Are you certain at the present moment that your sights,
clinometer, etc., are in accurate adjustment? Do you frequently
test this personally?
_ 20. Are you certain at the present moment that the bores of
your guns are absolutely clean, and all working parts in good
adjustment and well oiled, and all unpainted parts polished? Do
you personally examine the working parts of your guns to see
that there is no dirt in them?
21. Do you realize the damage that can be done to the bore by
a gun being left loaded for some hours after it has been fired sev-
eral times, and is accordingly coated’ with corroding substances?
22. Do you turn your wheels daily, so as to change the working
.spoke? . '
8
23. Have you got a map board forv your battery position? Is
the map of the latest edition? The coordinates of points and
trenches vary considerably on different‘ editions.
24. Do you occasionally check your map to see that it has not
stretched and is giving you wrong map ranges?
25. Are you deficient of any stores, particularly the new ones
not in equipment manuals?
26. If you have emplacements, are they whitewashed inside?
Are all the tools necessary hung up neatly in the gun pit?
Are the box respirators handy?
27. Do you frequently look to see that your bufiers are full
and your springs and parting plates in good condition? Do
not leave this to the chief mechanic.
28. Do you frequently watch your guns while they are firing
to see that the recoil'and return are normal?
29. If you suspect anything wrong with your guns, do you
request that an ordnance ofiicer shall examine them?
30. Do your aeroplane lookouts know their job? Do you
arrange for them to go to neighboring anti-aircraft batteries
occasionally in order to learn new types of hostile aircraft?
IV. OBSERVATION.
1. Do you know the details of the enemy country your hat-
tery is shooting over? Can you name all the prominent points
that can be seen from your observing station?
2. Do you know exactly where our front line is?
3. Do you understand “contours ” and can you determine
from them what ground should or should not be visible from
your observing station? '
4. Do you visit other Field Artillery observing stations and
study the country from a different point of view‘?
5. Have you got a properly mounted map at your station
with an arc of view on it?
6. Do you continually instruct all your observation party in
knowledge of the country? As this knowledge depends on a
purely personal factor, viz, “ eye for country,” vyou will gener-
ally find that there are several men in the battery who are bet-
ter at spotting shell bursts, working parties, gun flashes, etc.,
than you are. Do you make all the use of these men you can?
7. Do you thoroughly appreciate the fact that, whoever ‘is
watching from the battery observing station, be it the battery
9
commander or member of the party, is nominally commanding
the battery, and must call it into action instantly if necessary,
get it shooting, and then make his report?
8. If you see a target out of your arc, do you know whom
to call up to engage it, and how long it takes them to commence
firing?
9. Have you an angle-measuring instrument at your station ‘2
10. Do you check the variation of your prismatic compass?
11. Is your observing station constructed on one of the fol-
lowing principles?
(a) Overhead cover proof against 5.9-inch, with tele-
phonists’ dugout proof against 8-inch.
(1)) Overhead cover just proof against shrapnel with a
5.9-inch proof dugout into which the observer can
slip instantly. Telephonists’ dugout proof against
8-inch.
The former used where there is naturalconcealment,
or where concealment is not necessary, and the latter
where concealment is essential.
12. Do you inspect your station each day to see that the
telephonists’ dugout is kept clean? Telephonists at observing
stations are inclined to acquire dirty habits.
13. Do you make a point of learning some more country from
the map each time you are up at the observing station?
14. Have you a general knowledge of country both sides of
the area your battery shoots over?
1.5. Do you know all depressions or other places within reach
of your battery where the enemy could assemble unobserved?
16. Do you know what rocket signals are used on the front
within your are of fire, and what they mean?
V. RANGING.
1. Can you adjust your battery quickly on any point in your
sector?
2. Do you know what change of range or deflection an arc of
100 mils represents when looking from your station on different
parts of your sector?
3. Do you employ a stop watch when ranging, so that you can
pick out your own shell if more than one battery is engaging the
same target?
106815°-—17—-—2
10
4. Can all your observation party carry on ranging the battery
in case you are a casualty?
5. Do you thoroughly understand the method of ranging with
aeroplane observation?
VI. ACTION.
1. You may be confronted at any moment by an exigency such
as a gas attack, a heavy bombardment of your battery, or even
a rapid German advance.
2. In each of these cases what action would you take? Have
you taken all the precautions necessary to insure that everyone
knows what to do? a
3. Do you understand the “ gas precautions ”; do you observe
them fully; and do you frequently practice “ gas drill”?
4. What will you do with casualties in the battery? Where
is the nearest dressing station?
5. Assuming, if the enemy attacked on a large scale, that there
was a severe preliminary bombardment followed by gas and a
possible rapid advance, what action would you take? Fire
would probably cut all your telephone lines, and you would thus
have to act entirely on your own initiative. Have you means
of laying and shifting if your normal aiming points are obscured
by smoke?
6. If you are ordered to retire, do you know the position that
is reserved for you to retire to, for each line of defense that
we hold? Have you visited rear observing stations, from which
our own front system of trenches can be observed in case these
should be occupied by the enemy? Do you know what arrange-
ments are made for establishing communication with these
stations? _ _
7. If you had to take one of these positions, have you thought
how you would get there, where you would dig dugouts, and
where you would run your lines? Have you reconnoitered the
route to the position? Can you make use of existing telephone
lines‘?
VII. LIAISON.
1. Do you make friends with the infantry in front of you
and ask them to your observing station and battery when you
are firing? It is of the greatest importance to get the infantry to
have absolute confidence in you and your shooting.
11
2. Do you go and visit other batteries and their stations, and
thereby see any improvements they may have made?
3. Are you in close touch with the personnel of the aviation,
balloon, engineer, topographical, signal, and supply services?
All these people can help you with your work.
VIII. CAPABILITIES OF YOUR BATTERY.
1. What is your extreme range on a hot day with a 10 m. p. h.
wind behind you, and on a cold day with a 30 m. p. h. wind
against you?
2. What is your extreme rate of accurate fire? Do you rest
your guns periodically when firing for long periods at a rapid
rate? (The general rule is 10 minutes in every hour.) Have
you got water, for cooling the guns, handy.
3. How many guns can you get on any particular place in
your arc of fire?
4. What is the shortest range at which you can fire?
5. How long does it take you to get the first round off upon
receiving a surprise drder to fire?
6. How long would ‘it take to get out of action if you were or-
dered to advance at this moment?
IX. TELEPHONY.
1. Can you buzz and read Morse fast enough to be of use?
2. Can you read and send semaphore‘?
3. Do you thoroughly understand the telephone, particularly
the tests which show whether it is in proper working order?
4. Do you test the voltage of your cells frequently?
5. Is your equipment complete, both for visual signaling and
telephony?
6. Are your lines in good order? Do you test to see whether
bad speaking of lines is due to bad insulation or bad joints?
(See Appendix I.)
7. Have you taken precautions that your linesmen are as lit-
tle exposed to shell fire as possible? That is, by having test
points in safe places and the route for the line laid out accord-
ingly. ' You can not expect to keep your lines “ through ” under
heavy shell fire, if your linesmen have to work all the time ex-
posed to this fire.
12
8. Doyou know exactly the route of each line? And do you
periodically walk your. lines?
9. Have you several alternate routes for communication and
do you take every precaution to make your lines safe by burying
them at least 6 feet? Do you realize how the use of insulators
will save your air lines from deteriorating?
10. Do you understand your telephone exchange and do you
know the calls for your difierent stations?
11. Are your buzzer calls carefully selected, so as to avoid
clashing with those of neighboring units who are interconnected
_ with you? Do you employ four letter calls where one letter is
suflicient?
12. Do you pay strict attention to the orders with regard to
using “earths ” within the zone of “ overhearing” by the
enemy?
X. FIELD ENGINEERING.
1. You are often required to construct dugouts and gun em-
placements which are weatherproof, shellproof, and, at the
same time, proof against detection in aero photos taken by the
enemy. ' .
2. Can you construct a dugout and a gun emplacement which
is proof against a 5.9-inch shell? Do you understand the advan-
tages of a “ bursting course” and “ double roofing”? (See
Appendix II.)
3. Do you make as much use as possible of cupolas?
4. When constructing a gun pit do you make certain that
the roof is not higher than necessary? There is always a ten—
dency to make the roof too high, thus adding height to the pit
and making it conspicuous.
5. Do you fully realize how essential it is to have proper
framework for your dugouts and gun emplacements when they
are first constructed? It is very difficult and unsatisfactory to
reinforce the supports afterwards. Are your supports more
than 18 inches apart?
6. Are you careful to give ample support to the beams or
girders you use for framework? It is little use to employ
heavy girders if you only support them for 2 inches at each end.
When building up sandbags on a trench, or excavation, are
you careful to leave a ledge so that when the earth crumbles
13
away your sandbags will not collapse for want of support‘? Do
you make the use of timber that gives its greatest strength‘?
Are the entrances to your dugouts very strong, and do they
face away from the direction of hostile shell fire? Have you two
entrances for each man’s dugout?
7. Before constructing dugouts, etc., do you go to see neigh-
boring batteries (particularly those who have had winter ex~
perience in the area) and find out what they recommend?
Have you studied the designs for gun pits issued?
8. Have you studied the drainage problem of your battery
position?
9. Do you take every precaution to make the dugouts, etc.,
weatherproof? Will the roof leak? Will water get into the
dugouts through the entrance? If water does get in, is there a
large sump? (The ideal floor is cement, drained toward a
deep sump and covered with high trench boards; or in chalk,
the trench boards are suflicient, provided the floor is kept free
from mud which blocks the natural drainage.)
10. Do you realize how easily battery positions can be de-
tected on aero photos from (a) shadows thrown by the outward
form of the dugout and emplacement, (1)) tracks leading about
the battery, (0) the blast from the guns on the ground in front
of the pits? Do you take precaution against these?
11. Do you endeavor to mislead the enemy as to your position
by (a) a not too obvious dummy position two or three hundred
yards away with an artificial blast in front of the guns, (b)
artificial tracks in front of your battery position?
12. Have you had an aero photo taken of your battery posi-
tion?
13. Are your telephonists’ dugout and your B. C.’s dugout
really well constructed and shellproof, and is there ample room
for the detachments in their dugouts?
14. Are your detachment dugouts so placed that the men can
man their guns in the least possible time?
15. Have you got a good road up to the vicinity of the posi-
tion along which wagons may drive for replenishment of am-
munition, etc.? Wheel tracks up to the position must be
avoided; if there is not a good road these tracks are inevitable.
16. Do you make use of speaking tubes?
14
XI. ROUTINE, DISCIPLINE, AND COMFORT.
1. At what time in the morning are your men clean and
shaved? At what time is the battery position absolutely clean
and tidy?
2. Do you hold frequent kit inspection to see that the men’s
equipment is complete and in good order?
3. Do you know how much pay each of your men gets and
whether their dependents are receiving their full allotment?
4. Do all your men wear identification tags and carry first-
aid dressings?
5. Do you know who are the men to trust in your section;
who are worth promoting; who are lazy; and who are slackers
and malingerers?
6. Can you trust all your noncommissioned oflicers? Can
your senior noncommissioned officers take your place if you
are a casualty? If they can not, are you training them?
7. Are the cooking arrangements satisfactory? Do your men
get the rations cooked as they like them? Do you arrange that
they can purchase any luxuries they want from exchanges?
8. Do your men do a full day’s work? Do you keep fairly
short hours but have your men working really hard at every
job they do?
9. Do you appreciate that men will not work hard when they
are required to do so if they are continually permitted to slack?
10. Do you appreciate that men can not continually do more
than six-hour shifts per day, for really hard physical work or
mental work such as telephone exchanges‘?
A normal day’s work for any man should be 12 hours, of
which 6 may be as. above.
11. Do you see that your men get recreation in the form of
baseball and other sports?
12. Do you appreciate how much ‘competition improves the
standard of work by giving the men a sporting interest in their
work?
13. Do you frequently hold small classes in laying, telephony,
etc? Do you occasionally have gun drill with buglers, me-
chanics, cooks, telephonists, etc., taking cannoneers’ numbers.
giving the junior noncommissioned officers a chance of prac-
ticing the duties of chief of section?
15
14. Do your men do their work at double time? Is their
gun drill smart? Do they spring to attention when spoken to
by an officer?
15. Do they appreciate how much external appearance coin-
cides with internal efficiency?
16. Do your men firmly believe that theirs is the best battery
in France, and have they a right to this belief?
XII. HYGIENE.
1. Are your latrines properly situated and in good condition?
2. Is your cookhouse well constructed and absolutely clean?
3. Where do you get your water from? Have you had it
tested?
4. Do you take precautions that the water is boiled before
being drunk, unless you know it to be certified as drinkable?
5. Can your men get a hot bath, clean shirt and drawers once
a week? Also clean and dry socks as required? Is there a
battery barber?
XIII. STABLE MANAGEMENT.
(For horse-drawn batteries.)
1. Do you know what your horses’ forage ration is and do you
see that they get full weight? Do you know good cats or hay
from bad oats or hay?
2. Do you attend “ Stables” as often as possible, and, if in
charge, do you see that the grooming, watering, and feeding
are well regulated?
3. Do you see that your horses are in good condition and
comfortable—i. e., that their shelters are good and water-tight;
that there are no draughts of cold air; that the standings are
in good order and out of the mud and water; that the horse
covers and nosebags are kept in good order? ,
4. Do you examine each horse at stable hour to see that he is
clean, free from vermin, and, particularly, that his feet and heels
are in good condition?
5. Do you understand the shoeing of horses, and do you see
that your horses are properly shod; that spare shoes are in
their proper place; and that the horseshoers’ tool bags are
properly equipped ?
16
6. Do you know the various grains and seeds which can be
used for fodder in the absence of oats, equivalent amounts, and
their effects? '
7. Have you seen'whether the entrances to your horse lines
are well metalled and dry, and that the approaches to and sur-
roundings of water troughs are similarly treated?
8. Do you understand the symptoms and cure of simple ail-
ments, and has your battery instructions regarding the preven-
tion of the spread of infectious diseases, such as mange?
9. Do you know who your veterinarian is and where he can
‘be found? Do you know what the farrier’s equipment is, what
the articles are for, and where they can be found?
10. If horses are out late at night, have you a noncommis-
sioned officer detailed to see them come in and properly cared
for at once?
11. Do you inspect your harness frequently to see—
(a) That the leather work is well cleaned and oiled, and
especially that working parts, such as breast collars,
girths, sweat flaps, are kept soft and pliable?
(b) That the steelwork is thoroughly cleaned and then
rubbed lightly over with clean oil?
(0) That every article of harness fits its wearer properly.
as laid down?
12. Have you got good cover for your harness? Is the cover
large enough to enable the drivers to clean their harness under
shelter? .
13. Do you ever inspect the drivers’ “ kits,” and do you know
what each should contain?
14. Do you inspect all battery vehicles frequently to see that
nothing is wrong with them? “A stitch in time saves nine.”
15. If on the march and a horse goes so sick that it has to be
left behind, do you know what disposition you should make of it?
16. How often are your horses fed? “ Little and often ” should
be your policy. Never less than three feeds a day, and prefer-
ably four or five; first feed as early as possible, and the last
(and biggest) as late as possible.
17. Do you appreciate that in cold weather a cover is as good
as an extra 2 pounds of oats?
18. Do you know the regulations re clipping, trimming, and
plucking?
17
19. De you realize how much a ‘horse’s condition depends on
good water, and plenty of it? Always water from troughs if
possible.
20. Do your men really work hard when grooming‘? Short
stable hours and hard work while at it should be the rule.
21. Remember that the essence of horse mastership is the
“ master’s eye.”
xIv. MARCH DISCIPLINE.
1. Do you realize that good discipline or the reverse shows
up more on the march than at any other time?
2. Do you and your drivers dismount as a matter of course
when halted? Do you realize the importance of getting the
weight ofi the horse’s back on every possible opportunity? All
mounted men, officers, included, should walk and lead at in-
tervals.
3. Do you see that your men never slouch in the saddle?
4. When on the march do you supervise your command and
not always ride at the head? See that your chiefs of section
do the same. You should see that the horses are being prop-
erly kept up in draft, that harness is properly fittedw (this often
only becomes apparent when on the march), carriages not over-
loaded, the proper balance of the pole maintained (this can
not be done if men are allowed to ride except in their places).
5. Do you see that your horses are watered and fed when-
ever possible on the march and that girths are slackened?
6. Do you realize that a horse can not drink its fill or even
drink comfortably with a man sitting on its back? Or with a
bit in its mouth? .
7. Do you take severe action in all cases of illtreatment of
horses?
APPENDIX I.

TESTING TELEPHONE LINES.
When a telephone line is first laid, the speaking is generally
very good. This gradually deteriorates until the line becomes
useless. The deterioration can be prevented if it is checked
the moment it commences; but this presupposes that the cause
is known and can be isolated. The tests explained hereunder
are to isolate the cause.
The causes of deterioration are, firstly, increase in resistance
of line due to rusty joints, etc.; secondly, increase in leakage
due to insulation wearing ofi, etc.
The results of the tests below should be carried out daily
and entered in a book, so that the linesmen can check any
tendency to deterioration.
I. TEST ron COMPARATIVE RESISTANCE or LINE.
' (See Diagram 1.)
“A” is a battery of 10 dry cells.
“B” is a linesman’s detector (part of British battery equip-
ment).
“ TZ ” is the telephone at “ Z ” station.
_ “L ” is the line to be tested.
0/4 GRAM I‘


®


{IIIIIIIII
hr“
The operator warns “ Z ” that he is going to test and then
disconnects the line from his phone and connects it to the
detector. The other line from the detector is connected to the
cells in series, increasing the voltage by one cell at a time until
(18)
19
a halfway deflection is obtained on the detector. The number
of cells and the deflection is written down.
If, on subsequent tests, this deflection becomes decreased or
more cells are required, the line resistance is increasing. A
lineman must then thoroughly overhaul the line, having it tested
frequently until the deflection increases to the old amount.
The earth pins should be tested and watered to see if this is the
cause of the increased resistance.
II. T0 TEST FOR LEAKAGE.
The connections are very similar to the previous test except
that all 10 cells must be connected up to the detector. Instead
of leaving the phone connected up at “ Z ” it is disconnected
and the bare end kept away from contact with anything. If
there is no leakage there will be no deflection of the needle.
Whatever deflection is obtained is a comparative figure for
leakage. If this increases, the insulation of the line must be
overhauled.
Both tests are‘ equally important.
If the above explanation is not understood, get hold of a -
signal oflicer who will explain it to you.
APPENDIX II.

SHELL-PROOF COVER.
Practically no cover which can be constructed in a battery
position is proof against the penetration of a heavy shell.
It is therefore necessary to cause it to burst before it has pene—
trated, and, if possible, to deflect it so that it will not tend to
penetrate actually into the pit.
In constructing overhead cover a definite scheme must be
adhered to.
The following is one example of many and illustrates the
general principle. (See Diagram II.)
49/14 6574/44 .1 I
fivoée 61a a'zreclum all‘ fivslc'le .S‘AelZ/‘zns





The protection consists essentially of the following parts, from
the top:
1. A hard flat “bursting course,” which retards a howitzer
shell sufficiently to cause the fuze to act very quickly and in the
case of a gun shell, with a small angle of descent, may deflect it
altogether.
(20)
21
2. A “deflecting course” which turns the shell that has al-
ready penetrated the bursting course into a more horizontal
direction.
3. A “cushion ” in which the shell should explode. It is soft,
so that the shock may be disseminated.
4. A supporting framework with splinter-proof cover.
In ideal conditions each part should be supported separately
with a small air space between, so that the shock on each part
is borne separately. Practically, 1, 2, and 3 should be supported
separately from 4.
Considering the roof in detail-—
(a) is a concrete roof about 5 inches thick, reinforced with
expanded metal. This is the “bursting course.” Immediately
under it is a roof ((1) of match boarding or corrugated iron,
which held the concrete in position until it had set. If the
concrete roof were made thick, it might inclose the explosion
' and collapse the whole cover.
(0) is a layer of bricks laid on each other so as to form a
deflecting course.
(d) is the “ cushion ” in which the shell is to burst, made of
sandbags full of gravel or slag.
(e) is a supporting roof of girders, iron rails, or baulks kept
up by the stanchions (f). This must be covered by boarding or
corrugated iron to prevent the sandbags escaping.
(g) is a small air space which allows a certain amount of
sagging of the upper supporting roof before any pressure is
borne on the lower supports.
(h) is a splinter-proof cushion course laid on the lower sup-
porting roof.
(It) is the lower supporting roof, rather stronger than (c),
as it may have to bear the weight of both roofs. It is supported
by stanchions (l). It would be improved by a 6-inch layer
of concrete immediately above the support, which would dis—
tribute a force on any point over the whole lower roof.
O
ZIP
L/ ‘9 ‘’ CONFIDENTIAL!
' 5:5‘ FOR OFFICIAL USE QNLY


- Field Artillery Notes
No. 6

COMPILED AT ‘TI—IE ARMY WAR COLLEGE
FROM THE LATEST AVAILABLE
INFORMATION
7

Y
LJ .
f , '.‘
‘w A M
J -
‘um-x CO L. J
OFFICER 1N CHARGE
GovEkjxgjglYé IféiAND,
No.1). 11mm’, ‘
MTLTTIA m FFATR
N. Y.


G
WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
3,
1917
WAR DEPARTMENT,
Document No. 628.
Ofi‘ice of The Adjutant General.
Qf'pb . 1
Mb Maw ILA-‘ML
an)’: (‘W
WAR DEPARTMENT,
WASHINGTON, July 18, 1917.
The following Field Artillery Notes N o. 6 are published for
the information of all concerned.
[062.1, A. G. 0.]
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY or WAR:
.TASKER H. BLISS,
Major General, Acting Chief of Stafi.
OFFICIAL:
H. P. MCCAIN,
The Adjutant General.
WAR DEPARTMENT,
THE AnJU'rANT GENEaAL’s OFFICE,
Washington, June 19, 1917.
To all ojficers of the Army:
You are advised that this and all subsequent documents of a
similar character which may be furnished to you from this
office are to be regarded as strictly confidential. They are to
be kept at all times in your personal possession and are not to
be copied nor are any parts of their contents to be communi-
cated, either directly or indirectly, to the press, nor to any
persons not in the military or naval service of the United
States. In Europe these documents are not to be carried into
the front-line trenches, nor farther to the front than the usual
post of the officers to whom issued.
Strict compliance with this injunction is enjoined upon every
officer into whose hands any of these confidential documents
may come.
By order of the Secretary of War:
H. P. MCCAIN,
The Adjutant General.
ARTILLERY INFORMATION SERVICE.
1. The organization of the important service of artillery
Information in the French service is of comparatively recent
date. It is oflicially known as the Service des Renseignements
de Z’Artillerie, and is referred to in orders and circulars as
“ S. R. A.”
2. Theoobject of the service is to furnish accurate infor-
mation as rapidly as possible covering the following:
(a) Hostile batteries, including their emplacements, the de—
gree of activity, and the number of pieces.
(b) Other hostile dispositions, including defensive and of-
fensive works, observation stations, telephone lines, railways,
paths, bivouacs, depots of ammunition, and other materiel, etc.
3. The facilities given the service include the following:
(a) Artillery observation stations, posts of commanding offi-
cers, etc.
(1)) Special observation stations pertaining directly to the
service itself. These are referred to as pertaining to the Service
dcs Renseignements Terrestres. (“S. R. T.”).
(0) Sections for the identification of targets by sound, re-
ferred to as Sections dc Repémge an Son. (“S. R. S.”).
(d) The information obtained by aerial observation and
aerial photography.
(e) Information received from neighboring army corps and
from the second bureau of the general staff.
(f) All information received from artillery and infantry
troops concerning hostile batteries or dispositions. This infor-
mation ordinarily is given by means of a daily bulletin or by
telephone.
4. The‘ distribution of information is provided for by the
issuing of bulletins distributed to all commanders, including
battery commanders. These bulletins are issued as often as
once a day during periods of active operations and less fre-
quently at other times. In urgent cases the information is
transmitted to commanding oflicers concerned by telephone, but
5
6 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 6.
in such cases every precaution should be taken in order that
useful information is not communicated to the enemy. As a
general principle important telephone messages are avoided
or are sent in cipher.
5. Organization—The service of artillery information is a
function of the Army Corps. It is supervised by the general or
colonel performing the duties of chief of artillery. The follow-
ing personnel pertain to his staff and are charged with the de-
tails of the service:
One captain, in charge.
One lieutenant, assistant.
One adjutant (warrant oflicer).
Two privates, draftsmen, and clerks.
One telephonist. .
One motorcyclist.
In the corps headquarters visited all the work of this service
was done in two very small rooms, one of which was used as an
of‘fice and one as a drawing room. Economy, simplicity, and
efliciency were noticeable in all arrangements.
Both the officers and men worked almost uninterruptedly
from 8 a. m. to 11 p. m. daily. In no other way could they
have produced the amount of valuable information which they
prepared each day.
6. Referring to paragraph 3, the facilities given to this par-
ticular corps were as follows:
(a) All the artillery observation stations of the two divisions
and one Russian brigade comprising the corps. These included
not less than 20 stations scattered along a front of 23 kilometers.
(b) Three permanent stations of the service itself. (S. R. T.).
The personnel for these stations is permanent and both oflicers
and men become experts in observation and interpretation of
reports. In addition to the ordinary optical equipment of an
observation station, which included binocular “ scissors ” instru-
ments and monocular observing telescopes, the stations were
provided with very simple range boards for ‘the horizontal base
position-finding system, and a very complete set of carefully
prepared panoramic sketches of their own and neighboring
sectors. They were connected with the artillery telephone sys-
tem, and also had a private system which connected the three
main stations and the secondary stations depending upon them.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 6. '7
In each main station there-was an instrument consisting of
four small electric lights, each covered with ground glass set in
a small frame. The ground-glass squares were numbered from
1 to 4. The lights were lighted by pressing a button in any one
of the secondary stations. If a button in No. 1 secondary sta-
tion Was pressed, the light under “ No. 1” in the main station
_ was lighted. .
The lighting of a light was a notification that the secondary
station concerned had made an observation. The lighting of
more than one light at the same instant indicated that probably
two stations had seen the same thing. The observations Were
then sent in to the main station at once by telephone and the
position of the objective located by the intersection of angles
as in any horizontal base system. If the lights had not been
lighted simultaneously there was naturally some doubt as to
both or all three observers having seen the same thing. The
use of the lights seemed to be an extremely simple and useful
device. I ' '
(a) Secondary observation stations: Each main station had
either three or four secondary stations depending upon it. Their
equipment was much like that of the main stations except that
instead of the lights their equipment consisted of the operating
key, which lighted the light in the main station.
All observation stations were strongly constructed and well-
camouflaged. They would have resisted anything except heavy
calibers. The construction of observation stations will be
treated in a separate report.
In addition to the observation stations of the corps itself, it
could depend upon cooperation from the stations of neighboring
corps.
(d) The corps visited was supplied with three stations for
the identification of targets by sound. (“S. R. S.”).'
This is a newly developed service, which is constantly giving
better and better results. The details of the system employed
will be described in another report from the mission.
Until recently these stations could locate satisfactorily only
the position of low-velocity guns because of the fact that there
was a confusion of sound waves in the case of high-velocity
guns; but at present results which identify the position of both
guns and howitzers within 50 yards are frequently obtained.
In the case of a new hostile gun or battery being reported the
oflicer in charge of the artillery-information service at once
8 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 6.
makes a careful study of the aerial photograph of the locality.
If he can not identify the gun or battery he has a new photo-
graph made. During the visit to the corps referred to the
location of a heavy German minenwerfer was discovered by the
sound and the position definitely located in an aerial photograph.
The locality had previously escaped the scrutiny of the officer
in charge, but when his attention was drawn to it by the report
from the sound station he found indications which became un—
misfakable in later photographs taken specially of the locality
in question.
Although still in a stage of development, the use of sound in
the location of targets is being used daily in the allied armies
and is given serious consideration by all concerned.
(e) For aerial reconnaissance and photography one of the two
aerial squadrons pertaining to the artillery of the corps was
used. It consisted of 12 biplace caudrons. They were un-
armored and were considered too slow for the work. The other
squadron consisted of 12 triplace armored caudrons and was
used principally for the ajustment of fire; but this line was not
strictly drawn, and both squadrons adjusted fire and made
reconnaissances.
Aerial photographs ,are constantly becoming more and more
important and more and more satisfactory and clear. The
information they contain is far more exact than the report of
the observer himself, although often the report of the observer
completes the photograph or vice versa.
But aerial photographs are of little value unless they are
properly read and interpreted. The officers charged with this
work at army headquarters and the artillery information offi—
cers at corps headquarters become very expert in it and can
see things in the photographs which are completely hidden
from the inexperienced person, no matter how good his eye-
sight may be.
The entire front of a corps (which amounted to 23 kilometers
in the corps visited) is carefully photographed each month
as a part of the reconnaissance routine of the aerial squadrons.
This work is done over the whole depth of the front which con-
tains any enemy works of importance and involves the taking
of about 300 photographs. In addition to this regular work,
the squadron is constantly charged with the taking of special
photographs necessary to establish the location of suspected
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 9 '
batteries, to keep track of new emplacements being constructed,
' and to record the result of friendly artillery fire for demolition
or for the preparation of the infantry attack.
Such details of aerial photography as have been obtained
will be made the subject of a separate report. .
(f) In addition to the aeroplane reconnaissance there was
one balloon engaged in constant observation of the front and
in the recording of all enemy activity. The results of this
information came regularly to the officer in charge of artillery
information at corps headquarters. He stated that during
active operations seven balloons would be engaged on this
work for a corps front.
6. Filing of information—Information obtained from the
foregoing sources was filed either on maps, in tables, or in
individual files covering hostile emplacements and positions.
(a) Maps: The basis of the map information _ was the
1/10,000 map kept constantly up to date by the officer in
charge himself. It might be called the “ current-information
map.” This map is kept for a period of 15 days. At the con-
clusion of this period the information collected is recorded and
distributed and a new current-information map is begun. The
basis of each new map is, of course, the information obtained
from the preceding map.
The current map showed batteries of 77 mm. as small green
circles, batteries of 105 mm. and medium calibers as small blue
circles, and heavy batteries as small red circles. In each circle
was stuck a large pin; and a small green, blue, or red streamer
was added to each pin each time the battery in question was re-
ported as active. As a result of this practice, at the end of the
15-day period, or at any intermediate time, it was very easy to
see the relative activity of the hostile batteries without having
the map littered up with lettering. A line was drawn from each
battery position to the targets usually fired on by the battery
concerned. Depending upon the reliability of this information
the lines terminated as follows:
Sure
Probable?
Possible
__ l


At the end of the 15-day period the current map is filed. The
pins are removed and a small legend is placed near each bat-
3568°—-17——2
10 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6.
tery pos1tion showing the number of times it has been active _
as indicated by the number of small streamers found on the pin.
The information thus obtained is made up in the form of a
map with a 1/50,000 scale and furnished to army headquarters.
Based on this map, army headquarters issues what is called the
Oanevas de Tir each month.
At corps headquarters the information is also marked on the
1/20,000 firing maps or Plan Director de Tir. These are fur-
nished to batteries. '
No lithographed or printed maps are actually made at corps
headquarters. All such work is done at army headquarters.
Special maps at scales of either ‘1/10,000 or 1/ 5,000 are pre-
pared at corps headquarters by mimeograph for use in special
operations.
In addition to the foregoing the artillery information service
prepares shaded outlines on tracing paper indicating the areas
hidden from observation stations and protected from fire from
batteries. By having one sheet of tracing paper for each sta-
tion and each battery, when information is required as to what
battery can fire on any given target, the appropriate sheet of
tracing paper is placed on the map and the capabilities and
limitations of the battery in question are evident at once. This
obviates the necessity of marking a map too much or of having
too many maps.
(b) Tables: Tabular information consists of corps artillery
bulletins prepared at corps headquarters in mimeograph usually
every five days. In active periods this bulletin is issued daily.
They are furnished to all higher commanders, to group com-
manders of light artillery, and to battery commanders of heavy
artillery. About 60 copies are required. These bulletins include
information concerning the activity of hostile batteries, their
objectives, and all data about new emplacements or works.
In addition to the bulletins, each 10 days the chief of artillery
of the corps prepares an artillery program including all the
counterbattery and fire for destruction -work which he wishes
carried out. This is, of course, based on the needs of the corps
as shown by the bulletins and maps.
(0) Individual information files: Each hostile emplacement
or observation station was recorded by means of an individual
file which consisted of a description of its exact location by map
coordinates, its caliber, number of guns, etc., copies of the last
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 11
aerial photograph, with the interpretations thereof marked on a
small section of a 1/20,000 map. On the back of the form was a
record of each time the battery had been active and all fires for
adjustment of destruction which had been directed at it by
friendly batteries. Filed with the card was a copy of all other
pertinent information. By the use of this record, the informa--
tion officer-at corps headquarters was in a position to give im-
mediate information concerning any enemy emplacement. This
information was often called for by the chief of artillery for the
corps who wished it for his work in connection with the regular
artillery program and for any special work which he had in
mind. Copies of this file, without photographs, were furnished
all batteries. Copies of files concerning batteries opposite or
opposed to them were furnished to battery commanders with
photographs. The form of the individual file can be seen by
referring to figures 3 and 3a accompanying the report submitted
under date of March 16, 1917, by O 6 on “Aerial Observation in
Liaison with Artillery.” _
7. Artillery infomnation service in divisions—Although not
regularly organized with special oflicers detailed for the work,
divisional artillery commanders and group and battery com-
manders all have a service of information which cooperates with
the corps service of artillery information. An officer at each
divisional artillery headquarters and in each group of artillery
is charged, in addition to his other duties, with the furnishing to
the oflicer in charge of artillery information at corps headquar-
ters with all artillery information received in the sector and with
the interpretation and distribution of information received from
the corps. Each time a hostile battery fires on a friendly bat-
tery the number and caliber of the projectiles is reported; and
each observation from a battery or group observation station
which would be of interest to the corps is also reported to corps
headquarters through divisional artillery headquarters.
8. Supervision of artillery preparation—One of the most im-
portant duties of the artillery information service is the super-
vision of artillery preparation. This falls to the officer at corps
headquarters charged with artillery information. He follows
the preparation with aerial photographs and reports and is able
to furnish the chief of artillery or the commanding general with
photographs of the zone subjected to the preparation taken
within 30 minutes of the time delivered. Based on these the
12 FIELD ARTIL'LERY NOTES NO. 6.
commanding general is able to make an estimate of the progress
of the preparation and thus intelligently determine upon the
“ jour J ” and the “ hour H ” which play so important a part
in the delivery of all modern attacks. (See report of O 6 on
“ Barrage and Accompanying Fire,” dated Mar. 23, 1917 ).
9. By every possible means the requirements of mobile war-
fare have been anticipated; and every provision has been made
for the continuance of this service when the Army moves. This
conforms to a fundamental principle of all French organization.
INSPECTION AND CARE OF ARTILLERY
MATERIEL.
- 1. During a recent visit to a battery of 75 mm. guns in posi-
tion on the western front the following notes on the inspection
and care of materiel were obtained:
2. General care and condition—The condition of the guns
and carriages was uniformly excellent. This applies not only
to the battery with which the observer was stationed, but also
to the nine other 75 mm. batteries and two 120 mm. gun bat-
teries, four 155 mm. gun batteries, and two modern rapid-fire
St. Ohamond, 1916, 155 mm. howitzer batteries seen during the
tour.
The elevating and traversing gears, the recoil guides, and the
breech mechanism were cleaned and oiled daily. For this pur-
pose 3 kilograms of lubricating oil were kept on hand’ with each
piece and 10 kilograms in store in the battery wagon. In addi-
tion there was 1 kilogram of coal oil with each piece and 18
kilograms in the battery wagon.
The bore was cleaned and oiled after each firing. For this
purpose water and ammonia were used. (See detailed instruc-
tions on this subject submitted as appendix to this report).
3. Care of recoil mechanism—The quantity of oil in the cyl-
inder is always shown by the position of the small gauge at the
rear of the cylinder. When the gauge is flush with the edges
of its recess the oil supply is correct. When the gauge recedes
it is an indication of insufficient oil; on the contrary, when it
projects it is a sign of too much oil.
For the purpose of filling the cylinder there are two filling
plugs and two pumps. One small screw pump is furnished
with each piece and is applied to the rear filling plug. One
battery pump is furnished for each battery which is larger,
more easily used, and is used at all times when available. Its
general design may be seen from the figure 1 submitted with
the original of this report only. The pump is screwed to the
right-hand side of the carriage before being used. Much thicker
13
14 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6.
oil is used than in the United States service. It takes one man
one minute to fill a cylinder. Cylinders are verified and filled
every day in intense action, two or three times a week in ordi-
nary active sectors, and once a week in quiet sectors. Although
leaking is referred to as a possibility in official publications, no
signs of oil were seen under any guns and no leaking was re-
ported by any of the oflicers or men questioned. Each 'emplace-
ment was carefully inspected for signs of leakage, and every
opportunity to be at the guns during and after firing was taken
advantage of. .
The group commander, who was a member of the Technical
Commission at Bourges before the war, stated that he had
been with 75-min. guns since August, 1914, and had never seen
a recoil mechanism out of order except as the result of hostile
fire or inexcusable neglect. The official records of the group
showed that at Verdun eight guns fired 6,000 rounds in one
day, one gun had fired 1,000 rounds during a day, and that
carriages with a continuous record of 13,000 rounds were in
excellent condition. During one day on which the observer
was with one of the batteries it fired 1,800 rounds in four
hours, and the recoil mechanism was functioning perfectly at
the end of the day, and the gauge showed no signs of lost oil.
4. Care of accessories and small parts.——In contrast with the
excellent care given to guns and carriages, spare parts and
accessories were in disorder in the battery visited. The chiefs
of section were always able to produce the parts called for,
but no two kept them in the same place or in the same way.
Boxes and cases provided for their care were in poor condition.
All leather portions of cases were stiff and badly cared for.
5. Inspection of materiel—All artillery materiel is under the
supervision of a general ofl‘icer as inspector for the armies.
At each army headquarters there is an assistant inspector,
with the rank of commandant, charged with the materiel of
his army. In the army visited, pieces are normally inspected
about once in two months and oftener whenever special in-
spections are asked for. The observer was present at a nor-
mal inspection. The assistant inspector for the army arrived
without previous notice. He was accompanied by one me-
chanic. The inspection of the battery required about one hour
and a half and consisted of visiting each piece, star-gauging
the bore, and measuring the chamber and core with the Man-
ceron device.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES’ NO. 6. ' 15
No play was found in sights or gears. The pieces in the
battery varied from a new piece, which had fired only 250
rounds, to a piece which had been in service since the war
and had fired 8.000 rounds. The new gun was found perfect,
the guns of average use showed a wear which did not exceed
110 mm., the old gun showed wear varying from 1% to 1% mm.,
but, as the wear was uniform and the piece reported as still
accurate, it was continued in service.
The individual record. of each piece was submitted to the
inspector by the chief of section. The inspector examined it
and noted the fact and results of his visit. He afterwards had
the chiefs of sections and gunners assembled and lectured them
on the necessity of careful compliance with the note from
general headquarters, dated September 3, 1916, on the care of
guns during and after firing, referred to below.
6. Instructions for the care of materiel—There is submitted
as an appendix to this report the note of September 3, 1916,
and an older note of November 19, 1915“, andexisting regula-
tions for the care of materiel. It is believed to be of con-
siderable value to the Ordnance Department as a recent authori-
tative statement based on the experience of two years and a
half of war and the expenditure of several million rounds of
ammunition. Their source should not be divulged, but no
reason is known to exist which should prevent the Ordnance
Department using the facts, advice, and warnings for the
\nformation of our own services.
RESUME OF INSTRUCTIONS GWEN AT A COURSE IN MATERIEL
FOR ARTILLERY OFFICERS, FOURTH ARMY, NOVEMBER, 1916,
BY COMMANDANT P. POUS, SOUS-INSPECTEUR
nu MATERIEL.
In addition to instructions in the regulations, the following
points should be considered:
A. CARRIAGES.
Former instructions indicated that certain care should be
given daily, certain other care every 15 days. This last interval
has proved too long for war conditions, even for limbers and
caissons, which are too often neglected.
The daily care previously described should be attended to with
the greatest care.
Bearing surfaces of instruments and levels should be scrupu-
lously clean at all times.
Elevating and traversing gears should be operated to their
‘full extent and oiled in the prescribed fashion.
All bronze and steel bearings, screws, racks, etc., should be
carefully cleaned. All bearing surfaces should be cleaned and
oiled. One should never find dirty black oil in elevating and
traversing mechanisms. All loose screws and bolts should be
tightened at once. ‘
Verify the greasing of axles and of caterpillar plates; repair
and replace everything not in good condition. Do not wait until
parts are unserviceable. Oareless'ness results in excessive de-
mands on the parts, delay in delivery, and harm to the interests
of the service in time of war.
Send to the park promptly all parts replaced, in order that they
may be utilized at the rear.
Keep cleaning materiel complete, renew the supply methodi-
* cally, and prevent waste. Use nothing but regulation materiel,
especially for recoil mechanism.
Recoil mechanisms should be verified as often as the nature of
the service permits. All cylinders lose more or less oil, which
3568°--17-——-3 ‘ 17
18 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6.
should be replaced at once. Many recoil mechanisms, especially
in the older materiel, have been ruined because they have been
used when half full. -
75-min. recoil brakes—Certain batteries have either sur-
charged the reserve reservoir or else have left it empty. ' All
surcharge changes the relative position of certain internal
parts which may either interfere with normal action or even
result in the ruin of the brake. There is no benefit in changing
the prescribed reserve. It may be even a source of danger. On
the contrary, there are many advantages in maintaining the
normal reserve. .
In case brakes work badly, report them as follows:
First. To the repair sections of the park:
(a) Brakes which give abrupt return to battery during nor-
mal firing. Pay no attention to merely rapid return to battery
during rapid fire for effect.
(b) Brakes which lose oil excessively by the forward filling
plug during firing. '
(c) Brakes which lose oil by the gauge either at rest or when
firing.
(a) and (b) can be repaired only in the rear; (0) can be re-
paired in the army park. ~ .
All brakes described above can be retained in service in spite
of slight inconveniences. Small springs are issued to be screwed
in the forward end of cylinders to take up excessive counter-
recoil pending the receipt of new brakes.
Second. The following categories should be sent to the repair
section with a written note:
(d) All brakes giving an excessive recoil.
(c) All brakes which do not properly return the piece to
battery.
(f) All brakes in which the gauge does not properly function.
(g) All brakes in which, when the reserve reservoir is emptied,
the oil'spurts out violently, very thick, like mayonnaise.
Norm—Use only clean oil furnished from Bourges Arsenal
and introduce it with the battery pump and not the screw pump.
(Jrensot brakes—Bad care is often the cause of accidents which
make it necessary to return pieces to the factory. These acci-
dents are due to excess recoil caused by superpressure in the
hydraulic brake (which is forced to work with orifices partially
closed) to deteriorated parts of the brake, or to broken pistons.
Great attention should be given to the recoil. The following
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 19
table gives the proper amount of recoil for each type fired with
the maximum charge:


. 155 155 Long
105, ’ Mortar
Elevation. M. 1913, 1201135 M'IQIISZF 280 ’
meters‘ meters’ meter’s. meters
10°. .................................... .. 1,25 ........ .. 1,21 ........ ..
20° . .................................... .. 1,26 1, 28 1, 24 1, 36
40° . .................................... . . 1, 27 1, 30 1, 27 1, 395
60° ................................................................... .. 1, 410


If the recoil is too long, the brake is not full or else the recu-
perator has lost air or liquid. Verify filling, then measure the
pressure in the recuperator.
In the course of intensive fire, certain failures in counter-
recoil have been reported. This is caused by the dilation and the
partial vaporization of theoil. The functionment will be cor-
rected as soon as the piece is cooled.
In order to keep up the fire, it is necessary to put the gun at
zero and to open the filling plug, let out the excess of liquid, and
close the plug. When the materiel has cooled, refill.
The use of ordinary air in Schneider brakes corrodes to a cer-
tain extent the internal surfaces of the cylinders, especially
for the cavalry cannon, model 1912. Azote (AZ) is furnished
in reservoirs or in special containers. When azote is not avail~
able, use ordinary air, and recharge with azote as. soon as it is
furnished.
B. VERIFICATION OF ADJUSTMENT OF SIGHTS.
Verification should be daily, or perhaps even after each firing,
but only simple field adjustments are required.
(NoTn—The methods were not translated for lack of time and
because they were the same field expedients used in our Field
Artillery Observer).
C. Rnrms.
_ Spare parts will not be assembled in batteries when such as-
semblage involves filing of delicate or essential parts, forge
work, or riveting. .
Other replacements and repairs are made at repair sections.
With the ‘piece should be sent the “ Book of the Piece ” (obser-
20 I FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES no. 6.
ver’s note—a small book kept by chief of section, giving com-
plete information as to his piece), with a notation of repairs
needed or a description of accidents, if any. '
In addition, all guns and caissons should be sent periodically
to the repair sections.
In the case of heavy calibers, important repairs are made as
soon as possible, but complete new parts or new guns are sent
by the heavy artillery service of the grand army park.
D. CARE OF TUBEs.
Peace-time requirements as to care of tubes have proved abso-
lutely insufficient for war conditions. A note from the grand
quarter general, dated September 3, 1916, on the conservation of
tubes meets all requirements. All batteries should have a copy.
Recently the inspector general of materiel called attention to'the
importance of the note and stated that strict compliance would
result in marked economies in guns.‘
War experience shows that the wear of tubes is not due alone
to the number of rounds fired, but also to the way in which the
fire is conducted and the way in which the tubes are cleaned,
cooled, and cared for.
On account of very intensive fire—called for, no doubt, by
necessity, but executed without care—certain 75-mm. guns
have become unfit for use after from 3,000 to 6,000 rounds,
whereas others after 20,000 rounds are found to be without
‘excessive wear or copper fouling. For example, one battery
has fired 3,800 rounds in 24 hours, nearly 1,000 rounds per
gun, without wear, copper fouling, or change in the bore. (This
is personally vouched for by Commandant Pous, who inspected
the battery)._ The rounds were fired as follows: 1,200 rounds
in 4 hours, 1,000 rounds in 2% hours, 1,200 rounds in 3 hours,
and 400 rounds in 1 hour. This was made possible by firing
sections and platoons alternately and permitting the inactive
pieces to be cooled, cleaned, and greased. '
Copper fouling is one of the most frequent and important
causes of trouble. Under the friction caused by the passage
of the projectile through the bore. light pieces of copper, either
liquefied by high temperature or flaked off by friction, are
-\ detached from rotating bands and fired along the walls of the
bore, where they sometimes remain as if they were welded.
The small projections thus made increase the wear caused by
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 21
later rounds, and the‘ copper, playing the part of a foreign
body, becomes more and more deeply embedded in the metal
of the tube, especially if the temperature is greatly raised by
intensity of fire. The interior surface of the tube remains
_rough even after the copper has been removed chemically and
is more liable to future copper fouling after a few additional
rounds.
(a) For a given kind of copper the amount of fouling de-
pends upon the following considerations:
(1) The condition of the bore, whether smooth and polished
or rough, whether clean and lubricated or dirty and full of
powder residue, whether dry and seldom or rarely cleaned, or
whether subjected to excess heating or cared for by rest and
cooling. .
(2) The action of the lands and grooves on the projectile,
which is a function of its velocity in the bore, its weight, and
the inclination of the rifiing. The last consideration explains
the fact that in guns like the 75 mm., 100 mm., and 105 mm.
with a constant rifling the fouling is chiefly at the beginning
of the grooves, and nearer the muzzle in guns like the 155 mm.
long with progressive riiling. It never occurs with low-velocity
guns, except when they are badly cared for.
(b) The successive phenomena of copper fouling are in-
teresting:
(1) The change in the surface of the lands and grooves,
particularly the edges of the lands, such as is always noticed
in guns badly fouled.
(2) The change in the rotating band of the projectile. This
explains certain irregularity of fire hitherto inexplicable.
In some cases small flakes of the rotating band are nearly
sheared off and a loss of pressure results, especially if the
phenomenon takes place near the beginning of the riding. This
may explain certain inequalities in the fire of guns with a
rifiing at a constant pitch (75 mm. and 105 mm.) or even in the
case of fire with the 155 mm. long of sufficient intensity to cause
copper-fouling, especially if the gun has already been fouled.
In some cases bits of the copper are actually sheared 01f,
either at the beginning of the riding in guns of constant pitch
or further forward in guns of progressive pitch like the 155
mm. long. In the first case the projectile leaves the gun with a
speed of rotation practically zero, which causes the projectile
fired at a range of 5,000 or 6,000 meters to fall at a distance
22 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. .
of 1,000 to 2,000 meters. In the second case the projectile leaves
the gun with a certain speed of rotation and the firing will be
normal if the range is not too great, but if the range is great—
9,500 meters, for example—the projectile will “ tumble ” toward
the end of the trajectory and often fall short by 500 meters.
From the foregoing it can be seen what difficulties, due to
copper-fouling, will be caused by firing rapidly without proper
precautions. But copper-fouling is not the only bad result. Im-
proper usage causes erosion and premature wear on the lands
near the origin. These, in their turn, render the tube more
liable to copper-fouling. All these results of improper use and
care result in destruction of materiel and waste of ammunition.
It is necessary to consider the gun as a machine tool which is
used to cut the copper of the rifling band by turning a heavy
inert mass under conditions which are at best difficult. This
work must be done under varying conditions—when hot or cold,
when dry, rough, and cracked, or when smooth, polished, and
lubricated. Under unfavorable conditions “ the superficial
layers of metal are superheated, and this heating causes groups
of cracks in the walls of the bore, which quickly deepen and
form permanent important erosions.” (Extract from an article
by Tchernoff in the “ Revue de Métallurgie ” for October, 1915,
quoted by Gen. St. Claire-Deville, inspector general of materiel).
The above truths are the basis of the note from the grand
quarters general previously referred to, whose conclusions may
be aphorized as follows:
“For the best conservation of tubes they should be washed and
greased before each shot.”
In spite of the tactical and technical requirements of actual
war, this ideal should be approached as closely as possible in
order to safeguard our materiel and thus hasten the final victory.
In this connection it is interesting to note that a battery
commander who attended one of the first lectures in this course
has since realized this ideal with one of his guns. By the de-
tail of two extra cannoneers he kept up a rate of fire of three
rounds per minute for 30 minutes. The work required of the
cannoneers was, of course, excessive, but at a recent inspection
the men of whom the extra work was required appeared very
proud of the results obtained.
As the power and initial velocity of a gun'increases the need
for special precautions is correspondingly increased. Strict
compliance with the note from the grand quarters general re-
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 23
ferred to has produced most happy results with the Schneider
materiel of 105 mm., 155 long, 155 short, and 4280 mm. mortar,
with the St. Chamond 155 mm., and with the 100 mm., 14 cm.,
and 145 mm.
“ During firing with full charges tubes should be greased at
least every four rounds.” Assuredly, whenever the tactical
situation demands it, the fire should be as intense as the ma-
teriel permits, but it is essential that commanders who order
such fire from large calibers should have examined the situation
in all its particulars and balanced the necessity of the moment
with the probability of the partial or total destruction of some
guns. 9
From the foregoing it follows that, with guns with varying
charges, the full charges should never be used except when the
range or the nature of the target demands it. The experience
of Commandant Jere, consulting ordnance engineer at the Center
of Artillery Studies, shows that one round fired with full charge
wears a gun as much as five rounds fired with half charges.
Existing orders require the use of reduced charges whenever
possible, but staff oflicers of the services of the interior who are
charged with the distribution of munitions have unchangeable
repugnance toward giving to parks and batteries a permanent
number of charges in excess to the number of projectiles. This
makes it rarely possible to comply with the orders covering the
use of reduced charges. This state of affairs is to be regretted,
but batteries should, in spite of it, use every eifort to comply
with the very necessary precautions.
E. INSPECTION OF GUNS.
The following indications will serve as a guide for officers
charged with inspections and for battery oflicers.
The role of officers charged with inspections of guns in the
field is defined _by Chapter V of the Instructions for the Annual
Inspection of Cams, dated January 10, 1906:
“ Give the gun a general examination after each day’s firing.
See if any dangerous'fault exists. Estimate the degree of seri-
ousness of each depreciation and inform the proper authority
thereof, either the commanding officer or the park commander.
“Decide provisionally if a gun should not be fired, report to
the proper authority (army park or grand park of the army,
as the case may be), enter verbally or in writing, so that the
24 ; FIELD ARTILLERY norns no. 6.
facts may be known at the next "visit of the sous-inspecteur of
artillery, who will make recommendation_as to final disposi-
tion.” (Note 2209, Sept. 4, 1916. G. Q. 01.).
Field decisions do not necessarily require the use of the
star gauge on the Manceron apparatus (for measuring cham-
bers). Make bold decisions, and in cases considered dangerous
do not hesitate to retire the piece provisionally and report the
circumstances.
At each visit have the bore cleaned carefully. Use hot water
or kerosene oil, if necessary, to remove caked grease in guns
badly cared for. -
Light the interior by sunlight reflected by a white paper or
by a candle or electric light. Look at both ends carefully.
COMMON MANIFESTATIONS OF DETERIORATION.
1. Erosion—Large pitted areas close together in groups near
the forcing cone and the beginning of the rifling. Unless they
degenerate into fissures they are not dangerous.
Indentations in the chamber and barrel recess caused by the
rupture of cartridge‘ cases. They are usually without depth
and not dangerous.
2. Fissures are the beginnings of cracks in the tube, which
may be recognized as fine lines usually parallel to the axis of
the piece. They are generally isolated and very deep; Their
depth distinguishes them from the scars made by foreign bodies. _
They are rare, but very dangerous. It is important not to
confuse fissures and scars made by tools or foreign bodies.
Be on the watch for any deterioration of this nature, which
increases with subsequent firing.
3. Sears made by hard bodies are frequent and may easily
be mistaken for fissures. It should be noted that they are more
continued than fissures, that they are usually long, and may
or may not be parallel to the rifling. They are usually shal-
low and are not dangerous.
4. Scratches, cuts, and dents come ordinarily from the pres-
ence of a foreign body in the tube during firing or from ‘a pre-
mature burst. They are of no importance unless they are of
such a nature as to obstruct the passage of a projectile through
the bore. In such a case retire the piece for repair. This de-
cision. is very important in view of the use of‘ high explosive
shells.
FIELD ARTILLERY no'rns no. 6. ' 25
Dents are always situated in the rear part of the tube.‘
They are very frequent in guns using fixed ammunition. In
spite of their grave appearance when seen from one end of the
piece, they are not serious, because they are not deep unless
their edges form a projection in the bore,
5. Swellings are recognized by the appearance of the bore.
Retire the gun until it can be passed upon definitely. Take
careful note of the ammunition used, including all the marks
of manufacture, and report to the commanding officer and to
the park. ~
6. Copper deposits have the appearance of caked dirt and '
must be removed only under the instructions of a sous-inspec-
teur of materiel at repair sections, army parks, or the Grand
Army Park. (See the note of July 22, 1915, reprinted May,
1916). In cases of slight copper fouling the copper can be
removed in the battery by the use of the ammonia solution fur-
nished by the repair section of the army park. Pay no atten-
tion to the tinge of copper without thickness, which is seen at
the muzzle of guns even after a very few rounds.
7. Wear on the lands near their origin—120 mm. and 155 mm.
can be submitted to the sous-inspecteur for condemnation when
the wear amounts to 1 mm. and when, in addition, the gun has
become more inaccurate to the extent of giving dispersions on
level ground equal to eight times the probable error. When ad-
justed and closely supervised fire with ammunition of the same
lot should be insisted upon.
The same rule applies to 75 mm. guns when the wear exceeds
0.5 mm. ' '
8. Earterior dents caused by hostile fire—Verify the interior
and if there is any interior swelling which would interfere with
the passage of a projectile retire the gun.
9. Displacement of locking hoops in 120 mm. and 155 mm.
guns—If the movement is rapid or if it exceeds 4 or 5 mm,
retire the gun until it can be inspected by a sous-inspecteur.
10. De Bange breech systems—The primer seat becomes dirty
rapidly, especially when firing “ D ” shells. Dirt commences at
forward end and rapidly fills the primer seat if the forward part
is not changed in time. It is necessary to watch carefully and
change frequently to prolong life of the mushroom head. The
mushroom head must be replaced when the primer seat becomes
dirty and increases the pressure.‘ Complete new mushroom
heads and spare parts must be on hand at all times.
26 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6.
All gas-check pads of which the tin washers show signs of
having been melted indicate insufficient obturation. The‘ obtura-
tors of the 155 mm. short model of 1881 should not be separated
from their gas-check rings. In urgent cases replace the entire
obturator and send to the rear, even if certain parts are still
serviceable. '
11. Retubed 105-mm. guns.—The tubes lengthen and turn dur-
ing firing. Report them when this amounts to 12 mm.
Nora—Batteries should record in their Li'vret dc Piece (indi-
vidual gun records) all shots fired and all accidents and im-
portant incidents. This book pertains to the piece and not to
the battery and should accompany the piece at all times when it
is sent to the rear. It must be presented at all inspections. by the
sous-inspecteur, who will record in it all required information.
P. Pous,
Commandant Assistant Inspector for Artillery Materiel.
G. Q. G., November 16, 1916.
The following is a translation of the note of September 3,
1916, referred to on page 5:
Now or SEPTEMBER 3, 1916, G. O. G.
A. A receptacle full of water must be kept at each piece.
B. At each interruption of the firing, no matter if even for a
few minutes only, wash and grease the bore without using
enough 'die to cause smoke. During short interruptions the
breech should not be dismounted, but at the end of the firing
or the day. it should be dismounted and cleaned.
During prolonged firings cause suitable intervals to be made
and alternate the pieces.
C. If due to the exigencies of the service the fire has been in-
tense enough to cause copper fouling, remove the copper as soon
as possible in the manner hitherto prescribed.
D. Grease the rotating bands freely, leaving a certain amount
of grease 011 forward edge of the band.
E. Whenever the rapidity of fire permits, before each shot is
fired make sure that there is no foreign body in the bore, such
as pieces of the cartridge cases or bits of unburned powder.
By order of the aid major general:
' ( Signed) POINDRON.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 6. 27
For the sake of completeness there is included the following
translation of an earlier note on the same subject:
GRAND QUARTERS GENERAL,
Gen. Staif—lst Bureau, At G. O. G., November 19, 1915.
No. 10363. '
NOTE RELATIVE TO MEASURES TO BE TAKEN IN BATTERIES IN ORDER
TO PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEATING OF 75 MM. TUBES.
During the intense fire of the recent attacks a certain number
of 75 mm. guns fired for 'a long time without interruption and
were thus heated excessively. This has resulted in a premature
wearing of tubes and the necessary condemnation of several re-
coil mechanisms whose joints had been completely burned out.
75 mm. fire, like that of machine guns, should not be uninter-
rupted. The fire can take the form of rafales executed as
rapidly as the service of the piece will permit, but it is neces-
sary there should be intervals sufficient to avoid excessive
heating.
Cooling can be hastened with water, either thrown on the out- .
side of the gun or preferably used in Washing the bore. The
water should be kept near the piece in a pail or other suitable
container. -
By order of the aid major general:
7 M. JANIN.
NOTES ON ARTILLERY, BARRAGE, AND ACCOMPANYING FIRE.
(From data obtained in France in March, 1917
SECRET AND CONFIDENTIAL. FOR OFFICIAL USE
ONLY. NOT TO BE TAKEN INTO FRONT - LINE
TRENCHES.





CONTENTS.
Page.
“Tir de barrage ” (barrage fire) 31
Front \ ___ 31-32
Objective - 32
Density of fire 32
Opening of barrage fire 32-33
Preparation for the barrage- 33.34
Organization of group sector _____ __ 34
Barrage chart. 34-35
Communications 35-36
Personal liaison 36
_ Limits of safety , ' 36
Time required to deliver barrage fire 36
Amount and rate of fire _ 36-37
Counterpreparation 37
Fire against special localities 37
Record of emplacement ' 37-38
Additional information on file I , 38
“Garnet de tir ” (data book) B 38-39
Barrage maps A 39-40
Individual emplacement data 39-40
The box barrage ' 40-41
29
30 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES HO. 6.
Page. *


Accompanying fire ____________________ __ 41
Terminology ____________________________________ _.. 41-42
Object __________________________________________ __ 42
Ideal results ____________________________________ __ 42
Amount of artillery ____________________ __' _______ __ 42-43
Planning the attack ___________________ ..l _________ ___ 43-44
Form of orders __________________________________ __ 44-45
Hour of departure _________________________ -4 _____ __ 45
Rate of advance _________________________________ __ 45-46
Artillery formations ____________________________ -_ 46
Frequency and amount of range changes __________ __ 46-47
Ammunition used ___________ _T ______ __ 47
Fire during halts ___________________ ___ __________ __ 47
Rate of fire _____________________________________ __ 47-48
Conclusion ______________________________________ ___ 48
NOTE ON ARTILLERY BARRAGE AND ACCOMPANYING FIRE.
The expression tir dc barrage '(curtain fire) is used so fre-"
quently in official communiqués and in journalism that it has be-
come one of the catchwords of the present war; but, in spite of its
importance, no previous report has been submitted on the subject
because, although the word was constantly used, surprisingly
little definite information about it was to be obtained. A recent
satisfactory visit to a group of field artillery has made it pos-
sible, however, to submit the following notes, which are believed
to be authentic. They include a translation of such written
official information as is available and such further data and
comment as was obtained on the visit referred to.
Tm DE BARRAGE.
Barrage fire has the following objects:
(a) To stop the attack of the enemy as soon as it is launched.
(b) To prevent the arrival of reserves and reinforcements.
Barrage fire is delivered by light artillery and by heavy howit-
zers. - '
OBsERvER’s NOTE.——Ill the French service the classification
Artillerie de campagne has a more restricted meaning than the
corresponding term field artillery in the United States service.
It includes only what we designate as light artillery and will
be so translated in oflicial reports.
The barrage fire thus delivered is completed by fire from
long-range heavy artillery directed on the rear of the hostile
position. All arrangements should be made so that barrage fire
may follow automatically the fire for counter preparation.
LIGHT ARTILLERY BARRAGE.
Front—A distinct sector is assigned to each battery. If
there are enough batteries available, the fire of several bat-
teries may be superimposed on the same sector. But such
duplication is used only when the barrage of one battery per
sector is not suflicient or to replace the barrage of a battery
which is forced. to cease firing. There should be, in addition,
31
32 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6.
such an organization on any given front that, for each infan-
try unit, there is a_ corresponding artillery unit charged with
the barrage fire for the sector concerned—a group (three bat-
teries) of artillery for each infantry battalion, for example.
Objective—The barrage must form a curtain as close to
l the friendly front line as the safety of friendly troops will
permit. As soon as an effective barrage has been established
close to the friendly front line the range is increased slightly
so as to carry the fire to the enemy’s front line, where the suc-
cessive waves of the hostile assault are particularly vulnerable
at the moment when they are massed or when they are just
springing out of the trenches.
Finally, the barrage is completed by searching fire in depth
directed against the communication trenches where the suc-
cessive elements of the enemy are passing or resting.
‘In cases in which portions of the friendly trenches have
been occupied by the enemy all or part of the barrage should
be brought back to bear upon the captured portions of the
friendly lines at the moment when the infantry makes such a
demand.
Density of fire—At the opening of barrage fire, the rapidity
of fire should be as great as possible. The delivery of fire is
afterwards modified to suit the circumstances and the requests
of the infantry in the first-line trenches. In order that this
may work smoothly, the group or battery commander must
arrange for the most intimate relations between himself and
the infantry commander of the front line.
Calculations should be based on a density of one round per
minute on each 10 meters of front. Assuming that each gun
fires five rounds per minute, it is necessary to assign at least
one battery for each 200 meters of’ front.
Opening of barrage fire—Barrage fire is opened at the re-
quest of the infantry either by telephone, optical signals, etc., I
or when battery commanders receive indications from observa-
tion stations (signal lights, display of small balloons, or of
streamers from a balloon basket), or when the situation seems
to demand this kind of fire, such as when a burst of infantry
fire is heard at night or when the report of a gas attack has
been confirmed in the daytime.
Barrage fire is stopped when the infantry asks for its cessa-
tion. When all telephone wires are cut it may be stopped on
the responsibility of the artillery commander at the moment
when he judges that the enemy attack has been broken up.
FIELD ARTILLERY norns no. 6. as
The barrage of heavy howitzers: Barrage from heavy how-
itzers is delivered automatically on the first line only. In other
cases it is ordered specially by the artillery commander of the
sector either on his own initiative or on the request of the in-
fantry. It is stopped only at the request of the infantry.
Trench mortar barrage: Trench mortar barrage from the 75-
mm. trench mortar is executed under the same conditions as
that of the light artillery. Other trench mortars execute the
barrage under the orders of the colonel commanding the infantry
of the sector, or automatically when battery commanders have
received information as to a hostile attack. It is stopped at the
order of the colonel commanding the infantry.
Long-range heavy artillery delivers a barrage when so directed
by the chief of artillery of the army corps.
Preparation for the barrage—The barrage depends upon a
prearranged scheme called the barrage plan, which includes all
the details necessary for its execution. This plan should include
the following: _
. Objectives.
. Rate and method of fire.
. Provisions for night barrages.
. Observation stations and liaisons to be established.
. The orders for each battery.
. The artillery support to be requested from neighboring
sectors.
In the group visited barrage fire was provided for and exe-
cuted according to the foregoing provisions.
Except when an offensive action was being prepared or deliv-
ered, the barrage fire was considered the principal duty of the
artillery,‘ and all the dispositions and routine in the batteries
were devoted to the perfection of the arrangement by which it
could be delivered at the time and place required by the
infantry. The only otlfer fire normally delivered without spe-
cial orders was that on localities where enemy activity was
reported, and “ reprisal fire ” in response to enemy fire on
friendly infantry. The group commander ordered barrage fire,
fire on minor enemy activity, and reprisal fire. Counter-battery
fire, fire for destruction, and all fire connected with an ofiensive
action was planned and ordered especially by higher authority.
Barrage fire was divided into the “ automatic barrage,” which
was the normal barrage required of any given battery, and
GDUlib-CJONH
34 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 6.
“ reinforcing barrage,” which was provided for in case the auto-
matic barrage had proved insufficient.
The basis of the organization was the assignment of one
group of light artillery to each infantry regiment. The group
visited supported a regiment which had two battalions in the
trenches and one in reserve. For the purpose of delivering bar-
rage fire, one flank battery was assigned to each infantry bat-
talion in the trenches and the third, or center, battery was so
placed that its fire could reinforce the barrage fire of either
of the other two. (See fig. 1).
In addition to this automatic and reinforcing barrage there
were three batteries of 95-min. guns available, and provisions
were made to obtain additional barrage on each battalion sector
from batteries in adjoining groups. '
Each battalion sector was given a name, such as “ Cousiers,”
“ Puits sans Eau,” “ Vauban,” etc. '
The “barrage plan” of the group commander was carefully
worked out, and consisted of a “ barrage table ” and a “bar-
rage chart,” both of which gave the same information but in
different form. '
Both the “ barrage table ” and the “ barrage chart ’7’ included
information covering the name of each sector, the limits of the
sector shown by coordinates, the infantry battalion holding it,
the battery assigned to it for the normal or automatic barrage,
the reinforcing battery detailed specially for this purpose‘, the
95-mm. batteries whose fire could be obtained in emergency, and
the available batteries from adjoining groups whose assistance
was regularly provided for but reserved special situations.
The “barrage table” had the following general form. Its
general provisions were prescribed by the colonel commanding
the divisional artillery. Its details were planned by the group
and battery commanders concerned.
Barrage chart—Organization‘of group sector.


- Auto- Rein- Emer- Heavy
Name. (35221’ India-‘FY matic forcing gency artiller
' ' barrage. barrage. barrage. availab e.
Rosiers ............ .. 348-267 1 1/56 2 1/48 3/43 5/48 3 2/101
Vauban . .......... . - 356-272 2/56 2/48 3/48 8/48 3/101

1 1/56 indicates first battalion, 56th ‘Infantry.
2 1/48 indicates first battery, 48th Field Artlllery._
3 2/101 indicates second battery, 101st Heavy Artillery.
Original tracing of above filed in R/ S (F/W 1056-45).
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 35
The “ barrage chart ” was asection of a 1/ 10000 map with
the limits of sectors and the positions of batteries carefully
marked, and the corresponding barrages noted by shaded por-
tions. '
Communications—The group commander’s station was with
that of one of his batteries and included an “ advanced telephone
central.” (See separate report on artillery telephone communi-
cation). This connected the group commander with the in-
fantry battalion commanders, not only in his own but the two
adjoining sectors, the infantry regimental commanders of his
own and adjoining sectors, all the observation stations of the
divisional artillery, the-batteries of his own group, the head-
quarters of neighboring groups, the heavy artillery, the aerial
service, the divisional artillery commander, and the divisional
infantry commander. .
To furnish communication when the wires were cut there
was connection by projectors or optical telegraph between the
infantry regimental commander’s station in the group sector
and the lookout station of the group, which was an armored
cupola immediately over the group commander’s post.
For emergencies, the following rocket or light signals were
provided:


Red Barrage needed.
White Cease firing.
Red and white __________ ...Lengthen range.
One green Gas warning.
Two green Gas attack.
This code was changed from time to time, but the variations
are so limited that the Germans usually were in possession of it,
and were able, by sending up rockets themselves, to cause some
, confusion. In order to avoid waste of ammunition and unnec-
essary alarms, orders provided that—
(a) A signal light sent up in the midst of small-arms or hos—
tile artillery fire will be at once responded to, but
(b) A signal light sent up during quiet times will be con-
firmed by telephone before being responded to, but
(0) If telephone confirmation is impossible, the signal light
will be responded to by immediate fire. '
During the visit to the group on one occasion the lookout re-
ported red rockets in a certain sector. As it was quiet at the
time, the group commander called up the infantry battalion
36 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6.
commander on the telephone and was told that there was no
need for barrage, and that it was the Germans who were send-
ing up the rockets. ‘
Personal liaison—The lieutenants of the group were detailed
by roster for three days’ tour of duty with the infantry regi-
ment. During this time they lived in the infantry trenches and
messed with the infantry officers. They were in charge of the
advanced observation stations and in close touch with every-
thing in the sector. The relations between the artillery and
infantry oflicers were uniformly cordial and intimate. The same
batteries had supported the same battalions since August, 1914.
Limit of safety—Due to dispersion and the possibility of a
change in atmospheric conditions since the previous adjustment,
150 meters was taken as the limit of safety on delivering a de-
fensive barrage. The advanced posts of the infantry sector
were in some cases within 30 meters of the advanced German
posts, and in cases in which it was necessary to fire closer’ to
the infantry line than the limit of safety, the infantry were
always notified so that they could take cover in their dugouts.
The limit of safety here referred to applies to defensive bar-
rages. For attacks, the accompanying fire, sometimes called the
“mobile barrage,” is planned separately in each case and often
is closer to the infantry than 80 meters.
Time required to deliver barrage fire—Calculations were
based on the following times:
Minutes after
request.
To obtain automatic barrage ___________ __ 2
To obtain reinforcing barrage __________ __ 5
To obtain help from adjoining group ____ __ 10 to 15'
During the visit to the group, only automatic barrages were
called for, but in no case did it take longer than two minutes
to open fire. The gun detachment slept within 5 yards of their
gun, and were awakened by an electric bell in the‘ lookout
cupola. The gun was always laid with the automatic barrage
data. The presence of an officer in the battery was considered
necessary, but he appeared almost instantly.
Amount of fire—The understanding with the infantry was
that batteries should fire 40 rounds from each piece when a
barrage was asked for, and that, at the conclusion, inquiry
should be made as to whether or not that was sufficient. Ten
minutes was required for this.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 37
Rate of fire—The automatic barrage was opened at the rate
of six rounds per piece per minute, and this rate was tapered
off to one round per piece per minute.
Counter preparation.—Arrangements were also made, both by
table and by graphical chart, for counter-preparation fire. Each
battery had its normal mission and its reinforcing mission.
Each hostile position had its normal counter-preparation bat-
tery and its reinforcing batteries just as in the automatic and
reinforcing barrage.
Fire against special localities—In order to bring‘ immediate
fire on special localities where the enemy are in the habit of
work or passing, there was a special code between the in-
fantry regimental commander and the group commander.
Each locality had a letter designation, and the kind of fire
desired was designated by “R” (rafale) or “L” (lente-
ment-slowly). For example, if the message “ CL ” was received,
it signified that the infantry wanted slow fire on the point “ C.”
When a rafale was asked for, usually only one round from
each piece was fired as quickly as possible. This was ordi-
narily directed against working parties, who unquestionably
would take cover at the first shots and so render any more fire
wasted. Slow fire was delivered at a rate of one round every
five minutes at irregular intervals and was designed to make
passage down certain communication trenches, etc., dangerous.
Record of emplacements—The following data was recorded
in the group commander’s records concerning each emplace-
ment in the group sector, including the ones which were unoc-
cupied but with the upkeep of which the group was charged:
(a) Designation of emplacement.
(b) Location by coordinates on map.
(0) Altitude.
(d) Minimum range at which the crest can be cleared at
300 A. S.
(e) Field of fire, both in casemates and outside of them.
(f) Daily registration point.
(9) Usual observation station.
(h) Normal-barrage.
(i) Points from which infantry rockets are fired.
(7') Reinforcing barrage.
(h) Barrage after infantry gives up first line.
(l) Barrage after infantry leaves second line.
Referring to (lo) and (l) above, this fire is never opened
until the correctness of the information as to the giving up of
38 » FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6.
the infantry lines has, been confirmed either by telephone or
other means.
Additional- informat-ion on file—In addition to the foregoing
information as to ttr de barrage, etc., the group commander had
the following:
(a) Information on gas attacks and the launching of gas.
(1)) The telephonic organization of the sector.
(0) The infantry organization of the sector.
(d) German maps of the sector.
(e) Artillery ‘and infantry panoramic sketches from observa-
tion stations.
(1‘) Charts showing “dead. zones.” The portions of the ter—
rain invisible from observation stations and covered from the
fire of the various batteries was marked off on pieces of tracing
cloth for each station and battery. By superimposing these
tracings on the map the exact capabilities and limitations of
the various positions could be learned. This saved having a
separate map for each station or battery.
“ Garnet de Tir ” (data book).-—The carnet de tir, a small data
book of aboutlOO pages intended for'data for each position occu-
pied by a battery. Data is entered as it is obtained, either in
registration fire or fire for effect. The book is turned over to
the relieving battery taking the same position, or, in case there
is no relieving battery when the position is vacated, to the com-
manding oflicer of the artillery of the sector.
The following table of contents will show the subheads under
which data is entered and the allotment of pages for each sub
ject: ' '
I. General information on the emplacement of the
battery and its echelons, 1 page.
II. Position of the battery, 5 pages.
III. Missions, 2 pages.
I". Standing orders (to open barrage, reprisal, fire,
alarm, etc.), 4 pages.
V. Command post, 2 pages. _
VI. Habitual observation station (with sketch), 4
pages. ‘
VII. Advanced observation station (with sketch), 4
pages. ~
VIII. Data on observation, 1 page.
IX. Barrage (with sketch), including initial ranges for
each piece and the mechanism of fire, 4 pages.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 39
X. Registered fire on enemy batteries and other special
points, 4 pages.
XI. Registration data from direct observation (each
target has a printed form on which date and hour,
direction and force of wind, etc., are entered, with
the results), 18 pages.
XII. Registration data from aerial observation (each
target has a table different from above, but in
which the same sort of data is entered), 31 pages.
XIII. Notes on daily variations in ranges (tables show-
ing date and hour, number of pieces, wind, atmos—
pheric condition, angle of site and range), 7
pages. '
XIV. Index of targets which have been registered on,
giving page in the notebook on which the desired
data can be found, 2 pages.
XV. Range tables of 7 5-mm. gun for different pro-
jectiles, 4 pages.
XVI. Short-range table for time-fuse shell, 75 mm., 2
pages.
, XVII. Formulas, 3 pages.
Barrage maps—The normal and reinforcing barrage zones
of the group visited are shown graphically in figure 1. The
location of the batteries of the adjoining groups is shown, and
the way in which the barrage zones overlap and reinforce one
another may readily be seen.
For the normal barrage the left battery of the group had
an average range of 3,000 and fired over a front of about 1,000
meters with slightly oblique fire. The field of fire was 200 mils.
The right battery had an average range of 4,000 and fired
over a front of 1,500 meters, with a field of fire of 380 mils.
The center, or reinforcing, battery had an average range of
2,700 and fired over a front equal to both the other zones, or
2,500 meters, with a field of fire of 700 mils.
Individual emplacement data—In addition to the data book
for the battery, in each emplacement there was posted up the
data which affected that gun in particular. This was either
painted on a board in large letters which could be read at
night or else was in the form of sheets of paper tacked to a
board. In each case there was given the data for fire on the
registration point, the normal barrage, the reinforcing barrage,
40 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6.
the fire in a neighboring group sector, the method of fire, and
the data for all special points on which the infantry ask for
fire.
The guns were left each night laid on the point for the normal
barrage. *
The field of fire for the normal, automatic barrage was about
200 mils for the left battery and 380 mils for the right battery.
The entire field of fire for the pieces of the left battery was, on
the average, 1,100 mils. In detail it was as follows: First piece,





@memmqy d- '’
a f A‘
12:! sane-ya» Artillery ’ ' I , .- .“
'lL'Bafiu'y‘of 95"“ Guns _1 _f_ _ _ _ ‘on Mt _ _ - -s
r all. -__-|°_ _'--I
- "10'!" "'1'
H‘
‘he
FigJ I
BARRAGE CHART : ' '
GROUP or BRTILLERY /‘° l‘l 95”
Support-m y
Reemem' or |NF_'A_NTRY M
h’orma/ J/ab/e Card/hon:
@I' II' III ill Ill
its ‘48 I" no" use’no'“ ‘I.
95"" ,5...



1,280; second piece, 925; third piece, 925; and fourth piece,
1,180 mils.
Volley fire, sweeping with three turns of the handwheel
(equal to 5 mils) between shots, was the ordinary method of
fire.
The boa: barrage, or tir d’encagement, as it is called in the
French service, is sometimes referred to as a separate form of
barrage, but since it is merely ' the delivery of three simul-
taneous barrages on both flanks and the rear of a position
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 41
in order to prevent escape and reenforcement, there is believed
to be no need of multiplying technical terms to include this and
every other possible form of barrage. The divisional and corps
artillery commanders make their plans which are based on
tactical reqrirements and the assistance required of the artil-
lery. When these plans involve barrage fire delivered in a
particular way, artillery otficers prefer to receive simple orders
for such fire without having all sorts of fantastic names at‘-
tached to each particular kind. Such at least was the opinion
of the artillery oflicers of the commands recently visited, who
deplored the present tendency to multiply definitions.
ACCOMPANYING FIRE.
Terminology—In the opinion of the many French artillery
oflicers of all ranks who have been consulted on the subject, the
term accompanying fire, which was well recognized before the
war, is a better term than mobile barrage, as it is often called
in France, or creeping barrage as it is sometimes called in the
British service. The officers consulted prefer to retain for the
term “ barrage fire” the curtain of fire habitually put up for
the defense of a position such as has been described in the
preceding pages. They deplore the present tendency to manufac-
ture names for all sorts of intense fire and to call each one of’
them some special kind of a barrage. As some of them have
expressed it, it may be called a trick of journalism and has no
place in true military terminology, which should always be
kept as simple as possible. As an example of this tendency,
certain orders recently issued for an infantry maneuver used
the terms “close barrage” and “distant barrage,” the first
being the accompanying fire which preceded the infantry in the
attack, and the second the true barrage which was being deliv-
ered simultaneously by the long-range heavy ‘artillery on the
ultimate objective. Artillery oflicers disapproved of this nomen-
clature on the ground that it was unnecessary.
But although accompanying fire involves no new term and no
new principle, its application has in recent months assumed a
tremendous new importance, and the details which govern its
successful application have been studied with the minutest care
by French general staff, infantry, and artillery officers. No
written instructions on the subject are known to exist. The
present report is based on a study of orders which have been
42' FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 6.
issued and conversation with artillery officers who have planned
and executed successful accompanying fire in recent attacks.
Object—The object of all accompanying fire is to precede and
assist the infantry advance. This is an old principle which
involves the statement of an ideal which modern field artillery-
men have long tried to realize. The first attempts made during
the present war were often disastrous to the infantry, and
examples of costly errors can be found as late as the British
fighting on the Somme in July, 1916. The successful French
attack in front of Douamont December 15, 1916, involved a tre-
mendous amount of accompanying fire, which achieved its object
almost perfectly. There is good reason to believe that the same
methods will be used in the spring offensives.
Ideal results—The ideal result is attained when the first
infantryman follows into the objective the last shell of the ac-
companying fire. Unless this is done the defenders who have
taken cover during the artillery fire will have time to man the
trenches and bring machine guns into action at the last moment
and may either successfully defend the position or make its
capture very costly. If, however, there is no interval between
the arrival of the last shell and the first infantryman, the de- y
fenders are necessarily caught in their shelters and will be
killed or captured. This ideal result can never be entirely
attained, and it is a hard but accurate reasoning which states
that it is better to lose a few men by friendly artillery fire than
to lose many and have an attack fail because the defenders have
had an opportunity to man their trenches and machine guns in
the interval between the last of the accompanying fire and the
first wave of the assault.
Amount of artillery—The number of guns shown in figure 1
for a division during the war of stabilization included only the
normal divisional artillery of one regiment of three groups of
three batteries each, one battery (12 guns) of 58 mm. trench
mortars and 6 old-model heavy batteries in addition.
The artillery is always hea'vily reinforced for an attack by the
addition of artillery from other divisions and corps and army
artillery. During the recent visit to the artillery of a division
it was reinforced by three groups (6 batteries) of modern 155
mm. howitzers and a battery of 58 mm. trench mortars for a
very minor operation, the corps artillery received a total rein
forcement of seventeen 155 mm. batteries for the three minor
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. 43
operations involved. At a division maneuver held early in
March, the divisional ‘artillery included the following:

Groups. Batteries. Guns.





75 mm ........................................... . - 6 18 72
155 mm ........................................... -- 4 8 32
220 mm ........................................... -. 1 2 8
Total. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. 112
with the following trench artillery:
4 batteries 58 mm.
2 batteries 75mm.
1 battery 240 mm.
The divisional artillery commander of a division which took
part in the attack in front. of Douamont in December, 1916,
gave me the following figures for the artillery actually em-
ployed in the support of his division, viz:

Groups. Batteries. Guns.


75 mm .................................... - ._ ..... .. 8 24 96
a 155 mm ........................................... .. - 4 8 32
105 mm ........................................... .. 1 3 12
Total ........................................................... . . 140


exclusive of trench artillery, for approximately 9,000 rifles.
The front occupied by the division before and after the attack,
the amount of advance, and the area covered by artillery fire is
shown in figure 2.

1 .2. , - - - ’ '1
glad/cafe)! Concenfraflqn of _ _, - r " ' 1
fry/er] arPrqpaCgf/an and _, - v ' " l
or ccpm an 1” 0's 0 T "
one .D/ru/‘oana/Jéfar du/rf ; Q Are” Com/‘e?’ . ' .Dgceméen /.9/6.a/faci ée/o a lQ- W/f/l Ari/Ila] fire. a: R
we Molvr. wz:- \5- o
, , I01 0
arrears 2: arm-3r Am a o/J/I/a/rw‘laiwea- - “.131
Iv - /05""" .3 ' __£Z__ 13f ‘ “ “.3300”? 3 S
44-03005‘ 8 : ‘-
| a
‘b l
L _ _ _ x .,
~ ~ _ _ _ _ - I
§ _ _ ~ .
_ _ _ J


Planning the attach—The greatest cause of disaster in the
execution of vaccompanying fire has been the failure to syn-
44 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES N0. 6.
chronize the advance of the infantry line and the advance of
the artillery fire. Attempts at continuous liaison which hoped
to keep the artillery always informed on the position of the
infantry have often been unsuccessful, not only on account of
the difiiculty of maintaining the liaison but also on account of
the difficulty of controlling the artillery sufliciently to change
continuallythe rate of progressive fire. After many such fail-
ures there grew up the later practice of attempting to predict
the rate of the entire infantry advance by a careful study of
the terrain and the map, and planning the rate of progression
of the artillery fire accordingly. But this also proved difficult,
because so many unforeseen circumstances altered the rate of
the infantry advance and threw out the calculations. The
methods which have brought success have involved a combina-
tion of the two previous methods. The basis of the present
method remains the careful predicting of the rate of the in-
fantry advance, the planning of the rate of progression for the
accompanying fire and its execution by the watch; but the in-
fantry advance is first predicted only from the initial point to
an intermediate objective. When this intermediate objective is
reached, the liaison between the infantry and artillery is de-
pended upon to establish this fact, and an interval of time is
allowed, so that there is opportunity for the infantry to re-
organize under the protection of artillery fire and to send a
second wave forward toward the second intermediate objective
at a rate of advance previously predicted.
Failure in any detail involves general failure; but the oppor-
tunity for reorganization at the intermediate objectives and the
possibility that, with good liaison and good command the time
spent at each intermediate objective may be varied, gives suf-
ficient flexibility to the general plan to make success a possibil-
ity. This method was successful before Douamont December 15,
1916.
Form of orders—The artillery orders should include not only
both a definite statement of the plan and the methods prescribed
for its execution but also a chart showing the point of depart-
ure, each intermediate objective and the final objective, all with
the appropriate hour and minute plainly marked. Both the
plan and the chart are essentially time-tables. Such orders can
never be properly drawn up unless there is complete profes-
sional and moral liaison between the infantry and the artillery
and a most accurate and painstaking study of the map and of
aerial photographs. In no other way can the probable rate of
I
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES no. 6. 45
infantry advance be predicted. The interpretation of aerial
photographs has become a science and is done in each army
corps by the ofiicer in charge'of the information service.
Both the written orders and the chart should show:
(CJ) The point of departure.
( b) The hour of departure or the hour “ H.”
(0) Each intermediate objective.
(d) The progression of the accompanying fire between each
two points given for each two minutes.
(0) The length of time to be spent at each intermediate objec-
tive.
(f) The new hour of departure from each intermediate objec-
tive, or the hour “H plus 11.”
A general idea of a chart is shown in figure 3.
The hour of departure depends entirely upon the success of
the artillery preparation. Formerly an attempt was made to
determine exactly the length of time necessary for the artillery
preparation and to order the launching of the infantry assault
at the conclusion of that period. . This practice involved tre-
mendous British losses on the Somme even as late as November,
1916, because the necessary time to prepare an attack can never
be definitely predicted. The present French method consists in
issuing preliminary orders which state that on the jour “J”
and at the hour “ H ” such and such an attack will be launched,
and that previous to this day and hour the artillery preparation
will be made. The commanding general keeps in touch with the
progress of the preparation by means of aerial reconnaissances
and especially by means of aerial photographs. Firing is stopped
in some cases for 30 minutes, to allow smoke to clear away and
photographs to be taken. As the preparation nears a successful
conclusion, the four “J” is announced in strictly confidential
orders, but the hour “H” is never announced until every pos-
sible precaution has been taken to insure that all enemy posi-
tions and machine-gun emplacements have been destroyed.
Aerial reconnaissance and photography are kept up until the
last moment, which result in the commanding general having
in his possession photographs taken 30 minutes before his deci-
sion is made. The hour “ H ” is then announced, and the attack
is made according to the preliminary orders. In this way every
possible provision for success is made.
Rate of advance—Naturally the rate of the infantry advance
is extremely variable. At maneuvers seen recently at Fourth
Army Schools it was computed at both 75 and 50 meters per
46 FIELD ARTILLERY NOTESWNO. 6.
minute. In planning the successful French advance from Doua-
mont on December 15, 1916, on account of the mud, which was
in some places knee-deep, the rate 'was placed at 25 meters per
minute. -
Artillery formations—In one of the divisions in the attack
referred to the three batteries of each group were placed one
in front of the other and a front of 300 meters was assigned
to each group. In division maneuvers recently seen by members
of the mission at Mailly the artillery was echeloned at dis-
tancesvarying from 500meters to 3,000 meters behind the front
line. The more distant units only fired during the first advance
and were followed later by the others. As soon as the second
units fired the distant ones changed position forward. This
appears to have been the application of a principle generally
understood in our service for a forward movement.
This formation apparently disregards all safety precautions
which were considered necessary before the war; but it has

53.5. fivyresslan of flacempany/qy Fire
5 fill-:32 C;
In 17
AM
Q
l.
//
been repeatedly observed at the front that neither artillery nor
infantry hesitates to place itself in front of artillery in action,
and that the idea of one battery “ blanketing ” the fire of another
never seems to be considered.
Mid ranges are usually employed.
Frequency and amount of range changes.-Accompanying fire
is necessarily progressive fire. The frequency and amount of
range changes depends entirely upon the predicted rate of in-
fantry advance already referred to. In the December attacks
mentioned the range was changed 50 yards each 2 minutes.
In other attacks which have been described by the artillery
commanders concerned the range has been changed 25 yards each
30 seconds. It is believed that the range change of 25 meters
is more common and is made as often as the predicted rate of
progression permits. Volley-fire sweeping is usually employed,
the range changes being strictly kept in the hands of officers
who use synchronized watches. Watches are synchronized
from data furnished by telephone from division headquarters
about three hours before the hour “ H,” and again a few minutes
before.
FIELD ARTILLERY NOTES NO. 6. - 47
In calculating the range changes, the slope of the ground must
be considered. Computations must be made on the actual hori-
zontal advance of the infantry in a given time interval.
Ammunition used—When there are enough batteries avail-
able it is considered advisable to have three batteries firing in
advance of each infantry unit which occupies a front of from
200 to 300 meters. One battery should establish a fire from
percussion shell with instantaneous fuses 130 meters in front
of the infantry; another battery should fire timed shrapnel with
the point of burst 130 meters in front of the infantry, and the
height of burst carefully adjusted between 2 and 3 mils; and
the third battery should fire percussion shrapnel 80 meters in
front of the infantry. Percussion shrapnel is, of course, a
comparatively ineflicient projectile, but at the same time it is
also the one which. the infantry can approach the closest and
which serves the purpose of having some sort of projectile go
into the objective as soon as possible before the first infantry-
man, as was referred to in paragraph “ Rate of advance,” on
page 45. This use of percussion shrapnel is at present antici-
pated in the fourth French Army, and is highly recommended
by divisional artillery commanders who have used it.
Fire during halts—When the infantry reaches any given
objective it is necessary that the supporting artillery which
has been delivering the accompanying fire should prevent de-
fensive measures on the part of the enemy during the halt.
To this end one battery in each group should establish a barrage
just ahead of the objective gained, and the other two batteries
should establish a raking fire (tir de ratissage) between the
objective gained and the next objective. This is established
with progressive fire from one battery and retrogressive fire
from the other battery delivered on the zone between the two
objectives. This procedure prevents the arrival of supports.
Rate of fire—Contrary to a prevalent opinion, the rate of
fire in accompanying fire is merely accelerated fire and can not
be called rapid fire. It usually does not exceed four rounds per
piece per minute. True rapid fire is used only in emergencies.
rI‘he reason for this comparative slowness is to be found in
the fact that in some cases such fire must be kept up without
stopping for four or five hours, and that there is a limit of
physical endurance for gun detachments, and also in the fact
that the experience of the war has shown that the life of guns
can be greatly prolonged by moderation in rapidity of fire and
48 main ARTILLERY NOTES no. 6.
care of materiel. (See Report No. 63 on Inspection and Care
of Materiel, Mar. 16, 1917). It has been stated on good au-
thority that it is more economical for a government at war to
send 5 batteries to the front to fire 4 rounds per minute than to
send 1 battery and permit it to fire 20 rounds per minute. In
the delivery of any prolonged fire it is necessary to adopt the
general rule in each battery of using only 3 guns habitually and
allowing each gun to be cooled and cleaned.
Conclusion—In conclusion it may be stated that, so far as
the technical execution of barrage fire and accompanying fire
is concerned, it is believed that our present firing instructions
and the methods generally used in the United States Artillery
would permit our batteries to do everything which might be
required of them in modern trench warfare or in war of move-
ment as it is now discussed in France. The staff work con-
nected with the planning of_ such fire is, on the contrary, some-
thing which can be created only by the most careful study of
existing methods and past mistakes. From the point of view
of materiel, it is not believed that our present 3-inch shell, with
a base fuse, can be used successfully against personnel to the
extent that the French shell is used, and that the use of timed
shrapnel over friendly infantry, even with a calculated burst
of 130 meters in front of them, would require a degree of
training on the part of gun detachments in the setting of fuses
and the centering of quadrant bubbles which is out of the ques-
tion with newly-organized batteries. Furthermore, it is con-
sidered doubtful if materiel which depends upon a spring
column for return to battery could satisfactorily stand the
wear and tear of such prolonged firing.
O